Copyright: © 2001  Jasc Software, Inc.
Citation: Vixen of Verbiage


Welcome to Paint Shop Pro 7.02
Welcome to Paint Shop Pro 7

Introduction

Jasc® Paint Shop Pro™ 7 contains all the tools you need for creating, editing, and retouching your images. It is friendly enough for the casual user who wants to enhance family photographs, yet powerful enough for the professional who needs to create multi-layered graphics. This version, with the new vector layer features, gives Paint Shop Pro enhanced drawing capabilities.

Use the companion program, Jasc® Animation Shop™ 3, to create animations for a Web site, presentation, or multimedia publication. You can import animations into Paint Shop Pro for editing and return them to Animation Shop with the click of your mouse.

Note to New Paint Shop Pro Users

If this is the first time you have used Paint Shop Pro, browse through the help topics to get an idea of what the program can do. If you purchased the boxed version, you can also read the Getting Started and Reference Guides to familiarize yourself with the program.

You can learn more about using this help system and the other help resources in Using the Help Resources.

Note to Experienced Paint Shop Pro Users

If you are familiar with previous versions of Paint Shop Pro, you can find a list of the new features in What's New in Paint Shop Pro 7. If you purchased the boxed version of the program, you can also read the Reference or Getting Started Guide for a more detailed description.


Using the Program Resources

In addition to the information in this help system and the Getting Started and Reference Guides, other resources that are available include:

•	The Tip of the Day,

•	The Support Center on the Jasc Software Website, and

•	Access to Jasc Software, Inc.’s Technical Support department via e-mail.

The Tip of the Day

When you first open Paint Shop Pro, the Tip of the Day box appears. You can read through these tips by clicking the Next Tip button. After you have closed the Tip box, you can return to it by choosing Help > Tip of the Day.

Jasc Software Website Support Center

The Jasc Software, Inc. Website contains several pages dedicated to customer support. It has product frequently-asked questions (FAQ’s), program updates, Picture Tubes to download, and many other resources.

To reach one of these pages from within Paint Shop Pro, choose Help > Jasc Software Online > Support Center.

Jasc Software Technical Support

If you have a question and cannot find a solution in the help system, Getting Started Guide, or Reference Guide, you can send e-mail to Jasc Software, Inc.’s Technical Support team. To do this while in Paint Shop Pro, choose Help > Jasc Software Online > Email Technical Support. To telephone the Technical Support team, call (952) 930-9171.

To reach a software distributor near you, refer to the README.DOC file that is included with Paint Shop Pro. You’ll find it in the same folder as the PSP.EXE file.

Other Ways to Reach Jasc Software, Inc.

Contact Method	Address or Number
E-mail	psp7sup@jasc.com
Website	www.jasc.com
Telephone
Technical Support	(952) 930-9171
Customer Service	(952) 930-9800
Fax	(952) 930-9172
Mail	Jasc Software, Inc. 7905 Fuller Road Eden Prairie, MN  55344  USA
More Information on Using Help

For general information on using Microsoft Windows Help, refer to General information on using Microsoft Windows Help.

For a description of various ways to access the Paint Shop Pro Help File, refer to Using Paint Shop Pro Help.


Using Paint Shop Pro Help

Accessing the Help File

You can open this help file from within Paint Shop Pro in either of the following ways:

•	Choosing Help > Help Topics, or

•	Pressing the <F1> key.

You can open a help topic about a specific item in the following ways:

•	Clicking the Help button [image] on the toolbar, and then clicking a menu item, toolbar button, or program feature,

•	Highlighting the toolbar item, tool palette item, or menu item and then pressing the <F1> key; this displays help file information relevant to what you highlighted, or

•	Clicking the Help button in a dialog box; this displays help file information relevant to using that dialog box.

About ToolTips and the Status Bar

To see the name of a toolbar or tool palette button, place the cursor over it. A pop-up hint, referred to as a ToolTip, appears. Note also that Paint Shop Pro displays a short description of the feature in the Status bar, which is located along the bottom of the workspace.

Navigating the Help File

If you are not familiar with using a help file, refer to the illustration below for explanations of the important features.

Using the Index Efficiently

To find information quickly on a particular help topic, click the Index tab in the left panel of the help window. This displays a list of keywords associated with a topic. To find help on using a particular dialog box, search for the dialog box title.

Understanding Colors for Hypertext

In a standard Windows Help file format, all hypertext (the text you click to jump to another topic or see a pop-up) is green -- jumps have a solid underline and pop-ups have a dashed underline. Paint Shop Pro uses a different method to indicate hypertext.

In Paint Shop Pro Help:

•	Topic jumps are red.

•	Pop-ups are blue.

•	Hypertext is not underlined.

Using the Shortcut Button

The shortcut button [image] provides a jump to the listed topic. Click either the button or the red text next to it to jump to the topic.

Using the Next Step Button

The next step button [image] provides a jump to the next step in a process or to closely related information. Click either the button or the red text next to it to jump to the topic.

Understanding Typographical Conventions

A few typographical conventions to be aware of when reading through this help file include the following:

•	Menu commands you are instructed to choose appear in bold face with the greater than (>) symbol separating each menu level. For example, if you are instructed to choose the Open command in the File menu, it appears as File > Open. If you are instructed to select the General Program Preferences command from the Preferences submenu in the File menu, it appears as File > Preferences > General Program Preferences.

•	Keys you are instructed to press appear in bold face within angled brackets. When you need to press keys in sequence, they are connected by a plus (+) sign. For example, you can also choose the Open command in the File menu by pressing <Ctrl> + <O> on the keyboard.

•	The term "left-click" is used to indicate that you should press the primary mouse button, which is the button used for most operations. For right-handed users, this is the left mouse button. The term "right-click" is used to indicate that you should press the secondary mouse button, which is the button used for auxiliary operations. For right-handed users, this is the right mouse button.


What's New in Paint Shop Pro 7

We have added several great new features and enhancements to Paint Shop Pro 7.

Photo Enhancement

•	Automatically adjust color balance, contrast, and saturation.

•	Remove red-eye on people and animals.

•	Restore damaged photos with Scratch Removal tool.

•	Adjustable Histogram enhances details without loss of information.

•	Automatically improve video, scanned, and overly compressed images.

•	Automatically remove noise, scratches, dust, or specks and improve crispness and impact.

Business/Home Graphics

•	Vector shapes, lines, and text now support gradients, textures, and patterns on the stroke and fill.

•	Brushes now support gradients, textures, and patterns.

•	Align, distribute, arrange, group and resize vector objects.

•	Create and save custom-styled lines with dots, dashes, and end-caps.

•	Create and save custom shapes for reuse.

•	Position more precisely with snap-to grid and guides.

•	Experiment with over 25 new artistic and lighting special effects.

Web Design

•	Create professional-quality GIF animations with Animation Shop 3.

•	Preview graphics in various Web file formats in up to three browsers.

•	New PNG optimizer for high Web performance.

•	An Image Mapper and Image Slicer with JavaScript rollover creation support.

Productivity & Ease of Use

•	Save and retrieve workspace arrangements to manage projects.

•	Quickly identify and select with thumbnail previews of Picture Tubes, Gradients, Textures, and Preset Shapes.

•	Navigate more easily while in Zoom mode with the Overview window.

•	Protect critical work with customizable Autosave.

•	Repeat last command feature.

•	Easily view your adjustments with proofing, autoproofing, and reset options on most dialogs.


Tour of Paint Shop Pro

Below is a screen capture of Paint Shop Pro with a window open in the workspace. For information on a labeled feature, click its name in the list underneath.

Paint Shop Pro Features	Microsoft Windows Features
Toolbar	Title Bar
Tool Palette	Control Icon
Color Palette	Window Buttons
Tool Options Palette	Menu Bar
Layer Palette	Workspace
Histogram	Status Bar
Paint Shop Pro Browser	Image Window
Browser Toolbar
Overview Window
Related Topics

 Using the Bars and Palettes

 Exiting Paint Shop Pro

 System Requirements


About the Control Icon

The Control icon [image], located at the left end of the title bar, provides access to the Control menu. You can also double-click it to exit Paint Shop Pro. When you are using the Print Multiple Images window, clicking its Control icon closes that window and returns you to the Paint Shop Pro workspace.

The Control Menu

The Control menu contains commands used for positioning and resizing the Paint Shop Pro window. To open the Control menu, click the Control icon.


About the Title Bar

The Paint Shop Pro title bar displays the Paint Shop Pro Control icon, the application name, the name of the active image and its format, and the standard Windows buttons.

Floating palettes and image windows also have title bars. The title bar of the active image displays the image title and format, its zoom level, and the name of the current layer. If you have edited the image since you last saved it, there will be an asterisk after the image’s name. If the image contains a watermark, the title bar displays a copyright symbol.

Double-clicking the title bar of the program or an image is the same as clicking the Windows Maximize button of the title bar. The program window enlarges to fill the screen; the image window enlarges to fill the workspace.

When the Automatic Roll-up feature is enabled, the title bars of the Histogram and Overview windows and Tool Options and Layer palettes have a buttons that you click to alternate between the active [image] and inactive [image] state. When the roll-up is active, the palettes and windows minimize to their title bars when you move the cursor away from them and then open again when you move your cursor back over them. When it is inactive, they stay open. When the feature is not enabled, the button disappears from the title bar. Enable automatic roll-up in the Toolbar dialog box or the Dialogs and Palettes tab of the General Program Preferences.

Related Topics

 Using the Automatic Roll-up Feature

 Setting Dialogs and Palettes Preferences

 Using the Bars and Palettes

 About the Window Buttons

 About the Control Icon


About the Window Buttons
About the Windows Buttons

The standard Microsoft Windows buttons, located in the upper right corner of the title bar, are used to resize the Paint Shop Pro window. Their functions are listed below.

Minimize		Reduces the window to its button.
Maximize		Enlarges the window to fill the screen.
Restore		Returns the window to its last non-minimized, non-maximized position. This button will not appear unless you have resized the window.
Close		Closes the images and window and exits the program.


 About the Color Palette

Use the Color palette to select the colors, gradients, patterns, and textures that you want to apply to an image. Whenever you move the cursor (regardless of which tool is active) over the Available Colors panel, the cursor changes into the Dropper [image]. Left-click to select a foreground solid color. Right-click to select a background solid color. The two boxes above the panel display the respective colors. The colors are also displayed in the Active Styles boxes when the boxes are set to display solid colors.

When you are working with a 24-bit (16 million colors) image, all the colors displayed in the in the panel are available. If the image has a lower color depth, you are limited to fewer colors. You may find it more convenient to use the Document palette style of the panel, where only the colors that the image contains appear. Select this option in the Dialogs and Palettes tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box.

 Using the Document Palette Style of the Available Colors Panel

The two pairs of boxes underneath the Available Colors panel display the style and texture choices for the painting, drawing, and text tools. You can use solid colors, patterns, gradients, and textures with these tools. Select the Lock check box [image] when you want to use the current Styles and Textures with a different tool. When the check box is not selected, each tool retains its last setting.

 About the Active Styles and Textures Boxes

To toggle between hiding and displaying the Color palette, do any of the following:

•	Press <C>,

•	Click the Color palette button [image] on the toolbar,

•	Right-click the empty space of a palette or bar and choose Color Palette from the menu, or

•	Choose View > Toolbars and select or clear the Color palette check box in the Toolbars dialog box.

Related Topics

 About the Current Color Panel

 Setting Dialogs and Palettes Preferences

 Using the Bars and Palettes

 About the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Active Styles and Textures Boxes

When you paint, you can use a solid color, a pattern, or a gradient. The two Active Styles boxes show you which of these choices you are currently using. You can also use paper textures to create the appearance of textured paper. The Active Textures boxes show you if you are using a texture.

The upper boxes display the foreground/stroke style and texture. To paint with them while using the raster tools, press the left (primary) mouse button. When using the shape, text, and line tools, Paint Shop Pro applies the stroke style and texture to the outlines of the shape and text and to the whole line. The lower boxes display the fill/background style and texture. Press the right (secondary) mouse button to paint with them while using raster tools. With the shape and text tools, this style and texture fill the interior of the shape and text. To exchange the foreground/stroke contents with the background/fill contents, click the switcher.

To change style and texture options:

1	Left-click the arrow in a Style or Texture box.

2	While keeping the left button pressed in, drag the mouse to a new icon. Your choices in the Styles boxes are solid color [image], pattern [image], gradient [image], and no style [image]. Your choices in the Textures boxes are texture [image] and no texture [image]. Choose the no style or no texture icon when you do not want to apply any stroke or fill or use a paper texture.

3	Release the mouse button to display the new style or texture choice.

The Lock check box controls whether each tool retains its own Active Styles and Textures settings or the current settings apply to every tool. Select the check box to have the settings stay the same no matter which tool you choose.

 Using the Active Styles Boxes

 Using the Active Textures Boxes

Related Topics

 Working with Gradients

 Working with Patterns


Current Color Panel
About the Current Color Panel

When the cursor is over the "Available Colors" panel or when you are using the Dropper tool, the Current Color panel displays the color’s RGB (red, green, and blue) or HSL (hue, saturation, and lightness) values. Use the Dialogs and Palettes tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box to select which values are displayed.

 About the Color Palette

Related Topic

 Setting Dialogs and Palettes Preferences


 About the Tool Options Palette

The Tool Options palette displays the options for the Tool palette's active tool. The options change as you change tools. Some tools have two tabs with options, while others have one. The palette has a permanent tab [image] for modifying the appearance of the cursor and the settings for a pressure sensitive tablet.

To toggle between displaying and hiding the Tool Options palette, do any of the following:

•	Press <O>.

•	Click the Tool Options button [image] on the toolbar.

•	Choose View > Toolbars, select or clear the Tool Options palette check box, and click Close.

•	Right-click any palette and choose Tool Options palette from the menu.

Cursors and Tablet Tab

Use the Cursors and Tablet tab to control how Paint Shop Pro displays the cursor and what feature on a drawing tablet changes as you apply pressure.

Cursors

Select the "Use precise cursors" check box to use a precise cursor in place of the standard Windows cursor. This cursor can help you select and position image elements with greater precision. Select the "Show brush outlines" check box to have the cursor show the brush shape and size when you paint.

Pressure Sensitive Tablet

If you are using a drawing tablet, select the attributes you want the pressure of the drawing pen to control. You can use it to control opacity, color, and width.

 Using a Pressure Sensitive Tablet

Tool Selection Icon

When you are working with more than one tool, you may find it easier to change tools from the Tool Options palette rather than moving the cursor to the Tool palette. To select a new tool, click the Tool Selection icon [image] and choose the tool from the menu that appears. The palette updates and displays the appropriate options and tabs for the tool.

Automatic Roll-up Feature

The Tool Options palette has an automatic roll-up feature that minimizes it so only its title bar is visible. This lets you keep it accessible without blocking the workspace. Enable automatic roll-up in the Toolbar dialog box or the Dialogs and Palettes tab of the General Program Preferences. When the feature is enabled, its button on the title bar shows whether it is active [image] or inactive [image]. When the feature is not enabled, the icon disappears from the title bar.

Related Topic

 Using the Bars and Palettes

 Using the Automatic Roll-up Feature

 Setting Dialogs and Palettes Preferences


 About the Histogram

A Histogram is a graph of the distribution of red, green, blue, greyscale, hue, saturation, and/or lightness values in an image. The horizontal axis represents the lightness values of the image from black to white (0 to 255). The vertical axis indicates the number of pixels at each value. At a lightness level where there are many pixels of one of the values, the corresponding line spikes; where there are few pixels, it appears close to the horizontal axis. In dark images, most of the pixels are grouped at the left side. If an image is too light, the pixels are grouped at the right.

Select the check boxes under the graph to see the distribution of the specific values. Select the Sample Select the Sample Merged check box to view the values from all layers. Select the Selection Only check box to limit the graph to the values of a selection.

You can also view specific information about a value. Choose its name from the Display Channel drop-down box and then move your cursor to the graph. Paint Shop Pro displays the number of pixels in the channel that match the Histogram’s maximum, minimum, mean, median, and average values. To select a range of levels along the x axis, left-click and drag the mouse.

To toggle between viewing and hiding the Histogram, do any of the following:

•	Press <H>,

•	Click the Histogram button [image] on the toolbar,

•	Right-click the empty space of a palette or bar and choose it from the menu, or

•	Choose View > ToolBars and select or clear its checkbox in the Toolbars dialog box.

The Histogram window has an automatic roll-up feature that minimizes it so only its title bar is visible. This lets you keep it accessible without blocking the workspace. Enable automatic roll-up in the Toolbar dialog box or the Dialogs and Palettes tab of the General Program Preferences. When the feature is enabled, its button on the title bar shows whether it is active [image] or inactive [image]. When the feature is not enabled, the icon disappears from the title bar.

•	Note: Paint Shop Pro runs more quickly with the Histogram closed because it doesn't have to update the Histogram as you edit an image.

Related Topics

 Using the Automatic Roll-up Feature

 Using the Bars and Palettes

 Using the Histogram to Analyze a Photograph

 Setting Dialogs and Palettes Preferences


Layer Palette
 About the Layer Palette

The Layer palette contains the controls used when working with layers and provides quick access to many of the commands and options in the Layers menu and Layer Properties dialog box. Unlike the Layers menu and Layer Properties dialog box, the palette allows you to change the options for all the layers in an image simultaneously.

To toggle between viewing and hiding the Layer palette, do any of the following:

•	Press <L>,

•	Click the Layer palette button [image] on the toolbar,

•	Right-click the empty space of a palette or bar and choose it from the menu, or

•	Choose View > ToolBars and select or clear its checkbox in the Toolbars dialog box.

The Layer palette has an automatic roll-up feature that minimizes it so only its title bar is visible. This lets you keep it accessible without blocking the workspace. Enable automatic roll-up in the Toolbar dialog box or the Dialogs and Palettes tab of the General Program Preferences. When the feature is enabled, its button on the title bar shows whether it is active [image] or inactive [image]. When the feature is not enabled, the icon disappears from the title bar.

Related Topics

 Using the Layer Palette

 Using the Automatic Roll-up Feature

 Using the Bars and Palettes

 About the Layer Properties Dialog Box

 Setting Dialogs and Palettes Preferences


Menu Bar
About the Menu Bar

The Menu bar displays the menu headings. The menus that are available depend on what is open in the workspace. Paint Shop Pro has four menus — one menu when no image is open, another when an image is open, the Browser menu, and the Print Multiple Images window menu. Click a menu heading to open the menu and choose a command. The commands you use frequently are also displayed on the toolbar and palettes.

•	Note: Menu items that appear in grey either do not apply or are unavailable.

Using the Menus

You can display menu commands using the following methods:

•	Clicking the menu in the Menu bar, or

•	Pressing the <Alt> key plus the underlined letter in the menu’s title. For example, to display the File menu, press <Alt> + <F>.

You can select or execute a menu command using the following methods:

•	Clicking the item in the menu,

•	Pressing the <Alt> key plus the underlined letter in the menu’s title, and then pressing the letter underlined in the menu item. For example, to select the menu item File > Open, press <Alt> + <F> + <O>, or

•	Using the cursor or the <↑>, and <↓> keys to highlight a menu item, and then pressing the Enter key.


Status Bar
About the Status Bar

The Status bar, located along the bottom of the Paint Shop Pro window, displays information about images, buttons, and procedures.

When the cursor is over a button, the status bar displays an explanation of its use. When the cursor is over an image, the left side of the status bar displays the cursor’s current x and y coordinates, and the right side displays the image’s dimensions, color depth, and file size. When you are creating a selection, the left side of the status also displays the selection’s size and position.

To display and hide the Status bar, either:

•	Right-click the empty space of a palette or bar and choose it from the menu, or

•	Choose View > ToolBars and select or clear its checkbox in the Toolbars dialog box.


Toolbar
About the Toolbar

The toolbar displays buttons corresponding to the menu commands. To apply a command, click its toolbar button. If a command is unavailable, its button appears greyed-out.

Paint Shop Pro now has four toolbars in its main window for displaying buttons. In addition to the standard toolbar, you can use the Effects, the Web, and the Photo toolbars. You can customize these toolbars by adding buttons for the commands you use most frequently and removing those that you do not need. Add any button to any of the toolbars.

You can toggle between viewing and hiding the toolbars by pressing <T>. To view or hide a particular toolbar, right-click the empty space of a palette or bar and choosing the toolbar from the menu or choose View > ToolBars and selecting its checkbox in the Toolbars dialog box.

•	Note: If you customize the toolbar, remember that increasing the number of buttons can cause Paint Shop Pro to run more slowly.

Related Topics

 Customizing the Toolbars

 Using the Bars and Palettes


Tool Palette
 About the Tool Palette

The Tool palette contains the selection, painting, drawing, and retouching tools. When you click a Tool palette button, the Tool Options palette displays the options associated with the tool, and the Status bar displays a short description of its use.

You can also access these tools from the Tool Options palette. Click the Tool Selection icon [image], and choose a tool from the drop-down menu.

To alternate between displaying and hiding the Tool palette, use one of the following methods:

•	Press <P>.

•	Click the View/Hide Tool palette button [image] on the toolbar.

•	Choose View > Toolbars, and select or clear the Tool palette check box.

•	Right-click any palette and select Tool Palette from the context menu.

For more information on using a tool palette tool, select its name from the list below.

Arrow Tool	Color Replacer Tool
Zoom Tool	Retouch Tool
Deformation Tool	Scratch Remover Tool
Crop Tool	Eraser Tool
Mover Tool	Picture Tube Tool
Selection Tool	Airbrush
Freehand Tool	Flood Fill Tool
Magic Wand Tool	Text Tool
Dropper Tool	Drawing Tool
Paint Brushes	Preset Shapes Tool
Clone Brush	Object Selector Tool
Related Topics

 Using the Bars and Palettes

 About the Tool Options palette


Workspace
About the Workspace

As the name implies, the workspace is the area of the main window where you create and edit images. When you open a file, an image window opens in the workspace. To change the size of the workspace, drag a border or corner of the main window.

You can dock many of the bars and palettes (make them part of the edge of the workspace) or undock and float them to enlarge the workspace.

You can also save the arrangement of your workspace and re-load it at a later time.

 Saving a Workspace

Related Topics

 Using the Bars and Palettes

 About the Image Window

 About the Window Buttons


About the Image Window

When you open an image file, Paint Shop Pro places it in an image window. You can drag a window around the workspace and minimize and open the window as needed. The image window you are currently working on is called the active image window.

Using the Scrollbars

When an image is larger than its window's image area, scrollbars appear at the right side and/or bottom of the image area.

To use a scrollbar:

•	Drag the slider bar,

•	Click the arrow buttons at each end, or

•	Click between the slider bar and an arrow button.

Arranging Windows

You can have more than one window open while you work. When you have several images open, you can arrange their windows in the workspace by using the following Window menu commands:

•	Cascade, which stacks the windows and aligns them from the upper left to the lower right of the workspace,

•	Tile Horizontally, which aligns the windows in rows, and

•	Tile Vertically, which aligns the windows in columns.


 About the Browser

Although you will not see the Browser when you first open Paint Shop Pro, it is an integral feature of the program. The Paint Shop Pro Browser, a tree-based browser similar to the Windows Explorer, is a visual file system that makes image file management easier and more intuitive. Use it to preview the images in a folder before opening them.

The Browser opens in its own window, and it can remain open or minimized in the workspace while you edit images. When the Browser is open, the Menu bar changes to display the Find and ImageFile menus, the Browser commands appear in the appropriate menus, and the Browser toolbar becomes active. You can use the toolbar to apply Browser commands and customize it to display the buttons of commands you use most frequently.

To open the Browser, press <Ctrl> + <B> or click the Browse button [image] on the toolbar.

Related Topics

 Using the Browser Toolbar

 Navigating with the Browser

 Customizing the Toolbars


Using the Bars and Palettes

The toolbar, Tool palette, Color palette, Tool Options palette, and Layer palette appear in the Paint Shop Pro window when you start the program. You can close and open them as needed, and drag them around the screen. The toolbar, Tool palette, Color palette, and Browser toolbar can be incorporated into the edges of the workspace (docked) or pulled away and floated (undocked). The Histogram and Tool Options and Layer palette can be minimized to their title bars.

Displaying a Bar or Palette

To display or hide a bar or palette, you can:

•	Right-click any palette or bar and select the item from the context menu,

•	Click the appropriate toolbar button, or

•	Choose View > Toolbars and select the bar, palette, or window from the Toolbars dialog box.

 Using the Toolbars Dialog Box

Docking and Undocking Bars and Palettes

The toolbar, Tool palette, and Color palette can be docked to the side of the workspace or dragged to a free-floating position. A docked bar or palette becomes part of the border around the workspace.

Undocking a Bar or Palette

To undock a palette or bar, do one of the following:

•	Place the cursor an area not occupied by a button, and then drag the bar or palette away from the edge of the Paint Shop Pro window.

•	Double-click any area not occupied by a button.

Docking a Bar or Palette

You can dock the Color palette, toolbar, and Tool palette to a side of the workspace by positioning it at the workspace's edge. The Tool Options palette, Layer palette, and Histogram cannot be docked.

To dock a palette or bar, do one of the following:

•	Place the cursor in an area not occupied by a button, and then drag the bar or palette to the edge of the Paint Shop Pro window.

•	Double-click any area not occupied by a button.

Using the Automatic Roll-up Feature

The Histogram and the Tool Options and Layer palettes have a roll-up feature, which minimizes them so that only their title bars are visible. This lets you keep them accessible without blocking the workspace.

When the roll-up feature is active, the title bar displays one of its buttons. The Roll-Up mode button [image] indicates that the palette will minimize. To temporarily turn off the feature so that the entire palette remains visible, click this button. It changes to the Always Open mode button [image].

When the roll-up feature is active, a palette or the Histogram minimizes to the title bar when all three of the following conditions are met:

•	The cursor is not over the palette or Histogram,

•	The Always Open mode button is not active, and

•	No option is being changed.

When the Histogram or a palette is minimized, use one of the following methods to expand it:

•	Move the cursor over the palette or Histogram,

•	Click the Roll-Up mode button, or

•	Choose a command that makes a change to the palette or Histogram.

To activate or turn off the roll-up feature, select or clear the "Enable Automatic Roll-ups" check box in the Toolbars dialog box or the Dialogs and Palettes tab of the Paint Shop Pro Preferences dialog box.

Related Topics

 Setting Dialogs and Palettes Preferences

 Using the Toolbars Dialog Box


Tools Dialog Box
Using the Toolbars Dialog Box

To display or hide a bar, palette, or window and choose its options, do the following:

1	Choose View > Toolbars. The Toolbars dialog box opens.

2	Select the check boxes of the items you want to display and clear those you want to hide. The items with boxes containing checks will be displayed. The items with empty boxes will be hidden.

3	To display large text and buttons, select the "Display large text…" check box.

4	To have the buttons appear flat, select the "Display flat style…" check box.

5	To activate the roll-up feature for the Tool Options and Layer palettes and the Histogram, select the "Enable Automatic Roll-Ups" check box.

6	To hide a toolbar when its commands can’t be chosen, select the "Hide disabled toolbars" check box.

7	To customize the toolbar or Browser toolbar by adding and removing buttons, click the name of the toolbar and then the Customize button.

8	Click Close to close the Toolbars dialog box and display the selected bars and palettes.

•	Notes: You can also open the Toolbars dialog box by right-clicking a bar or palette and choosing Toolbars.

Related Topics

 Customizing the Toolbar

 Using the Bars and Palettes


Exiting Paint Shop Pro

You can exit Paint Shop Pro by using any of the following methods:

•	Choosing File > Exit,

•	Clicking the Paint Shop Pro window’s Close button [image] in the upper right corner of the title bar,

•	Double-clicking the Paint Shop Pro window’s control icon [image] in the upper left corner of the title bar,

•	Choosing Exit from the Control menu, or

•	Pressing the key combination <Alt> + <F4>.

Related Topics

 About the Title Bar

 About the Control Icon


Uninstalling Paint Shop Pro
Uninstalling Paint Shop Pro 7

To remove Paint Shop Pro from your computer:

1	Close Paint Shop Pro.

2	On the taskbar, click the Start menu button to open the Start menu.

3	Choose Settings > Control Panel. The Control Panel opens.

4	Double-click the Add/Remove Programs button. The Add/Remove Programs Properties dialog box opens.

5	If necessary, click the Install/Uninstall tab to bring it to the front.

6	Scroll through the list box to find Paint Shop Pro 7.

7	Highlight Paint Shop Pro 7.

8	Click the Add/Remove button. The Uninstall setup program starts.

9	Follow the on-screen prompts.


Opening Animation Shop
About Animation Shop

Use Animation Shop to create animations from one or more images and to enhance your animations with effects and transitions. You can now create multi-layered images in Paint Shop Pro and open them in Animation Shop with each layer becoming a separate frame. You can also use the Export command of Animation Shop to send animations to Paint Shop Pro. Each frame becomes a separate image that is linked back to the original animation. You can edit the images and then choose the Update Back to Animation Shop command. The changes are reflected in the original animation.

Opening Animation Shop

To open Animation Shop, choose File > Jasc Software Products > Launch Animation Shop or click the optional Launch Animation Shop button on the toolbar.

Related Topics

 Importing Images from Animation Shop

 Exporting Images to Animation Shop


Creating Images Overview
Creating and Opening Images

Paint Shop Pro provides several ways to create and open images. You can create an new image with only a background, copy an image from another source, make a screen capture, load a digital camera picture, or scan a photograph.

Related Topics

 Creating a New Image

 Opening an Image

 Duplicating an Image

 Making a Screen Capture

 Using a TWAIN-Compliant Device

 Loading Images from a Digital Camera


 Creating a New Image

Before you create a new image, think about how you will use it. This will help you determine what size, resolution, and color depth to use.

Size

Size refers to the physical dimensions of an image. In Paint Shop Pro, you can create images by size using inches and centimeters and by resolution using pixels. If you are creating an image that will be printed and know the size you need, you may find it easier to use inches or centimeters rather than pixels. By starting with the final image dimensions, you can produce an image that will fit the page. If you later need to change the dimensions of the image, you can do so using the Resize dialog box. For images that will be displayed digitally (on a monitor), use pixels.

Resolution

Image resolution is the number of pixels per inch (ppi) or per centimeter in the image. You create bitmapped images at a specific resolution that is based on how you will use the image. An image for the web usually has a resolution of about 72 pixels per inch. An image for print usually has its resolution determined by the printing device. In general, creating an image at about 1.5 to 2 times the resolution (measured in dots per inch, or dpi) of the printer produces the best results.

Color Depth

Images created with a color depth of 24-bits (16 million colors) look the best because they contain the most colors. However, not all media can display 16 million colors. For example, GIF images, a popular format for the Web, can only contain up to 256 colors (8-bit depth). Even if your final image will contain fewer than 16 million colors, you probably want to create it at a 24-bit depth in the Paint Shop Pro format. Then, if you decide to apply filters, deformations, and other effects that require 16 million colors, you will not have to increase the color depth. When you have finished working on the image, reduce its color depth and save it in another format.

Opening the New Image Dialog Box

Use the New Image dialog box to create a new image. To open this dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Choose File > New.

•	Press <Ctrl> + <N>.

•	Click the New Image button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the New Image Dialog Box

Related Topics

 What is Color Depth

 Types of Resolution

 Comparing Raster and Vector File Formats

 Resizing an Image


 Using the New Image Dialog Box

Use the New Image dialog box to create a new, empty image.

To use the New Image dialog box:

1	In the Image Dimensions panel, select a unit of measurement (pixels, inches, or centimeters) in the drop-down box at the upper right.

2	Use the numeric edit controls to enter a width and height for the new image in the appropriate boxes.

3	Enter a resolution for the image. With an image for the web, use about 72 pixels per inch. For printing, use 1.5 to 2 times the screen frequency of the printer.

4	From the drop-down box next to the image resolution, select whether to view the resolution in Pixels/inch or Pixels/centimeter.

5	In the Image Characteristics panel, select a background color.

6	Select an image type for the new image. The image type is the bit depth. Increasing the bit depth increases the number of colors an image can display. It also increases the memory required to store and edit an image.

7	The Memory Required information is displayed below the Image type box. It indicates how much memory (RAM) is required to create the new image. If your computer doesn't have at least this much memory, decrease the color depth or the image size.

8	Click OK to close the dialog box and create the new image.

Related Topics

 About Color Depth

 Selecting Foreground and Background Colors

 Changing the Default Resolution


 Opening an Image

There are several ways to open an image. You can use the:

•	Open dialog box

•	Drag-and-Drop technique

•	Most-Recently Used list

•	Paint Shop Pro Browser

•	Load Workspace command

Opening the Open Dialog Box

To display the Open dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Choose File > Open,

•	Press <Ctrl> + <O>, or

•	Click the Open button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Open Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Using Drag-and-Drop

 Using the Most-Recently Used List

 Using the Browser

 Loading a Workspace


 Using the Open Dialog Box

To use the Open dialog box:

1	In the Look in drop-down box, choose the directory and navigate to the folder containing the image you want to open. Double-click a folder to open it. You can have Paint Shop Pro search for files in all the formats it reads or limit its search to a single format. Choose a format from the Files of type drop-down box.

2	Click the [image] button to move up one directory as you navigate.

3	To create a new folder, click the [image] button.

4	Click an image to select it. When you select an image file, the Image Information / Preview panel displays its dimensions in pixels and its bit depth.

5	To view the image before opening it, select the Show Preview check box.

6	To see more information about the image file, click Details.

7	To open the selected file, click Open. The dialog box closes, and the image opens in the Paint Shop Pro workspace. If you have selected a meta or vector, Photo-CD, or RAW file, Paint Shop Pro may open a format-specific dialog box requesting additional information.

8	To close the dialog box and open the Browser without opening a file, click Browse. The Browser displays the same folder as the Open dialog box and shows thumbnails of the images within it.

Related Topics

 Viewing File Information Details

 Using the Browser to Open Images

 Setting File Format Import Preferences

 Opening Windows MetaFiles and Windows Enhanced MetaFiles


Viewing File Information Details

Use the File Information box to view information on an image before opening it. The box contains information on the file format, location, compression method, memory requirements, and creation date.

Related Topics

 Using the Open Dialog Box

 Using the Browser to Open Images


Using Drag-and-Drop

You can open image files by dragging them from My Computer, the Windows Explorer, or any program that supports Drag-and-Drop, and releasing them on any of the following:

•	Paint Shop Pro’s workspace

•	Paint Shop Pro’s executable file (labeled PSP.EXE)

•	A shortcut to Paint Shop Pro’s executable file

If you have selected a meta or vector, Photo-CD, or RAW file, Paint Shop Pro may open a format-specific dialog box requesting additional information.

When you use the Paint Shop Pro Browser, you can drag a thumbnail into the workspace to open its image.

Related Topic

 Using the Browser to Open Images

 Setting WMF (Windows Meta File) Import Preferences

 Setting PCD File Import Preferences

 Setting RAW File Import Preferences


Using the Most-Recently-Used List

The File menu image displays the names of files that you have previously opened. These names are listed above the Exit command. To open one of these images, click its name in the list.

The number of files listed in the menu is controlled by the Recent File Listing option. This option is located on the miscellaneous tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box.

•	Note: If you have just installed Paint Shop Pro and not opened or created any images, the list will be empty.

Related Topic

 Setting the Recent File Listing Option


Duplicating an Image

Copying an Image in Paint Shop Pro

To copy an image file that is open or minimized in the Paint Shop Pro workspace:

1	Select the file by clicking its Title bar.

2	Choose Window > Duplicate or Press <Shift> + <D>. A new window containing the image opens in the workspace.

•	Note: You can also copy an image with a single layer by choosing Selections > Select All, and then choosing the Copy and Paste As New Image commands from the Edit menu.

Related Topic

 Using Thumbnails to Copy Files


 Capturing an Image from the Screen

The Screen Capture function takes a picture of all or part of the screen and opens it in Paint Shop Pro. These pictures, called screen captures, can be of an area you outline, of the entire screen, of an active window, of the contents of an active window, or of the controls of a program, such as a toolbar.

The Screen Capture function can also be used with any application that supports OLE. After you select your preferences, you can make screen captures while working in another program without opening Paint Shop Pro.

Before using the Screen Capture function, select the type and method of capture in the Capture Setup dialog box. You can then make a capture immediately or activate it later as needed.

Opening the Capture Setup Dialog Box

To open the Capture Setup dialog box, choose File >Import > Screen Capture > Setup.

 Setting the Screen Capture Options

Related Topics

 Making a Screen Capture

 Using the Screen Capture OLE Function


 Setting the Screen Capture Options

Before capturing the image, select your preferences in the Capture Setup dialog box.

To set the Screen Capture preferences:

1	Choose File >Import > Screen Capture > Setup to open the Capture Setup dialog box.

2	In the Capture panel, select the type of capture you want to make:

• Area	Lets you control the size of the area
• Full screen	Captures the entire screen
• Client area	Captures the workspace of the active window
• Window	Captures the entire active window
• Object	Captures a feature or group of features
3	In the Activate Capture Using panel, select a method to use to activate a screen capture:

•	Right Mouse Click

•	Hot Key

•	Delay Timer

4	To include the cursor in the capture, select the Include cursor option. You cannot include the cursor in an Area type capture.

5	To make more than one capture at a time, select the Multiple captures check box. Paint Shop Pro will remain minimized until you manually reactivate it. When the check box is not selected, Paint Shop Pro automatically reopens after a screen capture.

6	You can now activate the screen capture function from this dialog box or close the dialog box without activating the function. Choose one of the following:

•	To apply the options you have selected without activating the screen capture function, choose OK.

•	To apply the option and immediately make a screen capture, click Capture Now. Paint Shop Pro starts the capture function after the period of delay you selected in the Delay timer box.

 Making a Screen Capture

Related Topic

 Using the Screen Capture OLE Function


 Making a Screen Capture

After you have selected the options, you can start the Screen Capture function at any time. The initial steps are the same for all the capture methods.

To activate the Screen Capture function:

1	If Paint Shop Pro is not running, start it.

2	Choose File >Import > Screen Capture > Start, press <Shift> + <C>, or click the Start Capture button [image] on the toolbar. Paint Shop Pro minimizes and its button appears on the Windows taskbar.

3	Open or make active the image, window, or feature to be captured on the screen.

You are now ready to capture the image. The procedure you use depends on the type of screen capture you selected in the Capture Setup dialog box.

Making an Area Capture

To make an Area capture:

1	If you have chosen the Area method, right-click or press the Hot key you chose during the setup. The cursor changes to a cross-hair and becomes the Area Capture tool.

2	Move the cursor to where you want to create a corner of the screen capture.

3	Left-click. This action starts the actual screen capture.

4	Move the mouse to create a rectangular outline of the capture area. The rectangle displays its dimensions in pixels as you create it.

5	When the appropriate area is within the rectangle, left-click the mouse to end the screen capture.

6	If you did not select the Multiple Captures option during the setup, Paint Shop Pro automatically opens with the screen capture in the workspace.

7	If you selected the Multiple Captures option, continue making captures by using the right mouse button or Hot key to select the starting point and then using the left mouse button to create the capture area.

8	Activate Paint Shop Pro after you have finished. The program opens with the screen captures in the workspace.

Making an Object Capture

To make an Object capture:

1	If you have chosen the Object method, right-click or press the Hot key you chose during the setup.

2	Move the cursor over the object you want to capture. A black border appears around the area that will be captured.

3	Click the mouse to make the screen capture.

4	If you did not select the Multiple Captures option during the setup, Paint Shop Pro automatically opens with the screen capture in the workspace.

5	If you selected the Multiple Captures option, continue making captures by using the right mouse button or Hot key to select objects and left-clicking to capture them.

6	Activate Paint Shop Pro after you have finished. The program opens with the screen captures in the workspace.

Making a Full Screen, Client Area, or Window Capture

To make a Full Screen, Client Area, or Window Capture:

1	If you have chosen the Full Screen, Client Area, or Window method, right-click or press the Hot key you chose during the setup. Paint Shop Pro makes the screen capture.

2	If you did not select the Multiple Screen Captures option during the setup, Paint Shop Pro automatically opens with the screen capture in the workspace.

3	If you selected the Multiple Screen Captures option, continue making captures using the right mouse button or Hot key.

4	Activate Paint Shop Pro after you have finished. The program opens with the screen captures in the workspace.

Related Topic

 Using the Screen Capture OLE Function


Using the Screen Capture Function within Another Program

In programs that support OLE, you can use the Screen Capture function without opening Paint Shop Pro. When you select it from the list of methods for inserting an object, the Capture Setup dialog box appears on your screen. Set the options, click OK, and create the screen capture. It is automatically inserted in the program.

Discovering if a Program Supports OLE

In most applications that support the OLE function, you insert the screenshot by choosing a menu command with a name similar to "Import Object" or "Insert Object." To see if your application supports OLE screen captures and what commands activate it, search the application’s help file for OLE support. If the program supports OLE, you will see "Paint Shop Pro 7 Screen Capture" listed in the Object Types box when you activate the command.

•	Note: Because of Windows and OLE constraints, you cannot cancel the OLE Screen Capture Options dialog box after it is activated.

Example of an OLE Screen Capture Procedure

To insert a Paint Shop Pro OLE screen capture into Microsoft Word:

1	In Microsoft Word, choose Insert > Object.

2	From the Create New page of the Object dialog box, choose Paint Shop Pro 7 Screen Capture.

3	Set the screen capture options.

4	Make your screen capture using either the right-click or hotkey method you chose in the options setup.

5	The screen capture image appears in Microsoft Word.

6	To edit the image, double-click it. Paint Shop Pro loads it for editing and updates Microsoft Word after you have finished.

Related Topics

 Setting the Screen Capture Options

 Making a Screen Capture


 Using a TWAIN-Compliant Device

Paint Shop Pro supports TWAIN-Compliant devices, such as scanners and digital cameras. When Paint Shop Pro starts, it scans your computer to see if the software for a TWAIN device is installed. If it is installed, the TWAIN menu commands in the File menu are made available. If it is not installed, the toolbar button and menu commands are unavailable (greyed out).

Selecting the TWAIN-Compliant Device

To select a TWAIN-compliant device for acquiring images:

1	Choose File > Import > TWAIN > Select Source. The Select Source dialog box opens.

2	The Sources window displays the names of the TWAIN-compliant devices connected to your computer. Highlight the device.

3	Click Select to close the dialog box.

Acquiring an Image

To acquire an image using the selected TWAIN-compliant device:

1	Do either of the following to open the TWAIN Data Source dialog box:

•	Choose File > Import > TWAIN > Acquire, or

•	Click the optional Acquire button [image] on the toolbar.

2	Use the interface to set the image acquisition options. For help using the interface, consult its on-line help or manual. When the device and its software finish processing the image, the image is sent to Paint Shop Pro.

3	The TWAIN Data Source dialog box remains open even after the image is loaded into Paint Shop Pro. You can continue to scan images and close it after you have finished.

If a scanned image contains unwanted areas, cropping it should be your first step. You reduce the memory needed to edit the image and, by eliminating extraneous areas of color, you will make better color corrections. After you have cropped the image, you can rotate it to correct any alignment problems and then make any necessary color corrections.

Related Topics

 Cropping an Image

 Enhancing Photographs

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Connecting a Digital Camera

You can use Paint Shop Pro to access and manage your images while they are in the digital camera, and you can load the images directly into the program. When you installed Paint Shop Pro, you were given the option of loading drivers for most brands of digital cameras. If you did not do this, run the installation program again and install the drivers for your camera.

There are three steps to loading your images into Paint Shop Pro:

1	Connect the camera to the computer.

2	Configure the camera settings.

3	Open the images.

•	Note: Connect your camera to the computer before opening the Digital Camera Configuration dialog box.

After you have connected the camera to the computer, choose File > Import > Digital Camera > Configure to open the Digital Camera Configuration dialog box.

To use the Digital Camera Configuration dialog box:

1	In the Camera Type drop-down, select your camera.

2	If you know which port on your computer you have connected to your camera, select it from the Communication Port list. If you do not know the port, leave the selection at Auto Detect.

3	If you know the appropriate baud rate setting, select it from the Baud Rate list. If you do not know the setting, leave the selection at Auto Detect. Paint Shop Pro will check the computer and camera and set the fastest possible connection.

4	To download thumbnails of the images as soon as the camera connects to the computer, select the Download thumbnails immediately after opening camera check box. While this increases the time it takes to connect to the camera, it allows the preview in the Digital Camera dialog box to display a thumbnail of the image when you select it.

5	Click OK to close the dialog box.

 Loading Pictures from a Digital Camera


Loading a Digital Camera Image
Loading Pictures from a Digital Camera

After you have configured the connection between the camera and the computer, choose File > Import > Digital Camera > Access or click the optional Access Digital Camera button [image] on the toolbar to open the Digital Camera dialog box. Paint Shop Pro displays a message stating that it is connecting to the camera and getting the thumbnails (if you selected that option). Press Abort to cancel the operation.

Note that if your camera does not include a feature displayed in the Digital Camera dialog box, that feature’s option is unavailable (greyed-out).

To use the Digital Camera dialog box:

1	The top part of the dialog box displays the camera type, the image resolution, and the number of pictures taken and remaining.

2	Use the "Multiple Exposure Operations" panel to apply commands to all the pictures in the camera:

•	Click Delete All to delete all the images in the camera.

•	If you chose not to download thumbnails when you configured the settings, click Get Previews to download them now. When no previews have been downloaded, an "X" appears in the preview window.

•	Click Save All to Disk to save all the images to the hard disk without first opening them.

•	Click Open All in PSP to open all the images in the Paint Shop Pro workspace.

3	Use the Single Exposure Operations panel to view and work with individual images:

•	Click the left and right arrows below the preview box to scroll through the images. Each picture’s exposure number, time and date of creation, and preview appear. (The preview appears only if you downloaded the thumbnails.)

•	If you want to take a picture and see it immediately, position the camera, click Take Picture, and then click Get Preview.

•	If you chose not to download the thumbnails and now want to see a preview of the selected image, click Get Preview.

•	Click Delete to delete the image from the camera.

•	Click Open in PSP to open the image in the Paint Shop Pro workspace.

•	Click Save to Disk to save the image on your hard disk without opening it.

4	After you have finished, click OK to close the dialog box.

If your photographs contain unwanted areas, cropping them should be your first step. You reduce the memory needed to edit an image and, by eliminating extraneous areas of color, you will make better color corrections.

Related Topics

 Connecting to a Digital Camera

 Enhancing Photographs

 Cropping an Image

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Image Enhancements
Making Color Adjustments

Paint Shop Pro provides several commands for enhancing your photographs. Use them to make color corrections, improve the results of faulty lighting, and create special effects. For example, perhaps the photograph has a yellowish cast. Use the Hue/Saturation/Luminance function to remove it. Perhaps the shadowed areas are too dark. Use the Highlight/Midtone/Shadow function to bring out the detail. Perhaps the image is too dark and lacks contrast. Use the Gamma Adjustment function to adjust these two features in unison.

 Adjusting the Hue/Saturation/Lightness

 Adjusting the Highlight/Midtone/Shadow

 Adjusting the Image Gamma

As you use the color adjustment dialog boxes, you’ll notice that the sliders remain in the final position when you close the boxes. This lets you correct multiple images with the same problem without having to adjust the settings each time.

•	Notes: To use the Adjust Color submenu commands on a selection, the image must be a greyscale or 24-bit color image.
To limit the adjustment to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Related Topics

 Increasing Color Depth

 Using the Histogram to Analyze a Photograph

 Creating a Selection


Using the Histogram to Analyze a Photograph

The Histogram window displays the number of red, green, and blue pixels and the luminance value at each brightness level of an image. Use it to analyze your photographs before starting color corrections.

By examining the graph, you can learn whether the image contains enough detail to be successfully corrected, and if it does, where the image needs correcting.

If the graph is spread across most of the Histogram, the image contains enough detail to correct it successfully. If the graph is compressed into a narrow area of the Histogram, the image probably doesn’t contain enough detail. Make a new scan or find another picture.

In an image with enough detail, the position of the graph on the Histogram shows where the image needs correcting. A fairly even distribution of the graph indicates an image with a balanced composition. If too much of the graph is situated on the right side, you need to reduce the image’s lightness. If too much is on the left, you need to increase it. If the lines are not spread out enough, you need to increase the contrast.

 Adjusting the Histogram

 Stretching and Equalizing the Histogram

 Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast


 Adjusting Brightness and Contrast

The Brightness command lightens or darkens the entire image or selection. It is often used to lighten pictures that are too dark after scanning.

The Contrast command changes the amount of shading between areas. You can use it to sharpen or blur an image, to make colors appear more saturated, and make specific areas stand out.

Opening the Brightness/Contrast Dialog Box

To open the Brightness/Contrast dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Choose Colors > Adjust > Brightness/Contrast.

•	Press <Shift> + <B>.

•	Click the optional Adjust Brightness/Contrast button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Brightness/Contrast Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


 Using the Brightness/Contrast Dialog Box

Use the Brightness/Contrast dialog box to adjust the brightness and/or contrast of the entire image or selection.

•	Notes: To use the Brightness/Contrast command on a selection, the image must be a greyscale or 24-bit color image.
To limit the adjustment to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.
Note to Users of Paint Shop Pro 5: The Brightness function uses a different method for altering pixels. To produce the same result, enter a value approximately 2 – 2.5 the value used in version 5.

To use the Brightness/Contrast dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

2	To update the original image automatically each time you change the settings, click the Auto Proof button [image].

3	To brighten the image, move the Brightness slider to the right or type a positive number in the box. To darken the image, move a slider to the left or type a negative number in the box. The number you enter is added to or subtracted from the Brightness values (0 – 255) of all the pixels.

4	To increase the contrast, move the Contrast slider to the right or type a positive number in the box. To decrease the contrast, move a slider to the left or type a negative number in the box.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the settings.

Related Topics

 Using the Highlight/Midtone/Shadow Function to Adjust Specific Levels of Brightness

 Using the Sharpen Filters

 Increasing Color Depth

 Creating a Selection


Adjusting the Highlight, Midtone, and Shadow
Adjusting the Light, Midtone, and Dark Areas

Use the Highlight/Midtone/Shadow function when you want to adjust the dark, middle, and light values (tonal values) of a photograph separately. You can emphasize highlights and shadows or lighten or darken an image’s mid-range colors.

Opening the Highlight/Midtone/Shadow Dialog Box

To open the Highlight/Midtone/Shadow dialog box:

•	Choose Colors > Adjust > Highlight/Midtone/Shadow,

•	Press <Shift> + <M>, or

•	Click the optional Highlight/Midtone/Shadow toolbar button.

 Using the Highlight/Midtone/Shadow Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Using the Highlight/Midtone/Shadow Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to adjust separately the dark, middle, and light values of an image or selection.

•	Notes: To use the Highlight/Midtone/Shadow command on a selection, the image must be a greyscale or 24-bit color image.
To limit the adjustment to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

When adjusting the values in this dialog box, you can use the Linear or Dynamic adjustment method. The Linear method adds and removes light to the entire image, which shifts it along the histogram. The Dynamic method adds and removes light only to the area or areas you adjust (Shadow, Midtone, or Highlight). Before moving the sliders, select the option for Paint Shop Pro to use.

To use the Highlight/Midtone/Shadow dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

2	To update the original image automatically each time you change the settings, click the Auto Proof button [image].

3	Choose either the Linear or Dynamic adjustment method. With the Linear option, the original settings of the image are displayed as Shadow at 0, Midtone at 50, and Highlight at 100. With the Dynamic option, the original setting for each area is 0.

4	For the Linear adjustment method:

•	Drag the Shadow slider to the right or type a value up to 100 to darken increasingly lighter pixels and shift more of the image into the Shadow area.

•	Drag the Midtone slider or type a value between 0 and 100 to shift the middle area of the light scale. Note that this can cause some color distortion.

•	Drag the Highlight slider to the left or type a value down to 0 to lighten increasingly darker pixels, which shifts more of the image into the highlight area.

For the Dynamic adjustment method:

•	Drag any slider to the right or type a value up to 100 to lighten the pixels of the specific area.

•	Drag any slider to the left or type a negative value to –100 to darken the pixels of the specific area.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the settings.

Related Topics

 Increasing Color Depth

 Creating a Selection

 Using the Histogram to Analyze a Photograph

 Using the Brightness/Contrast Dialog Box


Adjusting the Red, Green, and Blue
 Adjusting the Levels of Red, Green, and Blue

By adjusting the levels of red, green, and blue in an image or selection, you can change its overall color cast and correct color balance problems. To reduce the amount of color in an image, you can either increase its opposite color or reduce the amount of the adjacent colors (on the color wheel). For example, to color correct an image containing too much yellow, either increase the amount of blue or decrease the amount of red and green.

Opening the Red/Green/Blue Dialog Box

To open the Red/Green/Blue dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Choose Colors > Adjust > Red/Green/Blue.

•	Press <Shift> + <U>.

•	Click the optional Adjust RGB button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Red/Green/Blue Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


 Using the Red/Green/Blue Dialog Box

Use the Red/Green/Blue dialog box to adjust separately the red, green, and blue values in an image or selection. You can use either this command or the Gamma Correction command to remove the color cast from an image.

The red, green, and blue values of the image are represented as percentages, with 0% indicating the original values.

•	Notes: To use the Red/Green/Blue command on a selection, the image must be a 24-bit color image.
To limit the adjustment to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Red/Green/Blue dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

2	To update the original image automatically each time you change the settings, click the Auto Proof button [image].

3	Use each of the red, green, and blue numeric edit controls to add or remove that color proportionally.

4	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

5	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the settings.

•	Tips: Reducing the amount of blue adds a yellow cast to the image.
Reducing the amount of green adds a magenta cast to the image.
Reducing the amount of red adds a cyan cast to the image.

Related Topics

 Adjusting the Image Gamma

 Increasing Color Depth

 Creating a Selection


Adjusting Individual Colors

Using the Hue Map Command

To adjust individual hues in an image, use the Hue Map function. You can replace any color with another.

Opening the Hue Map Dialog Box

To open the Hue Map dialog box, choose Colors > Adjust > Hue Map.

 Using the Hue Map Dialog Box

Other Methods

You can also replace a color using the Color Replacer. This technique is useful when you want to replace sections of a solid color quickly or replace a color without first making a selection. Another tool for replacing color is the Eraser. On a layer, the Eraser will replace a color with a transparency. On a background, it will replace a color with the foreground or background color.

 Using the Color Replacer

 Using the Eraser


Using the Hue Map Dialog Box

Use the Hue Map dialog box to change individual colors in a photograph. When painting or working on flat-color images, use the Color Replacer to replace colors.

•	Notes: To use the Hue Map command on a selection, the image must be a 24-bit color image.
To limit the adjustment to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Hue Map dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

2	To update the original image automatically each time you change the settings, click the Auto Proof button [image].

3	If necessary, click the Reset button to return the sliders to their default positions.

4	Move the slider of each column to shift a hue. If the image does not contain that hue, nothing happens.

5	Use the Saturation numeric edit control to decrease or increase the saturation of all colors in the image.

6	Use the Lightness numeric edit control to decrease or increase the lightness of the entire image.

7	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

8	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the settings.

Related Topics

 Using the Color Replacer

 Increasing Color Depth

 Creating a Selection


 Adjusting the Image Gamma

The gamma of an image is a measure of its contrast and brightness. By correcting the gamma, you can adjust these two elements in unison. Because this command can leave an image looking somewhat flat, you may want to increase the contrast after you have corrected the gamma.

The gamma curve has three components -- the red, green, and blue of the image. You can adjust the color balance of an image by unlinking the curves and moving them separately. For example, if an image has a red cast to it, move the Red slider to the left to reduce it.

Opening the Gamma Correction Dialog Box

To open the Gamma Correction dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Choose Colors > Adjust > Gamma Correction.

•	Press <Shift> + <G>.

•	Click the optional Gamma Correction button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Gamma Correction Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


 Using the Gamma Correction Dialog Box

Use the Gamma Correction dialog box to adjust the midtones and color balance of an image.

•	Notes: To use the Gamma Correction command on a selection, the image must be a greyscale or 24-bit color image.
To limit the adjustment to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

To use the Gamma Correction dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

2	To adjust the red, green, and blue curves individually, clear the Link check box. By default, the sliders are linked so that they move in unison.

3	To update the original image automatically each time you change the settings, click the Auto Proof button [image].

4	The graph to the right of the sliders shows the curves for the three colors. The left side of the graph represents the shadows of the image; the right side represents the highlights. To view the image’s current settings, move the sliders to a setting of 1.00. The three curves will combine into a single straight line. This line mirrors the slider values in the Highlight/Midtone/Shadow dialog box, where the current image settings are 0% Shadow, 50% Midtone, and 100% highlight.

5	If the sliders are linked, drag any slider or type a number into any box to move the curve. Dragging to the right pushes more pixels into a higher lightness value and lightens the image. Dragging to the left darkens the image.

6	To change the color balance of the image, clear the Link check box and adjust the sliders individually. Drag to the right to add more of the color and to the left to remove it.

7	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

8	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the settings.

Because this command can leave an image looking somewhat flat, you may want to increase the contrast after correcting the gamma.

 Increasing Contrast in an Image

Related Topics

 Increasing Color Depth

 Creating a Selection


Stretching and Equalizing the Histogram

These two commands change the shape of the Histogram, thereby altering the image.

Equalize Command

The Equalize command distributes the lightness values of the pixels more evenly across the light spectrum from black to white. It makes the darkest pixel as close to black and the lightest pixel as close to white as possible. It then distributes the remaining pixels evenly between these two values. This produces an averaging, or tempering, of the brightness in the image.

To equalize the Histogram, either:

•	Choose Colors > Histogram Functions > Equalize, or

•	Press <Shift> + <E>.

Stretch Command

If the Histogram does not cover the entire lightness spectrum, the image does not contain very dark or very light areas; it lacks contrast. The Stretch command stretches the graph closer to both ends so that it covers more of the spectrum.

To stretch the Histogram, either:

•	Choose Colors > Histogram Functions > Stretch, or

•	Press <Shift> + <T>.

Related Topic

 Using the Histogram to Analyze a Photograph


Painting and Drawing Overview
Painting Overview

Paint Shop Pro provides several painting and drawing tools on the Tool palette. The painting tools can be used only on raster layers, while the drawing tools can be used on both raster and vector layers. When a vector layer is selected, the painting tools are unavailable, and their buttons are greyed-out.

To select a tool, click its button on the Tool palette. You can also click the Tool Selection button on the Tool Options palette and choose the brush from the drop-down menu.

•	Note: Because many tools will operate or will have the desired effect only on greyscale or 24-bit images, you may need to increase the color (bit) depth of your image before using these tools.

The painting tools are the Paintbrush, Color Replacer, Eraser, Airbrush, Picture Tube, and Flood Fill tool. Of these tools, the Paintbrush, Color Replace, Eraser, and Airbrush are considered brushes. They all display the same Brush Tip tab on the Tool Options palette.

For more information about a specific tool, click its name in the list below:

Paintbrush

Color Replacer

Eraser

Airbrush

Picture Tube

Flood Fill

 Using a Brush

•	Note: The Clone and Retouch brushes, which are not designed specifically for painting, also display the Brush Tip tab on their Tool Options palette.

The Text, Draw, and Preset Shapes tools are the drawing tools. You can use them on both raster and vector layers. The other painting tools are limited to raster layers.

Related Topics

 About the Tool Palette

 Increasing Color Depth

 Selecting the Brush Colors

 Selecting Brush Styles

 Selecting Brush Textures

 About Vector Layers and Objects


Using a Brush

There are four steps to using a brush:

1	Activate the brush.

2	Configure the settings on the Tool Options palette.

3	Select the brush style on the Color palette.

4	Apply the paint to the image.

•	Note: To confine the paint to a specific area, make a selection before painting.

Activating a Brush

To activate a brush using the Tool palette:

1	Display the Tool palette if it is not visible.

2	On the Tool palette, click the button of the brush you want to use.

To activate a brush using the Tool Options palette:

1	Display the Tool Options palette if it is not visible.

2	Click the Tool Selection button and choose the tool from the drop-down menu.

Configuring the Settings on the Tool Options Palette

The Tool Options palette displays the settings for the painting tools. After you activate a brush, use the first tab of the Tool Options palette to configure the brush tip. The last tab, the Cursor and Tablet Options tab [image], displays options for changing the appearance of the cursor and showing the brush size. Some tools also have a middle tab, which displays the options unique to that tool.

 Selecting Brush Options

Selecting Brush Styles, Colors, and Textures

With the Paintbrush, Color Replacer, Eraser, Airbrush, and Flood Fill tool, you can use solid colors, patterns, and gradients. You can also select the None option to have no style appear. Use the Active Styles boxes on the Color palette to choose an option. You can change the brush at any time by selecting new foreground/stroke and background/fill styles. You can also simulate painting on textured paper by selecting texture options.

 Selecting Brush Styles

 Selecting Brush Textures

Related Topic

 About the Tool Palette


Selecting the Brush Tip Options

The first tab of the Tool Options palette contains the attributes that determine how a brush applies paint to an image. As you create or modify a brush, the preview box at the upper left of the palette displays the new tip.

Paint Shop Pro also contains a selection of brushes with the preset tips that replicate specific drawing tools-Paintbrush, Pen, Pencil, Marker, Crayon, Chalk, and Charcoal. If you use one of these brushes, all attributes except the size and step values are set automatically.

The numeric edit controls used in the palette provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

Shape

Shape controls the shape of the brush tip. The choices are round, square, vertical, horizontal, right slash, and left slash. When the brush touches the image, it applies paint in the selected shape. For example, if you click your image once with a square brush, the brush will apply a square-shaped area of paint.

Size

Size is the width of the brush tip in pixels. A brush can be from 1-255 pixels wide.

Hardness

Hardness controls the sharpness of the brush edges. The harder the brush, the more defined the edges of paint will be. At 100%, the paint stroke has sharply defined edges. As the hardness decreases, the brush edge softens.

Opacity

Opacity controls how well the paint covers the image surface. Lowering the opacity is like diluting paint. At 100% opacity, the paint covers everything; at 1%, the paint is almost transparent.

Step

Step controls the spacing of the discrete drops of paint, or how frequently the brush tip touches the image during a stroke. It is a percentage of the diameter of the brush tip. At 100%, a size 30 brush tip touches the surface once every 30 pixels, and the brush shape is clearly defined; at 50%, the tip touches in the middle of the previous tip. As the step decreases, the brush tip touches the surface more frequently. Its outline becomes less noticeable, and the strokes appear smoother and more dense.

Density

Density controls the amount of paint the brush applies with each stroke. The density can be compared to the number of bristles in a brush—increasing and decreasing density adds and removes bristles. At 100%, the paint covers the surface completely. As the density decreases, the amount of paint applied with each stroke decreases. At 1%, only a few pixels of paint appear.

Build Up Brush Option

The Build Up Brush feature simulates the effect of repeated brush strokes. Each time you move the brush over the same area of the image or layer, you apply more paint. When the option is inactive, the brush applies paint once; repainting an area has no effect. Select the check box to activate this feature. Clear the check box to make it inactive.

 Using Tab 2 of the Tool Options Palette

Related Topics

 Selecting the Brush Colors

 Selecting Brush Styles

 Selecting Brush Textures

 Using a Paint Shop Pro Custom Brush

 Painting with the Airbrush

 Using the Color Replacer


Selecting Other Brush Options

Click the second tab of the Tool Options palette to set options that vary according to the brush. The most common options are explained below. The others are described with their brushes.

Sample Merged Feature

The Sample Merged feature, which can be used with the Clone and Retouch brushes, applies the brush action to all the layers in the image rather than limiting it to the current (active) layer. The Clone brush copies all visible data, and the Retouch brush applies the effect to all visible pixels.

Tolerance

The Tolerance setting, which is available for the Flood Fill and Color Replacer tools, determines how closely the colors of the image must match the old color in order to be replaced. As you increase the tolerance, more colors are replaced.

Paper Texture

Note to users of earlier versions of Paint Shop Pro: The Paper Texture drop-down box, which was on the second tab of the Tool Options palette, has been replaced by the Textures boxes on the Color palette.

You can now apply a foreground/stroke and a background/fill texture. The textures simulate a variety of surfaces and make it look as though you were painting on a canvas with that texture. Use the left mouse button to apply the foreground texture and the right mouse button to apply the background texture.

 Selecting Brush Textures

Related Topics

 Selecting the Brush Tip Options

 Selecting Brush Colors

 Selecting Brush Styles


Selecting Brush Colors

The solid colors you are currently using, called the active solid colors, are displayed in the Active Styles boxes of the Color palette when you have selected the solid color option. There are two active solid colors, the foreground/stroke and background/fill colors. You can change the brush colors by selecting new foreground/stroke and background/fill solid colors using the Color palette, the Jasc or Windows Color dialog boxes, the Image palette, the image, or the Recent Colors dialog box.

 Using the Active Styles Boxes

To select a new solid color from the image, click a brush on the Tool palette and choose the solid color options for the Styles boxes. Then, press <Ctrl> to change the brush cursor into the Dropper. While pressing the <Ctrl> key, you can left-click to choose a new foreground solid color and right-click to choose a new background solid color.

Note that you can paint with the foreground/stroke and the background/fill colors, gradients, and patterns. Painting with the left mouse button applies the foreground/stroke style and texture; painting with the right mouse button applies the background/fill style and texture.

Related Topics

 Using the Color Palette

 Selecting a Color Dialog Box

 Using the Image Palette

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box

 Selecting Brush Tip Options


 Using a Paint Shop Pro Custom Brush

Paint Shop Pro offers custom brushes that simulate various drawing and painting tools. When you choose a custom brush, Paint Shop Pro configures the Shape, Opacity, Density, and Hardness settings (except for the Paintbrush, whose shape you select).

To select a Paint Shop Pro custom brush:

1	On the first tab of the Tool Options palette, click the Brush Types button [image] to open the Brush Types menu.

2	Choose a brush from the drop-down menu.

3	Select the Size, Step, and Build Up Brush options.

Related Topics

 Selecting Brush Options

 Selecting Brush Styles

 Selecting Brush Textures

 Selecting Brush Colors

 Creating a Custom Brush


 Creating a Custom Brush

Paint Shop Pro contains two types of custom brushes:

•	Brushes that mimic tools, such as pens, crayons, and chalk, and

•	Brushes that apply paint in shapes.

Brushes that mimic tools are listed in the Brush Types menu. To select one, click the [image] button on the first tab of any brush Tool Options palette.

The Paint Shop Pro Brushes folder contains several brushes that apply paint in shapes. Select them using the Custom Brush dialog box. You can also create your own custom brushes. They can be made from selections with a width and height of up to 255 by 255 pixels.

To create a custom brush:

1	Make a selection of the area you want to convert into a brush.

2	If necessary, make the Tool Options palette visible.

3	Click any brush button on the Tool palette.

4	If necessary, click tab 1 of the Tool Options palette to bring it to the front.

5	Click the Brush Types button [image] to open the Brush Types menu, and choose Custom. The Custom Brush dialog box opens.

6	Use the dialog box to create and save the brush.

 Using the Custom Brush Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Creating a Selection

 Selecting Brush Options

 Selecting Brush Styles

 Selecting Brush Textures

 Selecting Brush Colors


 Using the Custom Brush Dialog Box

Use the Custom Brush dialog box to turn a selection into a brush tip. Before opening this dialog box, create the selection. Click the Brush Types button [image] on the Tool Options palette, and choose Custom. The Custom Brush dialog box opens.

To use the Custom Brush dialog box:

1	To save the brush in a folder other than the Paint Shop Pro Brushes folder, click the Edit Paths button. When the Browse for Folder dialog box opens, navigate to the folder, select it, and click OK.

2	Click the Create button. The new brush thumbnail appears in the dialog box. Paint Shop Pro saves the brush in the selected folder when it creates it.

3	To set a default Step value, click the Edit button to open the Custom Brush Edit dialog box. Drag the slider or type a number in the box, and then click OK to close this dialog box.

4	Click OK to close the Custom Brush dialog box.

Related Topics

 Editing a Custom Brush

 Selecting Brush Options

 Selecting Brush Colors

 Selecting Brush Styles

 Selecting Brush Textures


 Editing a Custom Brush

You can edit the size, opacity, step, and texture of the custom brushes you have created. On tab 1 of the Tool Options palette, use the numeric edit controls of the Size, Opacity, and Step boxes to enter new values. Use the Active Textures and Styles boxes on the Color palette to select textures and styles.

You can also change the Step value using the Custom Brush Edit dialog box. To use the dialog box:

1	On the Tool Options palette, click the Brush Types button [image] and choose Custom. The Custom Brush dialog box opens.

2	Click the Edit button in the Custom Brush dialog box. The Custom Brush Edit box opens.

3	Drag the slider or type a value in the box to set the step size.

4	Click OK to close the dialog box and save this value, and then click Ok to close the Custom Brush dialog box.

Related Topics

 About the Active Textures Boxes

 Selecting Brush Tip Options

 Selecting Brush Colors

 Selecting Brush Styles

 Selecting Brush Textures


Using a Paintbrush

Freehand Painting

To create freehand paint strokes with a brush, use the following method:

1	Click the image where you want the brush stroke to start.

2	Drag the cursor while pressing one of the mouse buttons.

•	To apply the foreground/stroke style and texture, click the left mouse button.

•	To apply the background/fill style and texture, click the right button.

3	Release the mouse button to end the brush stroke.

Creating Straight Lines

To paint a straight line, use the following method:

1	Click the image where you want the line to begin.

2	Press and hold the <Shift> key.

3	Click the image where you want to end the line. Left-click to create a line using the foreground/stroke style and texture; right-click to create it using the background/fill style and texture.

4	You can continue adding line segments of either color by clicking with the left or right mouse button. Release the  <Shift> key to end the line.

Related Topics

 Selecting Brush Tip Options

 Selecting Brush Colors

 Selecting Brush Styles

 Selecting Brush Textures


Using the Airbrush

The Airbrush simulates painting with an airbrush or spray can.

Selecting the Brush Properties

To set the Airbrush properties:

1	Activate the Airbrush by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or in the Tool Selection menu of the Tool Options palette.

2	Display the Tool Options palette, if necessary.

3	On tab 1, set the options to determine how the Airbrush applies paint.

4	To create a textured effect when painting, click tab 2 and select a paper texture from the drop-down box.

5	Select the Airbrush colors.

•	Note: To confine the paint to a specific area, make a selection before painting with the Airbrush.

Freehand Painting with the Airbrush

To create freehand paint strokes with a brush, use the following method:

1	Click the image where you want the brush stroke to start.

2	Drag the cursor while pressing one of the mouse buttons.

•	To apply the foreground/stroke style and texture, click the left mouse button.

•	To apply the background/fill style and texture, click the right button.

3	Release the mouse button to end the brush stroke.

Creating Straight Lines with the Airbrush

To paint a straight line, use the following method:

1	Click the image where you want the line to begin.

2	Press and hold the <Shift> key.

3	Click the image where you want to end the line. Left-click to create a line using the foreground/stroke style and texture. Right-click to create it using the background/fill style and texture.

4	Continue adding line segments by clicking with the left or right mouse button. Release the <Shift> key to end the line.

Related Topics

 Selecting Brush Tip Options

 Selecting Brush Colors

 Selecting Brush Styles

 Selecting Brush Textures


 Replacing a Color

The Color Replacer uses the active styles to replace one color in an image with a new color. Either one can be the foreground/stroke or background/fill color. You can paint with the brush strokes to replace only those areas the brush touches, or you can double-click the image to replace the color throughout. You can also set a Tolerance value on tab 2 of the Tool Options palette. This lets you replace colors that are similar, but not identical, to the original.

•	Note: To confine the paint to a specific area, make a selection before using the Color Replacer.

To replace a color:

1	Activate the Color Replacer by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or in the Tool Selection menu of the Tool Options palette.

2	Select the color you are replacing as the foreground/stroke or background/fill color.

3	Select the color you are substituting as the other active solid color.

4	To add a texture, select one as the active foreground/stroke texture.

5	Use the Tool Options palette tab 1 to configure the brush tip.

6	Click tab 2 to bring it to the front.

7	Set a Tolerance value to determine how closely the colors of the image must match the old color in order to be replaced. As you increase the tolerance, more colors are replaced.

8	Paint to replace the color in the following way:

•	If the new color is the foreground/stroke style, press the left mouse button while you paint or double-click with the left button.

•	If the new color is the background/fill style, press the right mouse button or double-click with it.

Related Topics

 Selecting Brush Tip Options

 Selecting Brush Colors

 Selecting Brush Styles

 Selecting Brush Textures

 Painting with a Brush


 Erasing a Color

Use the Eraser to replace colors in an image with the background color or with a transparency. When you drag the Eraser across a raster layer, all the pixels in its path become transparent. When used on a background, the Eraser produces a different effect. It acts like a paintbrush, and it replaces the existing color with the current foreground/stroke or background/fill style and texture.

The Eraser retains the information it has removed from a layer. To restore the erased image, right-click and drag the Eraser over the transparent areas.

•	Notes: To confine the paint to a specific area, make a selection before using the Eraser tool.
Right-clicking and dragging over transparent areas of the layer make those areas black. To remove the black, left-click and drag.

To use the Eraser:

1	Activate the Eraser by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or in the Tool Selection menu of the Tool Options palette.

2	Use the Tool Options palette tab 1 to configure the Eraser tip.

3	Select or clear the “Build Up Brush” check box. When the check box is selected, each eraser stroke removes more of the color. When the check box is cleared, the color is erased only on the first brush stroke.

4	On the Color palette, select the Eraser styles and textures if you are erasing a background of an image.

5	Drag the cursor across the image:

•	On a background, the left mouse button paints the background/fill style and texture, while the right mouse button paint the foreground/stroke style and texture.

•	On a layer, use the left mouse button to erase to a transparency. The right mouse is not used.

Related Topics

 Selecting Brush Tip Options

 Selecting Brush Styles

 Selecting Brush Textures

 Selecting Brush Colors

 Painting with a Brush


 About the Flood Fill Tool

The Flood Fill tool fills an area with a color, pattern, or gradient. It has a number of options that control how it recognizes and replaces color. Use tab 1 of the Tool Options palette to select the options that apply to all styles. If an option does not apply, it is unavailable. Use the Color palette to control whether the fill style is a solid color, a gradient, or a pattern.

After you have set the tool option, apply the fill by clicking the image or selection:

•	To apply the foreground/stroke style and texture, click the left mouse button.

•	To apply the background/fill style and texture, click the right button.

•	Note: To confine the fill to a specific area, make a selection before using the Flood Fill tool.

Setting the [image] Tab Options

To set the Flood Fill tool options:

1	Activate the Flood Fill tool by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or in the Tool Selection menu of the Tool Options palette.

2	From the Blend Mode drop-down box, choose a mode other than Normal if you want the pixels of the underlying image to affect the Flood Fill colors. The same choices are used for the Layer blend modes.

3	In the Match mode drop-down box, select a method for determining which pixels are covered. The modes select the pixels using the following methods:

•	RGB Value covers pixels with matching RGB values,

•	Hue covers pixels with matching hue values,

•	Brightness covers pixels with matching luminance values,

•	All Opaque covers only the opaque areas (does not cover transparent areas),

•	Opacity covers pixels based on the opacity of the current pixel vs. the others, and

•	None covers all pixels.

4	Use the numeric edit controls of the Tolerance box to enter a setting. The Tolerance value determines how closely the color of a pixel must match the color of the selected pixel before it is overwritten. The Tolerance box uses a scale of 0 to 200, with 0 being no tolerance (only pixels with a perfect match are filled), and 200 being total tolerance (all pixels are filled).

5	Set the Opacity for the fill. At 100% opacity, the paint covers everything; at 1%, the paint is almost transparent.

6	Select the Sample Merged check box to have the Match mode select pixels from the entire image. Clear the check box to limit it to the current (active) layer.

 Setting Fill Style and Texture Options

•	Note: Pattern and Gradient fills can only be applied to 24-bit color or greyscale images.

Related Topics

 Layer Blend Modes

 Creating a Selection


Setting the Fill Style Options
 Setting the Fill Style and Texture Options

Note to users of earlier versions of Paint Shop Pro: The Fill Style options, which were on the second tab of the Tool Options palette, have been replaced by the Styles boxes on the Color palette.

•	Note: To confine the fill to a specific area, make a selection before using the Flood Fill tool.

Fill Style

The option you choose for the Style boxes on the Color palette determine if the fill is a solid color, a gradient, or a pattern.

•	Note: Pattern and Gradient fills can only be applied to 24-bit color or greyscale images.

 Selecting Styles

Fill Texture

To add a texture to the fill, select a texture option for the Texture boxes.

 Selecting Textures

Related Topics

 Selecting Brush Colors

 Using the Gradient Editor Dialog Box

 Creating a Selection


Editing a Gradient

Edit a newly created or older gradient using the Gradient Editor dialog box. To edit a gradient, click its name in the “Types” panel list of gradients and configure it using the Gradient and Transparency bars in the lower portion of the dialog box.

Use the Gradient bar to set the gradient’s color placement, the color buttons and color box to set the colors, the Transparency bar to set the transparencies, and the Result bar to preview the resulting gradient.

Using the Gradient Bar, Color Buttons, and Color Box

A gradient consists of at least two colors and the blended area between them or a color that fades to transparency. The markers below the bar indicate the points of solid color; the midpoints above it indicate where the two colors are equally blended. Every two markers have a midpoint between them.

Using Markers

To add a marker when no other markers are selected:

•	Click inside the Gradient bar to create a new marker using the color of the spot you click.

•	Click under the Gradient bar to create a marker at that position using the color from the color box.

To add a marker when another marker is selected, click under the Gradient bar. The color displayed in the color box determines the color of the new marker and its corresponding Gradient bar area.

To move a marker or midpoint:

•	Click and drag it along the bar, or

•	Click it and type a value in the Location box. The scale ranges from 0% at the left end to 100% at the right. A marker can be assigned any value on the scale. A midpoint must have a value in between its two marker values.

Other marker actions:

•	To remove a marker, click and drag it away from the Gradient bar, and then release it.

•	To activate a marker or midpoint, click it. A black triangular point on a marker and a black midpoint diamond indicate they are active.

•	To deactivate a marker or midpoint, click the dialog box away from the editing area.

Changing Marker Colors

You can set marker colors using the foreground color, background color, or a color you select. To change a marker’s color, click the market to select it, and then click one of the three color buttons (Fore, Back. And Custom) located at the left side of the “Gradient” panel.

The color box to the right of the Custom button displays the current user defined color.

To change the color:

1	Click the Custom button.

2	Click the color box. Left-click to open the Color dialog box; right-click to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

3	Choose a new color and close the dialog box.

If the gradient contains the foreground or background color, when you next apply the gradient it uses the current foreground and background colors of the image. To create a gradient that always contains the same colors, color all the markers with user defined colors.

Using the Transparency Bar

Use the Transparency bar to alter the opacity of the gradient. By default, the bar displays 100% transparency (or 0 opacity) at the left and 100% opacity (or 0 transparency) at the right. The black area of the bar indicates where the gradient will be transparent, the white area indicates where it will be opaque, and the grey area indicates where it will be semi-opaque.

You can vary the opacity along the gradient by clicking a marker to activate it, changing the value in the Opacity box, and then moving the marker (or typing a position in the Location box). Move the midpoint diamond to shift the point between markers where the opacity is 50%. Move the markers to indicate the points where the opacity changes. Note that the beginning and ending opacity can be any values.

You add, move, and delete markers and midpoints of the Transparency bar in the same way as you do the Gradient markers and midpoints. The Transparency bar always contains at least two markers. To create an opaque (non-transparent) gradient, set them both to 100% opacity. When you change the opacity of a marker, its color lightens or darkens. A darker marker indicates lower opacity (more transparency), and a lighter marker indicates higher opacity (less transparency).

•	To add a marker, click a spot under the Transparency bar. New markers are set to 100% opacity by default.

•	To remove a marker, click and drag it away from the Transparency bar.

•	To activate a marker or midpoint, click it. The triangular point of a marker or the entire diamond becomes black to indicate that it is active.

•	To deactivate a marker or midpoint, click the dialog box away from the editing area.

•	To move a marker or midpoint, drag it along the bar or click it and then type a value in the Location box. The scale ranges from 0% at the left end to 100% at the right. A marker can be assigned any value on the scale. A midpoint must have a value in between its two marker values.

•	To change a marker’s transparency, activate it and then change the value in the Opacity box. The marker is completely transparent at 0 and completely opaque at 100.

Related Topics

 Using the Gradient Editor Dialog Box

 Selecting a Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Using the Gradient Editor Dialog Box

Use the Gradient Editor dialog box to create, edit, and manage multi-color gradients, which you apply to an image using the Flood Fill tool. You can open the dialog box whenever this tool is active. In the Fill style box of the Tool Options palette, choose one of the four gradients. Click tab 2 of the palette and then click the Edit button. The Gradient Editor dialog box opens.

The Types panel of the dialog box displays the available gradients and the buttons for creating and managing them. The list contains the gradients installed by Paint Shop Pro and those you have created and imported. If you are deleting or exporting gradients, you can choose more than one by pressing the <Ctrl> key while clicking names in the list. Use the tools and settings in the area below the panel to configure or edit the gradient.

•	Note: Changes to gradient files do not take effect until you click OK on the Gradient Editor dialog box. Clicking Cancel reverts all gradient files to their previous states.

To create a new gradient file:

1	Click New. The New Gradient dialog box opens.

2	Type a name for the new gradient in the text box and click OK. If the name is a duplicate, you are asked to supply a different one. Edit the default gradient that appears in the lower portion of the Gradient Editor dialog box.

To copy a gradient file to a new gradient:

1	Choose a source gradient from the Types list box.

2	Click Copy. The Copy Gradient dialog box opens.

3	Type a name for the copied gradient and click OK. If the name is a duplicate, you are asked to supply a different one.

4	The new gradient’s name appears in the list box.

To rename a gradient file:

1	Choose a gradient from the Types list box.

2	Click Rename. The Rename Gradient dialog box opens.

3	Type a new name for the gradient in the text box and click OK. If the name is a duplicate, you are asked to supply a different one.

4	The new name replaces the old one in the list box.

To delete a gradient file:

1	Choose one or more gradients from the Types list box.

2	Click Delete. The gradient(s) are removed from the list.

3	If you accidentally delete a gradient, click Cancel to undo the deletion. You also undo any changes you made to the list of gradients.

4	Click OK to close the dialog box and delete the gradient file(s).

To import a gradient file:

1	Click Import. The Import Gradient dialog box opens.

2	Navigate to the folder containing the gradient you want to load. PhotoShop gradients are saved in the GRD format, which Paint Shop Pro automatically displays in the Files of type box.

3	Click the filename to highlight it.

4	Click OK to close the dialog box and import the gradient. Its name appears in the Types list box.

•	Note: To import a Paint Shop Pro Gradient in the JGD file format, place the gradient file in the Gradients folder of the program. It is automatically added to the gradient list.

To export a gradient file:

1	Choose a gradient from the Types list box.

2	Click Export. The Export Gradient dialog box opens.

3	Navigate to the folder to which you want to export the gradient. Exported gradients are saved in the GRD format, which Paint Shop Pro automatically displays in the Save as type box.

4	Type a name for the gradient file in the text box.

5	Click OK to close the dialog box and export the gradient.

Related Topic

 Creating or Editing a Gradient


Gradient Name Dialog Box

This dialog box opens when you click the New, Copy, and Rename buttons in Gradient Editor dialog box. Type a new name for the gradient, and then click OK to close this dialog box and return to the Gradient Editor dialog box.


Using the Import Gradient Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to load a Paint Shop Pro gradient, a Photoshop gradient, or a gradient that you created and saved.

To use the Import Gradient dialog box:

1	Navigate to the folder containing the gradient you want to load. Photoshop gradients are saved in the GRD format, which Paint Shop Pro automatically displays in the Files of type box.

2	Click the file to highlight it.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and import the gradient.


Using the Export Gradient Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to save a gradient that you created or edited.

To use the Export Gradient dialog box:

1	Navigate to the folder to which you want to export the gradient. Exported gradients are saved in the GRD format, which Paint Shop Pro automatically displays in the Save as type box.

2	Type a name for the gradient file in the text box.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and export the gradient.


 Using Picture Tubes

Use Paint Shop Pro’s Picture Tube to paint with a variety of objects. You can add butterflies and beetles to a picnic setting, fill an aquarium with fish, or frame a picture with holly. Use one of the Picture Tubes included with the program or create your own.

Each Picture Tube contains a collection of related objects or an object in a variety of settings. For example, the Fish Picture Tube applies 12 different fish, while the Colored Spheres Picture Tube applies a sphere in 15 colors.

When you paint with a Picture Tube, you can control which object appears by changing the settings in the Selection Mode box of the Picture Tube Options dialog box. This dialog box also contains a Cell Arrangement panel, which you use when you are painting with a Picture Tube you have created.

To use a Picture Tube:

1	Activate the Picture Tube tool by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette.

2	On the first tab of the Tool Options palette:

•	Select a Picture Tube from the Tube drop-down list. A sample of the tube appears in the preview box.

•	Use the numeric edit control of the Scale box to set the Picture Tube size. You can reduce and enlarge it from 10% to 250% of its original size.

•	Use the numeric edit control of the Step box to set the spacing of the tubes when you drag the cursor. The step is a percentage of the diameter of the brush tip. As the step decreases, the brush tip touches the surface more frequently. Its outline becomes less noticeable, and the strokes appear smoother and more dense.

3	Click the second tab to bring it to the front.

4	In the Placement Mode drop-down box, choose the Random or Continuous placement mode to control whether the Picture Tubes appear in the image at random or equal intervals.

5	In the Selection Mode drop-down box, choose how Paint Shop Pro selects the cells (images) it paints. You have a choice of 5 modes:

•	The Random mode randomly selects images in the tube.

•	The Incremental mode selects the first image in the tube and repeats it only after it has selected all the images.

•	The Angular mode selects images based on the direction you drag the cursor as you paint.

•	The Pressure mode uses pressure from a pressure sensitive pad to determine which image to select.

•	The Velocity mode selects images based on the speed you drag the cursor as you paint.

6	To change the Picture Tube settings, you can also click the Options button to open the Picture Tube Options dialog box. You can apply tubes without changing the settings.

7	If you changed the settings in the dialog box, click OK to close it.

8	Paint with the Picture Tube.

Related Topics

 Setting the Picture Tube Options

 Painting with a Picture Tube

 Creating a Picture Tube

 Increasing Color Depth


 Setting the Picture Tube Options

Use the Picture Tube Options dialog box to change the default settings for the tool’s options.

To set the options:

1	The Cell Arrangement panel shows the arrangement of Picture Tube cells in the Picture Tube file. For Paint Shop Pro Picture Tubes, use the default settings.

2	In the Placement Options panel, select Random or Continuous placement mode to control whether the Picture Tubes appear in the image at random or equal intervals.

3	Type a step size. As you decrease the step size, the distance between the intervals at which the tubes appear in the image decreases.

4	Paint Shop Pro selects the cells (images) it paints based on the mode you choose from the Selection Mode list:

•	The Random mode randomly selects images in the tube.

•	The Incremental mode selects the first image in the tube and repeats it only after it has selected all the images.

•	The Angular mode selects images based on the direction you drag the cursor as you paint.

•	The Pressure mode uses pressure from a pressure sensitive pad to determine which image to select.

•	The Velocity mode selects images based on the speed you drag the cursor as you paint.

5	If you want these settings to become the new default settings for the tube, select the Save as default for this Picture Tube check box.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box.

Related Topics

 Painting with a Picture Tube


 Painting with a Picture Tube

•	Note: To confine the paint to a specific area, make a selection before painting.

To paint with a Picture Tube:

1	If the image has more than one layer, select the layer on which you want to paint.

2	Click the Picture Tube button on the Tool palette to activate the tool.

3	Select the options from the Tool Options palette.

4	Position the cursor where you want to begin painting.

5	Click and drag the cursor to paint the Picture Tube. If you have chosen a Selection Mode option other than Random, move the cursor accordingly.

Related Topics

 Setting the Picture Tube Options

 Creating a Picture Tube

 Increasing Color Depth


 Creating a Picture Tube

To create a Picture Tube file:

1	Choose View > Change Grid and Guide Properties to open the Grid and Guide Properties dialog box.

2	In the Grid panel, type Horizontal and Vertical Spacing values in pixels. The values you enter become the length and height of the Picture Tube cell. Your images can be no larger than the cell size you select.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box.

4	Choose File > New. The New Image dialog box opens.

5	In the Image Dimensions panel, type values for the width and height that are multiples of the cell horizontal and vertical spacing. The number you type determines the total cells you can fill with images. For example, if the grid spacing is 100 pixels, you could create an image of 400 x 300 pixels. With an image this size, you will have 12 cells (4 across and three down).

6	Select Transparent for the Background Color.

7	Click OK. A new image with visible grid lines appears in the workspace.

8	If the grid is not visible, choose View > Grid to display it.

9	Create the images of the Picture Tube. Place one image in each grid square. Each square with the image becomes a Picture Tube cell.

After you have finished creating the Picture Tube, you need to save it.

 Saving a Picture Tube

Related Topics

 Setting the Picture Tube Options

 Painting with a Picture Tube


Saving a Picture Tube

After you have finished creating the Picture Tube, choose File > Export > Picture Tube. The Export Picture Tube dialog box opens.

To use the Export Picture Tube dialog box:

1	In the Cell Arrangement panel, enter the number of image cells you created across and down the image file.

2	In the Placement Options panel, select a Placement Mode. The mode can be changed when you use the Picture Tube.

3	Type the pixel width of the Picture Tube cell in the Step Size box.

4	To use a Selection Mode other than Random, select it from the list.

5	Type a name for the Picture Tube file.

6	Click the OK button.

Paint Shop Pro saves the file in the TUB format in the Tubes folder of the program and adds the file to the list of Picture Tubes on the Tool Options palette.

Related Topics

 Creating a Picture Tube

 Setting the Picture Tube Options

 Painting with a Picture Tube


Using a Pressure Sensitive Tablet

Paint Shop Pro allows you to use a pressure-sensitive tablet with a digitizing pen or other input device. The preferences for a tablet are changed on the Cursors and Tablet tab of the Tool Options palette.

Select the "Vary opacity" check box to have the pressure of the input device control opacity of the brush. Select the "Vary color" check box to have the pressure of the input device determine whether to apply the foreground or background color. Select the "Vary width" check box to have the pressure of the input device control the width. The width will vary from 1 pixel up to the value you have selected for that brush in the Tool Options palette.


Saving Selections and Gradients

 Saving a Selection to the Hard Drive

 Saving a Custom Gradient


Loading Selections and Gradients

 Loading a Selection from the Hard Drive

 Loading a Gradient


Selecting Foreground and Background Solid Colors

The foreground/stroke and background/fill solid colors are displayed in the Foreground and Background Solid Color boxes on the Color palette. If you paint on an image when you have chosen the Solid Color option in the Styles boxes, you apply one of these two colors. Painting while pressing the left mouse button applies the foreground/stroke color; pressing the right mouse button applies the background/fill color.

Chose new foreground/stroke and background/fill solid colors using any of the following methods:

•	Left-click the Available Colors panel to choose a foreground/stroke color. Right-click it to choose a background/fill color.

 Using the Color Palette

•	Left-click either the Foreground or Background Solid Color box to open the Color dialog box or Image palette. The two Solid Color boxes appear at the top of the Color palette.

•	Left-click a Styles box when it displays a solid color. The Color dialog box or Image palette opens.

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Select Color from Palette Dialog Box

•	Right-click the Foreground or Background Solid Color box or a Styles box when it displays a solid color. The Recent Colors dialog box opens.

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box

•	When any painting tool is active, press the <Ctrl> key while right-click or left-clicking a color in the image.

 Using the Dropper


Using the Color Palette

The solid colors you use as you paint are called active solid colors. An image has two active solid colors—the foreground/stroke and background/fill colors. They are displayed at the top of the Color palette in the Foreground and Background Solid Color boxes. The boxes always display the most recently selected foreground/stroke and background/fill solid colors. These two colors are the same as the colors in the two Styles boxes when both Styles boxes are set to the Solid Color option. To see the RGB or HSL values of these colors, move your cursor over them.

Below them is the Available Colors panel, where you select active solid colors. Whenever the cursor moves over this panel, it becomes the Dropper to indicate that you can select a color. The selected color and its RGB or HSL values appear at the bottom of the Color palette in the Current Color Information panel.

The number of colors actually available to you varies with the number of colors (bit depth) in your image. You can set the Available Colors panel to display the complete rainbow of colors or limit it to the number of colors available in the image. Select this option using the Dialogs and Palettes tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box.

Below the Available Colors panel are the Active Styles boxes, which display foreground/stroke and background/fill solid colors, gradients, and patterns. The box at the left shows the foreground/stroke style, while the box at the right shows the background/fill style. To paint or draw using a solid color, choose the Solid Color option by clicking the arrows in the boxes and then clicking the Solid Color icon [image]. You can now choose new solid colors using one of the following methods:

•	Clicking inside one of the Styles boxes,

•	Clicking inside a Foreground and Background Solid Color box,

•	Clicking a color in the Available Colors panel, or

•	Pressing the <Ctrl> key while you click a color in an image (a brush or drawing tool must be active to use the last method).

To paint with the foreground/stroke color, press the left mouse button while dragging your mouse. To paint with the background/fill color, press the right mouse button. To reverse the background and foreground colors, click the double-headed arrow to the left of the boxes.

The Lock check box [image] controls whether each brush or tool keeps its own styles and textures or all the brushes use the styles and textures that are currently selected. Select the check box to apply the same style and texture settings to every brush. Clear the check box to have each brush retain the individual settings selected for it.

The Active Textures boxes display the paper textures you are using.

At the bottom of the palette is the Current Color Information panel. It provides a preview when you select active colors from the Available Colors panel or are using the Dropper. As you move the Dropper around the Available Colors panel, the box displays the color under the Dropper, and above the box the color’s RGB or HSL values appear. When no color is selected, the color box displays an “X.” Choose to display the RGB or HSL value by selecting its option in the Dialogs and Palettes tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box.

Related Topics

 Setting the Dialogs and Palettes Tab Preferences

 Active Styles and Textures Boxes

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Edit Palette Dialog Box


Selecting a Color Dialog Box

The Jasc Color dialog box is the default dialog box used to select and modify colors. If you prefer, you can use the standard Windows Color dialog box.

To use the standard Windows Color dialog box:

1	Choose File > Preferences > General Program Preferences. The Paint Shop Pro Preferences dialog box opens.

2	Click the Dialogs and Palettes tab to bring it to the front.

3	Select the "Use standard Windows color picker" check box.

4	Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box.

To return to using the Jasc Colors dialog box, open the Preferences dialog box, select the Dialogs and Palettes tab, and clear the "Use standard Windows color picker" check box.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box


Jasc Color Dialog Box
Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

Opening the Jasc Color Dialog Box

To display the Jasc Color dialog box, click the Foreground or Background Solid Color box at the top of the Color palette or an Active Styles box when it displays a solid color. To select a new foreground/stroke color, click the Foreground/Stroke box. To select a new background/fill color, click the Background/Fill box. When the Jasc Color dialog box opens, the foreground/background color appears in the Color dialog box’s current color information area.

•	Note: You must be working with a 24-bit image to access the Color dialog box. In images with lower color depths, clicking a color in the Active Colors panel opens the Select Color from Palette dialog box.

Selecting from the Basic Colors

There are forty-eight basic colors that are preset and cannot be modified. The first column displays the three primary additive and three primary subtractive colors. The last column displays six lightness levels (grey levels). In between are the additive and subtractive primaries at increasing lightness levels from left to right.

To select one of these basic colors:

1	Click the color’s square in the Basic Colors box. The selected color, its RGB and HSL values, and its HTML code appear in the Current Color panel.

2	Click the OK button. The dialog box closes and the new color appears in the appropriate box of the Active Colors panel.

Selecting a Color from the Color Wheel

Selecting a color from the Color wheel is a two step process:

1	Select a hue from the Color wheel.

2	Adjust the hue’s saturation and lightness in the Saturation/Lightness box.

Selecting the Hue

Click the Color wheel or drag the selection ring to select a hue. As the dropper moves around the wheel, the values in the Current Color panel update. This panel displays the RGB and HSL values, the color, and its HTML number. The HTML number appears a text format that you can copy and paste directly into your HTML code.

Adjusting the Saturation/Lightness

Adjust the saturation and lightness of the hue using the Saturation/Lightness box inside the Color wheel.

To adjust the selected hue:

1	Click anywhere in the Saturation/Lightness box or drag the selection ring to change the saturation and lightness:

•	The saturation increases as you move from the left to the right.

•	The lightness increases as you move from the top to the bottom.

2	The selected color, its RGB and HSL values, and its HTML code (in the Current Color panel) update as you move the Dropper.

3	Click the OK button. The dialog box closes and the new color appears in the appropriate box of the Active Colors panel.

Selecting a Color Using the Current Color Panel

You can use any of the six numeric edit controls in this panel to select or adjust a specific color. Note that when you adjust the slider for one of the six values, a color preview appears inside the slider. The contents of the slider's color preview depend on whether or not the Link Colors checkbox is selected.

When you select the Link Colors checkbox, adjustments you make to any of the grouped color settings (RGB and HSL) reflect the current setting for the other grouped settings. In effect, you can select this checkbox if you wish to adjust these grouped color settings and see an accurate color preview. Do not select this checkbox if you do not want to see an accurate color preview.

Selecting a Color from the Image

To select a color from the image while the Color dialog box is open, move the dropper over the image and click. The selected color, its RGB and HSL values, and its HTML code appear in the Current Color panel.

Creating a Custom Color

There are sixteen Custom Color squares that you can fill with colors of your choice. Fill an empty square or replace a Custom Color square with a new color.

To select a custom color:

1	Select a color by left-clicking the Color wheel, the Saturation/Lightness box, the Current Color box, the Old Color box, or a basic color.

2	Do either of the following:

•	Right-click and drag the cursor to any Custom Color square and release the mouse button, or

•	Click the Add Custom button.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and display the color in the in the appropriate box of the Active Colors panel.

About the HTML Code Box

The HTML Code box displays the HTML hex code for the color displayed in the New Color box. If you know the HTML hex code for a color you wish to use, you can enter it in this box; the color will appear in the New Color box.

Related Topics

 Setting the Dialogs and Palettes Tab Preferences

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box


Windows Color Dialog Box
Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

If you prefer to use the Windows Color dialog box, you set Paint Shop Pro to open it rather than the Jasc Color dialog box.

Opening the Windows Color Dialog Box

To display the Windows Color dialog box, click the Foreground or Background Solid Color box at the top of the Color palette or an Active Styles box when it displays a solid color. To select a new foreground/stroke color, click the foreground/stroke color box. To select a new background/fill color, click the background/fill color box. When the Color dialog box opens, the foreground/background color appears in the Color dialog box’s current color information area.

•	Note: You must be working with a 24-bit image to access the Color dialog box. In images with lower color depths, clicking a color in the Active Colors panel opens the Select Color from Palette dialog box.

Selecting a Basic Color

There are 48 basic colors that are preset and can not be modified.

To select one of these basic color:

1	Click the square of the color you want in the Basic Colors box. The selected color and its RGB and HSL values appear in the Current Color information area.

2	Click OK to close the dialog box and display the color in the in the appropriate box of the Active Colors panel.

Selecting a Full Spectrum Color

The large Color Spectrum box modifies the current color’s red, green, blue, hue and saturation values. To adjust these values, click the cursor inside the “Color Spectrum” box or drag the crosshair pointer to the desired position. The controls affect the contents of the Color/Solid display box, which displays the color currently selected.

The thin Color Ribbon box modifies the current color’s red, green, blue, and luminance values. To adjust these values, click the cursor inside the Color Ribbon box or drag the pointer on the right of the box up or down as desired. The Color/Solid display box changes as you move the pointer.

Creating a Custom Color

There are 16 Custom Color squares that you can fill with colors of your choice. You can fill an empty square or replace the color in a square with a new color.

To select a custom color:

1	Use the Crosshair and Pointer controls to select a color.

2	Click the Add to Custom Colors button. The color appears in a Custom Color square.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and display the color in the appropriate box of the Active Colors panel.

Changing a Custom Color

To change a custom color:

1	Click the square of the color in the lower left corner of the dialog box.

2	Select a full spectrum color.

3	Click the Add to Custom Colors button.

Related Topics

 Selecting a Color Dialog Box

 Setting the Dialogs and Palettes Tab Preferences

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box


Using the Dropper Tool

Use the Dropper tool to select the active foreground and background solid colors. These colors are displayed in an Active Styles box when it contains a solid color and in the Foreground or Background Solid Color box at the top of the Color palette.

•	Note: The cursor always changes to the Dropper when you move it over the Available Colors panel of the Color palette or open the Jasc Color dialog box.

You can activate the Dropper tool in the following ways:

•	Click the Dropper button [image] on the Tools palette. If you have tool preferences set to standard, the cursor changes to the Dropper. If you have tool preferences set to precise, the cursor changes to the precision cursor.

•	While using a painting or drawing tool, press the <Ctrl> key. The cursor changes to the Dropper. Keep the <Ctrl> key pressed in until after you have finished selecting a color.

•	While using the Jasc Color dialog box, move the dropper over the image and click the color you want to select.

•	While using any dialog box containing a color box, move the cursor over an image and click the color you want to select.

To select a color using the Dropper:

1	Move the Dropper over the color you want to select.

2	Click to select an active color:

•	Left-click to select the foreground/stroke solid color.

•	Right-click to select the background/fill solid color.

The selected color appears in the Foreground or Background Solid Color box at the top of the Color palette. Note that you must choose the Solid Color option [image] in an Active Styles box to use the color you have just chosen. If an Active Styles box displays a gradient, pattern, or no style, the new color appears only in the Solid Color box at the top of the Color palette. When you then choose the Solid Color option, the box displays the new color.

If you are selecting a new color for a color box located in a dialog box, the active colors do not change. You can left-click to open the Color dialog box or right-click to open the Recent Colors dialog box. The new color appears in the color box, but it does not appear on the Color palette.

Related Topics

 Using the Color Palette

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Setting Cursor Preferences

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Recent Colors Dialog Box

Open the Recent Colors dialog box by right-clicking the Foreground/Stroke or Background/Fill Active Styles box when it displays a solid color, by right clicking the Foreground or Background Solid Color box (above the Available Colors panel), or by right-clicking the color box in a dialog box or tabbed page.

The upper half of this dialog box always displays the same ten colors or shades of grey. Note that if the color depth of the image is lower than 24 bits, some of the colors may be unavailable. Unavailable colors are signified by a circle with a line through it.

Whether colors or grey values are displayed depends on the image.

•	With color images, the colors are red, green, blue, dark grey, light grey, cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and white.

•	With greyscale images, the upper half displays evenly spaced values of grey, from black to white.

The lower half displays the ten colors or grey values you have used most recently that are not contained in the upper half. After you have selected more than ten colors or greys, each new color replaces the earliest color selected.

The current foreground and background solid colors are displayed at the lower left of the dialog box.

To select one of the colors, click it. The dialog box closes, and the color appears in the appropriate box.

Click the Other button to open the Color dialog box or Select Color from Palette dialog box.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Select Color from Palette Dialog Box


Using the Select Color from Palette Dialog Box

When you are working with an image that contains 256 or fewer colors, and you click the current foreground or background color box or a solid color in an Active Styles box, the Select Color from Palette dialog box opens. It displays the colors contained in the image.

To use the dialog box:

1	In the Sort Order drop-down box, choose a method for displaying the colors. You can sort them by palette order, by luminance (the lightness value), or by hue (color families).

2	Click the color you want to select. Its palette number, HSL or RGB value, and hexadecimal value appear at the bottom of the dialog box.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and replace the color. The new color appears in the appropriate color box.


Creating a Selection

When you create a selection, you temporarily isolate part of an image so that you can edit it without affecting the rest of the image. You can move a selection, copy it, paint it, and apply special effects to it.

The selected area is surrounded by a border of black and white dashes called a marquee. The marquee defines the area of a selection, but is not restricted to it. You can move the marquee and the selection it encloses or move the marquee by itself. When you move only the marquee, the new area it surrounds becomes the new selection. The area no longer surrounded by the marquee is deselected.

Selecting a vector object and floating it transforms it into a raster selection. You cannot defloat this selection back to its original vector layer because vector layers cannot contain raster information. When you defloat the selection, Paint Shop Pro places it on the nearest raster layer.

Selection Tools

You can create a selection by enclosing an area of the image, by selecting specific colors, or by pasting the contents of the clipboard as a selection. Paint Shop Pro provides three tools for creating selections:

•	The Selection tool, which makes a selection of a specific shape,

•	The Freehand tool, which makes a selection of an irregular shape, and

•	The Magic Wand tool, which makes a selection of a range of color, hue, or brightness.

Creating a Selection

To create a selection:

1	Activate a selection tool by clicking its button on the Tool palette.

2	Select its options on the Tool Options palette.

3	Create the selection in the image.

•	Note: You can create text as a selection. For information on creating text, please see Adding Text..

Related Topics

 Using the Selection Tool

 Using the Freehand Tool

 Using the Magic Wand Tool


Selection Tool
 Using the Selection Tool

Use the Selection tool to create a selection in a specific shape.

Selection Tool Options

The first tab of the Tool Options palette displays the options for the Selection tool.

Selection Type

Choose one of the selection shapes from this drop-down box. Your choice determines the shape of the selection.

Feathering

Feathering controls the sharpness of a selection’s edges. By fading a set width (in pixels) along the edges, it produces a smooth transition between a selection and the surrounding area. The feathering value is the width of the transition area in pixels. A higher feathering value creates softer edges by feathering more pixels. Feathering is useful when pasting a selection. The fading helps the selection blend into the background and appear more natural.

Antialias

Antialiasing is similar to feathering, but more precise. It produces a smooth-edged selection by partially filling in pixels along the edge, making them semi-transparent. If antialiasing is not applied, the edges of a selection can appear jagged. Antialiasing is useful when combining images and when working with text.

Making a Selection

To make a selection:

1	Click the Selection button [image] on the Tool palette.

2	Place the mouse on the image at one of two places:

•	To create a rectangular, square, or rounded rectangular or square selection, place the cursor at a corner of the area you want to select.

•	To create a circular or elliptical selection, place the cursor at the center of the area you want to select.

•	To create a selection using the other shapes, place the cursor at a point that would form the corner of an imaginary rectangle enclosing the shape.

3	Click and drag the mouse until the selection is the size you want. As the mouse moves, a line appears to indicate the border of the selection.

4	Release the mouse button. The selection border becomes a marquee.

Related Topics

 Cropping to a Selection

 Modifying a Selection


Making Freehand Selections
 Using the Freehand Tool

The Freehand tool makes selections with three types of borders:

•	Irregularly shaped borders

•	Point-to-point straight borders

•	Borders between areas of contrasting colors or amount of light

Freehand Tool Options

The first tab of the Tool Options palette displays the options for the Freehand tool.

Selection Type

Choose one of the three selection shapes from this drop-down box.

Feathering

Feathering controls the sharpness of a selection’s edges. By fading a set width (in pixels) along the edges, it produces a smooth transition between a selection and the surrounding area. The feathering value is the width of the transition area in pixels. A higher feathering value creates softer edges by feathering more pixels. Feathering is useful when pasting a selection. The fading helps the selection blend into the background and appear more natural.

Antialias

Antialiasing is similar to feathering, but more precise. It produces a smooth-edged selection by partially filling in pixels along the edge, making them semi-transparent. If antialiasing is not applied, the edges of a selection can appear jagged. Antialiasing is useful when combining images and when working with text.

Making a Freehand Selection

Use the Freehand selection mode to draw the outline of the selection.

To make a Freehand selection:

1	Click the Freehand button [image] on the Tool palette.

2	On the Tool Options palette, choose Freehand as the Selection Type and set the options.

3	Move the cursor over the image.

4	Click the image at a point that you want to become the border of the selection.

5	Drag the cursor to create an outline of the area you want to select. IMPORTANT: Do not release the mouse while creating your selection.

6	If you release the mouse, start again, add to the selection using the <Shift> key, or remove part of the selection using the <Ctrl> key.

7	When the line encloses the selection, release the mouse. The line becomes a marquee indicating the border of the selection.

Related Topics

 Modifying a Selection

 Making Point to Point Selections

 Making Smart Edge Selections


Making Point-to-Point Selections
 Creating a Point to Point Selection

The Point to Point Selection tool encloses an area using a series of straight lines.

Feathering

Feathering controls the sharpness of a selection’s edges. By fading a set width (in pixels) along the edges, it produces a smooth transition between a selection and the surrounding area. The feathering value is the width of the transition area in pixels. A higher feathering value creates softer edges by feathering more pixels. Feathering is useful when pasting a selection. The fading helps the selection blend into the background and appear more natural.

Antialias

Antialiasing is similar to feathering, but more precise. It produces a smooth-edged selection by partially filling in pixels along the edge, making them semi-transparent. If antialiasing is not applied, the edges of a selection can appear jagged. Antialiasing is useful when combining images and when working with text.

Making a Point to Point Selection

To make a Point to Point selection:

1	Click the Freehand button [image] on the Tool palette.

2	On the Tool Options palette, select Point to Point as the Selection Type and set the options.

3	Click the cursor on the point in the image where you want to begin the line. As the mouse moves, a straight line connects it to the starting point.

4	Click the image wherever you want to anchor the line and change its direction.

5	To delete an anchor point from the line, press <Delete> as you move to the next point.

6	When the line encloses the selected area and has connected to the starting point, either double-click or right-click the point. The line becomes a marquee to indicate that the selection is complete.

Related Topics

 Modifying a Selection

 Making Freehand Selections

 Making Smart Edge Selections


Making Smart Edge Selections
 Making a Smart Edge Selection

Use the Smart Edge Selection tool to select the border between two areas of contrasting color or light.

Feathering

Feathering controls the sharpness of a selection’s edges. By fading a set width (in pixels) along the edges, it produces a smooth transition between a selection and the surrounding area. The feathering value is the width of the transition area in pixels. A higher feathering value creates softer edges by feathering more pixels. Feathering is useful when pasting a selection. The fading helps the selection blend into the background and appear more natural.

Antialias

Antialiasing is similar to feathering, but more precise. It produces a smooth-edged selection by partially filling in pixels along the edge, making them semi-transparent. If antialiasing is not applied, the edges of a selection can appear jagged. Antialiasing is useful when combining images and when working with text.

Sample Merged

When selected, the Smart Edge tool makes the selection from all layers of the image within the selected area. When the option is not selected, the Smart Edge tool limits the selection to the active layer.

Making a Smart Edge Selection

To make a Smart Edge selection:

1	Click the Freehand button [image] on the Tool palette.

2	On the Tool Options palette, select Smart Edge as the Selection Type and set the options.

3	Move the cursor over the image.

4	Click where you want to start the selection, and then move the mouse. As you move it, a selection box encloses the edge.

5	Click the image as needed to keep the edge inside the selection box. Each time you click, the box shrinks into a line that follows the edge.

6	To remove the previous click point, press the <Delete> key as you move to the next click point.

7	When you have completed the selection, double-click or right-click the mouse. The line becomes a marquee indicating the border of the selection.

•	Note: If the border crosses over itself, everything within the border is selected.

Related Topics

 Modifying a Selection

 Making Point to Point Selections

 Making Freehand Selections


Making Magic Wand Selections
 Making a Magic Wand Selection

Unlike the other two selection tools, the Magic Wand tool works by selecting content rather than defining edges.

It uses four types of values for making selections:

•	RGB Value

•	Hue

•	Brightness

•	All Opaque

•	Opacity

Magic Wand Tool Options

Match Mode

Makes a selection based on one of the four values:

•	With RGB Value, it selects pixels based on the amount of Red, Green, and Blue they contain.

•	With Hue, it selects pixels based on the position in the color wheel of the hues.

•	With Brightness, it selects pixels based on the amount of white they contain.

•	With All Opaque (called All Pixels in previous versions of Paint Shop Pro), it selects only areas containing pixels. No transparent areas are selected.

•	With Opacity, it selects pixels based on the opacity of the current pixel vs. the others.

Tolerance

Controls how similar to the selected mode the value of a pixel must be before it is selected. At low settings, the values must be close. At higher settings the tolerance is greater, so the Magic Wand chooses more pixels.

Feathering

Feathering controls the sharpness of a selection’s edges. By fading a set width (in pixels) along the edges, it produces a smooth transition between a selection and the surrounding area. The feathering value is the width of the transition area in pixels. A higher feathering value creates softer edges by feathering more pixels. Feathering is useful when pasting a selection. The fading helps the selection blend into the background and appear more natural.

Sample Merged

When selected, the Magic Wand tool makes the selection from all layers of the image within the selected area. When the option is not selected, the Magic Wand tool limits the selection to the active layer.

Setting the Options

After you click the Magic Wand button [image] on the Tool palette, set its options on the Tool Options palette:

1	Choose a selection mode from the Match Mode box. The choices are RGB, Hue, Brightness, All Opaque, and Opacity.

2	Choose a Tolerance factor.

3	To feather the selection, set a width in the Feather box. The width can be from 0 to 20 pixels. Set the width to 0 to create a selection with no feathering.

4	To create a selection using the entire image and not limit the action to the current layer, select the Sample Merged check box.

Creating a Magic Wand Selection

To make a Magic Wand selection:

1	Move the cursor over the image.

2	Click the color you want to select.

3	Release the mouse button. A marquee surrounds the selection.

Related Topic

 Modifying a Selection


Creating a Selection from a Mask

Creating a selection from a mask selects all non-masked (white) areas and omits all masked (non-white) areas.

To make a selection from a mask:

1	Select the layer that contains the mask.

2	Choose Selections > From Mask or press <Shift> + <Ctrl> + <S>.

•	Note: You can also load any mask that you have saved to an alpha channel as a selection by choosing Selections > Load from Alpha Channel.

Related Topics

 Creating a Mask

 Loading a Selection from an Alpha Channel


 Selecting the Entire Image

To select the entire image, do one of the following:

•	Choose Selections > Select All,

•	Press <Ctrl> + <A>, or

•	Click the optional Select All button [image] on the toolbar.

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Editing a Selection
Modifying a Selection

Paint Shop Pro contains several commands for modifying selections. Click a topic listed below for help:

 Inverting a Selection

 Increasing the Selection Size

 Decreasing the Selection Size

 Modifying Selection Edges

 Feathering a Selection

 Removing a Color from a Selection


 Inverting a Selection

At times, the easiest way to isolate an area is to select the part of the image you don’t want and then reverse the selection. For example, if you have an image where the background is one color and the foreground contains several colors, you can select the background and then invert the selection.

To invert a selection:

1	Make your selection using any method.

2	Do one of the following:

•	Choose Selections > Invert,

•	Press <Shift> + <Ctrl> + <I>, or

•	Click the optional Invert button [image] on the toolbar.

The marquee changes so that it encloses the opposite area of the image.

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Adding to a Selection

You can increase the size of a selection by using a selection tool or by choosing the Expand, Grow Selection, or Select Similar command from the Selection menu’s Modify submenu.

Using the Selection Tools

To add to a selection using the Selection and Freehand tools, press and hold down the <Shift> key while outlining the area you want to add.

Original Selection

Adding to the Selection

New, Larger Selection

To add to a selection using the Magic Wand tool, press and hold down the <Shift> key while clicking the area you want to add.

Using the Expand Command

Use the Expand command to enlarge the selection by a specific number of pixels around its edge. The selection increases in size while retaining its original shape.

To expand a selection:

1	Choose Selections > Modify > Expand. The Expand Selection dialog box opens.

2	Select the number of pixels by which you want to expand the selection. You can select up to 100 pixels.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and expand the selection.

Using the Grow Selection Command

The Grow Selection command expands the selection to include adjacent areas of similar color using the Magic Wand tolerance setting. To select non-adjacent areas, use the Select Similar command.

•	Note: The Grow command can only be applied to a 24-bit color or a greyscale image. If necessary, increase the color depth of the image before using this command.

To use the command:

1	On the Tool Options palette, select a Tolerance level.

2	Choose Selections > Modify > Grow Selection.

Using the Select Similar Command

The Select Similar command selects all areas in the image containing the same colors as the current selection. It uses the Magic Wand tolerance settings. The areas do not have to be adjacent to the current selection. To select only the adjacent areas, use the Grow Selection command.

•	Note: The Select Similar command can only be applied to a 24-bit color or a greyscale image. If necessary, increase the color depth of the image before using this command.

To use the command:

1	On the Tool Options palette, select a Tolerance level.

2	Choose Selections > Modify > Select Similar.

Related Topic

 Increasing Color Depth


Subtracting from a Selection

You can decrease the size of a selection by using the selection tools or by choosing the Contract command from the Selection menu’s Modify submenu.

Using the Selection Tools

To remove an area from a selection using the Selection and Freehand tools, press and hold down the <Ctrl> key while outlining the area you want to remove.

To remove an area from a selection using the Magic Wand tool, press and hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking the area you want to remove.

Using the Contract Command

Use the Contract command to reduce the selection by a specific number of pixels around its edge. The selection decreases in size while retaining its original shape.

To contract a selection:

1	Choose Selections > Modify > Contract. The Contract Selection dialog box opens.

2	Select the number of pixels by which you want to contract the selection. You can select up to 100 pixels.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and contract the selection.


 Hiding and Viewing the Marquee

By default, the marquee is visible. However, as you work with selections, there will be times when you want to hide the marquee. For example, you may want see the results of pasting a selection or feathering a selection’s edges.

•	Note: Hiding the marquee does NOT deselect the selection; it merely hides it from view.

To hide the marquee, do one of the following:

•	Choose Selections > Hide Marquee,

•	Press <Shift> + <Ctrl> + <M>, or

•	Click the optional Hide Marquee button [image] on the toolbar.

The Hide Marquee icon in the Selections menu appears pressed in.

To view the marquee again:

•	Choose Selections > Hide Marquee,

•	Press <Shift> + <Ctrl> + <M>, or

•	Click the Hide Marquee button [image] on the toolbar.

The Hide Marquee icon in the Selections menu no longer appears pressed in.

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Moving a Selection

To move a selection, drag it with the tool that you used to create it. When moving a selection, you can:

•	Cut the original selection from its position and move it, or

•	Copy the selection and move the copy, leaving the original intact.

Cutting and Moving

To move a selection by cutting it from the layer, either drag the selection with the selection tool or press and hold the <Shift> key while using the keyboard Arrow keys.

When you move the selection, it changes to a floating selection. The area from which the selection has been cut becomes transparent (or becomes the background color if it is the background layer). You can then drag the selection or move it pixel by pixel.

Copying and Moving

To create a copy of a selection and move it while leaving the original intact, press and hold the <Alt> key while dragging the selection with the selection tool or press and hold both the <Alt> and <Ctrl> keys while pressing the keyboard Arrow keys.

When you move the selection, it changes to a floating selection. You can then drag the selection or move it pixel by pixel.

Moving Pixel by Pixel

Moving the Selection

To move the selection one pixel at a time, press and hold the <Shift> key while using the keyboard arrows. When you move the selection, it changes to a floating selection. <Shift> + <↑> moves the selection up, <Shift> + <↓> moves the selection down, <Shift> + <←> moves the selection to the left, and <Shift> + <→> moves the selection to the right. Cutting the selection leaves a transparent area.

Moving a Copy of the Selection

To create a copy of the selection and move it one pixel at a time while leaving the original intact, press and hold both the <Alt> and <Ctrl> keys while using the keyboard arrows as described above in Moving the Selection.

Related Topic

 Moving the Marquee


Moving a Marquee

You can use the Mover tool to drag a marquee within the image. The new area it encloses becomes the new selection.

To move the marquee:

1	On the Tool palette, click the Mover tool [image].

2	Right-click anywhere inside or on the marquee.

3	Drag to move the marquee.

4	Release the mouse button to drop the marquee in its new location.

•	Notes: Before moving the marquee, you must click the Mover tool.
If you right-click the image with a selection tool, you deselect the selected area; if you click and drag with the selection tool, you move the selection.

Related Topic

 Moving the Selection


Selection Modes

There are two selection modes:

•	Floating

•	Standard

Floating Selections

A floating selection temporarily rests above the image or layer. You can move or modify it without changing the original image. The Layer palette displays a Floating Selection button when you float a selection. Floating a selection on a Vector layer turns the selection into raster data. The selection cannot be defloated to the Vector layer.

To float a selection, do one of the following:

•	Choose Selections > Float,

•	Press <Ctrl> + <F>, or

•	Click the optional Float button [image] on the toolbar.

The following actions also create or convert a selection to the floating mode:

•	Pressing <Alt> while dragging a selection with a selection tool,

•	Selecting the Floating option when creating text, and

•	Pasting a selection by choosing Edit > Paste > As New Selection.

Standard Selections

A standard selection is embedded in an image or layer. When you move or edit a standard selection, you modify the original image.

To change a selection from the floating to standard mode, do one of the following:

•	Choose Selections > Defloat,

•	Press <Shift> + <Ctrl> + <F>, or

•	Click the optional Defloat button [image] on the toolbar.

Paint Shop Pro pastes the selection’s contents into the layer. The selection is still active; it has been defloated, not deselected.

You cannot defloat a selection to a Vector layer. If you choose the Defloat command when a selection is floating over a Vector layer, Paint Shop Pro displays a prompt asking if you would like it to defloat the selection to the next lower Raster (or Adjustment) layer.

The following actions also create or convert a selection to standard mode:

•	Creating a new selection (except when you have selected the Floating option),

•	Choosing the Selection options when creating text, and

•	Adding an area to or removing an area from a floating selection.

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Modifying Selection Edges

When you move a selection, some of the pixels surrounding the border are included, especially when you choose the Antialias or Feather option. To remove these pixels and clean up the border, use the Defringe and Matting functions. If the selection has a colored background, use the Defringe command; if it has a black or white background, use the Remove Matte command.

•	Notes: You must float a selection before applying the Defringe and Matting commands.

Using the Remove Black Matte and White Matte Functions

When you copy (or cut) and paste an antialiased or feathered selection from a white or black to a colored background, the edges contain black and white pixels. The Remove White Matte command removes the white from the edges; the Remove Black Matte command removes the black pixels.

To remove the black or white pixels:

1	If necessary, float the selection by choosing Selections > Float.

2	Choose one of the following:

•	Selections > Matting > Remove Black Matte to remove the black pixels.

•	Selections > Matting > Remove White Matte to remove the white pixels.

Using the Defringe Function

Use the Defringe function to remove pixels from the edges of a selection with a colored background. The function works by bleeding non-feathered pixels in the selection outward and over the feathered part of the selection.

To defringe a selection, use the Defringe dialog box. Choose Selections > Matting > Defringe to open the dialog box.

 Using the Defringe Dialog Box


Defringe Dialog Box

Use the Defringe function to remove the pixels from a selection with a colored background. The function bleeds non-feathered pixels in the selection outward and over the feathered part of the selection.

•	Notes: You must float a selection before applying the Defringe command.
Float the selection by choosing Selections > Float.

To defringe a selection:

1	Choose Selections > Matting > Defringe to open the Defringe dialog box.

2	Enter the width in pixels of the area to defringe.

3	Click OK. Paint Shop Pro closes the dialog box and applies the command.

Related Topics

 Floating a Selection

 Remove Matte Commands


Using the Contract, Expand, and Feather Dialog Boxes
Using the Contract, Expand, and Feather Selection Dialog Boxes

Using the Contract and Expand Selection Dialog Boxes

The Contract and Expand commands increase and decrease the size of the selection on each side by the number of pixels entered. The shape remains the same. For example, if you have a rectangular selection measuring 35 by 70 pixels and contract it by 5 pixels, the resulting selection will measure 25 by 60 pixels.

To use the dialog boxes:

1	Type or use the spin controls to select the number of pixels by which you want to contract or expand the selection. You can select up to 100 pixels.

2	Click OK to close the dialog box and modify the selection.

Using the Feather Selection Dialog Box

Feathering controls the sharpness of the selection's edges. By fading a set width along the edges, feathering produces a smooth transition between a selection and the surrounding area. The feathering value you enter is the width in pixels of the transition area. A higher feathering value creates softer edges by feathering more pixels.

To use the dialog box, enter a width in pixels, and then click OK.


Feathering a Selection

Feathering controls the sharpness of a selection's edges. By fading a set width along the edges, feathering produces a smooth transition between a selection and the surrounding area. The feathering value you enter is the width in pixels of the transition area. A higher feathering value creates softer edges by feathering more pixels.

When pasting a selection, use feathering to help the selection blend into the background and appear more natural.

You can feather the edges of a selection before or after you create a selection:

•	To feather as you create the selection, enter a pixel width in the Feather box on the Tool Options palette.

•	To feather after you have created the selection, choose Selections > Modify > Feather to open the Feather Selection dialog box. Enter a width in pixels, and then click OK.

•	Notes: Be sure to feather a selection before you apply any editing changes.
Feathering produces a loss of detail. To smooth the edges of a selection without losing detail, select the Antialias check box on the Tool Options palette before creating the selection.


Making a Color Transparent
Removing a Color from a Selection

You can remove areas of a specific color from a selection in two ways:

•	Using the Magic Wand tool while pressing <Ctrl>, or

•	Choosing the Selections > Modify > Transparent Color command.

The Transparent Color command removes areas of a specific color from a selection. You can remove the following colors: white, black, red, green, blue, plus the foreground or the background color. When you choose Foreground or Background, Paint Shop Pro uses the appropriate color displayed in the Foreground and Background Solid Color boxes on the Color palette. To remove a custom color, select it as the foreground or the background solid color before opening the Remove Selected Color dialog box.

To open the dialog box, choose Selections > Modify > Transparent Color or press <Ctrl> + <T>.

 Using the Remove Selected Color Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Selecting Foreground and Background Colors


Using the Remove Selected Color Dialog Box

Use the Remove Selected Color dialog box to remove areas of a specific color from a selection. To remove a color other than white, black, red, green, or blue, select it as the foreground or background solid color before opening the dialog box.

To use the Remove Selected Color dialog box:

1	From the Transparent Color box, select the color you want to remove.

2	Enter a tolerance value. The tolerance controls how closely a color must match the selected color for it to be removed. A high tolerance includes more colors.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and remove the area of color from the selection.

Related Topic

 Selecting Foreground and Background Solid Colors


Saving a Selection to an Alpha Channel

You can save a selection to a disk or an alpha channel. When you save it to an alpha channel, Paint Shop Pro stores the selection within the image.

A channel contains information about the color elements in an image; for example, a RGB image contains a red channel, a green channel, and a blue channel. An alpha channel is a channel that saves information on a mask or selection you create. When you save a selection as an alpha channel, you save it as a greyscale bitmap within the image.

•	Notes: Both selections and masks can be saved to alpha channels, and each can be loaded as the other.
An advantage of the PSP format is that its files store alpha channels within the images. TIFF and TGA files can store one alpha channel; almost all the others will not store any.

Use the Save to Alpha dialog box to save a selection to an alpha channel. To open the dialog box, choose Selections > Save To Alpha Channel. This command is available only when the image contains a selection.

Using the Save to Alpha Dialog Box

1	When the dialog box opens, the filename of the image appears in the Available Documents box, and the selection is displayed in the Preview box.

2	In the Available Alpha list, double-click New Channel, or highlight New Channel and click OK. The New Channel dialog box opens.

3	Type a name for the new selection.

4	Click OK. Paint Shop Pro saves the selection to the alpha channel and closes both dialog boxes.

Related Topics

 Loading a Selection from an Alpha Channel

 Saving a Selection to a Disk

 Deleting a Selection from an Alpha Channel


Saving a Selection to the Hard Drive
Saving a Selection to the Hard Disk

You can save a selection to an alpha channel or a disk. When you save a selection to a disk, the selection is saved in its own SEL format file. You can then load this selection to other images without opening the original image. If you save a selection to an image’s alpha channel, the image must be open or minimized in the Paint Shop Pro workspace before you can load the selection.

Use the Paint Shop Pro Save Selection dialog box to save a selection to your hard disk or any other disk connected to your computer. To open this dialog box, choose Selections > Save To Disk.

Using the Paint Shop Pro Selection Dialog Box

1	Use the Save in drop-down box to navigate to the folder in which you want to save your selection.

2	In the File name box, type a name for the selection. The Save as type box automatically displays the Paint Shop Pro Selection format.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and save the selection.

Related Topics

 Loading a Selection from a Disk

 Saving a Selection to an Alpha Channel


Loading a Selection from an Alpha Channel

Because both selections and masks can be saved to alpha channels, you can load a mask as a selection or a selection as a mask. You can load a selection from any image either open or minimized in the workspace.

•	Note: Before loading a selection to a multi-layered image, make active the layer in which you want to place the selection.

Use the Load from Alpha dialog box to load a selection from an alpha channel. To open this dialog box, choose Selections > Load from Alpha Channel.

Using the Load from Alpha Dialog Box

1	To load a selection from the active image, leave its filename in the Available Documents box. To load a selection from another image, highlight its filename.

2	In the Available Alpha list, click the selection or mask you want to load. The Preview box displays your choice. You can view any selection or mask by clicking its name. You can also open any selection by double-clicking its name.

3	After you have chosen a selection, click OK. The dialog box closes, and the selection appears in the image.

Related Topics

 Saving a Selection to an Alpha Channel

 Loading a Selection from a Disk

 Deleting a Selection from an Alpha Channel


Loading a Selection from the Hard Drive
Loading a Selection from the Hard Disk

Use the Load Selection Area dialog box to load a selection from your hard disk or any other disk connected to your computer.

•	Note: Before loading a selection to a multi-layered image, make active the layer in which you want to place the selection.

To open the Load Selection Area dialog box, choose Selections > Load from Disk.

Using the Load Selection Area Dialog Box

1	Navigate to the folder containing the selection you want to load. Selections are saved in the SEL format, which Paint Shop Pro automatically displays in the Files of type box.

2	Click the file to highlight it.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and load the selection.

Related Topics

 Saving a Selection to a Disk

 Loading a Selection from an Alpha Channel


Promoting to a Layer
 Converting to a Layer

In 24-bit color and greyscale images, you can promote a floating or standard selection into a layer. When you promote a selection, Paint Shop Pro copies and pastes it in its own layer above the original selection. The selection’s button on the Layer palette changes to read Promoted Selection. The original selection is not affected.

On the new layer, any area not containing the selection is transparent, and this layer is referred to as containing a transparency.

To convert a selection to a layer, choose Selections > Promote to Layer, press <Shift> + <Ctrl> + <P>, or click the optional Promote Selection button [image] on the toolbar.

•	Notes: To convert a selection to layer, the selection’s image must be a 24-bit color or a greyscale image.
To paste a selection as a layer in another image, use the Paste as New Layer command.

Related Topics

 Paste as New Layer Command

 Creating a Selection

 Increasing Color Depth

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Converting to a Seamless Pattern

You can convert any standard or floating selection in a 24-bit color or a greyscale image into a seamless pattern, which, when tiled, looks like a single, large texture. These patterns can be used with the Flood Fill tool or as backgrounds for your web page. A seamless pattern is always rectangular or square. When you convert an irregularly shaped selection into a seamless pattern, Paint Shop Pro takes the largest dimensions for creating the pattern.

When creating a seamless pattern, Paint Shop Pro uses the area surrounding the selection to eliminate the appearance of seams. If the selection is too close the edge of the image, Paint Shop Pro does not have enough data to create the pattern. The program displays a message telling you to move the selection. Either drag the marquee or create a new selection closer to the center of the image, and choose the command again. Paint Shop Pro creates a new image containing the seamless pattern and leaves the original image untouched.

To create a seamless pattern, choose Selections > Convert to Seamless Pattern.

Paint Shop Pro also contains a Pattern Effect among the Image menu’s Effects commands. Use it when you want more control in creating patterns.

•	Note: To convert a selection to a seamless pattern, the selection’s image must be a 24-bit color or a greyscale image.

Related Topics

 Creating a Pattern Effect

 Creating a Selection

 Using the Flood Fill Tool

 Increasing Color Depth


 Deselecting a Selection

The Deselect command removes the marquee and border from a selection and integrates the area back into the image. If the selection is in the floating mode, Paint Shop Pro defloats it and integrates it into the underlying layer.

To deselect a selection, you can either of the following methods:

•	Choose Selections > Select None,

•	Click the optional Select None button [image] on the toolbar, or

•	Right-click the image.

Related Topics

 Floating and Standard Selections

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Clearing a Selection
Deleting a Selection

The Clear command affects a floating and standard selection differently. With a floating selection, the Clear command deletes the selection and its marquee.

With a non-floating raster selection, the command deletes the contents of the selection while leaving the area selected. On a layer, the cleared selection area becomes transparent. With a vector selection, the command deletes the selected object.

If there is no selection on a raster or vector layer, the command deletes the contents of the layer, but not the actual layer. On a background layer or an 8-bit or lower image, the cleared selection area changes to the background color.

Clearing a Selection

To clear a selection, you can either:

•	Choose Edit > Clear, or

•	Press <Del>.

Related Topics

 Deleting a Selection from an Alpha Channel

 Floating and Standard Selections


Deleting a Selection from an Alpha Channel

Deleting a selection from the alpha channel and deleting a selection from a layer are two separate functions. Deleting a selection from the layer or image does not delete it from the alpha channel. To delete a selection from the alpha channel, you can use either the Load from Alpha dialog box or the Save to Alpha dialog box.

To open the dialog box, choose either Selections > Load From Alpha Channel or Selections > Save to Alpha Channel.

Deleting a Selection from the Alpha Channel

To delete a selection from an alpha channel:

1	From the Available Documents list, select the name of the image containing the selection you want to delete.

2	In the Available Alpha list, highlight the selection. The preview displays the selection.

3	Click the Delete button.

4	At the prompt message, click the Yes button. Paint Shop Pro deletes the selection.

5	Click OK to close the dialog box.


 Using the Mover Tool

Use the Mover Tool to move a selection marquee or a layer.

To move a selection marquee, click the Mover button [image] on the Tool palette, right-click on or inside the marquee, and drag with the mouse.

To move a layer, click the Mover button on the Tool palette, left-click any part of a layer containing data, and drag with the mouse.


Saving a Selection

There are two ways to save a selection:

•	To an alpha channel, where the selection is saved as a greyscale bitmap within the image
 Saving a Selection to an Alpha Channel

•	To a hard drive or other disk, where the selection is saved in its own ".sel" format file
 Saving a Selection to a Disk


Load Selection 2 ways
Loading a Selection

After you save a selection to an alpha channel or disk, you can load it back into the image. You can also load a mask from an alpha channel as a selection.

 Loading a Selection from an Alpha Channel

 Loading a Selection from a Disk


Introduction to Layers

You can create three types of layers in Paint Shop Pro: raster layers, vector layers, and adjustment layers. Raster layers contain pixel-based information. Vector layers contain instruction data for drawing vector lines, shapes, and text. Unlike raster layers, vector layers can be added to images of any color depth. Adjustment layers contain color correction information; use them to change the appearance of the underlying layers.

A newly created Paint Shop Pro image consists of one raster layer, the background layer. This is analogous to the canvas of a painting; every image must have at least one layer. Paint Shop Pro supports up to 100 layers per image. The actual number of layers you can create may be further limited by the amount of memory in your computer.

The layer you are editing is called the current (active) layer. As you work with images containing multiple layers, be sure the appropriate layer is current before you apply commands.

Paint Shop Pro provides the Layer palette, the Layer Properties dialog box, and various commands in the Layers menu for working with layers. The Layer palette displays each layer, its order in the layer stack, its current properties, and for a vector layer, a button for each vector object you draw. The Layer Properties dialog box shows the settings for an individual layer, and it provides access to the adjustment layer settings. The Layers menu contains the general commands for creating, managing, and merging layers. It also lists the layers in the image.

Example of Layers in an Image

•	Note: An image must be a grey scale or 24-bit color image to contain more than one raster layer or an adjustment layer. To add these layers, increase an image’s color depth.

Related Topics

 Using the Layer Palette

 About the Layer Properties Dialog Box

 Increasing Color Depth

 Vector Layers Overview

 Adjustment Layers Overview

 Comparing Raster and Vector File Formats


Layer Properties Dialog Box
About the Layer Properties Dialog Box

The Layer Properties dialog box for raster and vector layers always contains the General and Blend Ranges tabs. For an adjustment layer, the dialog box does not contain the Blend Ranges tab. Instead, there is a tab that displays the settings for the type of adjustment.

At the bottom of the dialog box are the Proof and Auto Proof button that you can use to view changes to the original image before applying them. Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the settings.

The dialog box automatically opens when you create a new layer using one of the following methods:

•	Clicking the Create Layer button [image] on the Layer palette. This creates a raster layer.

•	Clicking the Create Raster Layer button [image] on the toolbar to create a raster layer.

•	Right-clicking the Create Layer button and choosing New Raster Layer, New Vector Layer, or New Adjustment Layer from the context menu. For an adjustment layer, choose one of the layer types.

•	Right-clicking a Layer button and choosing New Raster Layer, New Vector Layer, or New Adjustment Layer from the context menu. For an adjustment layer, choose one of the layer types.

•	Choosing Layers > New Raster Layer, Layers > New Vector Layer, or Layers > New Adjustment Layer. For an adjustment layer, choose one of the layer types.

General Tab

The General tab contains the “Layer” panel and the “Mask” panel. The options within them, except for the Layer Name, can also be controlled using the Layers palette. The default names for new raster and vector layers are "Layer1," "Layer2," etc. The default name for a new adjustment layer is the type of the adjustment. When you create a new layer, use a name that will allow you to recognize the layer contents easily.

For information on the options in these panels, view the individual topics on the following options:

General Tab Settings

Blend Mode	Layer Visibility
Opacity	Transparency Lock
Group	Mask Options
Blend Ranges Tab

This tab contains the “Blend Ranges” panel. When you select a Blend Mode from the Layer Properties dialog box or Layer palette, Paint Shop Pro applies the blend to all the pixels in the layers. Use the Blend Range controls to limit the pixels that the Blend mode affects. By setting opacity based on brightness or channel value, you can remove colors from the current layer and make other colors show through.

 Using the Layer Blend Ranges Tab

Adjustment Tab

The Adjustment tab contains the controls for the following adjustment layers: Levels, Curves, Brightness/Contrast, Color Balance, Hue/Saturation, Channel Mixer, Threshold, and Posterize. The contents of the tab depend on the type of adjustment layer you choose. Because there are no options for the Invert command, its tab is blank.

 Using the New Adjustment Layer Properties Box

Re-opening the Layer Properties Dialog Box

You can re-open the Layer Properties dialog box for a layer by doing one of the following:

•	Clicking its Layer button on the Layer palette and choosing Layers > Properties.

•	Right-clicking its Layer button on the Layer palette and choosing Properties from the context menu.

•	Double-clicking its Layer button on the Layer palette.

Related Topic

 Using the Layer Palette


 Using the Layer Palette

The Layer palette provides quick access to many of the commands and options in the Layers menu and Layer Properties dialog box.

The Layer palette contains two panes. Drag the divider to change to relative size of them. The left pane displays the Layer and Object buttons, the layer type icons, and the Layer Visibility buttons. It also shows if a layer is masked and if the Blend Range settings are used. The right pane displays the Appearance, Mask, and Group tabs. The settings on this pane apply to raster, vector, and adjustment layers, but not to vector objects.

If the palette is not visible, do one of the following to display it:

•	Press <L>.

•	Click the View/Hide Layer palette button [image] on the toolbar.

•	Right-click any palette or bar and choose Tool Palette from the context menu.

•	Choose View > Toolbars to open the Toolbars dialog box. In the Toolbars dialog box, select the Layer Palette check box, and then click OK.

About the Layer Palette Layer Buttons

Each layer in an image has a Layer button on the Layer palette that displays the layer’s name. To the left of the layer button, an icon indicates whether the layer is a raster layer [image], a vector layer [image], or an adjustment layer. Each type of adjustment layer has its own icon. When you add an object to a vector layer, a plus sign (+) appears next to its button [image] and a Vector Object button appears underneath it. A Text Object button displays the text you typed. Line Object and Shape Object buttons display the types of lines and shapes. Vector Object buttons are indicated by the [image] icon to the left of their button.

Note the following button properties:

•	When you click a Layer button to make its layer active, or current, it changes color (dark blue with the default system settings). When you click a Vector Object button, its text appears bolded.

•	When you add a layer, a Layer button corresponding to the new layer appears on the palette and in the Layers menu list; when you delete or merge a layer, its Layer button disappears.

•	When you right-click a Layer button, a context menu appears. It contains many of the same commands that you find in the Layers menu.

•	When you right-click a Vector Object button, a context menu containing many of the editing commands opens. Choose Properties to open the Vector Properties dialog box.

•	When you rest the cursor over a Layer button, a thumbnail image of that layer appears. When you rest it over a Vector Object button, a thumbnail of the object appears. Move the cursor to close the thumbnail.

•	When you click the plus (+) sign to the left of a Vector layer button, the palette displays a button for each vector object on the layer.

About the Layer Palette Tabs

There are three tabs that make up the right side of the Layer palette: Appearance, Mask, and Group. The Appearance tab [image] controls the opacity, blend mode, and transparency lock state of each layer. The Mask tab [image] controls the enable mask and link mask to layer options. The Group tab [image] controls the layer groups.

Related Topic

 About the Layer Properties Dialog Box


Creating a Layer

To create a new layer in an image, do one of the following:

•	Choose Layers > New Raster Layer, Layers > New Vector Layer, or Layers > New Adjustment Layer. For an adjustment layer, choose one of the layer types. The Layer Properties dialog box opens.

•	Click the Create Layer button [image] at the upper left of the Layer palette. The Layer Properties dialog box opens with default properties for raster layers. If the image is not a greyscale or 24-bit image, only a Vector layer can be created. Paint Shop Pro warns you and offers to create a vector layer. If you clear the “Show this next time” check box in the message, when you next use this method to create a layer in a paletted image (one that is not greyscale or 24-bit), Paint Shop Pro automatically creates a vector layer.

•	Right-click any Layer button on the Layer palette and choose New Raster Layer, New Vector Layer, or New Adjustment Layer. For an adjustment layer, choose one of the layer types. The Layer Properties dialog box opens.

•	Right-click the Create Layer button on the Layer palette and choose New Raster Layer, New Vector Layer, or New Adjustment Layer. For an adjustment layer, choose one of the layer types. The Layer Properties dialog box opens.

•	Press <Shift> while clicking the Create Layer button on the Layer palette. Paint Shop Pro creates a new raster layer. A new button appears on the Layer palette, bypassing the Layer Properties dialog box.

•	To create a new Raster layer, you can also click the optional Raster Layer button [image] on the toolbar.

•	Note: An image must be a grey scale or 24-bit color image to contain an adjustment layer or more than one raster layer. To add these layers, increase an image’s color depth.

Related Topics

 About the Layer Properties Dialog Box

 Using the Layer Palette

 Increasing Color Depth

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Promoting a Selection to a Layer

While you can promote both raster and vector selections to create new layers, a promoted selection always creates a raster layer. Any area of the new layer not containing the selection is transparent.

There are several ways to promote a selection to a layer within an image:

•	Promote a selection by choosing Selections > Promote to Layer.

•	Promote a floating selection by choosing Selections > Promote to Layer.

•	Promote a floating selection by right-clicking the Floating Selection button on the Layer palette and then choosing Promote to Layer from the context menu.

•	Promote a selection by cutting or copying it and then pressing <Ctrl>+<L>, choosing Edit > Paste > As New Layer., or clicking the optional Paste as New Layer button [image] on the toolbar.

•	Note: An image must be a grey scale or 24-bit color image to contain an adjustment layer or more than one raster layer. To add these layers, increase an image’s color depth.

Related Topics

 Using the Layer Palette

 Creating Selections

 Increasing Color Depth

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Duplicating a Layer

There are 4 ways to duplicate a layer:

•	Click its Layer button on the Layer palette, and then choose Layers > Duplicate from the Menu bar.

•	Right-click its Layer button, and then choose Duplicate from the context menu.

•	Drag its Layer button over the Create Layer button [image] at the upper left of the Layer palette.

•	Click its Layer button, choose Edit > Copy to copy the layer, and then choose Edit > Paste >As New Layer.

The duplicated layer is placed in the image above the original layer, and its Layer button appears on the Layer palette above the Layer button of the original layer.

•	Note: An image must be a grey scale or 24-bit color image to contain an adjustment layer or more than one raster layer. To add these layers, increase an image’s color depth.

Related Topics

 Using the Layer Palette

 Increasing Color Depth


Background vs. Background Layer

A background layer is not the same as a background.

When you create a new image and choose transparent as the background color, the new image contains a transparent layer floating above the background, which appears checkered. This transparent layer, which is always labeled “Layer 1,” can be moved in the layer stack. It is a layer, not a background. The background cannot be moved.

When you create a new image and choose a color other than transparent, the image consists of a Background layer in the selected color. A Background layer, like a background, cannot be moved within the stack. However, unlike a background, a Background layer can be promoted to a “regular” layer.

To promote a Background layer, use one of the following methods:

•	Right-click the Background button on the Layer palette and choose Promote to Layer from the context menu.

•	Open the Layer Properties dialog box. Notice that the dialog box is actually named Promote Layer and Edit Properties. Rename the layer and close the dialog box. You can now move it.

Related Topic

 About the Layer Properties Dialog Box


Moving a Layer within the Image

There are two ways to move a layer—vertically up and down within the stack, and horizontally across the image on the same level.

Moving a Layer Vertically

To move a layer up or down within the stack of layers, click its button on the Layer palette and then do one of the following:

•	Choose Layers > Arrange > Move Up or Move Down. Each time you choose the command, the layer moves up or down one level. Choose Layers > Arrange > Bring to Top to place the layer at the top; choose Layers > Arrange > Send to Bottom to place it at the bottom or just above the background layer, if there is one.

•	On the Layer palette, drag the Layer button up or down to a new position in the stack.

You must promote the Background layer to a “regular” layer before you can move it. To promote it, use the Layer Properties dialog box or the Layer palette context menu.

 Promoting a Background Layer

Moving a Layer Horizontally

You can move a layer anywhere in the image window by dragging it with the Mover tool [image]. Even if you move part of a layer off the canvas, Paint Shop Pro does not crop it. You can return it to the canvas in its original state.

The Mover tool finds the uppermost visible layer that contains data and moves that layer. To move the current (active) layer, use the Smart Mover tool.

 Using the Smart Mover Tool

Related Topic

 Background and Background Layer


Using the Smart Mover Tool

You can move a layer anywhere in the image window without cropping it, even off the canvas, by dragging it with the Mover tool [image].

The Mover tool does not automatically move the current (active) layer -- it moves the uppermost visible layer that contains data. When you click an image, if you click a transparent area of the top layer, the Mover tool ignores the layer and searches the other layers. When it reaches a layer containing non-transparent pixels, it selects this layer, makes it the current layer, and moves it.

If you want to move the current layer, you can turn the Mover tool into the Smart Mover tool by pressing and holding the <Shift> key while you click the image and drag the layer.


Viewing and Hiding a Layer

Viewing All Layers

To make all the layers in an image visible, do one of the following:

•	Click the Visibility buttons [image] on the palette until all the layers are visible. When a layer is invisible, its Visibility button displays a red “X” [image].

•	Choose Layers > View > All.

•	On the Layer palette, right-click a Layer button and choose View > All from the context menu.

Hiding All the Layers

To make all the layers in an image invisible, do one of the following:

•	Click the Visibility buttons [image] on the palette until all the layers are invisible. When a layer is invisible, its Visibility button displays a red “X” [image].

•	Choose Layers > View > None.

•	On the Layer palette, right-click a Layer button and choose View > None from the context menu.

Inverting Layer Visibility

To make all visible layers invisible and all invisible layers visible, do either of the following:

•	Choose Layers > View > Invert.

•	On the Layer palette, right-click a Layer button and choose View > Invert from the context menu.

Viewing Individual Layers

To view only a specific layer, do one of the following:

•	On the Layer palette, click a Layer button to select a layer, and choose Layers > View > Current Only.

•	Right-click the Layer button, and choose View > Current Only in the context menu.

•	Click the Visibility buttons on the palette until only that layer remains visible. You can use this method to make as many layers visible as you want.

•	Note: Making a layer current (active) automatically makes it visible, but a current layer without data appears transparent.

Related Topic

 Viewing and Hiding Layer Groups


Modifying the Edges of a Layer

When you promote or paste a selection to create a layer, some of the pixels surrounding the border are included, especially when it has been antialiased or feathered. Matting cleans up the border by removing these pixels.

•	Note: The Layer Matting and Defringe commands can only be applied to a grey scale or 24-bit color image.

Removing Black and White Matte

When you promote a selection that contains white or black at its edges into a layer, the edges of the layer now contain black and white pixels. If the promoted layer is above a colored layer, the white or black needs to be removed using the following method:

•	To remove the black matte, choose Layers > Matting > Remove Black Matte.

•	To remove the white matte, choose Layers > Matting > Remove White Matte.

Defringing a Layer

Defringing bleeds non-feathered pixels in the layer edges outward and over the "jaggies" in the feathered part of the selection. Use the Defringe command when the background of a layer is a color (not black or white).

To defringe a layer:

1	Choose Layers > Matting > Defringe. The Defringe dialog box opens.

2	Enter the pixel width you want to defringe.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box defringe the layer.


Protecting Transparent Areas

The Lock Transparency option restricts the editing of raster layers to the pixels that already contain data. You can select and edit the data on a protected layer, but you can not cover, deselect, or paste to any transparent area. This option does not apply to vector and adjustment layers, so their buttons are unavailable on the Layer palette.

By default, the Lock Transparency button [image] of a layer on the Layer palette displays a red “X” because this option is not active. Use either the Layer Properties dialog box or the Layer palette to activate this option on a layer.

To use the Layer Properties dialog box:

1	Open the Layer Properties dialog box for a layer by right-clicking the layer button and choosing Properties from the context menu, clicking its button and choosing Layers > Properties, or double-clicking its button.

2	Select the “Lock Transparency” check box.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box.

The red “X” on the Lock Transparency button for the layer disappears.

To use the Layer Palette:

1	Click the Appearance tab [image] of the Layer palette to bring it to the front.

2	Click the Lock Transparency button of the layer. The red “X” disappears [image].


Renaming a Layer

In an image containing several layers, you may find it convenient to rename the layers so that they are easier to identify on the Layer palette. You can rename all three types of layers using either the Layer palette or the Layer Properties dialog box. You can also rename vector objects using the Layer palette.

To rename a layer or a vector object using the Layer palette:

1	Right-click the Layer Name button and choose Rename from the context menu.

2	Type a Name on the Layer button.

3	Press the <Enter> key.

To rename a layer using the Layer Properties dialog box:

1	Open the Layer Properties dialog box for a layer by right-clicking the layer button and choosing Properties from the context menu, clicking the button and choosing Layers > Properties, or double-clicking the button.

2	Type a new name in the Name box.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box.

The Layer palette displays the new name on the layer button.

•	Note: If you right-click the Layer Name button of a vector object, the Vector Properties dialog box opens. You can rename the object in this dialog box.


Applying Effects, Deformations, and Filters
Applying Effects

You can apply effects to raster and adjustment layers, but not to vector layers. If an image contains a selection, the effect, deformation, or filter is applied to the selected area of the current (active) layer. When an image does not contain a selection, the effect is applied to the entire layer.

•	Note: Before choosing a command, be sure that the appropriate layer is the current layer.


Changing Layer Opacity

The Appearance tab [image] of the Layer palette displays the opacity bar [image] for each layer. The overall opacity of a layer and the opacity of its pixels are independent of each other. Changing a layer’s opacity changes the appearance of the pixels, but not their opacity values.

At an overall opacity of 100%, the default value, a layer is totally opaque and none of the underlying layer shows through. This is the default value for layers. As you drag the slider to the left to reduce the opacity, the underlying layer begins to appear. At 75% opacity, the image displays 75% of the upper layer and 25% of the underlying layer. At 0% opacity, the layer is transparent, and you see only the underlying layer.

To set the opacity of a layer, do one of the following:

•	Drag the Opacity slider [image] on the Layer palette, or

•	Enter a value for the Opacity in the Layer Properties dialog box.

Related Topic

 About the Layer Properties Dialog Box


Layer Blend Modes
About Layer Blend Modes

The layer blend modes are methods of combining the pixels of the current (active) Raster or Vector layer with the pixels of the underlying layers. You are not combining the layers permanently; you are previewing the way they will appear if combined. To combine layers permanently, you need to merge them.

The current layer whose blend mode you are changing is the Blend layer. The pixels of this layer are blended into the result of the combination of the pixels of all the underlying layers, not merely the layer directly underneath it. The blend mode for each layer is displayed on the Appearance tab [image] of the Layer palette.

Click a blend mode in the list below to learn more about it.

Layer Blend Modes

Normal	Dissolve
Darken	Overlay
Lighten	Hard Light
Hue	Soft Light
Saturation	Difference
Color	Dodge
Luminance	Burn
Multiply	Exclusion
Screen
Note: The Multiply, Screen, Difference, and Exclusion modes will produce the same results no matter which layer is on top. The Hue, Saturation, Color, and Luminance modes are available only with 24-bit images.

Related Topics

 Using the Layer Blend Ranges Tab

 Merging Layers


Using the Layer Blend Ranges Tab

When you select a blend mode from the Layer Properties dialog box or Layer palette, Paint Shop Pro applies the blend to all the pixels in the layers. To limit the effect of the blend to pixels with specific values, use the Blend Ranges tab of the Layer Properties dialog box.

By setting opacity based on brightness or channel value, you can drop colors from the current layer and make other colors show through.

To use the Blend Ranges feature:

1	On the Layer palette, select a layer and set its Blend mode.

2	Open the Layer Properties dialog box for the layer by right-clicking its button and choosing Properties.

3	Click the Blend Ranges tab to bring it to the front.

4	In the Blend Channel drop-down box, select which channel you want Paint Shop Pro to use for comparing the layers. Your choices are Grey, Red, Green, and Blue. When the Grey channel is selected, the lightness values of the layers determine opacity.

5	Set the opacity ramp for the channel. The upper arrows indicate the values at which the opacity will be 100%. The lower arrows indicate the values at which the opacity will be 0%. The values on the left side indicate the ramp up values, while the values on the right side indicate the ramp down values. In the example, the Blend layer’s opacity is 100% between lightness values of 83 and 213, and falls off at the darkest and lightest area. The Blend Opacity for the Underlying layer is 100% between lightness values of 47 and 216 and none at other values.

6	If you cleared the “Auto Proof” check box, click the Proof button to view the image with the new settings before applying them. If you left the check box selected, the image updates as you change the settings.

7	Click OK. Paint Shop Pro applies the blend only to the pixels that fall within the range.

Related Topics

 Using the Layer Palette

 Layer Blend Modes

 About the Layer Properties Dialog Box


Adding a Layer Mask

You can add a mask to a raster or vector layer, but not to an adjustment layer, in any 8-bit greyscale or 24-bit color image. When working with masks, you can use the Layer palette to create the mask, view a thumbnail of it, control its visibility on the layer, and link it to the layer. Use the commands in the Masks menu for other functions.

To create a mask:

1	On the Layer palette, click a layer button to make the layer current (active).

2	Click the Create Mask button [image] at the upper left of the palette. You have three options:

•	Left-click to create a mask in the “Hide All” mode.

•	Press <Shift> while left-clicking to create a mask in the “Show All” mode.

•	Right-click to open a context menu containing the same commands as the Mask > New submenu.

A mask icon [image] appears to the left of the Visibility button on the Layer palette. By default, the masked is linked to the layer. To view a thumbnail of the mask, move the cursor over the icon.

Related Topics

 Enabling a Layer Mask

 Linking the Mask and Layer

 Masks Overview


Enabling a Layer Mask

The Enable Layer Mask option controls whether a layer is viewed with or without its mask. When it is active, the layer mask determines the appearance of the layer. When the option is not active [image], the mask is hidden and has no effect on the layer’s appearance.

To control this option, do either of the following:

•	Click the Enable Layer Mask button [image] on the Masks tab of the Layer palette.

•	Select or clear the “Mask is enabled for this layer” check box in the Layer Properties dialog box.

Related Topics

 Linking the Mask and Layer

 Using the Layer Palette

 About the Layer Properties Dialog Box


Linking to a Mask
Linking and Unlinking a Layer and Mask

By default, the mask is linked to its layer, and the mask and layer move together within an image when you drag the layer. The Flip, Rotate, and Mirror commands also move the mask and layer as one unit.

When the option is not active [image], the layer and mask move independently. The Mask options are displayed on the Mask tab of the Layer palette.

To control this option, do either of the following:

•	Click the Link Mask [image] icon on the Mask tab of the Layer palette. When the layer and mask are not linked, the button has a red “X” over it.

•	Select or clear the “Mask is locked with layer” check box in the Layer Properties dialog box.

Related Topics

 Using the Layer Palette

 About the Layer Properties Dialog Box


Grouping Layers

The Layer Group option lets you place layers into a group. When you use the Mover tool to drag one layer in the group horizontally, the other layers in the group move with it. Moving a layer up and down within the stack does not move the other layers in the group, nor does dragging the Layer palette button to copy a layer to another image.

You can combine all types of layers into a group. When you click the Layer button of a layer that is part of a group, the Group tab displays a red dot [image].

To group layers in an image, click each layer’s Group button [image] on the Group tab [image] of the Layer palette. The button changes from “None” to a number [image]. All the layers having the same number on their Group buttons belong to a single group.

•	Each time you left-click a Group button, it changes to the next higher valid number.

•	Each time you right-click a Group button, it changes to the next lower valid number.

The number will cycle back to None when you have gone through all the valid group numbers.

You also create a Layer group when you use the Browser to copy a layered image to another image. Dragging a thumbnail from the Browser and releasing it over an image adds the layers to the image as a new group.

Related Topics

 Using the Layer Palette

 Viewing and Hiding Layer Groups


Copying Layers Between Images
Copying a Layer Between Images

To copy a layer into another image, do one of the following:

•	Click the Layer button of layer you want to copy and choose Edit > Copy. Place it into the second image by choosing Edit > Paste > As New Layer after making the second image active.

•	Drag a Layer button from the Layer palette of the first image and drop it into the second image.

•	Cut or copy a selection from the first image, make the second image active, and then choose Edit > Paste > As New Layer.

The new layer is placed above the current (active) layer of the second image. Its Layer button appears at a corresponding position on the Layer palette.

Related Topic

 Using the Layer Palette


Merging Layers

You can combine multiple layers together to create merged layers. The merged layer contains all of the data from the source layers and bases its appearance on their blend modes. All vector data in the source layers will be converted to raster data.

Merge layers in one of the following ways:

•	Merge all the layers to produce a flat image by choosing Layers > Merge > Merge All (Flatten) or right-clicking a layer in the Layer palette and choosing Merge > Merge All (Flatten) from the context menu.

•	Merge only the visible layers by choosing Layers > Merge > Merge Visible or right-clicking a layer in the Layer palette and choosing Merge > Merge Visible from the context menu. The hidden layers are not affected.


Saving a Layered Image

You can save images that contain raster and adjustment layers in either the PSP format or the PSD format of PhotoShop. Both formats retain all the layer information for these two types of layers. However, images containing vector layers must be saved in the PSP format to retain the vector information. When you save an image with vector layers in the PSD format, the vector layers are converted to raster layers.

Related Topic

 Saving an Image


Deleting a Layer

To delete a layer, choose Layers > Delete, or do one of the following on the Layer palette:

•	Right-click the Layer button and choose Delete from the context menu.

•	Click the Layer button, and then click the Delete Layer button [image] at the upper left of the palette. A message appears asking you to confirm this action. Click Yes.

•	Drag the Layer button to the Delete Layer button and release the mouse. A message appears asking you to confirm this action. Click Yes.

The deleted layer’s button disappears from the Layer palette.

Related Topic

 Using the Layer Palette


Layers Menu List

The bottom of the Layers menu displays a list of the layers in an image. You can make a layer current, or active, by clicking its name in the list. The current layer has a check mark next to its name.


Copying a Layer

You can duplicate a layer within the original image or copy to another image.

 Duplicating a Layer within an Image

 Copying a Layer to Another Image


Setting Blend Ranges


About Vector Layers and Objects

In Paint Shop Pro, you can work on two different types of layers: raster and vector. A raster layer is pixel-oriented, while a vector layer is object oriented. Raster images (and layers) display objects by combining units of colored light, called pixels. If you zoom in, you can see each pixel as a small square. When you move an object in a raster image (or layer), you move the pixels, which affects the entire image.

A vector layer does not use pixels for storing image information. Instead, it stores a vector object as a set of properties that describe its attributes, dimensions, and position in the image. Each time an image is opened, these properties are used as instructions for drawing the objects. Because the objects are independent elements, you can move them without affecting the rest of the image.

You can add vector layers to images of color depths that are too low to support raster layers. While only greyscale and 24-bit color images can contain multiple raster layers, images of any color depth can contain multiple vector layers. When you reduce the color depth of an image, Paint Shop Pro merges both raster and vector layers. You can then create new vector layers in this image, even if it does not support raster layers.

The Layer palette displays the vector icon [image] to the left of a vector layer button. When the layer contains vector objects, a plus sign [image] appears next to the icon. Click it to display the buttons of all the vector objects on the layer.

You cannot place vector objects on raster layers or raster objects on vector layers. If you try to create a vector object on a raster layer, Paint Shop Pro automatically creates a vector layer for you. If you are working on a vector layer, Paint Shop Pro merely adds the new object to the layer.

The Drawing [image], Preset Shape [image], and Text [image] tools can create both vector and raster objects. Use the tools as vector tools on vector layers and raster tools on raster layers. There is also a tool for editing vector objects called the Object Selector tool [image]. It cannot be activated unless a vector layer is current (active).

Related Topics

 Comparing Raster and Vector File Formats

 Introduction to Layers


Adding Text

Use the Text tool to create raster and vector text. Vector text, which can be moved, deformed, and edited after it is created, can only be placed on vector layers. If you create vector text while working on a raster layer, Paint Shop Pro places it on a new vector layer.

To position the text, click the point on the image where you want to place it. Clicking the image opens the Text Entry dialog box. To create text on an existing layer, click that layer’s button on the Layer palette.

You can create text in one of three modes:

•	As a raster selection on the current layer,

•	As a floating raster selection above the current layer, or

•	As a vector object on a vector layer.

Creating Text as a Selection

Text created as a selection appears on the current (active) layer as an empty, transparent selection. Use this method when creating raster text. You can then promote it to a layer, color it using a painting tool, or edit it as you would any other selection.

To add text to an existing selection, press the <Shift> key while clicking the image.

Creating Text as a Floating Selection

Text created as a floating selection appears above the current (active) layer. Although you cannot defloat it to a vector layer, you can create floating selection text along a path. Click a vector object and create the text as a floating selection. It follows the path of the object. When you defloat it, it merges into the raster layer below the vector layer. You can then delete the vector layer.

To add text to an existing floating selection, press the <Shift> key while clicking the image.

Creating Vector Text

Vector text can be created only on vector layers. If necessary, Paint Shop Pro creates a new vector layer. The text is a vector object that can be edited, deformed, and moved. Text is placed horizontally unless you have created it on a path. When created on a path, the text follows the path.

Opening the Text Entry Dialog Box

To open the Text Entry dialog box, click the Text tool button [image] on the toolbar or the Tool Options palette’s Tool Selection menu, and then click a point in the image. Click away from a vector object to create horizontal text. Click a vector object to place text on the object’s path.

 Using the Text Entry Dialog Box

 Text Tool Options Palette Tab 1

 Text Tool Options Palette Tab 2

Related Topic

 About Vector Layers and Objects

 Editing Text

 About Paths

 Creating Text on a Path

 Creating a Selection

 Floating and Defloating Selections


Using the Text Tool Dialog Box
Using the Text Entry Dialog Box

Use the Text Entry dialog box to create raster and vector text and edit existing vector text. It contains the options for setting the content, font attributes, alignment, effects, mode, leading, and kerning of the text.

•	Note: All the options in this dialog box are available for 24-bit images. If your image has a lower color depth or is greyscale, some options are not available.

To create text:

1	Activate the Text tool by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or clicking the Tool Option palette Tool Selection button [image] and choosing Text from the menu.

2	Click the image where you want to place the text. If you are creating the text as a selection or floating selection, hold the <Shift> key when clicking to add the text to any existing selection. The Text Entry dialog box opens.

3	Scroll through the Name and Size lists and click to make your selection. Paint Shop Pro displays a sample of a font when you select it. You can leave the Script box set to Western for most cases.

4	Select the Auto Kern check box to use the default kerning values. To use other values, clear the check box and use the numeric edit controls of the Kerning and Leading boxes to set specific leading (space between lines) and kerning (space between letters).
If you are adding text to a path, you can use the Leading value to position the text. Use positive values to place the text below the path and negative values to place the text above it.

5	Select the effects for the text by clicking the appropriate buttons along the upper right of the typing area. When you choose an effect, it is applied to the letters you next type. Change the effects of specific letters by highlighting them and then clicking the buttons. You can select from four effects:

•	Click the Bold button [image] to create bold text.

•	Click the Italic button [image] to create italic text.

•	Click the Underline button [image] to place a line under the text.

•	Click the Strikeout button [image] to place a line through the text.

6	Click an Alignment button to choose left, center, or right alignment. Alignment determines how the ends of multiple lines of text line up with each other. The alignment setting affects the entire text and cannot be changed for individual lines.
Note: Text is aligned relative to the insertion point when it is created. When text is edited, it is aligned relative to its bounding box.

7	In the Styles and Textures panels, select the Stroke and Fill for the text. The Stroke is used for the outline of the text; the Fill is used for the interior.

8	To create solid-colored text, click the Standard text button. The Stroke Style and Textures Stroke and Fill choices are replaced by the None icon [image]. The Fill Style box displays the current background solid color, which is used for the text color.

9	In the text box, type the text you want to add to the image. Click the background (away from the text) to remove the highlighting and view the text. Note that the text does not display kerning and leading changes you have made.

10	In the "Create As" panel, choose the mode for the text. You can select one of three modes:

•	Vector, which creates the text as a vector object and adds a new vector layer, if necessary,

•	Selection, which creates the text as an empty selection on the current layer, or

•	Floating, which creates the text as a selection floating above the current layer.

11	Use the Proof [image] and Auto Proof [image] buttons to preview the text in the original image before applying it.

12	Click OK to close the dialog box and place the text in the image.

To edit the text before closing the dialog box, click and drag the cursor to select the text. You can now choose new properties. If you are creating vector text, you can select it and edit it at any time.

Related Topics

 About Paths

 Creating Text on a Path

 Editing Text


About Paths

A path defines the shape of a vector object. It can be composed of one or more contours. Each contour has a start point node, an end point node, and a direction, and a contour can be open or closed. The path of an object is visible while you create it and when you are in Node Edit. At other times, you see only the rendered object.

To produce curved text, place it on a contour. By aligning the text with a contour, you can make the letters follow its curves.

Related Topic

 Creating Text on a Path

 Editing Contours and Paths


Creating Text on a Path

To create curved text, place vector text on the path of vector lines and shapes. The path is the outline that defines the shape of a vector object. The text follows the shape of the path. You can create the text on an existing object or combine existing text with an existing object. When text is combined with an object, the paths of the two are linked and must be on the same layer. If you move one to a different layer, the linked text or path moves with it.

Aligning Text

The alignment of the text depends on the alignment setting in the Text Entry dialog box (Left, Center, or Right) and whether the path is non-closed or closed.

Aligning Text on an Open Path

An open path has specific starting and ending points, as in a curved or straight line. Left-justified text is aligned with the starting point of the path. Right-justified text is aligned with the ending point of the path. Center-justified text is placed equidistant between the starting and ending points. If the text is longer than the path, the extra text hangs from the end. The angle of the last segment determines the direction it hangs.

Example of Text Justified on Open Paths

Aligning Text on a Closed Path (Shape)

A closed path has starting and ending points that meet to form a continuous shape, as in a circle. Its edges are used to justify the text. Left-justified text is centered on the midpoint of the left or left side of the shape. Right-justified text is centered on the midpoint of the right or right side of the shape. Center-justified text is centered about the midpoint of the top or upper side of the shape. If the text is longer than an existing closed path, the extra text wraps around itself.

Example of Text Justified on Closed Paths

Creating Text on an Object (Path)

To create text on the path of an existing object:

1	Activate the Text tool by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or the Tool Selection menu of the Tool Options palette.

2	Move the cursor to the vector object. It changes to the Curved Text cursor.

3	Click the vector object. The Text Entry dialog box appears.

4	Select the text settings. Be sure to choose the Vector option in the “Create As” panel.

5	Click OK. The text appears on the path.

Fitting Existing Text to Object (Path)

You can combine vector text with an object so that the text follows its shape.

To combine vector text with an object:

1	Activate the Object Selector tool by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or the Tool Selection menu of the Tool Options palette.

2	Press the <Shift> key while clicking the vector object and the text to group them.

3	Right-click the Vector object group and choose Fit Text to Path from the context menu.

The text moves into alignment along the path of the shape.

To place to text on the opposite side of the path, use the Reverse Contour or Reverse Path command.

Making the Object Invisible

To make the Object invisible, either:

•	Open the Vector Properties dialog box and clear the “Visible” check box, or

•	On the Layer palette, click the Visibility button of the object so that it appears crossed out [image].

Related Topics

 About Paths

 Using the Text Entry Dialog Box

 Reversing a Contour

 Using the Vector Properties Dialog Box


Editing Text

Vector text can be edited by opening the Text Entry dialog box and changing the settings. Because vector text cannot be converted into a raster selection, the Selection and Floating Selection options are not available.

You can deform vector text and edit its properties, but you cannot edit its path. If you want to edit its path, convert it into a vector object.

 Converting Vector Text to One or More Vector Objects

Editing Vector Text

To edit the properties of vector text use one of the following methods:

•	Activate the Text tool by clicking its button [image] on the Tools palette or the Tool Selection menu of the Tool Options palette. Click the text. The Text Entry dialog box opens. The text is highlighted (selected) and the dialog box displays the current settings. Change the properties, the text, or both, and click OK.

•	Activate the Object Selector tool, select the text, and then click the Edit Text button on the first tab of the Tool Options palette. The Text Entry dialog box opens.

•	On the Layer palette, expand the vector layer by clicking the plus sign [image] to the left of the layer button. Double-click a text object button. The Text Entry dialog box opens with the current settings for the text. Select new settings and click OK.

 Using the Text Entry dialog box

Editing Raster Text

Edit raster text as you would any other selection. You can:

•	Color floating and non-floating text using a painting tool,

•	Copy non-floating text to fill the letters with the areas of the image within them,

•	Cut or delete non-floating text to remove the areas of the letters from the image, and

•	Promote floating and non-floating text to a layer to edit it without affecting the rest of the image.

Reversing the Position of Vector Text

You can move text to the opposite side of a line or object by reversing the path of its object. When you reverse the path, you also flip the text. For example, if you place text along one side of a curve, but then want it along the other side, you can edit the path of the curve.

To do this:

1	Activate the Object Selector tool.

2	Select the circle and text.

3	Right-click the selection and choose Node Edit. The program enters Node Edit mode.

4	Right-click the path or the image and choose Edit > Reverse Path. If you right-click a node, you can also choose Edit > Reverse Contour.

If you want to move the text to the opposite side of the curve without flipping it, click the text with the Text tool and change the Leading value. A positive value places the text below the path; a negative value places the text above it.

Related Topics

 Using the Vector Objects Selection Tool

 Editing Vector Lines and Shapes

 Deforming Vector Objects

 Editing a Selection


Converting Vector Text

When you want to edit the path of text, convert it into a vector object. You can convert each letter into its own object or convert the entire text into one object.

To convert text:

1	Select it using the Object Selector tool.

2	Right-click the text and choose one of the following:

•	Choose Convert Text to Curves > As Single Shape to convert the entire string of text into one object. This produces one path containing a contour for each letter. To edit the nodes of the entire text string, activate the Object Selector tool, click the text to select it, and then right-click it and choose Node Editing.

•	Choose Convert Text to Curves > As Character Shape to convert each letter of the text string into a separate vector object with its own path. Note that to edit the nodes of the text, you must select the letters individually.

Related Topic

 Editing Text

 Using the Vector Objects Selection Tool


About the Drawing Tool

Use the Drawing tool [image] to draw straight lines, freehand lines, Bezier curves, and node drawings as raster objects on raster layers or as vector objects on vector layers. When you use the Drawing tool in the vector mode, the objects can be moved, deformed, and edited after they are created without affecting the rest of the image.

When you draw a line, Paint Shop Pro applies the foreground/stroke style and texture to the path of the line and the background/fill style and texture to areas enclosed by the line.

There are two steps to creating a line:

1	Configuring the characteristics, including type, style, and color, using the first two tabs of the Tool Options palette and the Color palette. Choose from the list below for information about setting the Drawing tool options:

 Tool Options Palette Tab 1

 Tool Options Palette Tab 2

 Using the Styles Boxes

 Using the Textures Boxes

2	Drawing it on a new or existing layer. Choose from the list below for information on drawing a specific type of line:

 Drawing a Single Line

 Drawing a Bezier Curve

 Drawing a Freehand Line

 Drawing a Point to Point Line

Related Topic

 About Vector Layers and Objects


Drawing Tool Options Palette Tab 1

When the Drawing tool is active, configure its settings on the first two tabs of the Tool Options palette. To activate the Drawing tool, use one of the following methods:

•	Click the Drawing tool button [image] on the Tool palette, or

•	Click the Tool Option palette’s Tool Selection button and choose the Drawing tool from the drop-down menu.

The first tab displays the options for line type, width, style, antialias, mode, and endpoint placement.

Type Option

The Drawing tool creates four types of lines:

•	Single lines, which are straight lines,

•	Bezier curves, which are smooth curves with anchor points and controls for creating the curve,

•	Freehand lines, which are lines of any shape, and

•	Point to Point lines, which are lines and shapes composed of nodes and line segments.

Width Setting

Use the Width numeric edit control to set the line width to between 1 and 255 pixels.

Line Style

Select a preset style from the Line Style drop-down list or click the Custom button and create your own line style.

 Using the Styled Lines Dialog Box

Antialias Check Box

Select or clear the “Antialias” check box. Antialiasing smooths the edges of slanted lines, curves, and corners by partially filling in pixels. This effect is available only with greyscale and 24-bit color images.

Create as Vector Check Box

Select the “Create as Vector” check box to create the line as a vector object. Paint Shop Pro creates a new vector layer if the current (active) layer is a raster layer. Clear the check box to create a raster line. If the current (active) layer is a vector layer, Paint Shop Pro creates a new raster layer.

This check box is unavailable when you are working on a vector layer in a paletted image. To create a raster line, place it on the background. It is also unavailable when you use the Line tool to edit a mask; masks cannot contain vector information.

Close Path Check Box

Select the "Close Path" check box to have Paint Shop Pro automatically connect the endpoint with the starting point (origin of the line). The straight line that closes the path is considered part of the original line and appears as part of the path. If you have selected a Fill Style and Texture on the Color palette, the enclosed area is filled with them. Note that this check box is not available when creating Point to Point lines.

Tab 2 Options

Click tab 2 to select the shapes of corners and end points and the size of Freehand line segments.

 Tool Options Palette Tab 2

Related Topic

 Using the Styles Boxes

 Using the Textures Boxes


Drawing Tool Options Palette Tab 2

When the Drawing tool is active, the first two tabs of the Tool Options palette display its options. The settings on the second tab control the shapes of corners and the size of Freehand line segments of both raster and vector lines.

Join Button Options

Click the drop-down arrow and select a Join style to set the shape of the corners. If you select the Miter Join option, enter a value in the Miter Limit box.

Choose from three Join styles:

•	Miter Join [image], which produces mitered (pointed) corners when the width of the corner is within the Miter Limit value and beveled corners when it exceeds it,

•	Round Join [image], which produces round corners, and

•	Bevel Join [image], which produces flattened corners.

Miter Limit Setting

The Miter Limit value determines whether a Miter join is pointed or flat. This option is not available for other types of joins. Use the numeric edit control to set a value from 1 to 30.

Miter length is the length of the intersecting edge of two line segments, or the depth of the intersection from the inside to outside corner. The Miter limit is the maximum allowed ratio of miter length to the width of the intersecting lines. If a Miter join exceeds the limit, the corner is not pointed, but is cut off at the limit point.

Curve Tracking Setting

Curve Tracking controls the distance between the points of the line segments for Freehand lines. Enter a value from 1 to 100 using the numeric edit control. This option is not available for other types of lines.

Related Topics

 Tool Options Palette Tab 1

 Using the Styles Boxes

 Using the Textures Boxes


Drawing a Single Line

After you have selected the Tool Options palette tabs settings and chosen foreground/stroke and background/fill styles and textures, draw the line. The Single line type creates a straight line or a series of straight segments using the foreground/stroke style and texture. While creating a vector line, you can use the Drawing tool to rotate, move, and deform the object. You can edit it later using the Vector Properties dialog box and the Object Selector tool. Edit a raster line as you would any other raster selection.

•	Note: You must choose a foreground/stroke style from the Color palette before you can draw a Single line.

Drawing a Single Line

To draw a Single line:

1	Position the cursor where you want the line to start. To draw the line at fixed angles in increments of 45°, press and hold the <Shift> key.

2	Press and hold the left mouse button.

3	Drag the cursor. An outline showing the width of the line appears as you drag.

4	To end the line, release the mouse button. Paint Shop Pro creates the line.

Drawing a Multi-Segmented Line

IMPORTANT: Keep the <Alt> key pressed to connect your line segments.

To draw a line composed of angled line segments:

1	Click the image at the point where you want the line to start.

2	Press and hold down the <Alt> key.

3	Move the cursor to where you want the line segment to end. The outline (or path if you have selected the Filled style option) of the segment appears

4	Click the image while still pressing the <Alt> key.

5	While continuing to press the <Alt> key, move the cursor to where you want the next line segment to end, and left-click.

6	Continue pressing the <Alt> key while clicking points.

7	To end the line, release the <Alt> key before clicking for the final time.

Connecting a New to a Previous Line

You can change Drawing styles and then continue the previous line by pressing the <Alt> key and then clicking the image where you want the new line segment to end.

Related Topics

 Tool Options Palette Tab 1

 Tool Options Palette Tab 2

 Using the Styles Boxes

 Using the Textures Boxes

 Editing Vector Lines and Shapes

 Editing a Selection


Drawing a Bezier Curve

After you have selected the Tool Options palette tabs settings and chosen foreground/stroke and background/fill styles and textures, draw the line. The Bezier type creates a curve. While creating a vector curve, you can use the Drawing tool to rotate, move, and deform the object. You can edit it later using the Vector Properties dialog box and the Object Selector tool. Edit a raster curve as you would any other raster selection.

•	Note: If you have no foreground/stroke style selected from the Color palette before you draw, the curve is filled with the background/fill choices but no line is visible.

To draw a Bezier curve:

1	Position the cursor on the image where you want the curve to begin.

2	Press and hold the left mouse button.

3	Drag the cursor to where you want to end the line, and release the mouse. An outline showing the width of the curve’s line appears as you drag.

4	Create the curve by clicking the mouse away from the line two times and dragging to shape the curve. A node handle appears each time you click. The first click sets the angle and target point from the starting node; the second click sets the angle and target point from the ending node.

•	To create a semi-circular curve, click the mouse where you want to position the top of the curve, and then click again to bring the curve from the endpoint up to it.

•	To create an "S" shaped curve, click and drag once on one side of the line and once on the other.

5	Release the mouse after editing the ending node to set the curve shape and apply the appropriate style and texture at the selected line width.

Related Topics

 Tool Options Palette Tab 1

 Tool Options Palette Tab 2

 Using the Styles Boxes

 Using the Textures Boxes

 Editing Vector Lines and Shapes

 Editing a Selection


Drawing a Freehand Line

After you have selected the Tool Options palette tabs settings and chosen foreground/stroke and background/fill styles and textures, draw the line. A freehand line can be any shape you want. While creating a vector curve, you can use the Drawing tool to rotate, move, and deform the object. You can edit it later using the Vector Properties dialog box and the Object Selector tool. Edit a raster line as you would any other raster selection.

•	Note: If you have no foreground/stroke style selected from the Color palette before you draw, curves are filled with the background/fill choices but no line is visible.

To draw a Freehand line:

1	Be sure to enter a Curve Tracking value on tab 2 of the Tool Options palette. The number controls the distance between nodes line segments. Use smaller numbers if you are drawing tighter curves.

2	Position the cursor on the image where you want the line to begin.

3	Press and hold the left mouse button.

4	Drag the cursor on the path you want the line to take. Paint Shop Pro draws an outline to show the width of the line. Note that if you have chosen only the background/fill style, the path appears instead of the outline of the line width.

5	Release the mouse button. Paint Shop Pro draws the line based on the selected options.

Related Topics

 Tool Options Palette Tab 1

 Tool Options Palette Tab 2

 Using the Styles Boxes

 Using the Textures Boxes

 Editing Vector Lines and Shapes

 Editing a Selection


Creating a Point to Point Style Line

The Point to Point style of the Drawing tool operates differently from the other styles. When you select it, you activate the Node Edit feature of the program. While you are creating the line or shape, the tool works the same way in both raster and vector modes: you can add nodes and edit them. After you quit Node Edit, you edit the raster line or shape as you would any other raster selection. You edit the vector line or shape using the Object Selector tool.

 About Node Editing

•	Note: If you have no foreground/stroke style selected from the Color palette before you draw, curves are filled with the background/fill choices but no line is visible.

To create a Point to Point line or shape:

1	Left-click the image and then release the mouse button or drag it. Your action when clicking determines the type of node you create:

•	Release the mouse button to create a straight segment node. The node appears as a black square [image].

•	Drag the mouse to create a curved segment node. Handles extend from both sides of the node [image].

2	Move the cursor to where you want to create the second node.

3	Left-click and release the mouse button or drag it to create a straight or curved node. A line connecting the nodes appears.

4	If you are creating straight segments, continue left-clicking to draw the line. If you are creating curves, you can shape them as you create them, while you are drawing the line, or after you have finished.

5	You can continue creating nodes or shape the curved segment.

6	To end the line or shape:

•	Press <Ctrl> + <Q>,

•	Click outside the image, or

•	Right-click anywhere in the image and choose Quit Node Editing from the context menu.

Paint Shop Pro applies the selected options to the line.

Related Topics

 Tool Options Palette Tab 1

 Tool Options Palette Tab 2

 Using the Styles Boxes

 Using the Textures Boxes

 Editing Vector Lines and Shapes

 Editing a Selection


About Vector Node Editing

Every vector object contains a path, which is composed of at least one contour. The path of a circle or other simple object usually has one contour; the path of a complex object may have several. A contour contains at least two nodes, or control points, and the segments that connect them. The segments can be straight or curved. Each contour has a specific direction. It begins at its start point node and finishes at its end point node. To find the direction of a contour, pause the cursor over either end node to display the word “Start” or “End.”

To edit the nodes of a contour, you first activate the Node Edit function, which displays the path of the vector object. You can edit the nodes of only one path at a time. Note also that if you have more than one object selected, Node Edit is unavailable. Vector node editing consists of adding and removing nodes and segments, changing node types, altering the shape of segments, and combining or separating one contour from another.

The Node Edit function has two modes: the Drawing mode and the Edit mode. You must be in the Drawing mode to create new contours by adding nodes; you can move nodes and segments and change their type while in either mode. The available commands are displayed in a menu that you open by right-clicking the contour or node. This menu contains two sub-menus. The Node Type menu displays the commands for changing node types and for converting curves into lines and lines into curves. The type of node or segment determines which commands are available. The Edit menu displays the other commands.

Accessing Node Edit

Use one of the following methods to enter the Node Edit function:

•	Activate the Drawing tool by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or the Tool Options palette Tool Selection menu, and then select Point to Point from the Type drop-down box on this palette’s first tab.

•	Activate the Object Selector tool by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or the Tool Options palette Tool Selection menu, and then right-click a Vector object other than text and choose Node Edit from the context menu.

•	Activate the Object Selector tool, click a vector object other than text to select it, and then click the Node Edit button [image] on the Tool Options palette.

Exiting Node Edit

Use one of the following methods to exit the Node Edit function:

•	Press the <ESC> key. Paint Shop Pro exits the mode without applying any changes.

•	Right-click a node and choose Quit Node Editing from the context menu. Paint Shop Pro applies the changes and exits the Node Editing mode.

•	Press <Ctrl> + <Q>. Paint Shop Pro applies the changes and exits the Node Editing mode.

•	Click outside the image.

When you exit the Node Edit function, Paint Shop Pro applies color to the path and deletes single nodes not connected by segments. To return to Node Edit, use any method described above.

Related Topics

 About Drawing Mode and Edit Mode

 Overview of Nodes

 Adding Nodes

 Editing Nodes

 Converting Vector Text to One or More Vector Objects


Overview of Nodes

A node and its control arms influence the shape of the entering and exiting segment. For example, to make smooth curves, use a node with symmetrical control arms.

All drawing points (nodes) have two handles extending from them. These handles determine the shape of a contour. A handle can have a length of 0. Two opposing handles from sequential nodes having zero length form a straight line segment. A curve is formed if one or both opposing handles of sequential nodes have length.

There are three types of nodes:

•	 Tangent node

•	 Corner or cusp node, and

•	 Curve node, either symmetrical or asymmetrical.

Tangent points have a handle that is tangent to a segment in the opposite direction. A tangent node allows a curve to blend seamlessly with a line.

The handles of a corner or cusp node move independently.

The control arms of a curve node teeter-totter about the node, producing very smooth curves. There are two types of smooth curves, symmetrical and asymmetrical. The control arms of a symmetrical curve are the same length and remain so as you drag them, whereas the arms of an asymmetrical curve can have different lengths.

To change the shape of the segments, move the node handles or change the node type. For example, a symmetrical curve node connects two curved lines. If you want to replace one of the curves with a straight line, right-click the node to open the context menu, and then choose either Node Type > Line Before or Node Type > Line After. The node type changes to Smooth/Tangent, which connects a curve to a straight line.

Related Topics

 Adding Nodes

 Editing Nodes

 About Vector Node Edit Mode


Adding Nodes

You can add nodes along an existing contour, extend a contour by adding nodes from its Start point or End point node, and create new contours by adding nodes unconnected to existing contours.

Inserting a Node into an Existing Contour

You can add a node along an existing contour while you are in either the Drawing or Edit Mode of Node Editing. To add a node along an existing contour:

1	Press <Ctrl> and move the cursor over the segment where you want to add the node.

2	When the cursor changes to display with word “ADD,” click the line.

The new node appears. It contains handles appropriate to the shape of its segments.

Adding a Node as a New Start Point Node or End Point Node

You can extend a contour by adding nodes to either end of it. Note that you can do this only when you are in the Drawing Mode of Node Edit and you must extend the contour from either its Start point or End point.

To add a node as a new Start point or End point node:

1	Activate Node Edit and enter the Drawing mode. Note that the context menu should display Edit Mode as the first command.

2	Click the Start point or End point node to select it. Your cursor will display the word “START” or “END” when it is over the Start or End node.

3	Move the mouse to where you want to place the new node.

4	Click or click and drag the mouse to shape the segment.

5	To end the contour, right-click and choose Edit Mode or Quit Node Editing.

Creating a New Contour

To add a node as the start point node for a new contour, enter the Drawing mode and then left-click the image away from a segment. You add nodes in the same way as you do when creating a Point to Point line:

•	To create straight segments, click and release the mouse button.

•	To create curved segments, click and drag the mouse. Control handles extending from both sides of the node appear. The arrow tip indicates the clockwise/counterclockwise winding of the contour.

 Drawing a Point to Point Line

Related Topics

 About Vector Node Editing

 About Drawing Mode and Edit Mode

 Types of Nodes

 Editing Nodes

 Editing Vector Lines and Shapes

 Editing Contours and Paths


About Drawing Mode and Edit Mode

Node Edit has a Drawing mode and an Edit mode. Drawing Mode allows you to add to the ends of a contour or to add new contours. In Edit Mode, you can select nodes by dragging the cursor to form a selection rectangle around them.

You can enter Node Edit using either the Drawing tool or the Object Selector tool. Using the Point to Point Drawing tool automatically opens Node Edit in the Drawing mode. Activating Node Edit with the Object Selector tool opens Node Edit in the Edit mode.

After you have activated Node Edit, you can alternate between the two modes by doing either of the following:

•	Right-clicking the image and choosing Edit Mode or Drawing Mode from the context menu, or

•	Pressing <Ctrl> + <E>.

Remember that when you are in the Edit mode, the context menu displays the Drawing Mode command, and when you are in the Drawing mode, it displays the Edit Mode command.

Related Topics

 About Vector Node Editing

 Editing Nodes


Editing Nodes

When working with nodes:

•	In Drawing and Edit mode, press the <Ctrl> key while left-clicking to add nodes along the contour,

•	In Drawing and Edit mode, use the left mouse button to move the nodes or reshape the curves.

•	In Drawing and Edit mode, right-click to choose context menu commands.

Moving Nodes

To move nodes, select one or more, and then drag one of the selected nodes. Note that if you drag a segment instead of a node, you move the entire contour.

If only one node is selected, you can constrain the movement to increments of 45° around the next node. Press <Shift> to move the selected node around the previous node; press <Shift> + <Alt> to move it around the next node.

You can also move one or more selected nodes in increments of 10 monitor pixels using the keyboard. Hold <Ctrl> while pressing the following keys:

•	Press <Home> to move the selected node to the left,

•	Press <End> to move the selected node to the right,

•	Press <PgUp> to move the selected node up, and

•	Press <PgDn> to move the selected node down.

Moving the Control Arm Handles

To move the control arm handles:

1	Select any node.

2	Move the cursor over a node handle.

3	When the cursor shape changes, click and drag it. The contour redraws as the handle is moved.

Hold the <Shift> key to constrain the control arms to fixed angles in increments of 45°.

Node Editing Commands

Choose from the list below to learn about node editing commands:

 Changing a Node Type

 Merging a Node

 Deleting a Node

Related Topics

 About Vector Node Editing

 Overview of Nodes

 Adding Nodes

 Selecting a Node

 Editing Contours and Paths


Changing a Node Type

When editing nodes, you can change the type of a node. This affects the segment ends entering and exiting that node.

You can change one or both handles of a node, which will influence its respective segment. When you change the node handle, it updates to display the appropriate controls.

•	To change a node’s type, right-click the node so that it becomes black, and from the context menu, choose Node Type > and then a type.

•	To change a node handle, right-click the node to select it, and from the context menu choose Node Type > Line Before (<Ctrl> + <B>), Line After (<Ctrl> + <F>), Curve Before (<Ctrl> + <1>), Curve After (<Ctrl> + <2>), or Convert to Line (<Ctrl> + <L>).

To change two or more nodes at the same time, select the nodes before choosing the new node type.

Related Topics

 About Vector Node Editing

 Overview of Nodes

 Editing Nodes


Merging a Node

Merging a node removes it from the path and merges the two segments on either side of it into one continuous segment. If the segment is curved, Paint Shop Pro attempts to retain the curve.

You can merge one or more nodes along a contour. Note that a contour contains at least two nodes. If you merge all nodes, you delete the contour.

After you enter Node Edit, use one of the following methods to merge a node:

•	Right-click a node or press <Shift> while clicking more than one node, and then right-click and choose Edit > Merge,

•	Click one or mode nodes and press <Ctrl> + <M>, or

•	Click a node to select it, and then press <Ctrl> and move the cursor over the node. When the merge cursor appears, click the node.

Related Topics

 About Vector Node Editing

 Overview of Nodes

 Editing Nodes


Deleting a Node

Deleting a node removes it along with its two segments and converts the contour into two separate contours or opens a closed contour.

After you enter Node Edit, use one of the following methods to delete nodes:

•	To delete one node, right-click it and choose Edit > Delete, or select it and press <Del>.

•	To delete multiple nodes, select the nodes and press <Del> or right-click and choose Edit > Delete.

Related Topics

 About Vector Node Editing

 Overview of Nodes

 Editing Nodes


Editing Contours and Paths

In addition to editing individual nodes and segments, you can edit the entire contour or path. This is useful when you want to create combinations of filled and empty spaces or to move text to the opposite side of a segment. For example, when you place text on a circle, it appears along the outside edge. If you then activate Node Edit and choose Edit > Reverse Path, Paint Shop Pro moves the text to its inside edge.

Note that if you edit a path containing more than one contour and have not selected a specific node, you can choose only the Edit commands that apply to the entire path. None of the Node Type commands are available. Most of the time, you will probably be editing

Editing Contours

If a path contains several contours, there are times when you may not want to edit all the contours, but only specific ones. You can do this by double-clicking at least one node along each contour to select the entire contour.

When editing a contour, you can do the following:

•	Move a contour by double-clicking a node to select the entire contour, and then dragging any segment or node.

•	Drag individual nodes to alter the shape of the contour.

•	Move from one node to the next of a contour by selecting a node and pressing <Shift> while using the Arrow keys. As you traverse the nodes, the status bar displays the position of the current node.

•	Reverse the direction of a Contour by right-clicking a node and choosing Edit > Reverse Contour from the context menu. You can also select one of its nodes and press <Ctrl> + <R>. This reverses the start point and end point nodes and the direction of the node handles.

•	Close a contour (create a segment between the endpoint and starting point) by right-clicking any node on it and choosing Edit > Close. To close more than one contour, click at least one node on each before choosing the command.

Contour Editing Commands

Choose from the list below to learn about contour editing commands:

 Reversing a Contour

 Closing a Contour

 Joining Contours

 Breaking a Contour

 Copying and Pasting Contours

 Editing the Entire Path

Related Topics

 About Vector Node Editing

 Editing Nodes

 Selecting a Node

 Select All and Select None Commands


Reversing a Contour

To reverse a contour, select one of its nodes and then press <Ctrl> + <R> or right-click and choose Edit > Reverse from the context menu. Reversing a contour is used to alter the filling characteristics of a multi contour drawing.

To hollow the center of a closed contour, draw another contour inside, close it, make sure the direction of the outside contour is clockwise and the inside contour is counter-clockwise. To detect the winding direction of a contour, select a node on it. If that node has visible control arms, the arrow points in the direction the contour is drawn. If the node does not has control arms then press the <Shift> key and traverse the nodes with the Arrow keys. Use the Up <↑> and Right <→> Arrows to move clockwise, and the Left <←> and Down <↓> Arrows to move counter-clockwise.

Related Topics

 Selecting a Node

 About Vector Node Editing

 Editing Contours and Paths

 Closing a Contour

 Joining Contours

 Breaking a Contour

 Copying and Pasting Contours

 Editing the Entire Path


Closing a Contour

Closing a contour adds a segment that connects the start point and end point nodes.

In Node Edit mode, you can close a contour by using one of the following methods:

•	Press <Shift> while selecting the starting point and ending point nodes, and then right-clicking and choosing Edit > Join Select or pressing <Ctrl> + <J>.

•	Right-clicking any node on a path and choosing Edit > Close from the context menu, or left-clicking any node and pressing <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <C>.

The segment appears between the start and end point nodes.

Related Topics

 Selecting a Node

 About Vector Node Editing

 Editing Contours and Paths

 Reversing a Contour

 Joining Contours

 Breaking a Contour

 Copying and Pasting Contours

 Editing the Entire Path


Joining Contours

You can join the start point or end point node of one contour with the start or end point nodes of another to form one contour.

•	To join the nodes, press <Ctrl> while dragging one node over the other. When the two overlap, the word “Join” appears. Release the mouse button.

•	To join two starting or ending nodes, select two starting or ending nodes and press <Ctrl> + <J> or right-click the image and choose Edit > Join Select.

Related Topics

 Selecting a Node

 About Vector Node Editing

 Editing Contours and Paths

 Reversing a Contour

 Closing a Contour

 Breaking a Contour

 Copying and Pasting Contours

 Editing the Entire Path


Breaking a Contour

You can break apart a contour at a node. When you break a contour, the selected node is converted into a new start point node and end point node. If the original contour was open, Paint Shop Pro splits it into two separate contours. If the original contour was closed, Paint Shop Pro opens the contour. Note that you must select a node before you can break a contour.

To break a contour:

1	Click a node to select it.

2	Right-click and choose Edit > Break, or press <Ctrl> + <K>.

3	Drag the nodes to separate them,

Related Topics

 About Vector Node Editing

 Editing Contours and Paths

 Reversing a Contour

 Closing a Contour

 Joining Contours

 Copying and Pasting Contours

 Editing the Entire Path


Copying and Pasting Contours

•	To copy a contour, select the nodes and press <Ctrl> + <C>, or right-click and choose Edit > Copy from the menu. Only entire contours are copied.

•	To paste the contour from the clipboard, press <Ctrl> + <V>, or right-click and choose Edit > Paste from the menu. Each time you paste, the nodes are placed into your current drawing with an accumulative X Y offset from the original nodes. Each time the Copy command is used, the X Y offset is reset for the next Paste command.

Related Topics

 Selecting a Node

 About Vector Node Editing

 Editing Contours and Paths

 Reversing a Contour

 Closing a Contour

 Joining Contours

 Breaking a Contour

 Editing the Entire Path


Editing the Entire Path

When editing a path in Node Edit mode, you can do the following:

•	Move a path by dragging it by any line segment. If the path contains more than one contour, they all move. To move only one contour, double-click and drag one of its nodes.

•	Reverse the direction of a path by right-clicking a node and choosing Reverse Path from the context menu. You can also by press <Shift> + <Ctrl> + <R> when no nodes are selected. This reverses the start point and end point nodes of all contours. The path retains its shape, but node handles point in the opposite direction. To reverse a contour, select one of its nodes and press <Ctrl> + <R>.

•	Close every contour (create a segment between the end point and start point node of each contour) by selecting the entire path or one node of each contour, and then right-clicking and choosing Edit > Close.

•	Copy or delete the path by selecting all of it and then right-clicking and choosing Edit > Copy or Edit > Delete.

Related Topics

 Selecting a Node

 Select All and Select None Commands

 About Vector Node Editing

 Editing Contours and Paths

 Reversing a Contour

 Closing a Contour

 Joining Contours

 Breaking a Contour

 Copying and Pasting Contours


Using Undo and Redo Commands

To Undo or Redo any Node Editing command, you can use the standard Windows <Ctrl> + <Z> to undo and <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Z> to redo, or right-click and choose the commands from the Edit submenu.

Related Topics

 Editing Nodes

 About Vector Node Editing


Refreshing Your View in Node Edit

When you are in Node Edit, you can refresh the screen so that it updates and displays the most current configuration of the nodes.

To refresh the screen in Node Edit, press <F5> or right-click the image and choose Refresh.


Creating Preset Shapes

Use the Shape tool to draw rectangles, buttons, callouts, signs, and polygons as raster objects on raster layers or vector objects on vector layers.

•	Note: A vector shape can be moved, deformed, and edited after it is created without affecting the rest of the image.

There are two steps to creating a shape:

1	Configuring the shape type, style, width, and other characteristics. This includes setting the options on the first two tabs of the Tool Options palette and selecting foreground/stroke and background/fill styles and textures. Choose from the list below for information about setting the shape options:

 Tool Options Palette Tab 1

 Tool Options Palette Tab 2

 Using the Styles Boxes

 Using the Textures Boxes

2	Drawing the shape on a new or existing layer.

 Drawing a Shape

Related Topic

 About Vector Layers and Objects


Preset Shapes Tool Options Palette Tab 1

When the Preset Shape tool is active, the first two tabs of the Tool Options palette display its options. Activate the tool using one of the following methods:

•	Click the Preset Shape tool button [image] on the Tool palette, or

•	Click the Tool Option palette’s Tool Selection button and choose the Preset Shape tool from the drop-down menu.

The first tab of the Tool Options palette displays the shape type, line style and width, and other choices. The options on tab 2 apply only to rectangles and squares.

Shape Type Setting

The Preset Shape tool creates several shapes, including buttons, callouts, signs, vehicles, international symbols, and arrows. When creating a shape, left-click to start from a corner; right-click to start from the center. The corner is formed by the intersection of perpendicular lines along the outside edges of the shapes.

Line Width Setting

The Line Width value determines the pixel width of the colored outline. The outline of the shape can be between 1 and 255 pixels wide.

Line Style

Select a preset style from the Line Style drop-down list or click the Custom button and create your own line style.

 Using the Styled Lines Dialog Box

Retain Style Check Box

If the selected shape has a style (color, gradient, or pattern), select the check box to use the default style. Clear the check box to use the styles you have set on the Color palette.

Antialias Check Box

Select or clear the Antialias check box. Antialiasing smooths the edges of slanted lines, curves, and corners in the shape by partially filling in pixels. This effect is available only with greyscale and 24-bit color images.

Create as Vector Check Box

Select the “Create as Vector” check box to create the shape as a vector object. Paint Shop Pro creates a new vector layer if the current (active) layer is a raster layer. Clear the check box to create a raster shape. A new raster layer is created if the current (active) layer is a vector layer.

This check box is unavailable when you are working on a vector layer in a paletted image. To create a raster shape, place it on the background. It is also unavailable when you use the Shape tool to edit a mask; masks can contain only raster information.

Tab 2 Options

If you are creating a shape with straight lines, click tab 2 and select the Join and Miter Limit options. If you are creating a circle or ellipse, the tab 2 options do not apply, and you are ready to draw the shape. You may need to clear the “Retain style” check box to make tab 2 available.

 Tool Options Palette Tab 2

Related Topics

 Using the Styles Boxes

 Using the Textures Boxes

 Drawing a Shape


Preset Shapes Tool Options Palette Tab 2

If you are creating a shape with straight lines and corners, select the Join and Miter Limit options on the second tab. These settings apply to both raster and vector shapes.

Join Button Options

Click the drop-down arrow and select a Join style to set the shape of the corners. If you select the Miter Join option, enter a value in the Miter Limit box.

Choose from three Join styles:

•	Miter Join [image], which produces mitered (pointed) corners when the width of the corner is within the Miter Limit value, and beveled corners when it exceeds it,

•	Round Join [image], which produces round corners, and

•	Bevel Join [image], which produces flattened corners.

Miter Limit Setting

The Miter Limit value determines whether a Miter join is pointed or flat. This option is not available for other types of joins. Use the numeric edit control to set a value from 1 to 30.

Miter length is the length of the intersecting edge of two line segments, or the depth of the intersection from the inside to outside corner. The Miter limit is the maximum allowed ratio of miter length to the width of the intersecting lines. If a Miter join exceeds the limit, the join is not pointed, but is cut off at the limit. point. Related Topics

 Tool Options Palette Tab 1

 Drawing a Shape


Drawing a Preset Shape

You can draw shapes as raster or vector objects. Before drawing the shape, click the Preset Shape button to activate it, select the settings on the Tool Options palette tabs, and choose foreground/stroke and background/fill styles and textures on the Color palette.

•	Note: A vector shape can be moved, deformed, and edited after it is created without affecting the rest of the image.

To draw a shape:

1	Position the cursor in the image where you want the shape to originate.

•	Left-click to start at a corner formed by the intersection of the outline of their paths.

•	Right-click to start at the center.

2	Drag the cursor to draw the shape. An outline showing the width of the edges appears as you drag.

3	Release the mouse button when the shape is the size you want. Paint Shop Pro draws the shape in the image.

A button with the shape type you selected appears on the Layer palette.

When creating a vector shape, you can use the Preset Shape tool to rotate, move, and deform the object while it is selected. After you have deselected it, use the Object Selector tool to re-select and edit it.

Related Topics

 Tool Options Palette Tab 1

 Tool Options Palette Tab 2

 Using the Styles Boxes

 Using the Textures Boxes

 Editing Vector Lines and Shapes

 Editing Contours and Paths


Editing Vector Shapes and Lines

Drawing lines and shapes as vector objects gives you the flexibility of editing them after they are created. Use the Vector Properties dialog box to edit the name, color, width, visibility, and other properties of vector lines and shapes. Use the Object Selector tool to move and deform vector objects and to edit vector nodes. Use the Text Entry dialog box to edit vector text.

About the Vector Properties Dialog Box

You can use the Vector Properties dialog box to edit one vector object or a group of selected objects. When you edit a group of objects, the dialog box displays the properties of the uppermost object in the group, and options that need to be edited individually are unavailable.

Opening the Vector Properties Dialog Box

Open the Vector Properties dialog box using one of the following methods:

•	Click the Object Selector button [image] on the Tool palette or the Tool Options palette’s Tool Selection menu, and then double-click a vector object or group of objects in the image.

•	After you have selected a vector object using the Object Selector tool, click the Properties button of the first tab of the Tool Options palette.

•	After you have selected a vector object using the Object Selector tool, right-click the object or group of objects and choose Properties from the context menu.

•	On the Layer palette, click the plus sign [image] next to the layer button to display the buttons of the vector objects. Double-click a Vector Object button or right-click it and choose Properties from the context menu.

 Using the Vector Properties Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Selecting Vector Objects

 Using the Vector Objects Selection Tool

 Editing Text

 Aligning Objects

 Distributing Objects

 Making Objects the Same Size

 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects


About the Vector Object Selection Tool
About the Object Selector Tool

Use the Object Selector tool to move, resize, skew, stretch, and rotate vector objects, to edit vector object nodes, and to use Edit menu commands on vector objects.

You can select one or more vector objects from any layer using the Object Selector tool. The objects selected are enclosed in a rectangle that contains handles used to move, rotate, and deform the objects. Right-clicking the selected shape or group displays a context menu containing editing commands. Vector node editing is available only when a single object is selected.

To activate the Object Selector tool, click its button [image] on the Tool palette or choose it from the Tool Options palette’s Tool Selection menu.

 Vector Object Selector Tool Options Palette Tab 1

 Vector Object Selector Tool Options Palette Tab 2

You also use the Object Selector tool to edit nodes and their segments, contours, and paths.

 About Vector Node Editing

Related Topics

 About Vector Layers and Objects

 Selecting Vector Objects

 Deforming Vector Objects

 Editing Contours and Paths

 Aligning Objects

 Distributing Objects

 Making Objects the Same Size

 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects


Selecting Vector Objects

You can select one or more vector objects and group objects from any layer in the image.

To select vector objects:

1	 Activate the Object Selector tool by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or the Tool Options palette’s Tool Selection menu.

2	 Select one object by doing either of the following:

•	Clicking the object, or

•	Dragging the cursor to create a rectangle around the object. The rectangle must enclose the object completely to select it.

4	 Select more than one object, do any of the following

•	Press the <Shift> key while clicking each object,

•	Drag the cursor to completely enclose the objects, or

•	On the Layer palette, press and hold the <Ctrl> key while clicking the Layer Name button of each object.

5	 Select all objects on all visible layers by making a vector layer active, right-clicking the layer, and choosing Select All from the context menu. To prevent vector objects from being selected, make their layer invisible.

To remove objects from a group:

•	Remove one or more objects from the group by pressing <Ctrl> while clicking the object or objects.

•	Deselect all vector objects in an image by right-clicking the group of objects in the image or one of the Vector Object buttons on the Layer palette, and choosing Select None from the context menu.

Related Topic

 Using the Select All Command


Deforming Vector Objects

To deform vector text, objects, and groups of objects:

1	Activate the Object Selector tool by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or the Tool Options palette’s Tool Selection menu.

2	Select one or more vector objects. Deformation handles appear for the object or object group. When you place the cursor over a handle, it displays an icon of the type of deformation it performs.

3	Drag the deformation handles to deform the object or group. To keep the original proportions (width to height), use the right mouse button. Deform the object or group using the following methods:

•	 Resize the object or group by dragging the corner deformation handles. Change the width or height by dragging a handle in the middle of an edge.

•	 Rotate the object or group by dragging the center bar.

•	 Change the perspective of the object or group by pressing the <Ctrl> key while dragging the corner deformation handles.

•	 Skew or shear the object or group by pressing the <Shift> key while dragging the deformation handles in the middle of each edge.

•	 Distort the object or group by pressing the <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys while dragging the corner handles.

If an object has text mapped to its path and is deformed, the text will be reapplied to the new path after the deformation.

Related Topic

 Selecting Vector Objects


Moving Vector Objects

To move an object or group of objects:

1	Activate the Object Selector tool by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or the Tool Options palette’s Tool Selection menu.

2	Select one or more vector objects in the image.

3	Drag the object or group of objects to a new location.

If you want to nudge the selected objects, you may find it easier to use the keyboard arrow keys:

•	To nudge a vector selection 10 pixels in a direction, press and hold <Ctrl> + <Shift> while pressing the Up <↑>, Down <↓>, Left <←>, and Right <→> Arrow keys.

•	To nudge a vector selection 1 pixel, press and hold the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key while using the Arrow keys.

Related Topic

 Selecting Vector Objects

 Aligning Objects

 Distributing Objects


Arranging Vector Objects

As you work with vector objects, there may be times when you want to move one object behind another or bring a particular object to the front of a group. You can do this by choosing commands from the Arrange sub-menu.

To move an object behind or in front of another:

1	Select the object you want to move. Note that you can only arrange one object at a time.

2	Right-click the object and choose Arrange > and then one of the commands.

Related Topic

 Selecting Vector Objects


Activating the Node Edit Mode

Use the Object Selector tool to edit vector nodes. You can only edit the nodes of one object at a time. When you have selected more than one object, Node Edit is not available. Choose a node editing command by right-clicking the node to open the context menu.

To activate the Node Edit mode:

1	Click the Object Selector button [image] on the Tool palette or the Tool Selection menu of the Tool Options palette.

2	Select a vector object in the image or click a Vector Object button [image] on the Layer palette. Only one Vector object can be edited at a time in the Node Edit mode.

3	Do either of the following:

•	Click the Node Edit button [image] on the Tool Options palette, or

•	Right-click the image and choose Node Edit from the context menu.

When you work with vector nodes, you can alternate between creating them and editing them.

Related Topic

 About Drawing Mode and Edit Mode

 Selecting Vector Objects


Using the Vector Properties Dialog Box

Use the Vector Properties dialog box to edit the properties of vector lines and shapes. Use the Text Entry dialog box to edit vector text.

You can edit the properties of several objects simultaneously. In this case, the dialog box displays the properties of the uppermost object in the group and any options that can’t be edited as a group are unavailable.

 Opening the Vector Properties Dialog Box

Changing the Vector Properties Dialog Box Settings

Some dialog box options may be unavailable if you have selected a group of objects. Edit the objects individually to change all the settings.

To use the Vector Properties dialog box:

1	If you are editing one object, you can rename it in the Name box. This box is unavailable if you are editing a group of objects.

2	From the Styles and Textures panels, make any changes to the stroke and fill styles and textures. These boxes are identical to the Active Styles and Textures boxes on the Color palette.

3	In the Stroke width numeric edit control to change the width of the stroke (outline) of the object.

4	If the object is a square, rectangle or multi-angle line, choose a shape for the corners and angles where the segments connect. The choices are Miter (pointed) [image], Round [image], and Bevel (flat) [image].

5	If you chose a Join in the previous step, set a Miter limit of 1 to 30. The Miter Limit controls the length of Miter joins. The Miter length is the width of the two line segments along the edges where they intersect. As the angle of intersection narrows, the width lines at their intersection increases. The Miter limit is the maximum allowed ratio of length of the intersecting edges to the width of the lines. If a Miter join exceeds the limit value, the limit, the corner is flattened at the limit.

6	To choose a new style for the lines of the object, either make a selection from the Line style drop-down list or click the Custom button. Clicking the Custom button opens the Styled Lines dialog box, where you can edit your line style or create a new one.

7	Clear the “Visible” check box to create an invisible object as a path for text.

8	Select the “Antialias” check box to smooth the edges of the object.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the new settings.

Related Topics

 Selecting Vector Objects

 Using the Color Palette

 Using the Styled Lines Dialog Box


Select All and Select None Commands

The Object Selector tool has two context menus: one that opens when you are working with vector objects and Node Edit is inactive, and one that opens when Node Edit is active.

When Selecting Vector Objects

To select all vector objects on all visible layers:

•	When the Object Selector tool is active, right-click a vector layer and choose Select All from the context menu.

•	When any vector tool is active, right-click a Vector Object button on the Layer palette and choose Select All from the context menu.

To prevent vector objects from being selected, make their layer invisible.

When a vector layer is current (active), to select all vector objects on all layers, press <Ctrl> + <A>.

To undo the Select All command:

•	When the Object Selector tool is active, right-click the layer and choose Select None from the context menu.

•	When any vector tool is active, right-click a Vector Object button on the Layer palette and choose Select None from the context menu.

When a vector layer is current (active), to deselect all selected vector objects on the layer, press <Ctrl> + <D>.

When in Node Edit and Selecting Nodes

•	When Node Edit is active, select all the nodes of a path by pressing <Ctrl> + <A> or by right-clicking the image and choosing Edit > Select All from the context menu.

•	To deselect all the nodes, press <Ctrl> + <D> or right-click the image and choose Edit > Select None from the context menu.

•	To select a single node, move the cursor over the node you want to select and click it.

•	To add or remove a node from a selection, press the <Shift> key while moving the cursor over a node and clicking it. If the node is already selected, it is deselected and removed from the selection.

•	To select a contour, move the cursor over a node on the contour and double click it. Pressing the <Shift> key while clicking adds the contour to the current selection.

•	To select nodes by enclosing them in a selection rectangle, move the cursor to a position on the image, click and drag it around the nodes you want to select, and release the cursor. Press the <Shift> key wile dragging to add the nodes to the current selection.

•	To select the next or previous node, make sure only one node is selected, and then press the <Shift> key while using the Arrow keys to move forward or backward.

Related Topics

 Viewing and Hiding a Layer

 Using the Layer Palette

 Selecting Vector Objects


Cutting and Copying Vector Objects

To use the clipboard with vector objects:

1	Activate the Object Selector tool by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or the Tool Options palette’s Tool Selection menu.

2	Select one or more vector objects.

3	Do one of the following:

•	Right-click the object or group of objects and choose Cut or Copy from the context menu, or

•	Choose Edit > Cut or Edit > Copy.

Related Topics

 Pasting as a New Vector Selection

 Selecting Vector Objects


Pasting Vector Objects

When you copy one or more vector objects to the clipboard, you can paste the objects as a new image, new layer, or new vector selection as long as the vector layer is current (active). If you make a raster layer current, you can also paste the objects as a selection or transparent selection.

When the vector layer is current (active), Paint Shop Pro pastes a vector object in the following ways:

•	If you paste a vector object as a new image, Paint Shop Pro pastes the object on a vector layer above a transparent background.

•	If you paste a vector object as a new layer, Paint Shop Pro creates a new vector layer containing the object.

•	If you paste a vector object as a new vector selection, Paint Shop Pro places it on the current (active) vector layer. If a raster layer is current, Paint Shop Pro creates a new vector layer above the current raster layer.

When you make a raster layer current (active), Paint Shop Pro does the following:

•	If you paste a vector object as a new selection, Paint Shop Pro pastes the object as a floating raster selection above the raster layer.

•	If you paste a vector object as a transparent selection, Paint Shop Pro pastes the object as a floating raster selection above the raster layer. If the object contains the current background color, that color becomes transparent.

Note that if you used the Object Selector tool to select the vector objects, it is de-selected when you click the raster layer, and the Arrow tool [image] becomes active. If you used the Drawing or Preset Shape tool, it remains active. If you continue drawing, Paint Shop Pro creates a new vector layer and places the object on it. The pasted item continues to be an active floating raster selection until you defloat it.

Related Topics

 Selecting Vector Objects

 Selecting Foreground and Background Colors


Deleting Vector Objects

To delete vector objects, you can:

•	Press the <Delete> key while the object is selected, or

•	Right-click a Vector Object button on Layer palette and choose Delete from the context menu.

Paint Shop Pro deletes the selected object or group.


Distorting a Group


Changing the Perspective of a Group


Skewing a Group


Node Edit Menu in Editing Mode


Converting Curves to Lines


Corner Node


Symmetric Curve Node


Asymmetrical Curve Node


Smooth/Tangent Node


Add Node Cursor


Newly Added Node with Handles


Edit Submenu in Node Edit


Node Types


Arrange Commands


Miter Join Examples


Reversing Text


Selecting a Node

To select a node, click it. To select more than one node, hold <Shift> while clicking the nodes. If you click the selected node a second time, you deselect it.

To select all the nodes of a path or contour, double-click one of its nodes or press <Ctrl> + <A>. To deselect all the nodes, press <Ctrl> + <D>.

You can also select nodes by dragging the cursor to enclose them in a selection rectangle.

Related Topic

 Editing Nodes


Kerning Examples


Leading Examples


Methods for Defining Color

When you edit Paint Shop Pro images on the screen and then print them on paper, you work with two different methods, or models, for defining color. A computer screen uses transmitted light to produce color, while a printer's ink uses reflected light.

Paint Shop Pro uses two methods for defining color on screens and one for defining color for printers:

•	The RGB (Red/Green/Blue) and HSL (Hue/Saturation/Lightness) methods for screens, and

•	The CMYK (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow/Black) methods for printers.

RGB Method

The RGB model, one of the Additive Color models, is used on computer monitors. It has three primary colors - red, green, and blue - that it creates by emitting light. These three colors are combined in various proportions to produce all the colors displayed on your screen. They are referred to as additive because they combine to produce white.

Primary colors are measured as a value from 0-255. The colors produced by combining the three primaries are a result of the relative strength (value) of each primary. For example, pure red has a red value of 255, a green value of 0, and a blue value of 0. Yellow has a red value of 255, a green value of 255, and a blue value of 0. An absence of the three primaries colors results in black; when all three have values of 255, they produce white.

HSL Method

The HSL method uses a more intuitive approach. It corresponds our perception of color by defining it in terms of hue, saturation, and lightness.

The three components are measured on a scale from 0 to 255. Hue distinguishes the various colors such as green and blue. In the Paint Shop Pro Color dialog box, the hues are arranged around the Color wheel and assigned values from 0-255. The color wheel is like a clock with 256 hours (255 plus the 0) that runs backwards. At the top is red at 0. Moving counter-clockwise, yellow is at 43; green is at 85; cyan is directly opposite red at 128; blue is at 170 (directly opposite yellow); magenta is at 212 (directly opposite green).

Saturation is the strength of a hue, or the amount of grey it contains. A color referred to as vivid usually has a high saturation level (not much grey). As the saturation decreases, the amount of grey increases, and the color becomes less vivid.

Lightness is the perceived amount or intensity of light. A lightness value of 0 on the scale is total darkness, or black. A value of 255 on the scale is total lightness, or white. At 50% lightness (127 on the scale), a hue is considered pure. In the Paint Shop Pro Color dialog box, a hue's saturation and lightness values are modified using the Saturation/Lightness box inside the color wheel.

CMYK Method

The CMYK model, a Subtractive Color model, is based on light being absorbed and reflected by paint and ink. This model is often used when printing. The primary colors, cyan, magenta, and yellow, are mixed to produce the other colors. When all three are combined, they produce black. Because impurities in the ink make it difficult to produce a true black, a fourth color, black (the K) is added when printing.

RGB and HSL Table

The table below outlines RGB and HSL settings in the Jasc and Windows Color dialog boxes for the standard white light color spectrum.

Color	RGB Settings	Jasc Color Dialog Box HSL Settings	Windows Color Dialog Box HSL Settings
	Red	Green	Blue	Hue	Sat.	Light.	Hue	Sat.	Light.
Red	255	0	0	0	255	128	0	240	120
Orange	255	128	0	21	255	128	20	240	120
Yellow	255	255	0	42	255	128	40	240	120
Green	0	255	0	85	255	128	80	240	120
Azure	0	255	255	128	255	128	120	240	120
Indigo	0	0	255	170	255	128	160	240	120
Violet	255	0	255	200	255	128	200	240	120


Monitors and Gamma

An image is stored in computer memory as a series of numbers. Depending on the image’s format, a pixel's values can be described in a variety of ways. All these formats have at least one thing in common: a higher number means a brighter color value. This rule has two corollaries: (1) the highest combination of values possible for a pixel produces pure white; and (2) the lowest combination of values possible for a pixel produces pure black.

It would follow logically that a value half way up any scale would have a lightness exactly between black and white. This assumes that the hypothetical scale would allow an integer value exactly in the middle. In reality, it would not. Image formats are based on powers of two, so integer midpoints are not possible.

To get over this hurdle, consider an approximate midpoint, and to base it in reality, assume that the image is in a grey scale format. A graph of a monitor’s pixel output over the image’s potential pixel values would look like the following diagram, "Linear Brightness." The approximate midpoint -- say 120 -- would produce an identical brightness on the monitor.

Linear Brightness

A computer monitor displays colors by exciting phosphors on the screen. Unfortunately, phosphors do not excite linearly. For example, if a computer reads a lightness value from a photographic image and sends it directly to the monitor, the displayed color is dimmer than in the original photograph.

This is where gamma correction comes in. A gamma correction value adjusts for the non-linearity of phosphor excitation. The diagram below displays an example of how gamma correction can alter the color values sent to a computer monitor. In this case, the approximate midpoint of 120 produces a monitor value of 168.

Gamma Corrected Brightness


Types of Resolution

When you work with computer graphics, you need to be aware of the resolution of the image, the monitor, and the printer.

Image Resolution

An image is composed of small squares known as pixels. An image with smaller pixels means it contains more of them, and it therefore has a higher resolution, displays more detail, and is a larger file size than an image with bigger pixels. Image resolution is the number of pixels per unit of length of an image, and it is usually measured in pixels per inch (ppi).

Monitor Resolution

Monitor resolution, which is the number of pixels per unit of length on a monitor, is usually measured in dots per inch (dpi). The resolution of PC monitors is approximately 96 dpi.

Printer Resolution

The printer resolution is the number of ink dots per inch a laser or imagesetter printer produces. With laser printers that have a resolution of about 300 to 600 dpi, you will generally get good results with images from 96 to 150 ppi.

When working with commercial printers, you may also hear the term screen frequency. This is the resolution, measured in lines per inch (lpi), of the halftone screens used to reproduce the images. When you are scanning color or greyscale images intended for commercial printing, the general rule is to scan them at 1.5 to 2 times the screen frequency of the printing device.


Dithering Methods

Dithering is a technique for simulating colors that are missing from an image file's palette. The missing colors are simulated by intermingling pixels of two or more palette colors. If the unavailable color differs too greatly from the colors in the image's palette, dithering produces a grainy or mottled appearance.

Error diffusion dithering is a popular dithering method. The "error" in the title refers to the cumulative difference between the actual values of pixels in the image and their "true" values if they were all set to their correct colors. By reducing this error, error diffusion dithering produces image quality that is superior to that achieved by non-error adjusted dithering.

The process starts at the first pixel in the image (the upper left corner). The algorithm finds the color in the palette that is nearest to the color of the pixel. It then compares the two colors' numerical values, saves the difference as the initial error, and applies the color from the palette to the pixel.

The process then proceeds to the second pixel. It finds this pixel's nearest color and calculates the sum of the color and the error value from the last pixel. It sets the pixel to the color that is nearest to this sum. Any difference between the applied color and the sum becomes the new error value.

When the process reaches the third pixel, it repeats the procedure that was used to set the color for the second pixel. The algorithm cycles through the image's remaining pixels in the same manner. The error value is abandoned at the end of each row.

The Reduce Color Bleeding Option

Error diffusion dithering causes colors to bleed from left to right because the algorithm, and therefore the error value, travels in this direction. Color bleed is most noticeable in images with hard vertical edges because the edges are softened by the traveling color.

Paint Shop Pro functions that use error diffusion dithering include a Reduce Color Bleeding option. This option lessens the left-to-right color bleed by applying a fractional coefficient to the error value. By reducing the error value, less color information is carried from one pixel to the next.


Adjustment Overview
Adjustment Layer Overview

An adjustment layer is a special kind of raster layer that you can use to make color corrections to a multi-layered image without affecting the other layers. To make color corrections to one layer or to an image containing a single layer, you may prefer to use the Brightness/Contrast, Posterize, Hue/Saturation/Lightness, and other Color menu commands.

The adjustment layer, not the underlying layers, contains the information on the changes made to the image. The pixels in the underlying layers are not affected. You can edit an adjustment layer as many times as you like without permanently altering the pixel values. To make the adjustment permanent, flatten the image.

You can add more than one adjustment layer to an image. An adjustment layer affects only those layers underneath it, not the ones above. By creating adjustment layers at various levels in the layer stack, you can apply multiple effects.

 Creating an Adjustment Layer

Related Topic

 Using the Adjustment Layer Properties Dialog Box


Creating an Adjustment Layer

You can create an adjustment layer by choosing the New Adjustment Layer command from the Layers menu or Layer palette.

Use one of the following three methods:

•	Click the Layer palette button of the layer above which you want to create the adjustment layer and from the menu bar choose New Adjustment Layer > and then choose one of the layer types.

•	Click the Layer palette button of the layer above which you want to create the adjustment layer, right-click the Layer palette Create Layer button [image], choose New Adjustment Layer > and then choose one of the layer types.

•	Right-click the Layer palette button of the layer above which you want to create the adjustment layer and choose New Adjustment Layer > and then choose one of the layer types.

Related Topics

 Editing an Adjustment Layer

 Using the Adjustment Layer Properties Dialog Box


Using the Adjustment Layer Properties Dialog Box

The Layer Properties dialog box for an adjustment layer contains two tabs. The General tab displays the same information for Adjustment layers as it does for raster and vector layers.

 About the Layer Properties Dialog Box

The Adjustment tab of the dialog box displays the settings for each type of Layer. For information on a specific tab, click its name in the list below:

 Levels Tab

 Curves Tab

 Brightness/Contrast Tab

 Color Balance Tab

 Hue/Saturation Tab

 Channel Mixer Tab

 Invert Tab

 Threshold Tab

 Posterize Tab


About the Levels Adjustment

Use the Levels adjustment layer to reset the darkest and lightest values on the lightness scale (0 to 255) of the underlying layers and to adjust the midrange of colors.

 Using the Levels Tab

Related Topic

 About the Histogram


Using the Levels Adjustment Tab

Use the Levels adjustment tab to map the brightness values in the image to new values. The original values are the input values; the new values are the output values.

In the Channel drop-down box, select the color channel to edit. You can edit all the R/G/B values simultaneously or select a single channel.

Input Levels

Modify the Input levels to darken the darkest values and lighten the lightest values. This increases the contrast in the image. The Input levels boxes correspond to the diamonds on the slider underneath them. The box and diamond on the left represent a lightness value of 0. The middle box and diamond control the gamma curve. The box and diamond on the right represent a lightness value of 255.

Type values in the boxes or drag the diamonds to set new levels. As you increase the value in the left box, all lightness levels in the image lower than the new value are set to 0 (black). As you decrease the value in the right box, all lightness values in the image higher than this value are set to 255 (white).

Change the gamma value to reset the lightness of medium grey and alter the center of light balance.

Output Levels

The Output levels modify the edited Input values to another set of brightness values. Modify the levels to lighten the darkest pixels and darken the lightest pixels. You set the lowest range and highest range for brightness levels.

The Output levels boxes correspond to the diamonds on the slider underneath it. The box and diamond on the left represent the minimum (darkest) value in the image. As you increase this value, all levels in the image below it are set to the new level (lightened). The box and diamond on the right represent the maximum (lightest) value. As you decrease this value, all levels in the image above it are set to the new level (darkened).

You can also use the Output levels to invert an image by dragging the black diamond to the right (or typing a high number in the box), and then dragging the clear diamond to the left of the black one (or typing a low number in the box).

Using the Keyboard to Control Slider

The Input and Output Levels values and sliders can be controlled by keyboard input. Press the Up (↑) and Down (↓) Arrow keys to increase and decrease the values by one unit. Press the Page Up and Page Down keys to increase and decrease the values by 10 units. Press the Home key to increase a value to its maximum valid number and the End key to lower it to its minimum valid number. For the gamma level, the Up (↑) and Down (↓) Arrow keys move the value by .01; the Page Up and Page Down keys move it by .10.

General Tab Controls

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. If you do not use the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 About the Histogram

 Adjusting the Image Gamma


About the Curves Adjustment

The Curves adjustment layer is similar to the Levels adjustment in that you use it to adjust lightness values. However, with Curves, you can the change any lightness value on the 0-255 scale.

 Using the Curves Tab


Using the Curves Adjustment Tab

Use the Curves Adjustment tab to map any brightness value to a new value. This tab gives you more flexibility than the Levels tab because you can edit any value on the 0 to 255 (black to white) scale.

The graph charts the relationship between the input and output levels. At the lower left of the chart, both values are 0 (black). At the upper right, both values are 255 (white).

Select a channel to edit from Channel drop-down box. You can edit all the R/G/B values simultaneously or select a single channel.

You can change lightness values by entering numbers in the numeric edit control or dragging the graph line and adding a point to it. To use the numeric edit control, enter an input value and the new output value.

To add a point to the graph line, move the cursor over line. When the cursor changes to an arrowhead and displays "+add,’" click to add the point. You can then drag the point to a new location or use the numeric edit control to move it to a new brightness value. You can add up to 16 points.

You can also drag a point along the line to substitute values. To remove a point, drag it to the top or bottom of the graph and release the mouse.

General Tab Controls

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. If you do not use the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.


About the Brightness/Contrast Adjustment Layer

Use a Brightness/Contrast adjustment layer to lighten or darken the underlying layers and change the amount of shading, or contrast, between areas.

 Using the Brightness/Contrast Tab

Related Topic

 Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of an Image


Using the Brightness/Contrast Adjustment Tab

The Brightness/Contrast adjustment tab displays two controls: one for adjusting the brightness and one for adjusting the contrast.

Brightness Setting

A value of 0 displays the image at its original Brightness level. Drag the slider to the right or type a positive number to lighten the image. Drag it to the left or type a negative number to darken it.

Contrast Setting

A value of 0 displays the image at its original Contrast level. Drag the slider to the right or type a positive number to increase the contrast and make the image sharper. Drag it to the left or type a negative number to decrease it and make the image more blurry.

General Tab Controls

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. If you do not use the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topic

 Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of an Image


About the Color Balance Adjustment

Use a Color Balance adjustment layer to alter the underlying layers by shifting the balance of a color and its opposite on the color wheel. There are three pairs: cyan and red, magenta and green, and yellow and blue. Increasing the amount of one decreases the amount of its opposite. You can adjust the balance in each of the three tonal ranges.

 Using the Color Balance Tab


Using the Color Balance Adjustment Tab

Use the Color Balance adjustment tab settings to shift the balance of a color and its opposite on the color wheel. There are three pairs: cyan and red, magenta and green, and yellow and blue. Increasing the amount of one decreases the amount of its opposite. This tab contains two panels, one for tone balance, the other for color balance.

About the Tab

Tone Balance Panel

The "Tone balance" panel displays the lightness levels, or tonal ranges, of colors to adjust. While you adjust each tonal range individually, you can adjust all three. They are:

•	The Shadows option, which refers to the colors at the dark end of the lightness scale,

•	The Midtones option, which refers to the colors in the middle range, and

•	The Highlights option, which refers to the colors at the bright end of the scale.

Color Balance Panel

The "Color balance" panel contains the pairs of colors whose balance you shift. The box on the left displays the cyan/red balance. The middle box displays the magenta/green balance. The box at the right displays the yellow/blue balance.

Adjusting the Color Balance

To create a Color Balance adjustment layer:

1	In the "Tone balance" panel select which lightness level to adjust.

2	Select or clear the "Preserve luminosity" check box. Default is selected and luminosity is preserved.

3	Use the sliders or type values in the three Color levels boxes at the top to set the color balance. When the boxes display 0 and the sliders are in the middle, the image contains its original colors. Increase the amount of one color to decrease the amount of its opposite.

4	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the settings.

General Tab Controls

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. If you do not use the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.


About the Hue/Saturation/Luminance Adjustment
About the Hue/Saturation/Lightness Adjustment

Use this adjustment layer to change the hue, saturation, and lightness values for any color or range of colors in the underlying layers. You can also use it to colorize greyscale layers.

 Using the Hue/Saturation/Lightness Tab

Related Topic

 Adjusting the Hue/Saturation/Lightness of an Image


Using the Hue/Saturation Adjustment Tab
Using the Hue/Saturation/Lightness Adjustment Tab

Use the settings on the Hue/Saturation/Lightness adjustment tab to change the hue, saturation, and lightness values for any color or range of colors in the layers underneath. When the 3 sliders and boxes are set to 0, the image has its original values.

The tab contains three concentric hue rings:

•	The outer hue ring, which never moves, displays a color wheel. It represents the original hues. When the tab opens, this ring and the inner ring are displayed fully saturated. Increased saturation levels are not visible.

•	The inner ring displays the cumulative effects of all the adjustments. It rotates and changes as you adjust the settings, but does not reflect increases you make to the saturation level.

•	The middle ring is the control ring. When the tab opens, this ring is half saturated. It reflects all adjustments you make, including those to the saturation level. If you edit all the colors in the image by choosing Master in the Edit drop-down box, the entire ring appears. It shows all the colors at their current values. If you restrict the editing to a color range, only the segment of the ring at the color range appears. Drag the controls in the color segment to set where in the range the adjustment starts, where it is at full effect, where it begins to taper off, and where it ends.

•	Note: While the color ranges must be edited individually, you can edit as many as you want. There is a cumulative effect when you edit multiple color ranges.

To use the Hue/Saturation/Lightness Adjustment tab:

1	From the Edit drop-down box, select which color range to adjust. Choose Master to edit all the colors simultaneously. Choose a specific color range to limit the adjustment. Your choice determines the appearance of the control ring.

2	If you are adding color to a greyscale layer, select the "Colorize" check box below the color rings. The Edit box becomes unavailable.

3	To adjust the saturation and lightness, move the sliders or type numbers in the boxes. Negative numbers decrease the saturation and lightness levels; positive numbers increase them.

4	If you are in the Master Edit mode, move the Hue slider or type a number in the box to shift every color. You can go half the way around the wheel by moving the slider all the way left or right. Negative numbers rotate the wheel to the left; positive numbers rotate it to the right. The control ring displays the new hue for each color. For example, when the slider is at 180, blue becomes yellow and green becomes magenta.

5	If you are restricting the adjustment to a color range, drag the two outer pointers on the control ring to set the range width. They mark the beginning and end of the adjustment area. You can drag them to edit as wide a range of color as you like. You can also drag the two inner bars. The segment between each outer pointer and inner bar shows where the adjustment is building to its full effect. The area between the two inner bars shows where the adjustment is in full effect. To move control ring, drag the white circle.

6	To choose new colors for the color range, type a number in the Hue box or drag the Hue slider. You can move from –180 to +180.

7	To change the saturation of the color range, type a number from –100 to +100 in the Saturation box or drag the Saturation slider. At –100, the colors are desaturated, or grey; at +100, they are fully saturated.

8	To change the lightness of the color range, type a number from –100 to +100 in the Lightness box or drag the Lightness slider. At –100, the colors become black; at +100, they turn white.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the settings.

General Tab Controls

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. If you do not use the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 Adjusting Hue, Saturation, and Lightness

 About the Histogram

 Methods for Defining Color


About the Channel Mixer Adjustment

Use this adjustment layer to increase or decrease a color channel by a percentage of itself and the other two channels.

 Using the Channel Mixer Dialog Box


Using the Channel Mixer Adjustment Tab

Use the Channel Mixer adjustment tab to increase or decrease a color channel by a percentage of itself and the other two channels.

1	Select a color channel to edit from the Output channel drop-down box. Your choices are Red, Green, and Blue.

2	If you want to create a greyscale image, select the Monochrome check box. This sets the Output channel to black. You can then move the Source channel sliders. They set the percentage of each channel used for the greyscale value of the final image.

3	The Source Channels are used to define the current channel you are editing. For example, if you select the Red channel in the Output channel drop-down box and then set the Red slider to 50, you reduce the amount of red in the image to 50% of its original amount.

4	The Constant slider brightens and darkens the image across all the channels. The default of 0 is the original setting.

General Tab Controls

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. If you do not use the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.


About the Invert Adjustment

When you choose the Invert adjustment layer command, Paint Shop Pro reads the value for each pixel and subtracts it from 255 on the color value scale. The result is a negative of the image. There are no settings on the Adjustment tab.


Using the Invert Adjustment Tab

The Adjustment tab for an Invert adjustment layer does not contain any options. When you add the layer, Paint Shop Pro subtracts the value for each pixel from 255 on the color value scale and displays the result, which is a negative of the image.


About the Threshold Adjustment

Add a Threshold adjustment layer to create a black-and-white image from the underlying layers. The Histogram values are used to determine whether a pixel becomes white or black. All pixels whose brightness values are below the Threshold level become black and all pixels whose brightness values are equal to or greater than the Threshold level become white.

 Using the Threshold Tab

Related Topic

 About the Histogram


Using the Threshold Adjustment Tab

Use the Threshold adjustment tab to create a black-and white image. The tab displays a Threshold slider with levels from 1 to 255, which correspond to those in the Histogram. All pixels with brightness values below the Threshold level you set become black. All pixels with brightness values at or above the level you set become white.

To set a Threshold level, drag the slider or type a number in the box to its right.

General Tab Controls

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. If you do not use the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topic

 About the Histogram


About the Posterize Adjustment

Use a Posterize adjustment layer to reduce the number of bits per color channel in the underlying layers. Reducing the bits per color channel decreases the number of colors and levels of lightness the layers can display. This produces a flatter-looking image with bands of color rather than smooth gradients.

 Using the Posterize Tab

Related Topic

 About Color Depth


Using the Posterize Adjustment Tab

Use the Posterize adjustment tab slider to reduce the number of red, green, and blue brightness values in an image. At 255, all the levels are available. As you decrease the number, Paint Shop Pro divides the image into fewer levels, and the result is a flatter-looking image. If you reduce the value to 2, all the red, green, and blue pixels would be at 0 or 255.

To set a Posterizing effect, drag the slider or type a number in the box to its right.

General Tab Controls

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. If you do not use the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 What is Color Depth

 About the Histogram


Editing an Adjustment Layer

You can edit an adjustment layer by changing the settings on the Adjustment tab or by painting the layer to remove the adjustment on parts of it.

Editing the Adjustment Settings

Edit the settings by opening the Properties dialog box again and changing the settings on the Adjustment tab.

Open the Adjustment tab of the Properties dialog box in one of the two following ways:

•	Choose Layers > Properties,

•	Double-click the Layer button of the Layer palette, or

•	Right-click the Layer button of the Layer palette, and choose Properties from the pop-up menu.

The Properties dialog box opens with the Adjustment tab at the front. It displays the current settings. After you have changed the settings, click OK to close the dialog box and apply the new adjustment.

Editing the Layer

An adjustment layer is similar to a masked raster layer. You edit it with the painting tool in the same way you edit a mask. When you select an adjustment layer, the active colors on the Color palette change to greyscale values. Use these colors to edit the adjustment layer with any painting tool. Paint with black to remove the adjustment; paint with white to add it; paint with greys to vary the strength of its effect; use the Flood Fill tool to create a gradient adjustment.

You can also vary the opacity level and blend mode to edit the layer.

Related Topic

 Editing a Mask

 Layer Blend Modes

 Changing Layer Opacity


Levels Adjustment Tab


Brightness/Contrast Adjustment Tab


Color Balance Adjustment Tab


Hue/Saturation Adjustment Tab


Channel Mixer Adjustment Tab


Threshold Adjustment Tab


Posterize Ajustment Tab


Curves Adjustment Tab


What is a Mask?

A mask is a greyscale image that you apply to a layer. You can use it to hide and display parts of the layer, to fade between layers, and to create special effects with precision. Masks can be created from selections, alpha channels, and images.

A mask can cover a layer completely or with varying levels of opacity. The grey value of the mask determines how much it covers. Where it is black, it completely masks the layer, producing a transparent area; where it is white, it leaves the layer unmasked (in its original state); where it is grey, it produces a semi-masking effect, with the transparency increasing as the grey becomes darker.

All masks are created and edited in a raster, greyscale mode. Therefore, all tools and image processing features that work on greyscale images work on masks. The tools that can be used in either vector or raster mode (Drawing, Preset Shapes, and Text) work only in their raster modes when editing masks.

A mask works the same way with a vector layer as it does with a raster layer. It can be linked to a layer, which moves it with the layer. If a mask is not linked to the layer, moving the layer’s content will not affect the position of the mask.

Because a mask is greyscale, you can save it with the image in an alpha channel or as a separate image on a hard disk. Also, you can load a selection as a mask and a mask as a selection from an alpha channel.

Related Topics

 About Vector Layers

 Linking a Mask and a Layer

 Adding a Layer Mask


Creating a Mask
Creating a Mask from an Image

Paint Shop Pro creates a mask from an image by converting it into a greyscale bitmap and using the bitmap as the mask. The original, or source, image is not altered.

When you create a mask from an image, first click to select the layer to which you are adding the mask, and then open the Add Mask From Image dialog box.

Opening the Add Mask From Image dialog box

To open the Add Mask From Image dialog box, choose Masks > New > From Image.

 Using the Add Mask from Image Dialog Box

•	Note: To create a mask in an image that is not 24-bit, first increase the color depth and then create the mask.

Related Topics

 Increasing Color Depth

 Creating a Mask from a Selection

 Creating a Mask from the Entire Layer or Image

 Creating a Mask from a Channel


Using the Add Mask From Image Dialog Box

Select the layer to which you are adding the mask before opening the Add Mask From Image dialog box.

To use the Add Mask From Image dialog box:

1	Select the Source window from the drop-down list. The source window is the image from which you will create the mask. It can be any image window open in the workspace.

2	In the “Create mask from” panel, select the method for Paint Shop Pro to use to create the mask:

•	With Source luminance, the luminance value of the pixel color determines the degree of masking. The lighter colors produce less masking. Darker color produce more masking, increasing the transparency of the layer.

•	With Any non-zero value, there is no gradation to the masking. Pixels with color are completely masked, creating transparent areas; pixels without color have no masking, leaving the areas opaque.

•	With Source opacity, the opacity of the layer determines the degree of masking. Transparent areas in the source produce transparency on the masked layer, opaque areas produce opacity on the masked layer, and semi-transparent areas produce partial masking.

3	To invert the mask, select the “Invert mask data” check box. Inverting a mask reverses its transparency: black becomes white, white becomes black, and greys are assigned their mirror value.

4	Click OK to close the dialog box and create the mask.

On the Layer palette, a mask appears next to the masked layer’s button to indicate that the layer has a mask. By default, the mask is linked with the layer on which it is created and moves with it when you drag the layer. You can unlink the mask and move the layer separately.

•	Note: After you add a mask, you do not necessarily see a change in the image. To view the mask using the red overlay, choose Masks > View Mask.

Related Topic

 Linking the Mask and Layer


Creating a Mask from a Selection

When you create a mask from a selection, the selection remains active. To deselect it, chose the Select None command.

To create a mask from a selection:

1	Create a selection.

2	Choose one of the following:

•	Masks > New > Hide Selection to mask the selection.

•	Masks > New > Show Selection to mask everything except the selection.

Related Topics

 Creating a Mask from the Entire Layer or Image

 Creating a Mask from a Channel

 Creating a Selection


Creating a Mask on a Layer

At times you will want to apply a mask to the entire image (when it contains one layer) or specific layer (when the image contains more than one layer) and then edit it. If an image contains only a background layer, you must promote it to a “regular” layer before applying a mask.

To mask the entire image:

•	Choose Masks > New > Hide All to mask the entire layer. You can then edit the mask to remove any area you want uncovered (unmasked).

•	Choose Masks > New > Show All to create a mask where the entire area is the non-masked part of it. You can then edit the mask to add any area you want covered (masked).

By default, the mask is linked with the layer on which it is created and moves with it when you drag the layer. You can unlink the mask and move the layer separately.

Related Topics

 Background and Background Layer

 Using the Layer Palette to Create a Mask

 Creating a Mask from a Selection

 Creating a Mask from a Channel

 Linking the Mask and Layer


Creating a Mask from a Channel

When you split an image into its RGB, HSL, or CMYK channels, each channel becomes a greyscale image. You can then create a mask using one of these images.

To create a mask using a channel:

1	Split the image into channels using one of the three Channel Splitting commands in the Colors menu. Leave these new images open or minimized in the workspace.

2	Make the original image active.

3	Choose Masks > New > From Image. The Add Mask From Image dialog box opens.

4	In the Source window drop-down list, select which channel images to use for creating the mask.

5	Click the Source Opacity option in the “Create mask from” panel.

6	To invert the mask, select the “Invert mask data” check box.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and create the mask.

You can now save and load this mask.

 Loading a Mask from an Alpha Channel

Related Topic

 Splitting Channels


Viewing a Mask

When you create a mask, you do not automatically see it. To view the mask, choose Masks > View Mask. A check mark appears next to the command in the menu, and the image displays the masks as a red-colored overlay.

To return to normal viewing, choose Masks > View Mask. The check mark disappears from the menu, and the image returns to normal.

You can also view the mask from the Layer palette. Pause your cursor over the mask icon at the right of the Layer button. A thumbnail of the layer’s mask appears.

Note that you must always choose the View Mask command before you edit a mask. If you have created the mask using the Masks > New > Show All command, you will not see the mask until you have edited it

Related Topic

 Enabling a Layer Mask

 Linking a Mask and a Layer


Inverting a Mask

Inverting a mask reverses its transparency: what is black becomes white, and what is white becomes black. Greys are assigned their mirror transparency.

To invert a mask, choose Masks > Invert.


Editing a Mask

Remember that you must choose Masks > Edit before painting so that you edit the mask, not the image. When you work in the Edit Mask mode, the colors available to you become those of a greyscale image. When you click a foreground or background color box, the greyscale palette appears. When you leave the Edit Mask mode, the active color boxes return to their previous colors.

•	Note: Any painting tool or effect that can be applied to a greyscale image can be applied to a mask.

When you edit a mask you change either the areas or the level of masking. For example, painting over an object to mask it changes the area, while making a Gradient Fill edits the degree of masking.

To edit a mask:

1	Choose Masks > View Mask to see the mask. Paint Shop Pro displays it as a red overlay. A check mark appears next to the command.

2	Choose Masks > Edit. A check mark appears next to the command.

3	Use the painting tools to alter the masked area:

•	Paint with white to remove masking.

•	Paint with black to add masking.

•	Paint with lighter and darker greys to add various levels of masking.

4	After you have finished editing the mask, choose Masks > Edit. The check mark disappears.

Related Topic

 Creating a Gradient or Textured Mask

 Linking a Mask and a Layer

 Enabling a Layer Mask


Saving a Mask to an Alpha Channel

You can save a mask to your hard drive, another disk, or to an alpha channel. When you save it to an alpha channel, Paint Shop Pro stores its information as a greyscale bitmap within the image.

Use the Save To Alpha dialog box to save a mask to an alpha channel. To open this dialog box, choose Masks > Save To Alpha Channel. This command is available only when the image contains a mask.

Using the Save To Alpha Dialog Box

1	When the dialog box opens, file name of the image containing the mask appears in the Available Documents box, and the mask is displayed in the Preview box.

2	In the Available Alpha list, double-click New Channel, or highlight New Channel and click OK. The New Channel dialog box opens.

3	Type a name for the new mask.

4	Click OK. Paint Shop Pro saves the mask to the alpha channel and closes both dialog boxes.

•	Notes: Both masks and selections can be saved to alpha channels, and each can be loaded as the other.
An advantage of the PSP format is that its files store alpha channels within the images. TIFF, TGA, and PNG files can store one alpha channel; the others will not store any.

Related Topics

 Loading a Mask from an Alpha Channel

 Saving a Mask to a Disk

 Deleting a Mask from an Alpha Channel


Saving a Mask to the Hard Drive

You can save a mask to an alpha channel, your hard drive, or another disk. When you save a mask to a disk, the selection is saved in its own MSK file format. You can then load this mask to other images without opening the original image.

Use the Save Mask Channel dialog box to save a mask to your hard disk or any other disk connected to your computer. To open this dialog box, choose Masks > Save To Disk.

To use the Mask Channel dialog box:

1	Use the “Save in” drop-down box to navigate to the folder in which you want to save your mask.

2	In the “File name” box, type a name for the mask. The “Save as type” box automatically displays the PSP Mask Channel format.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and save the mask.

Related Topics

 Loading a Mask from a Disk

 Saving a Mask to an Alpha Channel


Loading a Mask from an Alpha Channel

Before loading a mask to a multi-layered image, make active the layer in which you want to place the mask.

Use the Load From Alpha dialog box to load a mask from an alpha channel. To open this dialog box, choose Masks > Load From Alpha Channel.

•	Notes: Because both masks and selections can be saved to alpha channels, you can load a mask as a selection or a selection as a mask.
You can load a mask from any image open or minimized in the workspace.

Using the Load From Alpha Dialog Box

1	To load a mask from the active image, leave its name in the Available Documents box. To load a mask from another image, highlight its file name.

2	In the Available Alpha list, click the mask or selection that you want to load. The Preview box displays your selected mask. You can view any selection or mask by clicking its name. You can open any selection or mask by double-clicking its name.

3	After you have chosen a mask, click OK. The dialog box closes, and the mask loads into the image.

Related Topics

 Saving a Mask to an Alpha Channel

 Loading a Mask from a Disk

 Deleting a Mask from an Alpha Channel


Loading a Mask from the Hard Drive

Use the Load Mask Channel dialog box to load a mask from your hard disk or any other disk connected to your computer.

Before loading a mask to a multi-layered image, make active the layer in which you want to place the mask. To open the Load Mask Channel dialog box, choose Masks > Load From Disk.

Using the Load Mask Channel Dialog Box

1	Navigate to the folder containing the mask you want to load. Masks are saved in the MSK format, which Paint Shop Pro automatically displays in the “Files of type” drop-down box.

2	Click the file to highlight it.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and load the mask.

You can also use the Browser to add a mask to a layer.

Related Topics

 Using the Browser to Add a Mask to a Layer

 Loading a Mask from an Alpha Channel

 Saving a Mask to a Hard Drive


Deleting a Mask from an Alpha Channel

Deleting a mask from the alpha channel and deleting a mask from a layer are two separate functions. Deleting a mask from the alpha channel does not delete it from the layer. If you delete a mask from the alpha channel and then save the image, the mask will be saved. To delete the mask from the image, delete it from the layer.

Deleting a Mask from the Alpha Channel

Use either the Save to Alpha or the Load from Alpha dialog box to delete a mask from the alpha channel. To open one of the dialog boxes, choose either Masks > Save To Alpha or Masks > Load From Alpha.

To delete a mask from an alpha channel:

1	From the Available Documents list, select the image containing the mask you want to delete.

2	In the Available Alpha list, highlight the mask. The preview displays the selected mask.

3	Click the Delete button.

4	At the prompt message, click Yes. Paint Shop Pro deletes the mask.

5	Click OK to close the dialog box.


Deleting a Mask from a Layer

When you delete a mask from the layer, you can remove it from or merge it into the image. Merging it makes it a permanent part of the image.

•	Note: Deleting a mask from a layer does not delete it from the alpha channel.

Deleting a Mask from a Layer

To delete a mask from a layer:

1	Choose Masks > Delete. Paint Shop Pro displays a message asking whether to merge the mask with the layer.

2	Click No to remove the mask from the layer. Click Yes to make the mask a part of the layer.

Related Topic

 Deleting a Mask from an Alpha Channel


Masks 2 ways to save
Saving a Mask

There are two ways to save a mask:

•	To an alpha channel, where the mask is saved as a greyscale bitmap within the image
 Saving a Mask to an Alpha Channel

•	To a hard drive or other disk, where the mask is saved in its own MSK format file
 Saving a Mask to a Disk


Delete mask 2 ways
Deleting a Mask

Deleting a mask from the alpha channel and deleting a mask from a layer are two separate functions.

 Deleting a mask from an alpha channel

 Deleting a mask from a layer


Load Mask 2 ways
Loading a Mask

After you save a mask to an alpha channel or disk, you can load it back into the image. You can also load a selection from an alpha channel as a mask.

 Loading a mask from an alpha channel

 Loading a mask from a disk


New Channel Dialog Box
Using the New Channel Dialog Box

When you save a selection or a mask to an alpha channel, you type a name for the new selection or mask in the New Channel dialog box.


Fixing Mistakes
 Using the Undo Commands

Undo Command

The Undo command reverses the last edit or command made to the active image. It can remove painting or drawing operations, color alterations, filter effects, etc. It cannot undo any modification that has been saved or any changes to the filename or file format.

Using Undo returns the file to its state prior to the most recent operation. The number of operations you can undo depends on the settings in the Undo tab in the General Program Preferences dialog box. It is limited only by the disk space in your computer.

To undo an action, do one of the following before saving the image:

•	Choose Edit > Undo,

•	Press <Ctrl> + <Z>, or

•	Click the Undo button [image] on the toolbar.

Command History

Use the Command History command to open the Command History dialog box, where you can undo several contiguous actions simultaneously. You view your previous actions and, starting from the most recent, select which of them to undo.

To open the Command History dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Choose Edit > Command History,

•	Press <Shift> + <Ctrl> <Z>, or

•	Click the optional Command History button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Command History Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Setting the Undo Preferences

 Using the Revert Command

 Using the Redo Command

 Setting the Undo Buffer Preferences

 Emptying the Undo Buffers

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


 Using the Command History Dialog Box

The Command History dialog box contains a list of the recent actions and commands you have applied to an image, starting with the most recent. It displays the tool or action that was used and time that has passed since the event occurred. Use it either to undo an action you applied or re-apply an action you undid. The actions you have applied are preceded by “Undo,” and the actions you have undone are preceded by “Redo.”

When you have applied but not undone any actions, the list displays “Undo” before every action to indicate that you can choose to undo them. When you have undone some of the actions, the dialog box lists them first and displays “Redo” before them to indicate that they can be re-applied. If you have undone all your actions, your only choice is to re-apply them, so they all are preceded by “Redo.”

For example, if you apply 10 brush strokes to an image and undo the last three, you can open the Command History dialog box to undo the first seven strokes or re-apply the final three.

To use the dialog box:

1	In the list of actions, select the ones to undo or to redo. You cannot undo and redo actions simultaneously. If you select actions to undo, the button at the lower left displays “Undo.” If you choose action to redo, the button displays “Redo.”

2	Click the Undo/Redo button to close the dialog box and apply the changes to the image.

•	Note: To undo all the changes made since an image was last saved, choose File > Revert or click the Revert button [image] on the toolbar.

Related Topics

 Emptying the Undo Buffers

 Setting the Undo Preferences


 Using the Revert Command

Use the Revert command to remove all changes made to an image since it was last saved. Please note that this command is not available until you alter the saved image.

To apply the Revert command, either:

•	Choose File > Revert, or

•	Click the optional Revert button [image] on the toolbar.

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Using the Redo Command
 Using the Redo Commands

The Redo command re-applies the actions or commands on which you have used the Undo command. Paint Shop Pro supports Multiple Redo, which is particularly useful if you have removed more edits and commands than you had intended. If this occurs, and you want to re-apply them, either choose the Redo command as many times as is necessary or use the Command History dialog box.

To apply the Redo command, do one of the following:

•	Choose Edit > Redo,

•	Press <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Z>, or

•	Click the Redo button [image] on the toolbar.

Multiple Redo

To re-apply more than one Undo, you may find it most convenient to use the Command History dialog box, which you open by doing one of the following:

•	Choosing Edit > Command History,

•	Pressing <Shift> + <Ctrl> <Z>, or

•	Clicking the Command History button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Command History Dialog Box


Emptying the Command History

Use this command to empty the contents of the Command History list, thereby freeing disk space. You can allocate storage space for the Undo list and compress the information in the list using the options in the Undo tab of the General Program Preferences.

To empty the buffers, choose Edit > Empty > Command History.

Related Topic

 Setting the Undo Buffer Preferences


Image Information
 Viewing Image Information

The Current Image Information dialog box displays information about images open in Paint Shop Pro. If the image contains a watermark, you can read its information in this dialog box. If the image is in the PSP format, you can also add comments such as a title, the artist’s name, and copyright information.

To open the Current Image Information dialog box, choose Image > Image Information, press <Shift> + <I>, or click the optional Image Information button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Current Image Information Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Current Image Information Dialog Box
 About the Current Image Information Dialog Box

The Current Image Information dialog box always displays at least two tabs, the Image Information tab and the Creator Information tab. If the image contains a digital watermark, the Watermark Information tab also appears.

Image Information Tab

The Image Information tab contains the file name and format, its dimensions and bit depth, selection, layer, and channel information, and a breakdown of the memory used.

Creator Information Tab

Unlike most file formats, the PSP format lets you save information about the image. You can type a title, the creator’s name, copyright information, and any comments in the Creator Information tab. Click OK to close the dialog box. This information is not saved until you save the image.

Watermark Information Tab

The Watermark Information tab displays the Creator ID, the year of copyright, and image attributes. If your computer is connected to the Web, you can view information about the image’s creator at the Digimarc Web site. To open the browser and go to the appropriate page, click the Web Lookup button. To view registration and patent information about Digimark digital watermarks, click the About button.

Related Topic

 About Digital Watermarks


 Changing Your View of an Image

Image Zoom Levels

At times you will probably want to see some areas of your image close up. At other times you may want to see the entire image. To do this, change the zoom level. For example, zoom in to see the individual pixels for detail work and back out to adjust the color balance.

The zoom level is the magnification level of an image. The normal viewing level is the actual size of one-to-one (1:1). At three-to-one (3:1), the image is three times the normal size; at one-to-five (1:5), it is one-fifth the normal size. The magnification level of an image always appears next to the title on an image’s title bar.

Using the View Menu Zoom Commands

The following commands on the View menu change the magnification an image:

•	Zoom In by 1 increases the zoom factor by 1.

•	Zoom In by 5 increases the zoom factor by 5.

•	Zoom Out by 1 decreases the zoom factor by 1.

•	Zoom Out by 5 decreases the zoom factor by 5.

•	Normal View immediately returns the image to the standard magnification of 1:1.

For example, if you choose View > Zoom in by 1 two times, the image will be displayed at three times its original size. If you then choose View > Zoom in by 5, the magnification will be eight times the original.

Using the Zoom Tool

To activate the Zoom tool, click the Zoom tool button [image] on the Tool palette. Use the left and right mouse buttons to increase and decrease the magnification level.

•	To zoom in, left-click the image. The magnification increases by one level each time you click the image, and the image centers where the Zoom tool was clicked.

•	To zoom out, right-click the image. The magnification decreases by one level with each click.

To return to the standard view, click the Normal Viewing button [image] on the toolbar or press <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <N>.

Using the Numeric Keypad

Press <+> on the numeric keypad to increase the magnification by one level.

Press <-> on the numeric keypad to decrease the magnification by one level.

Using the Tool Options Palette

When the Arrow, Zoom, Mover, Dropper, and Text tools are active, the Zoom indicator on the Tool Options palette displays the current zoom level. You can change magnification by selecting a new zoom level from the drop-down box.

Using a Mouse Wheel

If your mouse has a wheel, you can use it to change the magnification level of your image. Roll the wheel away from you to zoom in. Roll it toward you to zoom out.

Related Topics

 Scrolling the Image

 Fitting the Window to the Image

 Setting the Viewing Preferences


Fitting the Window to the Image

When you change the magnification of an image, Paint Shop Pro can enlarge or reduce the image window automatically to the new size. Select this option in the Viewing Preferences tab of the General Program Preferences.

If you have not selected this preferences, you can resize the window to fit the image by choosing Window > Fit to Image or by pressing <Ctrl> + <W>.

Related Topic

 Setting the Viewing Preferences


Opening a New Window

When you edit an image, it can be helpful to magnify the area you are editing while still being able to see the effect on the entire image. You can do this by opening multiple windows of the same image.

These new windows are NOT new images—they are new views of the image and are linked. Any changes you make to the image in one window you also make to the images in the other windows. However, because the zoom factor is independent, you can zoom in for close-up work on one window while displaying the entire image in another window.

To open a new view of an image, choose Windows > New Window or press <Shift> + <W>.

When more than one window is open, you can close any window, including the original. The image stays open as long as at least one window is open.

Related Topic

 About the Overview Window


 Full Screen Edit

In Full Screen Edit, Paint Shop Pro expands the workspace to cover the screen. This gives you the largest possible space for displaying your image. The palettes are visible, but the menus are hidden. To access the menus, click at the top edge of the screen.

To activate the Full Screen Edit, do one of the following:

•	Choose View > Full Screen Edit.

•	Press <Shift> + <A>.

•	Click the Full Screen Edit button [image] on the toolbar.

Use the same commands to return the workspace to its previous size.

Related Topics

 Fitting the Window to the Image

 Setting the Viewing Preferences


 Using the Arrow Tool

When you increase the magnification level of the image for detail work, you may find that the entire image no longer fits in its window. If you are not working on the entire image, it might be more convenient to keep the image at this higher zoom level but not increase the window’s size. When you want to move to a different part of the image, you can bring hidden areas into view using the Arrow tool, the Cursor keys, or the scrollbar.

The Arrow Tool

To use the Arrow tool:

1	Click the Arrow button [image] on the Tool palette.

2	Move the cursor over the image.

3	Press and hold down the left mouse button. The cursor changes into a hand.

4	Drag the image until the area you want is visible.

5	Release the mouse button.

The Cursor Keys

To use the Cursor keys:

•	Press <Page Up>, <Page Down>, <↑>, and <↓> to scroll vertically.

•	Press <Home>, <End>, <←>, and <→> to scroll horizontally.

The Scroll Bars

Scroll bars appear along the right and bottom edges of the window whenever the image is too large to fit entirely within the window. To bring a different area of the image into view, click and hold down the arrow buttons on either end of the scroll bar, or drag the slider bar.


 Using the Rulers

Paint Shop Pro provides rulers to help you align your artwork and arrange image elements symmetrically. The rulers can be configured to display inches, centimeters, and pixels.

To display the rulers, choose View > Rulers or click the optional Rulers button [image] on the toolbar. The icon to the left of the Ruler command appears pressed in when its feature is displayed.

To hide the rulers, choose View > Rulers or the button again.

Related Topic

 Setting the Rulers Preferences


 Using the Grid

Paint Shop Pro provides a grid to help you align your artwork and arrange image elements symmetrically. The grid spacing can be set at any size and can be configured to display inches, centimeters, and pixels. You can change its color and size at any time.

To display the grid, choose View > Grid, press <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <G>, or click the optional Grid button [image] on the toolbar. The icon to the left of the Grid command appears pressed in when it is displayed. Note that the grid appears in all the open images when you choose the command.

To hide the grid, choose View > Grid, <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <G>, or the button again. The grid disappears from all the images.

The grid also has a Snap To feature that you can use to align objects along it automatically when you place them close to its lines.

Related Topics

 Changing the Grid Properties

 Using the Grid and Guide Properties Dialog Box

 Using the Snap to Grid Feature

 Setting the Grid Preferences


Cut
 Cutting Parts of an Image

The Cut command removes part of an image and stores the cut data on the Windows clipboard. The data remains on the clipboard until you replace it by using either the Cut or Copy commands or you empty the clipboard.

If the image contains an active selection, the command affects the selection. If the image does not contain an active selection, the command applies to the current layer. The area cut from the background is replaced with the background color; the area cut from a layer becomes transparent.

To cut part of an image:

•	Choose Edit > Cut,

•	Press <Ctrl> + <X>, or

•	Click the Cut toolbar button [image].

•	Note: Use the <Delete> key to remove a selection or layer information without storing it on the clipboard.

Related Topics

 Copying Part of an Image

 Cutting and Copying Vector Objects

 Pasting Clipboard Items

 Emptying Contents of the Clipboard


Copying Part of an Image
 Copying Parts of an Image

When you use the Copy and Copy Merged commands, the Windows clipboard stores the copied data. This data remains on the clipboard until you empty the clipboard or you next use either the Copy or Cut commands.

Copy

If a layer contains an active selection, the Copy command copies the data inside the selection. It places a copy of it on the clipboard while leaving the original image unaffected. If a layer does not contain a selection, using the command copies either the image (if the image contains one layer) or the current layer (if the image contains more than one layer).

To use the command, choose Edit > Copy, press <Ctrl> + <C>, or click the Copy button [image] on the toolbar.

Copy Merged

The Copy Merged command copies data from all the layers rather than just the current layer. It then merges the information into a single layer. When copying a selection, it copies and merges the selection area from all the layers. This command is available only with multi-layered images.

To use the command, choose Edit > Copy Merged or press <Shift> + <Ctrl> + <C>.

Related Topics

 Cutting Part of an Image

 Cutting and Copying Vector Objects

 Pasting Clipboard Items

 Emptying Contents of the Clipboard


Pasting Clipboard Items

There are several commands for pasting the contents of the clipboard. Choose from the following ways:

 As a New Image

 As a New Layer

 As a New Selection

 As a Transparent Selection

 Into a Selection

If you are pasting an animation, you can paste it as multiple Paint Shop Pro files.

 Paste AS Animation as Multiple Images

If the clipboard contains vector information, you can paste it as a new vector selection.

 Paste as New Vector Selection Command

Related Topics

 Cutting Part of an Image

 Copying Part of an Image

 Emptying Contents of the Clipboard


Paste as a New Image
Pasting as a New Image

When you choose this command, Paint Shop Pro creates a new image from the contents of the clipboard.

To use the command, do one of the following:

•	Choose Edit > Paste > As New Image,

•	Press <Ctrl> + <V>, or

•	Click the Paste as New Image button [image] on the toolbar.

If the information is in a metafile format and the WMF / Import option is not set to use the file header information, Paint Shop Pro opens the Meta Picture Import dialog box.

Related Topics

 Setting WMF / Import Preferences

 Using the Meta Picture Import Dialog Box

 Pasting as a New Layer

 Pasting as a New Selection

 Pasting as a Transparent Selection

 Pasting into the Selection

 Pasting Images from Animation Shop

 Pasting Vector Objects


Paste as New Layer
Pasting as a New Layer

You can paste the clipboard contents as a new layer into any image that supports layers. Paint Shop Pro uses the data to create a new layer above the current layer.

To use the command, do one of the following:

•	Choose Edit > Paste > As New Layer,

•	Press <Ctrl> + <L>, or

•	Click the optional Paste as New Layer button [image] on the toolbar.

If the information is in a metafile format and the WMF / Import option is not set to use the file header information, Paint Shop Pro opens the Meta Picture Import dialog box.

Related Topics

 Setting WMF / Import Preferences

 Using the Meta Picture Import Dialog Box

 Pasting as a New Image

 Pasting as a New Selection

 Pasting as a Transparent Selection

 Pasting into the Selection

 Pasting Images from Animation Shop

 Pasting Vector Objects

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Paste as New Selection
Pasting as a New Selection

When you paste the clipboard contents as a new selection, Paint Shop Pro adds it as a floating selection above the current layer.

If the image already contains a floating selection, it is defloated and deselected before the new floating selection is pasted.

To paste data as a new selection:

1	Open or select the image into which you want to paste the clipboard contents.

2	Do one of the following:

•	Choose Edit > Paste > As New Selection,

•	Press <Ctrl> + <E>, or

•	Click the Paste as New Selection button [image] on the toolbar.

3	If the data is in a metafile format and the WMF / Import option is not set to use the file header information, Paint Shop Pro opens the Meta Picture Import dialog box.

4	Use the mouse to position the selection.

5	After you have positioned the selection, click once to release it.

Related Topics

 Setting WMF / Import Preferences

 Using the Meta Picture Import Dialog Box

 Pasting as a New Image

 Pasting as a New Layer

 Pasting as a Transparent Selection

 Pasting into the Selection

 Pasting Images from Animation Shop

 Pasting Vector Objects

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Paste as Transparent Selection
Pasting as a Transparent Selection

When you paste the clipboard contents as a transparent selection, Paint Shop Pro makes the current background color in the selection transparent, and it then pastes the remaining data to the image as a selection.

To paste data as a transparent selection:

1	Open image into which you want to paste the clipboard contents.

2	Do one of the following:

•	Choose Edit > Paste > As Transparent Selection,

•	Press <Shift> + <Ctrl> + <E>, or

•	Click the Paste as Transparent Selection button [image] on the toolbar.

Paint Shop Pro pastes the data as a floating selection above the current (active) layer.

3	If the data is in a metafile format and the WMF / Import option is not set to use the file header information, Paint Shop Pro opens the Meta Picture Import dialog box.

4	Use the mouse to position the selection.

5	After you have positioned the selection, click once to release it.

Related Topics

 Setting WMF / Import Preferences

 Using the Meta Picture Import Dialog Box

 Pasting as a New Image

 Pasting as a New Layer

 Pasting as a New Selection

 Pasting into the Selection

 Pasting AS Animation as Multiple Images

 Pasting Vector Objects

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Paste into Current Selection
Pasting into the Selection

You can paste the clipboard data into a floating or non-floating selection. Paint Shop Pro replaces the contents of the selection with the clipboard data.

To paste data into a selection:

1	Create the selection into which you want to paste the clipboard contents.

2	Do either of the following:

•	Choose Edit > Paste > Into Selection, or

•	Press <Shift> + <Ctrl> + <L>.

3	If the data is in a metafile format and the WMF / Import option is not set to use the file header information, Paint Shop Pro opens the Meta Picture Import dialog box.

4	The pasted contents appear in the image. If the selection into which the contents are pasted is a different size than the item being pasted, the clipboard contents are resized to fit the current selection.

Related Topics

 Setting WMF / Import Preferences

 Using the Meta Picture Import Dialog Box

 Pasting as a New Image

 Pasting as a New Layer

 Pasting as a New Selection

 Pasting as a Transparent Selection

 Pasting AS Animation as Multiple Images

 Pasting Vector Objects


Importing Images from Animation Shop

If you are working in Animation Shop, you can export an animation into Paint Shop Pro, edit the frames, and then update them back to Animation Shop. When the frames are exported to Paint Shop Pro, they remain linked to the original animation.

To import frames into Paint Shop Pro:

1	In Animation Shop, select individual frames or choose Edit > Select All to select the entire animation.

2	Choose File > Export Frames to Paint Shop Pro. Paint Shop Pro opens, and each frame is pasted into the program as an individual image with a transparent background and one layer.

As mentioned above, the new images are linked to their original frames. This makes it easy to apply any changes you make back to the original frames. Choose Edit > Update Back to Animation Shop, and the original animation is updated automatically.

You can also use the clipboard to paste one or more Animation Shop frames as Paint Shop Pro images. However, if you use this method, the images are not linked to their original frames. To apply changes to the original animation, you need to cut or copy each image and paste it back into its original frame.

To use the clipboard, select one or more frames of the animation and choose Edit > Copy. Open Paint Shop Pro, if necessary, and choose Edit> Paste AS Animation as Multiple Frames.


Exporting to Animation Shop
Updating Back to Animation Shop

When you export frames to Paint Shop Pro using Animation Shop’s File > Export Frames to Paint Shop Pro command, each frame becomes a new image. These images are linked to their original frames. This gives you the convenience of updating changes back to the animation without having to cut and paste between programs.

To update changes back to the original frame:

In Paint Shop Pro, click the image you want to update to make it active.

Choose Edit > Update Back to Animation Shop.

Changes you have made to the image are applied to the original animation frame. The image remains in the Paint Shop Pro workspace so that you can continue to edit it.

Note that when animations are linked to the Paint Shop Pro images, you cannot close Animation Shop until after all the images you have exported to Paint Shop Pro have been closed.


Emptying Contents of the Clipboard

When you use the Cut and Copy functions, the data you have cut or copied is placed on the Windows clipboard, an area of your computer’s memory used for temporary storage. You can then paste data from the clipboard to another layer, to another image, or as a new image. If the amount of data on the clipboard is very large, it can consume a considerable amount of memory and slow down your computer.

To empty (erase) the data from the clipboard, choose Edit > Empty > Clipboard. Note, however, that this removes the clipboard contents, making the data unavailable for pasting.

When you exit Paint Shop Pro with data still on the clipboard, you can choose to be prompted to remove it. Set this option in the Miscellaneous tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box.

Related Topic

 Setting the Miscellaneous Tab Preferences


 Changing the Image Size

When you want to resize an image but not crop it or add new canvas around it, use the Resize command. Changing the size of the image is called resampling. If you are creating a web page and have an image that is too large to fit, you can resize it. You can also reduce the number of pixels in an image to make it download more quickly.

To open the Resize dialog box, choose Image > Resize or click the optional Resize button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Resize Dialog Box

•	Note: To change the dimensions of the image by adding or removing pixels from the edges, use the Canvas Size command.

Related Topics

 Changing the Canvas Size

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


 Using the Resize Dialog Box

Use the Resize dialog box when you want to resize an image but not crop it or add new canvas around it. To change the dimensions of the image by adding pixels to or removing them from the edges of the image, use the Change Canvas Size dialog box.

To use the Resize dialog box:

1	Select a method for resizing the image. You have three options:

•	Pixel Size, where you select a new size by choosing a new measurement in pixels,

•	Percentage of Original, where you select a new size based on a percentage increase or decrease from the original, and

•	Actual/Print Size, where you select a new size by changing the resolution or the dimensions. Note that the two are linked.

2	Use the numeric edit controls to enter new measurements in the Width and Height boxes of the selected panel. In the Actual/Print Size panel, you can also change the resolution.

3	In the Resize Type box, select the type of resizing for Paint Shop Pro to apply. There are four choices:

•	Smart size, where Paint Shop Pro chooses the best algorithm based on the current image characteristics.

•	Bicubic resample, which uses a process called interpolation to minimize the raggedness normally associated with expanding an image. As applied here, interpolation smoothes out rough spots by estimating how the "missing" pixels should appear, and then filling them with the appropriate color. It produces better results than the Pixel resize method with photo-realistic images and with images that are irregular or complex. Use Bicubic resample when enlarging an image.

•	Bilinear resample, which reduces the size of an image by applying a similar method as Bicubic resample. Use it when reducing photo-realistic images and images that are irregular or complex.

•	Pixel Resize, where Paint Shop Pro duplicates or removes pixels as necessary to achieve the selected width and height of an image. It produces better results than the resampling methods when used with hard-edged images.

4	In an image with more than one layer, select the “Resize all Layers” check box to resize the entire image. Leave the box unchecked to resize only the active layer.

5	To change the proportions of the image, select the “Maintain aspect ratio of” check box and type a new ratio for the image width. Aspect ratio is the relationship of the image’s width to height. By default, the Aspect ratio box displays the image’s current aspect ratio.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the changes.

•	Note: After resizing, many images can be improved by using the Sharpen filter.

Bilinear and Bicubic resampling are available only for grey scale images and 24-bit images. To resample an image with a lower color depth, do the following:

1	Increase the image’s color depth.

2	Resize the image.

3	Reduce the image’s color depth to the original depth.

Related Topics

 Using the Change Canvas Size Dialog Box

 Using the Sharpen Filters

 Increasing Color Depth

 Decreasing Color Depth


 Changing Canvas Size

Changing the canvas size changes the dimensions of the image by adding pixels to or removing them from the edges of the image. You can increase or decrease the canvas on a specific side or around the entire image. When you are increasing the canvas size, Paint Shop Pro adds pixels using the current background color. Decreasing the canvas size produces the same result as cropping the image.

•	Note: To change the image resolution, use the Resize command, not the Canvas Size command. When you use the Resize command, you force the entire image into a larger or smaller area.

Opening the Change Canvas Size Dialog Box

Use the Change Canvas Size dialog box to select the number of pixels to add or remove. To open the dialog box, choose Image > Canvas Size or click the optional Canvas Size button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Change Canvas Size Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Resizing an Image

 Selecting Foreground and Background Colors

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


 Using the Change Canvas Size Dialog Box

Use the Change Canvas Size dialog box to change the dimensions of the image. Because the current background color is used for pixels added to the background layer of image, select a background color before opening the dialog box.

To change the image resolution, use the Resize dialog box, not the Canvas Size dialog box.

Using the Change Canvas Size Dialog Box

To change the size of the image canvas:

1	In the Dimensions panel, enter a new size (in pixels) for the image in the New Width and New Height boxes. You can type a number or use the spin controls. The current width and height are displayed for your reference.

2	Select the placement of the image in the new canvas.

•	To center the image in the new canvas, select both the “Center Image Horizontally” and the “Center Image Vertically” check boxes. The boxes below them become unavailable and Paint Shop Pro adds or removes pixels evenly around the image.

•	To center the image horizontally, select the “Center Image Horizontally” check box. The Left and Right boxes become unavailable and Paint Shop Pro adds or removes pixels evenly to the left and right sides of the image.

•	To center the image vertically, select the “Center Image Vertically” check box. The Top and Bottom boxes become unavailable and Paint Shop Pro add or removes pixels evenly to the top and bottom sides of the image.

•	To position the image off-center, clear the check boxes.

3	If you have not selected both check boxes, use the Image Placement boxes to position the image. The Top and Bottom boxes control the vertical placement; the Left and Right control the horizontal placement. Each pair of boxes works in unison—as you increase the numbers in one box, the numbers in the other box decrease.

4	After positioning the image, click OK to close the dialog box and apply the changes.

•	Notes: When increasing the canvas size:
On the background layer, Paint Shop Pro uses the active background color for the new pixels.
On other layers, Paint Shop Pro makes the new pixels transparent.

Related Topics

 Selecting Foreground and Background Colors

 Using the Resize Dialog Box


 Cropping an Image

Cropping eliminates areas of an image. It has the same effect as using the Change Canvas Size dialog box to reduce the dimensions of an image. If a scanned image contains unwanted areas, cropping it should be your first step. You reduce the memory needed to edit the image and, by eliminating extraneous areas of color, you will make better color corrections. After you have cropped the image, you can rotate it to correct any alignment problems.

Paint Shop Pro provides three ways to crop an image:

•	Using the Crop tool [image],

•	Using the Crop Area dialog box, and

•	Using the Crop to Selection command.

•	Notes: When you crop a multi-layered image, you crop all layers of the image.
You can not apply the Crop to Selection command to a floating selection.

Crop Tool

When you use the Crop tool, you select the area of the image you want to keep. The area outside the rectangle is deleted.

To use the Crop tool:

1	Click the Crop tool button [image] on the toolbar.

2	Place the cursor over the image at a corner of the area you want to keep.

3	Press the left mouse button and drag. A rectangle appears. The area inside the rectangle will be saved; the area outside the rectangle will be cropped.

4	When the rectangle encloses the area you want to keep, release the mouse button.

5	To change the area the rectangle encloses, do any of the following:

•	Click one of the rectangle’s sides and drag to move it,

•	Click inside the rectangle and drag to enclose a different area, or

•	Right-click to remove the rectangle and start over.

6	To crop the image, either:

•	Double-click inside the rectangle, or

•	Click the Crop Image button [image] on the Crop tab of the Tool Options palette.

Crop to Selection Command

The Crop to Selection command becomes available whenever an image contains a non-floating selection. Use it with irregularly shaped selections. It deletes everything except the selection and reduces the image size to the length and width of the selection.

To apply the command, choose Image > Crop to Selection or press <Shift> + <R>.

 Creating a Selection

Crop Area Dialog Box

If you know the coordinates of the image area you want to crop to or if you want to crop the area of the image that does not contain any data, use the Crop Area dialog box.

To open the dialog box, double-click the Crop tool button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Crop Area Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Using the Change Canvas Size Dialog Box

 Making Color Corrections

 Rotating an Image


Using the Crop Area or Select Area Dialog Box

The Crop Area and Select Area dialog boxes are identical. You use the Crop Area dialog box to crop around a specific area and the Select Area dialog box to select it.

Use the options in the dialog boxes provide four ways to:

•	Crop or select an area by entering its coordinates,

•	Crop around or use a current selection,

•	Crop or select a rectangular area using the coordinates of an irregularly shaped selection, and

•	Crop or select the opaque area of a layer or image.

•	Note: To crop around a selection, create the selection before opening the Crop Area dialog box. If the image does not contain a selection, the Surround current selection option is unavailable.

Opening the Dialog Boxes

To open the Select Area dialog box, double-click the Selection tool [image].

To open the Crop Area dialog box, double-click the Crop tool [image].

Using the Dialog Boxes

To use the dialog boxes:

1	At the bottom of the dialog box, choose one of the four crop or selection options:

•	Custom size and position, where you select the area.

•	Surround current selection, where the selected area is used. This option is available only if the image contains a selection. If the image contains an irregularly-shaped selection, Paint Shop Pro creates a rectangle from the coordinates.

•	Select opaque area – current layer, where the areas of the layer that contain data are selected or preserved.

•	Select opaque area – merged, where all areas of the image that contain data are selected or preserved.

2	If you have chosen the Custom size and position option, enter the coordinates in the boxes at the top of the dialog box.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box. One of the following occurs:

•	If you are using the Select Area dialog box, a marquee appears around the selected area.

•	If you are using the Crop Area dialog box, a rectangle appears around the area to be cropped to.

4	To change the area to be cropped:

•	Place the cursor inside the rectangle and drag to move it,

•	Place the cursor on an edge of the rectangle and drag to increase or decrease it, or

•	Place the cursor on a corner of the rectangle and drag to increase or decrease it.

5	To crop the image, click the Crop Image button [image] on the Crop tab of the Tool Options palette.

Related Topic

 Creating a Selection


 Adding Borders to an Image

Adding borders places a colored frame around an image, increasing the dimensions of the image by the width of the frame. Paint Shop Pro uses the background color for the border.

You need to flatten multi-layered images before opening the Add Borders dialog box.

Opening the Add Borders Dialog Box

To open the Add Borders dialog box, choose Image > Add Borders or click the optional Add Borders button [image] on the toolbar. If the image contains more than one layer, Paint Shop Pro will display a message stating that it must flatten the image before opening the dialog box.

 Using the Add Borders Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Flattening an Image

 Selecting Background Colors

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


 Using the Add Borders Dialog Box

Use the Add Borders dialog box to place borders around the outside of your image.

Before using this dialog box:

•	Select the border color by selecting a new background color.

•	Flatten the image if it contains more than one layer.

To add borders to an image:

1	To add borders equally on all sides, select the “Symmetric” check box. To add borders of unequal width, leave the check box unchecked.

2	Enter the border size in pixels in the four boxes. If you have selected the Symmetric option, the boxes are linked—changing the width in one box automatically changes the width in the others.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and add the borders to the image.

Related Topic

 Selecting Foreground and Background Colors

 Flattening an Image


 Cloning Part of an Image

Use the Clone brush to copy part of an image to another location. You can clone within an image, between Raster layers, or between two greyscale or 24-bit color images. For example, if a photograph has a flaw against a multi-toned or multicolored background, such as skin or cloth, you can use the Clone brush to copy the background over the flaw.

When you use the Clone brush, you work with two image areas:

•	The source area, which is the area you copy from. It contains the data you are copying.

•	The target area, which is the area you copy to. It can be within the same image or in another image of equal color depth.

Setting the Clone Brush Options

To set the Clone brush options:

1	Activate the Clone brush by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or in the Tool Selection menu of the Tool Options palette.

2	On tab 1 of the Tool Options palette, set the brush tip shape and other options. When the “Build Up Brush” check box is selected, each clone stroke applies more of the copied data. When the check box is cleared, the cloning is applied only on the first brush stroke over the area.

3	Click tab 2 to bring it to the front.

4	Select a mode from the Clone mode drop down box. The mode controls the position of the source area, or reference point, for cloning each time you release the mouse button and then press it again to resume cloning. The two modes are:

•	Aligned mode, in which the source area moves with the brush each time you release the mouse. When you release and then re-click the mouse, the brush resumes cloning the image relative to the distance from the source area.

•	Non-aligned mode, in which the source area does not move when you release the mouse. Each time you release and then re-click the mouse, the starting point for cloning returns to source area.

5	Select the “Sample merged” check box to clone all visible data rather than just the data from the current layer. If the check box is not selected, only the data on the current layer when the source point was defined is cloned.

6	To add a textured effect when cloning, select a foreground/stroke texture on the Color palette. The background/fill texture is not applicable.

 Using the Clone Brush

Related Topics

 Selecting Brush Tip Options

 Copying Part of an Image


 Using the Clone Brush

When you clone from one image to another, make the two have the same color depth before you begin.

•	Notes: The Clone brush can be used only on a 24-bit color or a greyscale image.
To confine the cloning to a specific area, create a selection before cloning.

To clone part of an image:

1	Position the cursor over the part of the image that you want to copy. Set the source area by doing either of the following:

•	Right-clicking the source area once. Your computer beeps to indicate that you have selected the source area.

•	Pressing <Shift> and clicking the source area.

2	To place the cloned image on a specific layer or in a selection, select that layer or area now. Paint Shop Pro clones only within the selection.

3	Move the cursor to the area you want to start copying the image. This can be within the same image or in another image of the same color depth.

4	Press and hold the left mouse button. Crosshairs appear over the source area. The crosshairs indicate which pixel you are copying.

5	Drag the mouse to clone from the source area to the target area.

6	Release the mouse button to end the Clone brush stroke.

7	To resume copying, start over at step 5. Remember that the location of the source area depends on the clone mode.

Related Topics

 Creating a Selection

 Increasing Color Depth


 Retouching an Image

Paint Shop Pro offers several Retouch modes. Some are like the Color Adjustment commands, and others are like photo retouching effects. Use the Retouch brush when you want to paint with the effect rather than apply it to the entire image or selection. Although the tool uses the same brush tips as the other brushes, you don’t use it to apply paint. You use it to lighten, emboss, change the saturation, and make other retouches to your image.

•	Note: Each mode of the Retouch brush now retains its brush tip setting.

Selecting the Retouch Options

1	Activate the Retouch brush by clicking its button [image] on the Tool palette or in the Tool Selection menu of the Tool Options palette.

2	On the first tab of the Tool Options palette set the brush tip shape, size, hardness and other options.

3	Note that the “Build up” option does not work with the Retouch tool, so you are not able to select its check box.

4	In the Retouch mode drop-down box (to the right of the “Build up” check box), select a mode. The mode settings are explained after these directions.

5	Click the second tab to bring it to the front.

6	Select the “Sample merged” check box to retouch all visible data rather than just the data from the current layer. When you don’t select the check, the retouch brush only affects the data on the current layer.

7	To add a textured effect when cloning, select a foreground/stroke texture on the Color palette. The background/fill texture is not applicable.

 Using the Retouch Brush

Retouch Tool Mode Settings

Lighten RGB	Saturation Down
Darken RGB	Lightness Up
Soften	Lightness Down
Sharpen	Hue Up
Emboss	Hue Down
Smudge	Saturation to Target
Push	Lightness to Target
Dodge	Hue to Target
Burn	Color to Target
Saturation Up
Note that the Lighten RGB, Darken RGB, Soften, Sharpen, Emboss, Smudge, and Push modes work on both greyscale and 24-bit images. The other modes of the Retouch tool work only on images of 24-bit color.


Using the Retouch Brush

The Retouch brush is usually used on specific areas of an image. It is generally easier to retouch an image if you zoom in on this area to get a closer view. If you want to limit the retouching to a specific area, make a selection of it before using the brush.

To retouch an image:

1	Click the image where you want the brush stroke to start.

2	Drag the cursor to apply the effect.

3	Release the mouse button to end the brush stroke.

Related Topics

 Creating a Selection

 Using the Zoom Feature


Images in the Workspace

The images that are open and minimized in the Paint Shop Pro workspace are displayed at the bottom of the Window menu. A check mark indicates the active image. To make a different image active, chose it from the list. The check mark appears next to the name you have chosen.


Retouch Tool Options Palette Tab 1


Adding Picture Frames
Adding a Picture Frame

Paint Shop Pro contains a variety of picture frames that you can add to your image as a separate layer. Choose from several types of wood, metal, stone, and other decorative surfaces.

To add a picture frame, you select the frame and choose whether to place it inside or outside the edges of the image. If the image contains transparent areas outside the frame, you select a color with which to fill the areas. Paint Shop Pro creates the frame on a new layer named “Picture Frame.”

After you have added a frame, you can change its color. Make the layer containing the frame active, and then adjust the hue of the layer using the Hue/Saturation/Lightness dialog box.

•	Note: Because the picture frame is added as a new layer, your image must be 24-bit or greyscale to use this feature.

To open the first page (Frame Selection page) of the Picture Frame Wizard, choose Image > Picture Frame.

 Using the Frame Selection Page

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Hue/Saturation/Lightness Dialog Box

 Creating a Custom Picture Frame


Frame Selection Page

Because a picture frame is added as a new layer, the image must be 24-bit or greyscale to make the Picture Frame command available.

To use the Frame Selection page:

1	Select a frame from the drop-down list. A thumbnail of the frame appears as you make your selection.

2	Click the Next button to proceed to the next page.

The fit of the frame to the image determines which page appears next:

•	If the frame completely encloses the image, a page that contains the options for positioning the frame inside or outside the canvas appears.

 Using the Frame Placement Page

•	If the image extends beyond the frame, you need to choose a color for this area outside the frame. In this case, the second page contains your color options.

 Using the Transparent Area Color Selection Page

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Transparent Area Color Selection Page

Use this page to select a color for the area of the image that appears outside the frame.

The drop-down list displays the available colors. Select the color you want to apply, and then click the Next button to open the Frame Placement page.

 Using the Frame Placement Page

To return to the previous page, click Back. To close the wizard without applying a frame, click Cancel.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Frame Placement Page

Use this page to choose whether to place the frame inside or outside the borders of the image:

•	If you select “Frame inside of the image,” Paint Shop Pro resizes the frame to fit within the edges of the image. Part of the image is covered by the picture frame, and the dimensions of the image are not altered.

•	If you select “Frame outside of the image,” Paint Shop Pro increases the canvas size to accommodate the frame. The original image is not covered, and the dimensions of the image are increased by the size of the frame. The new canvas uses the current background color.

Click the Finish button. Paint Shop Pro closes the Wizard, resizes the frame so that is fits the image, and, if necessary, fills the area between the frame and the image edge with the selected color. The frame appears in the image as a new layer named “Picture Frame.” Note that if the width and height differ by a considerable amount, the frame appears thicker along the shorter sides.

To return to a previous page, click Back. To close the wizard without applying a frame, click Cancel.

 Using the Transparent Area Color Selection Page

 Using the Frame Selection Page


Changing Image Orientation
Flipping and Mirroring

The Flip and Mirror commands change the image orientation. The Flip command reverses an image along its vertical axis, and the Mirror command reverses the image along its horizontal axis. You can flip and mirror an image, layer, or selection of any color depth. When you use these commands on a selection, the area that is flipped or mirrored becomes a floating selection, leaving the original image unchanged.

Flip

Flipping a selection, layer, or image reverses it vertically. What was the top becomes the bottom, and vice-versa.

To use the command, choose Image > Flip, press <Ctrl> + <I>, or click the optional Flip button [image] on the toolbar.

Mirror

Mirroring a selection, layer, or image reverses it horizontally. What was the left side becomes the right side, and what was the right side becomes the left.

To use the command, choose Image > Mirror, press <Ctrl> + <M>, or click the optional Mirror button [image] on the toolbar.

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Rotating an Image

Rotating an image moves it around its center point. You can rotate a selection, layer, or image of any color depth using the Rotate dialog box. It is a convenient command for re-aligning scanned images that are crooked.

Opening the Rotate Dialog Box

To open the Rotate dialog box, choose Image > Rotate, press <Ctrl> + <R>, or click the optional Rotate button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Rotate Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


 Using the Rotate Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to rotate a selection, layer, or image of any color depth.

To rotate an image, layer, or selection:

1	Select the direction of rotation by clicking the Direction's option button or its text. Right is clockwise; left is counter-clockwise.

2	Set the degrees of rotation:

•	To rotate in quarter-circle increments, click the 90, 180, or 270-degree option.

•	To rotate by any other amount, type the value in the Free box.

3	To rotate every layer in a multi-layer image, select the “All layers” check box. Clear the check box to rotate only the current layer. When this check box is selected or when the image consists of a single background layer, the canvas size changes to accommodate the rotated image.

4	Click OK to close the dialog box and rotate the image.


Splitting Channels

An image stores its color information in channels. The information contained in the channels depends on the color method being used to define the image. With Paint Shop Pro, you have three choices for splitting the channels.

When you separate these channels, Paint Shop Pro creates individual greyscale images that you can edit. You can use these images to create interesting effects. For example, you can split an image into its HSL channels, apply a filter to the Lightness channel, and then recombine the channels. You can also split an image and use one of the channels to create a mask.

When you split the channels of an image, you create new images; the original image is not affected. Each new image is named after its channel. For example, an HSL image will be split into three separate images with the names “Hue,” “Saturation,” and “Lightness.”

To split an active image, choose Colors > Channel Splitting, and then RGB, HSL, or CMYK.

Related Topics

 Color Definition Methods

 Combining Channels

 Creating a Mask


Combining Channels

If you have split an image into its color channels, you can combine the channels to recreate the original image or combine other channels to create various effects. The three Channel Combining dialog boxes all operate in the same way.

To open a Channel Combining dialog box, choose Colors > Channel Combining > and then one of the three methods from the submenu. The RGB, HSL, or CMYK Combining dialog box opens

To combine channels:

1	Select the Source Images, which are the greyscale images to be combined. You can use source images that were generated by splitting an image’s color channels, or you can select other images:

•	If you generated the source images by splitting the channels of an image, select the “Sync…” check box to have Paint Shop Pro use the channels from the selected image.

•	If the source images were not created by splitting the channels of an image, use the drop down boxes to select a greyscale image for each channel.

2	Click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro creates an image by combining the greyscale images into color channel data.

Related Topics

 Splitting Channels

 Color Definition Methods


Greyscale
 Creating a Greyscale Image

A greyscale image is an 8-bit image whose palette contains 256 shades of grey. Because it can contain only 256 shades, converting an image with more colors into a greyscale image automatically reduces it to an 8-bit image.

The Greyscale command removes the colors from an image and replaces each color with a grey matching its luminance value. The effect is similar to a black-and-white photograph.

To convert an image to greyscale:

•	Choose Colors > Greyscale, or

•	Click the optional Greyscale button [image] on the toolbar.

Creating a Duotone Image

Creating a greyscale image is the first step in making a duotone image.

After you have made a greyscale image, do the following to convert it into a duotone image:

1	Increase color depth to 24 bits.

2	Use the Colorize dialog box to add color and adjust saturation.

Related Topics

 Increasing Color Depth

 Using the Colorize Dialog Box

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Creating a Single-Color Image
Colorizing an Image

The Colorize command converts an image to a uniform hue and saturation while leaving the lightness values unchanged. You can use it to create sepia tones (the brown seen in old photographs) and other single-color effects.

Opening the Colorize Dialog Box

To open the Colorize dialog box, either:

•	Choose Colors > Colorize, or

•	Press <Shift> + <L>.

 Using the Colorize Dialog Box


Using the Colorize Dialog Box

Apply the Colorize command to replace all colors in an image or selection with a single color and saturation while leaving the lightness values unchanged. To replace individual colors, use the Hue Map dialog box or the Color Replacer tool.

To use the Colorize dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	To update the original image automatically each time you change the settings, click the Auto Proof button [image].

3	Drag the Hue slider to the left and right, use the arrow buttons o the keyboard, or type a number in the Hue box to change the hue. Moving the slider represents moving around the color wheel. 0 is red; 43 is yellow; 85 is green; 128 is cyan; 170 is blue; 213 is magenta; 255 is back to red.

4	Drag the Saturation slider to the left or right, use the keyboard Arrow buttons, or type a number in the Saturation box to set the saturation. A value of 0 indicates no saturation; a value of 255 indicates a fully saturated image.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Using the Hue Map Dialog Box

 Using the Color Replacer


Posterizing an Image

The Posterize (pronounced with a long “o”) function reduces the number of bits per color channel. This decreases the number of colors and levels of lightness in the image or selection. The result is a flatter-looking image with bands of color rather than smooth gradients.

Opening the Posterize Dialog Box

To open the Posterize dialog box, either:

•	Choose Colors > Posterize, or

•	Press <Shift> + <Z>.

 Using the Posterize Dialog Box


Using the Posterize Dialog Box

Apply the Posterize command to reduce the number lightness levels in an image. You set a value, and the program divides the range of lightness levels (from 2 to 255) into that number of equal increments. As the number of levels decreases, it produces a flatter-looking image or selection.

To use the Posterize dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	To update the original image automatically each time you change the settings, click the Auto Proof button [image].

3	Drag the Levels slider, use the keyboard Arrow buttons, or type a number in the slider box to Posterize the image. As you lower the number, you increase the effect.

4	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

5	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.


Creating a Negative Image

Creating a Negative image replaces each pixel color with its opposite on the color wheel. The brightness value of the pixel changes to 255 minus the original value. Zero becomes 255, and 30 becomes 225. The new image is like a photographic negative. You can use this function to create a positive image from a scanned negative.

To create a negative image, choose Colors > Negative Image.

Related Topic

 Solarizing an Image


Solarizing an Image

The Solarize command produces the same effect as the Negative Image command, but lets you control the threshold level.

The threshold level is the lightness value above which all colors are inverted. You set the level, and all colors with a lightness value above that level are turned into their inverse (on the 255 scale).

Opening the Solarize Dialog Box

To open the Solarize dialog box, choose Colors > Solarize.

 Using the Solarize Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Creating a Negative Image


Using the Solarize Dialog Box

Apply the Solarize command to convert all colors in an image or selection above a specific lightness value into their inverse on the 255 scale. The threshold level is the lightness value above which all colors are inverted. You set the level, and all colors with a lightness value above that level are turned into their inverse (on the 255 scale).

To use the Solarize dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	To update the original image automatically each time you change the settings, click the Auto Proof button [image].

3	Drag the Threshold slider, use the keyboard Arrow buttons, or type a number into the box to set the threshold level. As the level increases, colors must be increasingly lighter to be inverted.

4	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

5	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.


Combining Two Images

Paint Shop Pro can combine two images to produce a third one that is the product of the color data of the two source images.

To combine two images:

1	Open the images you want to combine.

2	Choose Image > Arithmetic to open the Image Arithmetic dialog box.

3	Set the options.

4	Click OK to close the dialog box and create the new image.

 Using the Image Arithmetic Dialog Box


Using the Image Arithmetic Dialog Box

Before opening the Image Arithmetic dialog box, open the two images you want to combine.

To use the Image Arithmetic dialog box:

1	In the Source image #1 and Source image #2 drop-down boxes, select the images to combine. The size of Source image #1 determines the size of the new image.

2	From the Function panel, select a method for combining the images. The color data from the two images is combined on a pixel-by-pixel basis according to the function.

Function	New Color Value Equals
Add	Image 1 Value + Image 2 Value
Subtract	Image 1 Value - Image 2 Value
Multiply	Image 1 Value x Image 2 Value
Difference	Absolute Value of (Image 1 Value - Image 2 Value)
Lightest	Maximum of (Image 1 Value, Image 2 Value)
Darkest	Minimum of (Image 1 Value, Image 2 Value)
Average	(Image 1 value + Image 2 Value) ÷ 2
Or	Binary Or
And	Binary And
3	From the Channel panel, select the color channels to combine:

•	Select the “All channels” check box to use all the color channels in both images. This will produce a 24-bit image.

•	Select a specific channel for each image to produce a greyscale image.

4	Set the Divisor and Bias modifiers. The modifiers are applied to the color values produced by the Formula and the Channel selections.

•	The Divisor number is used to divide the color values. It can reduce the effects of the other selections.

•	The Bias number shifts each color value by a fixed amount. The number is added to the color value produced by the Formula, Channel, and Divisor selections.

5	Select or clear the “Clip color values” check box to determine how Paint Shop Pro handles final color values greater than 255 and less than 0.

Check box setting	If value is less than 0	If value is more than 255
Selected	Value = 0	Value = 255
Cleared	Value = 256 + Value	Value = Value - 256
6	Click OK to close the dialog box and create the new image.


Paint Shop Pro Effects

Paint Shop Pro contains several effects that can give your image a paint-like, textured, 3-D, or distorted appearance by altering edges and areas of contrast.

Effects can be applied to greyscale and 24-bit images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image, apply the effect, and then return the image to its original color depth. Also note that some effects are not available unless the image contains a selection or a layer with transparent pixels.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Artistic Effects Dialog Boxes

The Black Pencil, Charcoal, Colored Chalk, Colored Pencil, Glowing Edges, and Neon Glow effects use the same dialog box. Its general use is explained below. For information on a specific effect, select it from the Related Topics list at the bottom of this topic.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

To apply an effect:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	To update the original image automatically each time you change the settings, click the Auto Proof button [image].

3	Drag the Detail slider or type a number in the Detail box to control the number of strokes used. Increasing the Detail level increases the number of strokes and detail level.

4	Drag the Opacity slider or type a number in the Opacity box to control the strength of the effect. As the Opacity increases, the image displays more of the effect and less of its original appearance.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Using the Black Pencil Dialog Box

 Using the Charcoal Dialog Box

 Using the Colored Chalk Dialog Box

 Using the Colored Pencil Dialog Box

 Using the Glowing Edges Dialog Box

 Using the Neon Glow Dialog Box

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Black Pencil Effect

The Black Pencil effect creates a black and white image drawn in black pencil. It is similar to the Charcoal effect, but uses thinner strokes and produces a more detailed image.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Black Pencil Dialog Box

To open the Black Pencil dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Black Pencil or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Black Pencil Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Creating a Charcoal Effect

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Black Pencil Dialog Box

This effect creates a black-and-white image that looks like it has been drawn using a black pencil. It is similar to the Charcoal effect, but produces an image containing more detail.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

To use the Black Pencil dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Detail slider or type a number in the Detail box to control the number and darkness of strokes used. Increasing the Detail level increases the number of strokes and detail level.

4	Drag the Opacity slider or type a number in the Opacity box to control the strength of the effect. As the Opacity increases, the image displays more of the effect and less of its original appearance.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Charcoal Effect

The Charcoal effect creates a black and white image drawn in charcoal. It is similar to the black pencil effect, but uses thicker strokes that show less detail. Paint Shop Pro also contains a Charcoal brush in its selection of custom brushes. Use it to apply paint with a similar effect.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Charcoal Dialog Box

To open the Charcoal dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Charcoal or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Charcoal Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Paint Shop Pro Custom Brushes

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Charcoal Dialog Box

This effect creates a black-and-white image that looks like it has been drawn in charcoal. It is similar to the Black Pencil effect, but the thicker strokes produce an image containing less detail.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

To use the Charcoal dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Detail slider or type a number in the Detail box to control the number and darkness of strokes used. Increasing the Detail level increases the number of strokes and the detail.

4	Drag the Opacity slider or type a number in the Opacity box to control the strength of the effect. As the Opacity increases, the image displays more of the effect and less of its original appearance.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Creating a Black Pencil Effect

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Colored Chalk Effect

The Colored Chalk effect makes an image appear drawn in chalk using the colors in the image. It uses wider strokes than the Colored Pencil.

Paint Shop Pro also contains a Chalk brush in its selection of custom brushes. Use it to apply paint with a similar effect.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Colored Chalk Dialog Box

To open the Colored Chalk dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Colored Chalk or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Colored Chalk Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Creating a Colored Pencil Effect

 Paint Shop Pro Custom Brushes

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Colored Chalk Dialog Box

Apply this effect to make an image appear drawn in colored chalk.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

To use the Colored Chalk dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Detail slider or type a number in the Detail box to control the number and darkness of strokes used. Increasing the Detail level increases the number of strokes and detail level.

4	Drag the Opacity slider or type a number in the Opacity box to control the strength of the effect. As the Opacity increases, the image displays more of the effect and less of its original appearance.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Colored Pencil Effect

The Colored Pencil effect makes an image appear drawn in pencil using the colors in the image. Because it uses narrower strokes than the Colored Chalk, the image shows more details.

Paint Shop Pro also contains a Pencil brush in its selection of custom brushes. Use it to apply paint with a similar effect.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Colored Pencil Dialog Box

To open the Colored Pencil dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Colored Pencil or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Colored Pencil Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Paint Shop Pro Custom Brushes

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Colored Pencil Dialog Box

Apply this effect to make an image appear drawn in colored pencil.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

To use the Colored Pencil dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Detail slider or type a number in the Detail box to control the number and darkness of strokes used. Increasing the Detail level increases the number of strokes and detail level.

4	Drag the Opacity slider or type a number in the Opacity box to control the strength of the effect. As the Opacity increases, the image displays more of the effect and less of its original appearance.

3	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

5	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Blinds Effect

The Blinds effect makes the image appear to be drawn on vertical or horizontal window blinds.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Blinds Dialog Box

To open the Blinds dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Blinds or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Blinds Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Blinds Dialog Box

Apply this effect to make the image appear to be drawn on vertical or horizontal window blinds.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

To use the Blinds dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Width slider or type a number in its box to set the width of the blinds.

4	Drag the Opacity slider or type a number in its box to control the strength of the effect. As the Opacity increases, the image displays more of the effect and less of its original appearance.

5	To make edges of the blinds a color other than black, left-click the Color box to open the Color dialog box or right-click it to open the Recent Colors dialog box. Choose a new color.

6	The blinds are vertical by default. To make then horizontal, select the Horizontal check box.

7	By default, the light hits the blinds from the right side or the bottom, depending on their position. Select the Light from left/top to reverse the direction of the light. The hard edge of the blinds is opposite the light direction.

8	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

9	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

10	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Button Effect

Add interest to your Web page by creating square or rectangular buttons from any image or selection. The Buttonize effect applies a three dimensional border that makes the image or selection appear raised.

Note that Paint Shop Pro uses the background solid color for the Solid Edge option. To create a button with a colored edge, select the solid background color before opening the Buttonize dialog box.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Buttonize Dialog Box

To open the Buttonize dialog box, choose Effects > 3D Effects > Buttonize or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Buttonize Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Selecting Solid Foreground and Background Colors

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Buttonize Dialog Box

Apply this effect to create a button from any selection, layer, or flattened image.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To create a button with colored edges, select a background color before opening the Buttonize dialog box.

To use the Buttonize dialog box:

1	Use the Preview box to view the button as you configure it.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Select the Solid Edge option to add color along the edge of the button. Select the Transparent Edge option to have the image appear along the edge. Paint Shop Pro uses the background solid color for the colored edge.

4	Select a height in pixels for the button’s top and bottom edges using the Height slider.

5	Select a width in pixels for the button’s left and right edges using the Width slider.

6	Set the opacity of the edges. Dragging the slider to the right increases the opacity.

7	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

8	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Selecting Foreground and Background Colors

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Saving an Image for the Web


About the Chisel Effect

The Chisel effect adds a three-dimensional border around a selection or layer to make it appear as though it were cut out of stone. The layer must contain a selection or transparency to create the Chisel effect. The chiseled area can either be transparent, allowing the underlying colors to show through, or be created from the background color.

To use a background color, select the color before opening the Chisel dialog box.

•	Notes: A layer must contain a selection or transparency to create a Chisel effect.
You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

Opening the Chisel Dialog Box

To open the Chisel dialog box, choose Effects > 3D Effects > Chisel or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Chisel Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Creating a Selection

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Chisel Dialog Box

Apply this effect to add a three-dimensional border to make a selection or layer appear to be cut out of stone.

Before opening the Chisel Dialog Box:

•	Select the area or item to which you are applying the Chisel effect.

•	Select a solid background color if you want to color the chisel area.

•	Notes: A layer must contain a selection or transparency to create a Chisel effect.
You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

To use the Chisel dialog box:

1	Use the preview box to view the button as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over the box (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Select either the Transparent or Background color option for the chiseled area.

4	Set the size of the chiseled area in pixels by dragging the Size slider or typing a pixel value in the Size box.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Selecting Foreground and Background Colors

 Creating a Selection

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Chrome Effect

The Chrome effect gives an image a metallic look. It works best with images that have distinct areas of contrast.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Chrome Dialog Box

To open the Chrome dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Chrome or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Chrome Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Chrome Dialog Box

Apply the Chrome command to create a metallic effect in an image.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

To use the Chrome dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Flaws slider or type a value in its box to set the number of creases, or folds. Each fold is a transition between light and dark areas.

4	Drag the Brightness slider or type a value in its box to set the brightness of the chrome.

5	To use the image’s colors for the chrome, select the “Use original color” check box.

6	To make the chrome a uniform color, clear the check box, and then left-click the Color box to open the Color dialog box or right-click it to open the Recent Color dialog box. White is the default color.

7	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

8	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Cutout Effect

The Cutout effect creates the illusion that part of the image has been removed, allowing you to see through the image to a lower level. You can apply this effect only to a layer that contains a selection or is not a background layer.

•	Notes: Before opening the Cutout dialog box, select the area or item to which you are applying the Cutout effect.
You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

Opening the Cutout Dialog Box

To open the Cutout dialog box, choose Effects > 3D Effects > Cutout or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Cutout Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Creating a Selection

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Cutout Dialog Box

Apply this effect to create the illusion that part of the image has been removed and you can see through to a lower level.

•	Notes: Before opening the Cutout dialog box, select the area or item to which you are applying the effect.
You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

To use the Cutout dialog box:

1	Use the preview box to view the button as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over the box (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	In the Color panel, choose a shadow color from the Shadow color box. Left-click inside the Interior color box to open the Color dialog box; right-click to open the Recent Colors dialog box. Choose a color, and then return to the Cutout dialog box.

4	Select the “Fill interior with color” check box to replace the contents of the cutout area with a solid color.

5	If you selected the check box in the previous step, choose an interior color. Use the same method as in step 3.

6	The Vertical Offset and Horizontal Offset sliders control the alignment of the interior and outline by moving the interior. Move the Vertical slider to the right to move the interior toward the bottom of the image and to the left to move the interior toward the top. Move the Horizontal slider to the right to move the interior toward the right and to the left to move the interior toward the left.

7	In the Attributes panel, set the opacity of the shadow by dragging the Opacity slider.

8	Set the blur of the shadow by dragging the Blur slider. As you increase the Blur level, the shadow widens and its edges soften.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Creating a Selection


About the Drop Shadow Effect

The Drop Shadow effect adds a shadow behind the current selection. It is most often used to give text a three-dimensional appearance.

•	Notes: Before opening the Drop Shadow dialog box, select the area to which you are adding the drop shadow.
You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

Opening the Drop Shadow Dialog Box

To open the Drop Shadow dialog box, choose Effects > 3D Effects > Drop Shadow or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Drop Shadow Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Creating a Selection

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Drop Shadow Dialog Box

Apply this effect to add a shadow behind a selection.

•	Notes: Before opening the Drop Shadow dialog box, select the area to which you are adding the effect.
You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

To use the Drop Shadow dialog box:

1	Use the preview box to view the drop shadow as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over the box (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	In the Offset panel, drag the Vertical and Horizontal offset sliders to control the alignment of the drop shadow. Move the Vertical slider to the right to move the shadow toward the bottom of the image and to the left to move it toward the top. Move the Horizontal slider to the right to move the shadow toward the right and to the left to move it toward the left.

4	In the Attributes panel, left-click the Color box to open the Color dialog box or right-click to open the Recent Colors dialog box. Choose a color for the drop shadow.

5	Drag the Opacity slider to select the shadow’s opacity. As the opacity decreases, the drop shadow fades.

6	Drag the Blur slider to set the blur of the shadow. As the blur level increases, the appearance of the shadow softens.

7	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

8	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Creating a Selection

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


About the Feedback Effect

The Feedback effect makes the image appear reflected in concentric squares or circles.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Feedback Dialog Box

To open the Feedback dialog box, choose Effects > Reflection Effects > Feedback or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Feedback Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Feedback Dialog Box

Apply this effect to make an image appear to be reflected in a series of concentric mirrors.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

To use the Feedback dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Opacity slider or type a number in its box to control the strength of the effect. As the Opacity increases, more of the effect and less of the original image is displayed.

4	Select the number of times the image repeated by dragging the Intensity slider or typing a number in its box.

5	Use the Horizontal center slider to the position the feedback’s center horizontally in the image. The position is a percentage of the width of the image; at 50 the feedback starts at the center of the image. Increase the value to move the center to the right; decrease it to move the center to the left.

6	Use the Vertical center slider to the position the feedback’s center vertically in the image. The position is a percentage of the height of the image; at 50 the feedback starts at the center of the image. Increase the percentage to move the center nearer to the bottom edge; decrease it to move the center nearer to the upper edge.

7	The default shape of the feedback is rectangular. Select the “Elliptical” check box to make the feedback elliptical (oval).

8	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

9	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

10	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Glowing Edges Effect

The Glowing Edges effect makes the image appear to be created from neon tubes. The images edges become brightly colored, while the remainder turns black.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Glowing Edges Dialog Box

To open the Glowing Edges dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Glowing Edges or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Glowing Edges Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 About the Edge Filters

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Glowing Edges Dialog Box

Apply this effect to create an image that appears to be made from neon tubes. The program finds and colors the edges in the image. Other areas of the image become black.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

To use the Glowing Edges dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Intensity slider or type a number in its box to set the brightness of the edges. As you increase the value, more edges are displayed and they become brighter.

4	Drag the Sharpness slider or type a number in its box to control the tightness of the edges. As you increase the value, the width of edges narrows and becomes more defined.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 About the Edge Filters

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Inner Bevel Effect

The Inner Bevel effect creates a three-dimensional appearance by curving the inner edges of an object surrounded by a transparency or a selection. It does so without increasing the size of the object.

This command is available when an image has a transparent background, a colored background containing a selection, or a colored background and a layer. If a layer does not contain a selection or transparent area, the effect is applied to the edges of the layer. You can promote a selection, paste a selection as a new layer, or use the Eraser to create a layer with transparency.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
Create the selection, floating selection, or transparency before choosing the command.

Opening the Inner Bevel Dialog Box

To open the Inner Bevel dialog box, choose Effects > 3D Effects > Inner Bevel or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Inner Bevel Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Background vs. Background Layer

 Promoting a Selection

 Using the Eraser

 Using the Effect Browser


Inner Bevel dialog box
Using the Inner Bevel Dialog Box

Apply this effect to give the inside edges of a selection or an object surrounded by a transparency a three-dimensional effect. When you create the Inner Bevel effect, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
Create the selection, floating selection, or transparency before choosing the command.

About the Dialog Box Settings

The dialog box contains three panels:

•	The “Bevel” panel, where you select the bevel shape and width. The Bevel box displays a cross-section of each bevel edge.

•	The “Image” panel, where you set the appearance of the effect and the overall brightness and glossiness of the image.

•	The “Light” panel, where you set the color, direction of origin, intensity, and height of the light source.

Using the Inner Bevel Dialog Box

When an option contains both a slider and a number box, you can either drag the slider or type a number in the box to change the setting. Click the Reset button to return to the settings for the dialog box.

To use the Inner Bevel dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can edit this effect by changing its settings.

4	In the “Bevel” panel, click the Bevel box or bar and select the bevel shape. Use the Width setting to select the width of the beveled edge.

5	In the “Image” panel, use the Smoothness and Depth settings to shape the bevel edges. Smoothness controls the slope (sharpness) and thickness of the edges, while Depth controls the height. As the Smoothness increases, the edges become more rounded; as it decreases, they appear thinner and steeper. As Depth increases, the edges become more pronounced.

6	Use the Ambience setting to adjust the overall brightness of the image.

7	Use the Shininess setting to determine how reflective the surface appears. A higher value produces a glossy image and makes the highlights more evident; a lower value makes the highlights diminish.

8	In the “Light” panel, choose the color of the light shining on the image. The light color affects the overall color of the image. To change the light color, click a color in the image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

9	The Angle setting points to the direction of origin of the light and affects which edges appear light and shadowed. It is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

10	Use the Intensity setting to adjust the brightness of the directional light. Note that the Ambience value determines the brightness of the entire image before the Intensity is applied.

11	The Elevation setting shows the height of light source above the image. At 90°, it is positioned directly overhead. As you lower the value, the light source moves closer to the image, producing longer shadows.

12	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

13	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

14	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Neon Glow Effect

The Neon Glow effect gives an image a three-dimensional appearance by applying neon effect and heightening the contrast of the edges.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Neon Glow Dialog Box

To open the Neon Glow dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Neon Glow or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Neon Glow Dialog Box

Related Topics

 About the Edge Filters

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Neon Glow Dialog Box

Apply this effect to make an image appear drawn in neon colors.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

To use the Neon Glow dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Detail slider or type a number in the Detail box to control the number of colors used and their brightness. Increasing the Detail level increases the number of strokes and the strength of the contrast between light and dark areas.

4	Drag the Opacity slider or type a number in the Opacity box to control the strength of the effect. As the Opacity increases, more of the effect and less of the original image is displayed.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 About the Edge Filters

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Woven Pattern Effect

The Woven Pattern effect makes an image appear created with a weave pattern. You can make the strands loosely or tightly woven and fill the gaps between strands with any color.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Weave Dialog Box

To open the Weave dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Weave or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Weave Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Weave Dialog Box

Apply this effect to make an image appear to be created from woven strands.

•	Note: When you apply this effect to a selection, the weave pattern starts at the edge of the selection, not the edge of the image.
You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.

To use the Weave dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Gap size slider or type a number in its box to set the pixel size of the area between the woven strands. Increasing the gap size makes the strands appear more loosely woven.

4	To fill the area that appears between the strands with a color, select the Fill gaps check box. Clear the check box to fill the gap area with the image.

5	To select a gap color other than black, click the Gap color box. When the Color dialog box opens, choose a new color. Right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

6	Drag the Width slider or type a number in its box to set the pixel width of the woven strands.

7	To use a weave color other than black, click the Weave color box. When the Color dialog box opens, choose a new color. The weave color appears wherever the strands cross.

8	Drag the Opacity slider or type a number in its box to control the strength of the effect. As the Opacity increases, more of the effect and less of the original image is displayed.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Distorting Images

When you distort an image, you move data from one area to another. You can distort your image in four ways:

•	Using the Deformation tool directly on an image,

•	Using the Deformation Settings dialog box,

•	Choosing an effect from the Effects > Geometric menu, or

•	Choosing a Geometric effect using the Effect Browser.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the Effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Deformation Tool

 Using the Deformation Settings Dialog Box

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Deformation Tool

Use the Deformation tool to rotate, resize, skew, and distort layers, floating selections, and images. You can use this tool in two ways: You can click its button [image] on the Tool palette and then use the tool directly on the image, or you can double-click the button to open the Deformation Settings dialog box.

•	Notes: To use the Deformation tool, the image must contain a layer. You may need to promote the background to a layer.
You can apply deformations to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To deform a selection using the Deformation tool, create the selection before choosing the tool.

To use the Deformation tool directly on an image:

1	If the Tool Options palette is closed, open it.

2	Click the Deformation tool button on the Tool palette. The Deformation handles and guides appear on the image.

3	Move the cursor to the area to be deformed. The cursor will change shape whenever it is over a handle.

4	Deform the image by doing one or more of the following:

•	Resize vertically by dragging the center top and bottom handles.

•	Resize horizontally by dragging the center left and right handles.

•	Resize horizontally and vertically at the same time by dragging the corner handles.

•	Rotate by dragging the center bar.

•	Change perspective by pressing <Ctrl> while dragging any of the 4 corner handles.

•	Apply a skew/shear effect by pressing <Shift> while dragging any of the 4 center handles.

•	Distort (move the corner) by pressing <Ctrl>+<Shift> while dragging any of the 4 corner handles.

As the cursor moves over a handle, a rectangle shaped like the distortion appears.

5	To apply the deformation, either click the Apply button on the Tool Options palette or double-click the image.

6	To cancel the deformation, click the Cancel button on the Tool Options palette.

 Using the Deformation Settings Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Background vs. Background Layer


Using the Deformation Settings Dialog Box

•	Notes: To use the Deformation Settings dialog box, the image must contain a layer. You may need to promote the background to a layer.
You can apply deformations to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To deform a selection using the Deformation Settings dialog box, create the selection before opening the dialog box.

To use the Deformation Settings dialog box:

1	Double-click the Deform tool button on the Tool palette to open the Deformation Settings dialog box.

2	The boxes in the X column control the horizontal distortion; the boxes in the Y column control the vertical distortion:

•	Position determines the X and Y coordinates of the left most corner point.

•	Scale controls the horizontal and vertical resizing.

•	Shear controls the offset of a side. Enter positive values to shear to the right or downward; enter negative values to shear to the left or upward. At .5, a side shears 50% of its length.

•	Perspective controls the length of a side to its opposite. Enter a positive number to shorten a side; enter a negative number to lengthen a side. At .5, one side is half the length of the opposing side.

•	Angle is the rotation around the center point. Set the angle between 0 and 259 to rotate clockwise.

3	After entering the values, click OK to close the dialog box.

4	To apply the Deformation, either click the Apply button on the Tool Options palette or double-click the image.

If you click another image or a command before applying the deformation, Paint Shop Pro displays a message asking to apply the deformation.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Deformation Tool

 Background vs. Background Layer


Applying the Circle Effect

The Circle effect is a deformation that turns the image or selection into a sphere.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To apply the Circle effect, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Circle or select it using the Effect browser.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


About the Horizontal Cylinder Effect

The Horizontal Cylinder effect is a deformation that stretches the image or selection as though wrapping it around a horizontal cylinder by a specific percentage.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Horizontal Cylinder Dialog Box

To open the Horizontal Cylinder dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Cylinder - Horizontal or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Cylinders, Pinch, and Punch Dialog Boxes

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


About the Vertical Cylinder Effect

The Vertical Cylinder effect is a deformation that stretches the image or selection as though wrapping it around a vertical cylinder by the percentage you select.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Vertical Cylinder Dialog Box

To open the Vertical Cylinder dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Cylinder - Vertical or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Cylinders, Pinch, and Punch Dialog Boxes

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Applying the Pentagon Effect

The Pentagon effect is a deformation that transforms the image or selection into a pentagon.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To apply the Pentagon effect, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Pentagon or select it using the Effect browser.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Horizontal Perspective Effect

The Horizontal Perspective effect is a deformation that creates a perspective along the horizontal axis by narrowing the left or right side of the image or selection.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Horizontal Perspective Dialog Box

To open the Horizontal Perspective dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Perspective - Horizontal or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Perspective Dialog Boxes

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Vertical Perspective Effect

The Vertical Perspective effect is a deformation that creates a perspective along the vertical axis by narrowing the top or bottom of the image or selection.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Vertical Perspective Dialog Box

To open the Vertical Perspective dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Perspective - Vertical or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Perspective Dialog Boxes

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Perspective Dialog Boxes

The Horizontal and Vertical Perspective dialog boxes work in the same way, but they affect the opposite axes. The Horizontal Perspective narrows the left or right side of the image, while the Vertical Perspective narrows the top or bottom side.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Perspective Dialog Boxes

To use the dialog boxes:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the % Difference slider or type a number in the % Difference box to right. The % Difference is the length of the shortened edge to the unchanged edge. Moving the slider to the left or typing a negative number reduces the length of the left or upper side of the image. Moving the slider to the right or typing a positive number reduces the length of the right or bottom side of the image.

4	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

5	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Pinch Effect

The Pinch effect is a deformation that makes the image or selection appear pinched in by pushing everything toward the middle.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Pinch Dialog Box

To open the Pinch dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Pinch or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Cylinders, Pinch, and Punch Dialog Boxes

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


About the Punch Effect

The Punch effect is a deformation that makes an image or selection appear punched out from behind so that the middle of it expands toward the outer edges.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Punch Dialog Box

To open the Punch dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Punch or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Cylinders, Pinch, and Punch Dialog Boxes

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Pinch and Punch Dialog Boxes
Using the Cylinders, Pinch, and Punch Dialog Boxes

The Horizontal Cylinder, Vertical Cylinder, Pinch, and Punch dialog boxes work in the same way, but move the image in different directions. The Horizontal Cylinder effect stretches the image by pulling from the top and bottom to wrap it around the horizontal axis. The Vertical Cylinder effect pulls the image from the left and right to wrap it vertically. Pinching pushes everything in toward the center of the image, while Punching pushes everything out toward the edges.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Cylinders, Pinch, and Punch Dialog Boxes

To use the dialog boxes:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the % Effect slider or type a number in the % Effect box to its right. As you increase the effect, more of the image is wrapped around, pinched in, or pushed out.

4	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

5	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Ripple Effect

The Ripple effect is a deformation that creates concentric rings similar to those produced by dropping a pebble in water. Use the Spiky Halo effect to create ripple in a radial pattern.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Ripple Dialog Box

To open the Ripple dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Ripple or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Ripple Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 About the Spiky Halo Effect

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Ripple Dialog Box

The Ripple effect is a deformation that creates concentric rings around a central point, similar to circles produced by dropping a pebble in calm water. It To create ripples in a radial pattern, use the Spiky Halo effect.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Ripple Dialog Box

To use the Ripple dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Amplitude slider or type a number in the Amplitude box to control the amplitude, or distance from the trough to the crest, of each ripple.

4	Drag the Wavelength slider or type a number in the Wavelength box to control the distance from the crest of one ripple to the crest of the next.

5	Drag the Horizontal slider or type a number in the Horizontal box to move the central point of the ripples. The value is a percentage of the width of the image or selection. The default position, 50, is the center of the image or selection.

6	Drag the Vertical slider or type a number in the Vertical box to move the central point of the ripples. The value is a percentage of the height of the image or selection. The default position, 50, is the center of the image or selection.

7	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

8	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Skew Effect

The Skew effect is a deformation that tilts an image or selection along its horizontal or vertical up to 45° in either direction.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Skew Dialog Box

To open the Skew dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Skew or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Skew Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Skew Deformation Dialog Box
Using the Skew Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to tilt an image or selection along its horizontal or vertical axis up to 45° in either direction.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Skew Dialog Box

To use the Skew dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Horizontal slider or type a number in the Horizontal box to tilt the image to the left or right. Positive numbers tilt it to the right; negative numbers tilt it to the left.

4	Drag the Vertical slider or type a number in the Vertical box to tilt the image up or down. Positive numbers lower the left and raise the right side; negative numbers have the opposite effect.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Twirl Deformation

The Twirl effect is a deformation that distorts an image by twisting or whirling it around its center. You can twirl an image in either direction by up to two rotations.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Twirl Dialog Box

To open the Twirl dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Twirl or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Twirl Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Twirl Dialog Box

The Twirl effect is a deformation that whirls an image in either direction around its center point.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Twirl Dialog Box

To use the Twirl dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the Degrees slider or type a number in the Degrees box to set the direction and amount of twirl. Dragging to the right creates a clockwise twirl; dragging to the left creates a counter-clockwise twirl. You can twirl the image up to two rotations, or 720°.

4	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

5	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Wave Effect

The Wave effect is a deformation that distorts an image by creating undulating lines. You determine the amount of distortion by setting the size of the wave.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Wave Dialog Box

To open the Wave dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Wave or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Wave Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Wave Dialog Box

The Wave effect is a deformation that creates a series of undulating vertical and horizontal lines. When creating waves, you set the horizontal displacement for the vertical lines of waves and vertical displacement for the horizontal lines of waves.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Wave Dialog Box

To use the Wave dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	In the Horizontal displacement panel, drag the Amplitude slider or type a number in the Amplitude box to set the distance from the trough to the crest of each vertical ripple.

4	In the same panel, drag the Wavelength slider or type a number in the Wavelength box to set the distance from the crest of one vertical ripple to the crest of the next.

5	In the Vertical displacement panel, drag the Amplitude slider or type a number in the Amplitude box to set the distance from the trough to the crest of each horizontal ripple.

6	In the same panel, drag the Wavelength slider or type a number in the Wavelength box to set the distance between the crests of the horizontal ripples.

7	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

8	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


About the Wind Effect

The Wind effect is a deformation that blurs an image to make it look as though it has been blown by wind coming from either the left or the right.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Wind Dialog Box

To open the Wind dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Wind or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Wind Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Wind Deformation Dialog Box
Using the Wind Dialog Box

Apply this effect to make an image appear blown by the wind.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Wind Dialog Box

To use the Wind dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Select the From Left or From Right option for the wind direction.

4	Drag the Strength slider or type a number in the Strength box to control the strength of the deformation. Increasing the Strength increases the blur of the image.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Applying Filters

A filter alter each pixel’s color based on its current color and the colors of any adjacent pixels. The results can vary from a minor adjustment of a single characteristic, such as luminance, to a total alteration of an image.

You can select filters by choosing them from the Effects Browser or from the Image menu. The Effects Browser is a convenient way to preview filters. When you select a filter from the Effects Name list, the Sample preview displays its effect on the image.

•	Notes: You can apply filters to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply a filter to a selection, create the selection before choosing the filter.

Related Topics

 Using the Effect Browser

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Blurring and Softening and Image

 Sharpening an Image

 Enhancing the Edges of an Image

 Adding Noise to an Image


Using the Effect Browser

Use the Effect browser to try out effects before applying them to your image. When you select an effect from the Effect browser, Paint Shop Pro opens that effect dialog box (if there is one), where you can configure its options.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before opening the Effect browser.

To use the Effect browser:

1	Choose Image > Effect Browser. The Effect browser opens.

2	Click an effect from the Effect name list to select it. The Sample Preview displays the result.

3	To apply the effect, click the OK button.

4	If the Effect does not have options that you can configure, Paint Shop Pro closes the dialog box and applies the effect to the image. If the effect has options, Paint Shop Pro opens the dialog box for the chosen effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Blurring and Softening an Image

There are seven Blur effects:

•	Average

•	Blur Effect

•	Blur More Effect

•	Gaussian Effect

•	Motion Effect

•	Soften Effect

•	Soften More Effect

The Blur effects are filters that smooth transitions and decrease contrast by averaging the pixels next to hard edges of defined lines and areas where there are significant color transitions. The Soften filter, which applies a uniform blur to an image can be used for photo retouching. The Soften More filter applies the effect with more intensity.

You can apply the Blur and Soften filters to an image to reduce its graininess. If you apply the filters repeatedly, you can produce motion effects.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To apply a Blur effect, choose Image > Blur > the effect or select it using the Effect browser. The Gaussian Blur, Motion Blur, and Average commands open dialog boxes that let you apply these effects with more control than the other Blur effects.

 Using the Gaussian Blur Dialog Box

 Using the Motion Blur Dialog Box

 Using the Average Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Gaussian Blur Dialog Box

Apply Gaussian Blur to an image when you want more control over the Blur effect. The Gaussian Blur effect is a filter that blends a specific number of pixels incrementally, following a bell-shaped curve. The blurring is dense in the center and feathers at the edges.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To use the Gaussian Blur dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values.

4	Set the Radius of the Blur. The Radius determines the width of the edge that is blurred.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Motion Blur Dialog Box

The Motion Blur effect is a filter that makes the image appear to be moving by adding a blur in a specific direction for a specific distance. Set the distance and direction of the blur to simulate the direction and speed you want the object to appear to be moving.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To use the Motion Blur dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To set the direction of the blur, drag the needle around the circle or type the degree (from 0 to 359) in the box.

4	Drag the slider to select the intensity. As the intensity increases, Paint Shop Pro blurs the image an increasing number of pixels in the selected direction.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Retouching an Image

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Edge Filter
Enhancing the Edges of an Image

The Edge effects are filters that accentuate the areas of contrast and edges in an image

You can choose form the following Edge effects:

•	 Dilate, which enhances the light areas of the image.

•	 Enhance, which increases the contrast along the edges in the image.

•	 Enhance More, which applies a stronger contrast to the edges in the image.

•	 Erode, which enhances the dark areas of the image.

•	 Find All, which enhances the contrasts between light and dark in the image by darkening the image and then highlighting the edges.

•	 Find Horizontal, which enhances the horizontal edges in the image using the method of the Find All effect.

•	 Find Vertical, which enhances the vertical edges in the image using the method of the Find All effect.

•	 Trace Contour, which traces a series of single-pixel lines around areas of contrast and turns the remaining pixels white.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To apply an Edge effect choose Effects > Edge > the effect or select an effect using the Effect browser.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Adding Noise

Noise refers to random patterns of pixels that give an image a grainy or textured appearance. Paint Shop Pro provides six tools for removing unwanted noise in an image and an effect for creating noise.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Adding Noise

The Add Noise effect is a filter that re-colors pixels randomly throughout the image or selection to increase its graininess.

To open the Noise dialog box, choose Effects > Noise > Add, or choose the Add Noise command in the Effect browser.

 Using the Add Noise Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Removing Noise


Using the Add Noise Dialog Box

The Add Noise effect is a filter that adds random pixels to an image. It reduces the detail of an image and adds a grainy texture. By adding a small percentage of noise to an image, you can reduce the appearance of scratches and other imperfections.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To use the Add Noise dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Drag the % Noise slider or type a number in the box to select the number of pixels covered with noise. As you increase the percentage, the more of the image is affected.

4	Select whether the Noise is displayed in a Random or Uniform pattern over the image. When you select Uniform, the Noise color more closely resembles the original pixels.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Sharpen Filters
Sharpening an Image

There are three Sharpen effects that heighten the contrast in an image:

•	Sharpen

•	Sharpen More

•	Unsharp Mask

The Sharpen effects are filters that produce the opposite effect of the Blur commands by increasing the contrast between adjacent pixels where there are significant color contrasts, usually at the edges of objects. They lighten the light pixels and darken the dark pixels. Sharpen More applies the Sharpen effect with more intensity.

You can use these effects to fix photographs that are slightly out of focus. You may get better results if you use the Unsharp Mask dialog box rather than the preset Sharpen and Sharpen More effects. With it, you can vary the thickness of the edges and the intensity of the contrast.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To apply a Sharpen effect choose Effects > Sharpen > the effect or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Unsharp Mask Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Retouching an Image

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Unsharp Mask Dialog Box

The Unsharp Mask effect is a filter that comes from the printing industry. Use it to sharpen mid to high contrast edges without enhancing the noise normally present in digital images. This effect locates adjacent pixels with the difference in lightness values that you specify, and it increases their contrast by the amount you select.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To use the Unsharp Mask dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Set the Radius, which indicates the number of pixels around an edge that are affected. 0.5 to 2 is used generally. Stay at lower ranges for on-screen images, higher ranges for high resolution printed images.

4	Set the Strength, which controls the intensity of the contrast, or sharpening effect. It is better to start with a low number and re-apply the effect, if necessary.

5	Set the Clipping, which determines how much contrast two pixels must have before they are sharpened.

6	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

7	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

8	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Retouching an Image

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Using the Pixelate Dialog Box

The Pixelate effect divides an image into rectangles or squares of a size you specify.

Note to users of earlier versions of Paint Shop Pro: This effect was previously called the Mosaic filter.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To use the Pixelate dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Select the block width and height in pixels.

4	To create square tiles, select the “Symmetric” check box. To create rectangular tiles, clear the check box.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


User Defined Filters

In Paint Shop Pro, you can create and edit your own filters. You manage them using the User Defined Filters dialog box. To open the dialog box, choose Effects > User Defined.

Applying a User Defined Filter

To apply a user defined filter:

1	In the Filter Name list, click the filter you want to apply.

2	In the “Apply To” panel, choose whether to apply the filter to the grey or color values in the image.

3	If you chose to apply the filter to the color values, select the check boxes of the colors to which you want the filter applied.

4	Click Apply to close the dialog box and apply the filter.

Creating a Use Defined Filter

To create you own filter, click the New button to open the Define New Filter dialog box.

 Creating a Filter

Editing a User Defined Filter

To edit a user defined filter:

1	In the Filter Name list, click the filter you want to edit.

2	Click the Edit button. The Edit User Defined Filter dialog box opens. This dialog box operates in the same way as the Define New Filter dialog box.

Deleting a User Defined Filter

To delete a user defined filter:

1	In the Filter Name list, click the filter you want to delete.

2	Click the Delete button.

3	When Paint Shop Pro displays the message box asking if you want to delete the filter, click Yes.


Creating a Filter

To create a filter, click the New button in the User Defined Filters dialog box to open the Define New Filter dialog box. To edit a filter, click the Edit button to open the Edit User Defined Filter dialog box, which works in the same way. You select the basic formula for the matrix, apply the division factor, and then add the bias.

The Basic Formula

A filter alters each pixel's color based on its current color and the colors of any neighboring pixels. The heart of a filter is an array of coefficients called a filter matrix.

A filter processes an image on a pixel-by-pixel basis. Each pixel's color value is multiplied by the coefficient in the matrix center, and any pixels within the matrix are multiplied by the corresponding coefficients.

The sum of the products becomes the target pixel's new value. The new value is saved in a separate bitmap so that it does not affect the remaining pixels.

The formula for this calculation is:

Where F is the filtered value of the target pixel, P is a pixel in the grid, and C is a coefficient in the matrix.

The Division Factor

You can think of the division factor as the coefficient denominator: each coefficient in the filter matrix is divided by the division factor before being applied to a pixel. In actuality, the division factor is applied to the product of the matrix calculation. The division factor changes the filter formula to:

The division factor allows you to achieve effects that would otherwise require decimal coefficients. The advantage of requiring non-decimal coefficients is execution speed: Paint Shop Pro can accelerate the filtering process by using integers to perform the math.

The Bias

The bias is added to the product of the matrix calculation and the division factor. You use the bias to shift the value of each pixel by a fixed amount. Bias adjustments are particularly useful for creating embossing effects. The bias changes the filter formula to:

Where F is the filtered value of the target pixel, P is a pixel in the grid, C is a coefficient in the matrix, D is the division factor, and B is the bias.

 Using the Define New Filter Dialog Box


Using the Define New Filter Dialog Box

Use the Define New Filter dialog box to create a filter. The Edit User Defined Filter dialog box, which you use to edit a filter, is identical to it.

To create a filter:

1	Choose Effects > User Defined. The User Defined Filters dialog box opens.

2	Click New. The Define New Filter dialog box opens.

3	Type a new filter name into the Filter name text box.

4	Enter the filter matrix values into the table at the center of the dialog box. Non-integers are truncated (chopped off at the decimal place). See the next step for help achieving the same effect as decimal coefficients.

5	Set the Division factor using the following steps:

A	Raise the decimal coefficients to integers by multiplying them by the division factor (typically 10, 100, or 1000).

B	Type the "integer-ized" coefficients in the matrix.

C	Type the division factor in the Division Factor text box. Non-integers are truncated.

6	Set the bias by typing a number in the Bias text box.

•	Non-integers are truncated.

•	Integers outside of the range of 0 to 255 are converted to fall within the range. For example, 256 becomes 0, and -1 is converted to 255.

7	After you have finished entering the filter's settings, click OK. Paint Shop Pro saves the filter and returns to the User Defined Filters dialog box.

Related Topics

 Applying a Filter

 Explanation of the Matrix, Division Factor, and Bias

 Example Filters


Example Filters

Matrix Examples

Grease	Lithograph
Grease and Lithograph use a Division Factor of 1 and a Bias of 0.

Psychedelic Distillation	Simple Emboss
Psychedelic Distillation uses a Division Factor of 1 and a Bias of 0.

Simple Emboss uses a Division Factor of 1 and a Bias of 128.

Related Topics

 Applying a Filter

 Explanation of the Matrix, Division Factor, and Bias


Making Commands Available

You can use the Picture Frame feature and the effects with 24-bit (16 million colors) and greyscale images. If the commands are unavailable (greyed-out), you probably need to increase the color depth of the image your image. To view the color depth of the image, choose Image > Image Information. In the image panel, look at the Pixel depth/colors entry. If it does not display 24/16 million, increase the color depth to make the commands available.

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors

For the Chisel, Cutout, Drop Shadow, and Bevel effects, your image must contain a selection or a layer with a transparency to make the commands available.

 Creating a Selection

 Promoting a Selection to a Layer


CurlyQs Effect

The CurlyQs effect is a deformation that you can use to turn your image into a series of rows and columns composed of curls.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the CurlyQs Dialog Box

To open the CurlyQs dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > CurlyQs or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the CurlyQs Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the CurlyQs Deformation Dialog Box
Using the CurlyQs Dialog Box

This effect is a deformation that divides the image into a series of rows and columns composed of curls.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the CurlyQs Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the CurlyQs dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	By default, the “Symmetric” check box is selected. This links the Rows and Columns values so that changing one changes the other. Clear this check box if you want an unequal number of rows and columns.

4	In the “Grid settings” panel, enter a Number of columns value to select the number of curls in each row.

5	Enter a Number of rows value to set the number of curls in each column.

6	In the “CurlyQ settings” panel, enter a Size value to set the radius of the curls. The value is a percentage of the smaller of the width of the column or height of the row.

7	For the Strength setting, the value controls the amount of rotation of each curl.

8	Choose either the Clockwise or Counter-Clockwise option to set the direction of the curls.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Kaleidoscope Effect
About the Kaleidoscope Effect

The Kaleidoscope effect turns a pie-shaped area of an image or selection into a circular pattern. The result is similar to the pattern seen in a kaleidoscope.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Kaleidoscope Dialog Box

To open the Kaleidoscope dialog box, choose Effects > Reflection Effects > Kaleidoscope or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Kaleidoscope Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Kaleidoscope Effect Dialog Box
Using the Kaleidoscope Dialog Box

Apply this effect to create a circular pattern from a pie-shaped area of an image or selection. The effect is similar to what one sees when looking through a kaleidoscope.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Using the Kaleidoscope Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Kaleidoscope dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Use the “Image sector” panel settings to select the part of the image that is used to create the circle. The program takes an area shaped somewhat like a piece of pie originating at the center of the image. The width of the outer edge of the pie is determined by the Number of petals value. Changing the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset values moves the origin of the area away from the image center. Negative horizontal values move the pie origin left. Negative vertical values move it up. The values are the percentage of the width and height of the image.

4	To set the Rotation angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Rotation angle box. The setting points to the direction of origin of the light and affects which edges appear light and shadowed. It is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle.

5	The Scale factor controls how much the pie-shaped area is enlarged or reduced when creating the kaleidoscopic pattern. As you decrease the scale, the pattern repeats itself more frequently.

6	The settings in the “Kaleidoscope settings” panel determine the number of radial and concentric repetitions of the pattern. The circumference of the circle is divided by the “Number of petals” value to determine the repetitions of the pattern. The number of repetitions controls the width of the pie. When you enter lower values, the arc is repeated fewer times.

7	In the Number of orbits control, set the number of times the circles of the pattern repeat.

8	The Radial suction value controls where in the pie the program takes the image information used to create the pattern. As you increase the value, you push the area toward the outer edge of the pie.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.


Pattern Effect
About the Pattern Effect

Use the Pattern effect to turn any image or selection into an intricate geometric pattern.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Pattern Dialog Box

To open the Pattern dialog box, choose Effects > Reflection Effects > Pattern or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Pattern Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Pattern Effect Dialog Box
Using the Pattern Dialog Box

Apply this effect to create patterns from any image or selection. These patterns can be used to create seamless tiles for the background of your Web page.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Using the Pattern Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Pattern dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Use the “Image area” panel settings to select the part of the image to use for the pattern. Change the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset values to move the origin of the pattern away from the center of the image. The values are the percentage of the width and height of the image. Negative horizontal values move the origin to the left. Negative vertical values move it toward the top. Paint Shop Pro creates a seamless pattern from the area.

4	To set the Rotation angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Rotation angle box. The setting points to the direction of origin of the light and affects which edges appear light and shadowed. It is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle.

5	The Scale factor controls the size of the pattern. The default of 0 uses the original scale of the image. As you decrease it, you shrink the pattern so it repeats itself more frequently.

6	The Number of columns and Number of rows values in the “Pattern settings” panel control the size of the area used to create the pattern. As you increase the number of rows and columns, the area used becomes smaller. Enter a Number of columns value to set the number of times the pattern is repeated from the left to right side of the image at a Scale factor of 0.

7	Enter a Number of rows value to set the number of times the pattern is repeated from the top to the bottom of the image at a Scale factor of 0.

8	Use the Horizontal shift and Vertical shift settings to move the pattern within the image window. You can place a specific section of it at the center. Use these boxes along with the Scale factor to create a seamless pattern.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.


About the Rotating Mirror Effect

The Rotating Mirror effect is a deformation that you can use to reflect an image or selection along a radial angle.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Rotating Mirror Dialog Box

To open the Rotating Mirror dialog box, choose Effects > Reflection Effects > Rotating Mirror or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Rotating Mirror Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Rotating Mirror Dialog Box

Apply the Rotating Mirror effect to reflect part of an image. You can rotate the line of reflection around the center of the image to create a reflection at any angle.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Rotating Mirror Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Rotating Mirror dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To set the angle of the rotation line, click in the Rotation angle circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the box. The angle corresponds to the degrees of a circle, so entering 0 and 180 create reflections along a vertical line. Enter 90 and 270 to create reflection along a horizontal line; enter 45, 135, 225, and 315 to create lines diagonally between two corners.

4	Change the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset values to move the center point of the reflection line away from the image center. The values are the percentage of the width and height of the image. Negative horizontal values move the reflection line to the left, while positive values move it to the right. Negative vertical values raise the reflection line, while positive values lower it. The default value of 0% splits the image in half. The Horizontal offset does not affect horizontal lines; the Vertical offset does not affect vertical lines.

5	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

6	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.


About the Spiky Halo Effect

The Spiky Halo effect is a deformation that you can use to create a radial pattern of waves or ripples. Use the Ripple deformation to create concentric waves.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Spiky Halo Dialog Box

To open the Spiky Halo dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Spiky Halo or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Spiky Halo Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 About the Ripple Deformation


Using the Spiky Halo Dialog Box

Apply the Spiky Halo effect to create a corona of waves in a radial pattern.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Spiky Halo Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Spiky Halo dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Use the “Source settings” panel to position the halo center relative to the center of the image. The values are the percentage of the width and height of the image. Negative values for the Horizontal offset control move the halo left. Negative values for the Vertical offset control move it up. Positive values move it in the opposite direction.

4	For the Radius value, set the distance from the center that the waves appear. Lower numbers start the waves closer to the center.

5	In the “Ray settings” panel, use the Amplitude value to set the apparent height of the waves. Lower values produce smoother ripples.

6	For the Frequency control, set the number of rays per quarter-circle, or each 90°.

7	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

8	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.


Warp Effect

The Warp effect is a deformation that you can use to make a circular area of the image appear be at a higher or lower Zoom level. The area is distorted as if viewed through a convex or concave lens.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Warp Dialog Box

To open the Warp dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Warp or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Warp Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Warp Deformation Dialog Box
Using the Warp Dialog Box

Apply the Warp effect to make a circular area in the image appear to be at a higher or lower zoom level than the rest.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Warp Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Warp dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Use the Horizontal and Vertical values in the “Center offset” panel to position the center of the deformation. The values are the percentage of the width and height of the image. Negative horizontal values move the center to the left. Negative vertical values move it up.

4	In the “Settings” panel, use the Size value to set how far from the center the effect continues. The value is the percentage of the image size. As you lower the number, less of the image appears distorted.

5	Use the Strength control to set the level of the Zoom In and Zoom Out distortion. Positive values make the area appear closer; negative values make it appear farther away.

6	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

7	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

8	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.


Antique Mosaic Effect
About the Mosaic - Antique Effect

Use the Mosaic - Antique effect to make the image appear to be created from mosaic tiles. You set the size, level of detail, and spacing of the tiles.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Mosaic - Antique Dialog Box

To open the Mosaic - Antique dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Mosaic - Antique or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Mosaic - Antique Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Antique Mosaic Effect Dialog Box
Using the Mosaic - Antique Dialog Box

Apply the Mosaic - Antique effect to make your image appear to be created from antique tiles.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Using the Mosaic - Antique Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls used in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Mosaic - Antique dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Use the “Grid settings” panel to set the number of rows and columns of tiles. As you increase the Number of columns and Number of rows values, you reduce the size of the tiles.

4	By default, the “Symmetric” check box is selected. This links the values in the Rows and Columns boxes so that changing one changes the other. Clear this check box if you want an unequal number of rows and columns.

5	In the “Mosaic settings” panel, use the Tile opacity value to set how much of the original image shows through the tiles. As you increase the opacity, you blur the tiles.

6	In the Grout width control, set the number of pixels between the tiles.

7	In the Grout opacity control, set the opacity of the pixels between the tiles. As you increase the value, the grout appears pixilated or flecked.

8	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

9	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

10	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.


Glass Mosaic Effect
About the Mosaic - Glass Effect

Use the Mosaic – Glass effect to make the image appear to be composed of glass tiles.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Mosaic - Glass Dialog Box

To open the Mosaic - Glass dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Mosaic - Glass or select it using the Effect browser.

 Using the Mosaic - Glass Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Glass Mosaic Effect Dialog Box
Using the Mosaic - Glass Dialog Box

Apply the Mosaic - Glass effect to make your image appear to be created from glass tiles.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Using the Mosaic - Glass Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls used in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Mosaic - Glass dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Use the “Grid settings” panel to set the number of rows and columns of tiles. As you increase the Number of columns and Number of rows values, you reduce the size of the tiles.

4	By default, the “Symmetric” check box is selected. This links the values in the Rows and Columns controls so that changing one changes the other. Clear this check box if you want to use an unequal number of rows and columns.

5	Use the “Mosaic settings” panel to set the distortion of the tiles and the width and opacity of the area between them. As you increase the Glass curvature value, each tile displays a larger area of the image. The effect is similar to using the Zoom Out setting of a camera lens.

6	Use the Edge curvature to set the distortion of the area around the edges of the tiles. Larger values produce rounder edges and increase the Zoom Out effect.

7	In the Grout width control, set the number of pixels between the tiles.

8	In the Grout opacity control, set the opacity of the pixels between the tiles. As you increase the value, the grout appears pixilated or flecked.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.


 Saving an Image

Paint Shop Pro has a native PSP format that supports layers, alpha channels, and other features you can use to create images. You will find it convenient to save image files in this format as you work on them and then, when necessary, convert them.

 Saving an Image for the Web

 Saving an Image for Print

Saving an Image

To save a new Paint Shop Pro image, do one of the following to open the Save As dialog box:

•	Choose File > Save,

•	Press <Ctrl> + <S>, or

•	Click the Save button [image] on the toolbar.

After the first time you save the image, you can save any changes using one of these methods. Paint Shop Pro saves the image without opening the dialog box. To save the image using a different name or file format, choose File > Save As.

Choosing a Command

Paint Shop Pro has three Save commands you can use:

•	Use the Save command to save a new image or changes to an image. The first time you save an image, the Save As dialog box opens. After it has saved the image, choosing File > Save or clicking the Save toolbar button [image] saves the changes without opening a dialog box.

•	Use the Save As command to save an image to a different file format or name. The Save As dialog box opens to the previously used folder. To have it display the last used file format, set the option in the General Program Preferences dialog box. To open the Save As dialog box, choose File > Save As or click the Save As toolbar button [image].

 Using the Save As Dialog Box

•	Use the Save Copy As command to save a copy of the active image file. To open the Save Copy As dialog box, choose File > Save Copy As or click the Save Copy As toolbar button [image].

 Using the Save Copy As Dialog Box

Compressing a File

An image file in the PSP format can be saved without compression can be compressed to save space. Saving a file without compressing it is the quicker method, but it requires more hard disk space.

The compression methods Paint Shop Pro uses are lossless; that is, they reduce the file size without losing any image information.

Paint Shop Pro uses two compression methods:

•	Run length encoding (RLE), which is fast and compresses most multi-layered images to about 75% of their original sizes. It works well with images that contain large areas of the same color.

•	LZ77 compression, which is slower than RLE, but can compress an image to a smaller size than RLE. It works well with photo-realistic images.

Related Topics

 Setting the Save As Dialog Box Preferences

 Making Batch Conversions


 Using the Save As Dialog Box

Paint Shop Pro has a native PSP format that supports layers, alpha channels, and other features you can use to create images. You will find it convenient to save an image in this format while you are working on it and then convert it after you have finished.

The first time you save an image, Paint Shop Pro automatically opens the Save As dialog box. You can also use this dialog box to save an image using a different file format or name by choosing File > Save As.

To use the Save As dialog box:

1	Use the Save In drop-down box to navigate to the folder in which you want to save the image file. If necessary, use the Up One Level button to help navigate and the Create New Folder button to create a new folder.

2	In the File Name box, type a name for the file.

3	To save the file in a new format, select the format from the Save As Type drop-down list.

4	If the file format has save options, click the Options button to open the Save Options dialog box. Select new settings, if appropriate. If you are unsure of the settings, use the default values. Click OK to return to the Save As dialog box.

5	Click Save to close the dialog box and save the file.

You can have Paint Shop Pro display the last used file type when opening this dialog box. Select this option in the Dialogs and Palettes Preferences.

 Setting Dialogs and Palettes Preferences


Save Copy As Dialog Box

Use this command to save a copy of an image while leaving the original intact. The dialog box contains the same features as the Save As dialog box.

To use the Save Copy As dialog box:

1	Use the Save In drop-down box to Navigate to a new folder if you want to save the copy in a different folder. If necessary, use the Up One Level button to help navigate, or the Create New Folder button to create a new folder.

2	In the File Name box, type a name for the file.

3	To save the file in a different format, select the format from the Save As Type drop-down list.

4	If the file format has save options, click the Options button to open the Save Options dialog box. Select new settings, if appropriate. If you are unsure of the settings, use the default values. Click OK to return to the Save As dialog box.

5	Click Save to close the dialog box and save a copy of the file.

To save copies of several images in a new file format, use the Batch Conversion function.

 Making Batch Conversions


 Making Batch Conversions

If you need to convert several files into a single file format, you can process them as a group using the Batch Conversion utility. This process makes copies of the files in the new format while leaving the originals intact.

Opening the Batch Conversion Dialog Box

To open the Batch Conversion dialog box:

•	Choose File > Batch Conversion, or

•	Click the optional Batch Conversion button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Batch Conversion Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Customizing the Toolbar


 Using the Batch Conversion Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to convert several files into a single file format. Paint Shop Pro makes copies of original files, called source files. It converts the copies, and then saves them in the output folder you select. The original images are not converted.

•	Note: Clicking the Select All or the Start button starts the conversion process.

To use the Batch Conversion dialog box:

1	Use the Look In drop-down box to navigate to the folder containing the source (original) files. If necessary, use the Up One Level button to help navigate, or the Create New Folder button to create a new folder.

2	From the Output Settings Type drop-down list, select a new file format for the images. If a format has save options, the Options button is accessible. Click it to open the Save Option dialog box. Select the format options and click OK to return to the Batch Conversion dialog box.

3	Select the output folder for the converted images by typing a path or browsing for the folder. If you have not selected an output folder, Paint Shop Pro saves the converted files in the same folder as the source files. To browse for a folder:

•	Click the Browse button in the Output folder panel to open the Browse for Folder dialog box.

•	Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the converted files.

•	Click the folder to select it.

•	Click OK to close this dialog box. The Output folder box displays the path to the selected folder.

4	To stop the conversion if Paint Shop Pro encounters an error during the process, select the “Stop on error” check box. Clear it to process all the images without stopping. The error messages appear in the Batch Conversion Status dialog box.

5	Select the files to convert using one of the following methods:

•	To convert specific image files, press <Shift> while selecting contiguous files or <Ctrl> while selecting non-contiguous files.

•	To convert files of a specific format, type filename wildcards (using *) in the File Name text box and then select the format from the Files of Type drop-down box. Paint Shop Pro will look for filename wildcards first. If it finds none, it will select files by file type.

•	To convert all the files displayed, click the Select All button. Note that clicking the Select All button starts the conversion process.

6	If you did not click the Select All button, click the Start button to start the conversion.

The Batch Conversion Status dialog box opens, and the batch conversion starts. The dialog box displays messages about the batch conversion’s progress. To stop the conversion, click the Abort button.

 Using the Batch Conversion Status Dialog Box


 Batch Conversion Status Dialog Box

The Batch Conversion Status dialog box opens when the batch conversion process begins. The Current Step pane displays each filename and whether it is converted, while the Job Progress bar indicates the conversion progress.

During the conversion, Paint Shop Pro might open other dialog boxes requesting more information if you have selected files in any of the following formats:

•	Meta and Vector Files

•	Photo-CD Files

•	RAW Files

•	PostScript Files

To stop the batch conversion, click the Abort button.

After the files have been converted, do one of the following:

•	Click OK to exit the dialog box, or

•	Click the Save Log button to save the progress messages to a text file.

Related Topics

 Setting WMF (Windows Meta File) Format Preferences

 Setting PCD File Format Preferences

 Setting RAW File Format Preferences

 Setting PostScript File Format Preferences

 Saving the Batch Conversion Log


Saving the Batch Conversion Log

Clicking the Save Log button opens the Save As dialog box for the batch conversion log. The Log file format is displayed in the Save as type box.

Type a name for the file and click Save. Paint Shop Pro saves the information in the LOG format.


Saving an Image for the Web

Because the majority of Web browsers recognize GIF and JPEG images, these two formats are used most often for saving Web images. Newer versions of the Web browsers can also recognize the more recent PNG format. When you save images for the Web, there are three major issues to consider: layers, color depth, and file size.

Layers

Because none of the current Web browsers can display layered images, you need to flatten an image before saving it for the Web. Flatten it by choosing Layers > Merge > Merge All (Flatten).

Color Depth

Some computers are only capable of displaying up to 256 colors. If an image on a Web page contains more colors, the Web browser uses its own dithering method to display the image. This can produce color distortion. If you reduce the color depth of the image to 8 bits (256 colors) before placing it on your Web page, its appearance will be more consistent.

File Size

File size affects the majority of users accessing a Web page. As the size of an image file increases, it takes more time to download, so viewers have a longer wait. Use a file format that reduces the image size most efficiently while keeping the quality as high as possible.

Web File Formats

Choose from the following file formats when saving image for use on the Web:

GIF

Use this format to compress line art and images with areas of similar colors. It supports 8-bit (256) color. There are two versions of GIF: 89a, which can save transparency and animation information, and 87a, which cannot. Both are recognized by most browsers and use lossless compression.

JPEG

Use this format to compress photographic images. It supports 24-bit (16.7 million) color, uses lossy compression, and is recognized by most browsers.

PNG

This format compresses most images efficiently. It supports up to 24-bit (16.7 million) color and uses lossless compression, but it is recognized by only a few browsers.

Previewing Your Image

If you aren’t sure which format to use, you can preview your image in the formats before deciding. Choose View > Preview in Web Browser, select the formats, and view them in your browser. Note that, to use this feature, you must have at least one Web browser installed on you computer.

 Using the Preview in Web Browser Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Export GIF Optimizer Command

 Export JPEG Optimizer Command

 JPG Format Save Options

 GIF Format Save Options

 PNG Format Save Options


GIF Optimizer Command

Choose this command or click the optional GIF Optimizer toolbar button [image] to open the GIF Optimizer dialog box, where you can view the image as you configure the transparency, color reduction, and other format options. To create a transparency from a selection, make the selection before opening the dialog box.

You can configure the settings in the tabbed pages or click the Use Wizard button and let Paint Shop Pro guide you through the process.

 Using the GIF Optimizer Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Creating a Selection

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


GIF Optimizer Dialog Box

The GIF Optimizer dialog box contains four tabbed pages where you configure the transparency, color, and format options. The fifth page displays estimated download times of the image at various modem speeds.

You can also use the dialog box to save your image as a GIF file without a transparency. Choose the None option in the Transparency tab and ignore the Partial Transparency tab.

Using the Preview Boxes

Use the two image preview boxes to compare the transparency, quality, and file size of the GIF image to that of the original. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

Using the Tabs

 Using the Transparency Tab

 Using the Partial Transparency Tab

 Using the Colors Tab

 Using the Format Tab

 Using the Download Times Tab

Saving the File

After you have selected the options, click the OK button to open the Save As dialog box. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the new image and type a name for the file. When you click Save, Paint Shop Pro saves a copy of the image as a GIF file and leaves the original image unchanged.

 Using the Save As Dialog Box

Opening the GIF Wizard

If you prefer to let Paint Shop Pro guide you through the process, click the Use Wizard button. Page 1 of the Wizard opens.

 Using Page I of the GIF Optimizer Wizard


GIF Optimizer Trans Tab
GIF Optimizer Transparency Tab

The option you choose on the Transparency tab determines which area of the image becomes transparent.

There are five choices:

•	None, which produces a GIF file that does not contain a transparency,

•	Existing image or layer transparency, which uses the current transparency information,

•	Inside the current selection, which is only available for images that contain a selection,

•	Outside the current selection, which is only available for images that contain a selection, and

•	Areas that match the color in the box. You can select any color. To choose a color from the image, move the cursor over the image and click a color. You can also click inside the color box to open the Color dialog box (24-bit images) or Image palette (8-bit images), or right-click it to open the Recent Colors dialog box. Set the tolerance factor for the color using the numeric edit control.The tolerance factor indicates how closely colors must match the color in the box before they are selected.

Related Topics

 Using a Color Dialog Box

 Using the Image Palette

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


GIF Optimizer Part Trans Tab
GIF Optimizer Partial Transparency Tab

A GIF file cannot contain partially transparent pixels. All pixels must be either transparent or opaque. Your image may have partially transparent pixels if you have reduced the opacity of a layer, added a mask, feathered a selection, or used a brush or the eraser at a reduced opacity setting. If you have chosen the “None” option in the Transparency tab, the options in this tab are unavailable.

If the image contains a transparency, use the options in the Partial Transparency tab to determine:

•	Whether the partially transparent pixels are made transparent or opaque, and

•	Whether they are blended with another color.

Representing Partially Transparent Pixels

Paint Shop Pro can make partially transparent pixels transparent or use a dithering method to make them opaque:

•	Choose the Use full transparency for pixels below x % opacity option and enter a value in its box to determine which partially transparent pixels become transparent. As you lower the value, you reduce the number of transparent pixels.

•	Choose the Use a 50% dither pattern option to apply this method of dithering after the partially transparent pixels have been made opaque using either the color chosen for blending or the image color. The blending option determines which color is used.

•	Choose the Use error diffusion dither option to apply this method of dithering after the partially transparent pixels have been made opaque using either the color chosen for blending or the image color. The blending option determines which color is used.

 About the Dithering Methods

Blending Partially Transparent Pixels

The second set of options determine whether partially transparent pixels are blended with another color or converted to total opacity using each pixel’s color. Choose one of the following options:

•	Choose Yes to blend each partially transparent pixel with the color in the color box. To choose a new color, click in the color box to open the Image palette or Color dialog box. Right-click to open the Recent Colors dialog box. Partially transparent pixels with a transparency value below the value you enter are blended with this color.

•	Choose No to increase each partially transparent pixel to 100% opacity using its color.

Related Topics

 Using a Color Dialog Box

 Using the Image Palette

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


GIF Optimizer Colors Tab

GIF images have an 8-bit color depth, which means they can display up to 256 colors. Because these colors are stored in a palette, an image containing 256 or fewer colors is called a paletted image. Use the options in the Colors tab to select the colors and type of palette used.

Number of Colors

You need to reduce your image to 256 or fewer colors. As you remove colors, the size of the file decreases, but so does the quality of the image. Use the Preview boxes to help you determine the best choice.

Amount of Dithering

Dithering refers to the way the program arranges pixels to compensate for missing colors in the adjacent pixels. Use the Preview boxes to help you determine the best setting.

Type of Palette

Choose one of the following palettes to use with the image:

•	Choose the Existing Palette option if your image is already paletted and you want to use its palette.

•	Choose the Standard / Web-safe option if your image will be used on the Web and you want it to display consistently on the viewers’ monitors.

•	Choose the Optimized Median Cut option if you need to reduce the image to only a few colors.

•	Choose the Optimized Octree option if your original image contains only a few colors, and you want to keep those exact colors.

Depending on your needs, you may want to try both “Optimized” options and choose the one that gives you the best looking result or the smallest file size.

 Palette Options

Options Panel

Boosting selected colors gives them more weight by a factor of the value you enter. The selected colors stand out from the rest of the image. To boost colors, make a selection of an area that contains these colors, and then select this option.

Select the “Include Windows’ colors” check box to include the 16 standard Windows colors in the palette. If the image will be used on the Web, leave this check box selected.


GIF Optimizer Format Tab

Use the Format tab to choose the interlacing and version options.

Interlace Option

The Interlace options determine how an image appears as it is downloaded.

There are two choices:

•	Non-interlaced, where the image downloads one line a time, starting from the top, and

•	Interlaced, where the image is displayed incrementally in several passes, and detail is added each time. Use this option with larger images so that the viewer can get an idea of how the image looks while waiting for it to download.

Version Option

You must choose the 89a Version option to save transparency information. It is selected automatically if the image contains transparent pixels. Version 87a is available only if the image does not contain a transparency.


GIF Optimizer Download Time Tab

The Download Times tab displays the size of the compressed file and an estimate of the download time at four modem speeds. If the file size is too large, decrease it by clicking the Colors tab and reducing the number of colors.

Click OK to open the Save As dialog box, where you type a name and select a location for saving the GIF file. The original image is not altered.

 Using the Save As Dialog Box


GIF Wiz page 1
GIF Wizard Transparency Page

Use the first page of the Wizard to choose the color that you want to make transparent. When the page opens, the color box displays the current background color.

If the Wizard does not detect transparent information in the image, the page displays the following two options:

•	No transparency, which you choose to create a GIF file that does not contain a transparency, and

•	Convert matching colors to transparent, which you choose to create a GIF file containing a transparency.

To choose a color from the image, move the cursor over the image and click a color. You can also click inside the color box to open the Color dialog box (24-bit images) or Image palette (8-bit images), or right-click it to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

If the Wizard detects a transparency in the image, it displays a third option. This option, which is for retaining the existing transparency in the final image, is chosen by default. To use a different transparent color, choose the second option and select the new color.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Background page.

 GIF Wizard Background Page

Related Topics

 Using a Color Dialog Box

 Using the Image Palette

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


GIF Wiz page 2
GIF Wizard Background Page

Use the Background page to enter the background color of the Web page on which you will be using the image. When the page opens, the color box displays the current solid background color. Choose a new color from the image by moving the cursor over the image and clicking a color. You can also click inside the color box to open the Color dialog box (24-bit images) or Image palette (8-bit images), or right-click it to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

A GIF image cannot contain partially transparent pixels. If the image contains them, the Wizard blends them with the color you choose. Reducing layer opacity, adding a mask, feathering a selection, and using a brush set at reduced opacity are some of the actions that can produce partially transparent pixels.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Palette page.

 GIF Wizard Palette Page

Related Topics

 Using a Color Dialog Box

 Using the Image Palette

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


GIF Wiz page 3
GIF Wizard Palette Page

The Palette page contains two Image palette options. Use the default Web-safe palette option to create an image that looks the best with most browsers. If you choose to use the other palette, some image colors may not display correctly when downloaded.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Quality page.

 GIF Wizard Quallity Page


GIF Wiz page 4
GIF Wizard Quality Page

Use the slider on the Quality page to set the file size. As you drag the slider up, you increase the size by adding colors, which creates a better-looking image. As you drag the slider down, you remove colors, decrease the file size, and lower the image quality.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Results page, where you can view the image.

 GIF Wizard Results Page


GIF Wiz page 5
GIF Wizard Results Page

The final page displays the result of your settings. To change a setting, click the Back button to return to the previous pages. Click the Finish button to close the Wizard and open the Save As dialog box, where you type a name and select a location for saving the GIF file. The original image is not altered.

 Using the Save As Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Using the GIF Optimizer Dialog Box


JPEG Optimizer Command

Choose this command or click the optional JPEG Optimizer toolbar button [image] to open the JPEG Optimizer dialog box. You can configure the settings in the tabbed pages or click the Use Wizard button to let Paint Shop Pro guide you through the process.

 Using the JPEG Optimizer Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


JPEG Optimizer Dialog Box

The JPEG Optimizer dialog box contains two tabbed pages where you configure the settings and a third page that displays estimated download times of the image at various modem speeds. Because JPEG uses lossy compression, which discards data, be sure to save the file as the final step and to save it only one time.

Using the Preview Boxes

Use the two image preview boxes to compare the quality and file size of the compressed image to that of the original. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the compression settings on the Quality page. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

Using the Tabs

 Using the Quality Tab

 Using the Format Tab

 Using the Download Time Tab

Saving the File

After you have selected the options, click OK to open the Save As dialog box. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the new image, and type a name for the file. When you click Save, Paint Shop Pro saves a copy of the image and leaves the original image unchanged.

 Using the Save As Dialog Box

Opening the JPEG Optimizer Wizard

If you prefer to let Paint Shop Pro guide you through the process, click the Use Wizard button at the lower left of the dialog box. Page 1 of the Wizard opens.

 Using Page I of the JPEG Optimizer Wizard


JPEG Saver Quality Tab
JPEG Optimizer Quality Tab

On the Quality tab, set a compression value for the file using the numeric edit control. JPEG uses lossy compression, which reduces the file size by deleting image information. This means that as you increase the compression, you lower the quality of the image. Use the image preview boxes to help you find the best balance between the two.


JPEG Saver Format Tab
JPEG Optimizer Format Tab

The Format tab options determine how an image appears as it is being loaded.

There are two choices:

•	Standard, where the image downloads one line a time, starting from the top, and

•	Progressive, where the image is displayed incrementally in several passes, and detail is added each time. Use this option with larger images so that the viewer can get an idea of how the image looks while waiting for it to download.


JPEG Saver Download Times Tab
JPEG Optimizer Download Times Tab

The Download Times tab displays the size of the compressed file and an estimate of the download time at four modem speeds. To change the file size, click the Quality tab and increase or reduce the compression value.

Click OK to open the Save As dialog box, where you type a name and select a location for saving the JPEG file. The original image is not altered.

 Using the Save As Dialog Box


JPEG Wizard Page 1
JPEG Wizard Quality Page

Drag the slider on the Quallity page of the Wizard to set the compression value. As the saved file size decrease, so does the image quality.

Click the Next button to proceed to the next page, which displays the compressed image and its file size.

 JPEG Wizard Results Page


JPEG Wizard Page 2
JPEG Wizard Results Page

The Results page displays the compressed image and its file size. To change the compression value, click the Back button to return to the previous page.

Click the Finish button to close the Wizard and open the Save As dialog box, where you type a name and select a location for saving the JPEG file. The original image is not altered.

 Using the Save As Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Using the JPEG Optimizer Dialog Box


Sending an Image Using E-mail

You can use Paint Shop Pro to e-mail any image open or minimized in the workspace. Paint Shop Pro opens a new e-mail message containing the image. The image is in its current file format whenever possible.

To send the image, choose File > Send or click the optional Send Mail button [image] on the toolbar.

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Saving an Image for Print

Personal Printers

If you are printing your image on a personal printer, save it in the PSP format. This gives you the most flexibility. Paint Shop Pro prints all the layers in an image, so you don’t need to flatten it. If you are using a black-and-white printer, choose the Greyscale option in the Page Setup dialog box.

Printing Services

If you are sending the image to a printing service, you should flatten the image before saving it. Ask the printer about the requirements for file format, resolution, and color depth. If CMYK color separations are needed, you can print them by choosing that option in the Page Setup dialog box.

Related Topics

 Before You Print

 Using the Page Setup Dialog Box


Before You Print

There are several factors that can influence the quality of your printed image. Before you print an image, be sure that it is at the proper resolution and that the color and lightness are adjusted to print correctly. Also, keep in mind that the printer and paper you use can affect the quality of the print.

Image Resolution

Laser and ink-jet printers work by applying dots of black or colored ink to the paper. While the image resolution is measured in pixels per inch (ppi), the printer resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi). To determine the printed image size in inches, the printer divides the image size in pixels by the pixels per inch. An image with a high resolution appears smaller when printed at its original size than an image with a low resolution. For example, if the size of your image is 600 x 300 pixels, it is 12 inches by 6 inches at a resolution of 50 ppi (600/50 by 300/50) and 6 inches by 3 inches at 100 ppi (600/100 by 300/100).

You can change the size of the printed image by changing the Scale value in the Page Setup dialog box. However, this can lower the quality of the print, as it enlarges each pixel. You will get better results if you create the image using a resolution that is appropriate for the printer.

Use the following guidelines to determine the image size for printing:

•	For a printer that prints 300 dpi use an image set at 72 to 120 ppi.

•	For a printer that prints 600 dpi, use an image set at 125 to 170 ppi.

•	For a printer that prints 1200 dpi, use an image set at 150 to 200 ppi.

 Types of Resolution

Image Color and Lightness

Computer monitors display color by combining red (R), green (G) and blue (B) color light on the screen. Color printers, however, use a combination of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K) ink. The difference in these two color modes can cause images to appear darker on paper than the screen. As you become familiar with how your printer handles color, you will be able to adjust your images to compensate. If the printed image appears too dark, you can use the Brightness/Contrast command to adjust it.

 Using the Brightness/Contrast Dialog Box

Paper Quality

The texture and color of the paper affects the quality of the image printed on it. Porous paper can cause colors to bleed into each other; colored paper can alter the image colors; off-white paper can reduce the contrast and vibrancy of colors. For the best results, you should use “bright white, coated” paper.

Related Topics

 Printing an Image

 Printing Multiple Images on a Page

 Printing Thumbnails


Page Setup
 About the Page Setup Options

The page setup options determine the page orientation, margin width, image size, and type of output. There are two Page Setup dialog boxes, one for images and one for Browser thumbnails. Before you print, use these dialog boxes to choose the setup.

Opening the Image Page Setup Dialog Box

To access the Page Setup dialog box for images, do one of the following:

•	Choose File > Page Setup,

•	Click the Setup button in the Image Print Preview window, or

•	Click the optional Page Setup button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Page Setup Dialog Box

Opening the Browser Page Setup Dialog Box

To access the Page Setup dialog box for Browser thumbnails, do one of the following when the Browser is open:

•	Choose File > Page Setup,

•	Click the Setup button in the Browser Image Print Preview window, or

•	Click the Page Setup button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Browser Page Setup Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Using the Page Setup Dialog Box

Use the Page Setup dialog box to select the page orientation, the margin width, and the image size and color.

To set or change the page setup:

1	In the “Paper” panel, select the paper size and its source.

2	Select one of the following page orientations:

•	Portrait orientation, which places the top of the image against one of the page's narrow sides, or

•	Landscape orientation, which places the top of the image against one of the page's wide sides.

3	In the “Position” panel, select from the following image placement options:

•	Select the “Center on page” check box to place the image in the middle of the page. The margin boxes are unavailable when you select this check box.

•	To place the image elsewhere on the page, enter the appropriate values in the margin boxes. The left and top margins indicate the position on the page of the image’s left and top edges.

4	Choose from the following size options:

•	Select the “Fit to page” check box to enlarge or reduce the image size to cover as much of the page as possible. Selecting this check box makes the “Position” panel options unavailable.

•	To print the image at a different size, enter a percent of the original size in the Scale box.

5	Select one of the following Print Output options:

•	Select the Color option to print the image in color. You must have a color printer to print in color.

•	Select the Greyscale option to convert an image to greyscale. Paint Shop Pro will replace the colors in the image with greys of equal luminance. The effect is similar to a black-and-white photograph.

•	Select the CMYK Separations option to enable CMYK color separations. Paint Shop Pro will generate 4 separate greyscale prints, each representing one CMYK color.

6	In the “Options” panel, select the Negative check box to produce a negative print of the image by replacing each color with its opposite.

7	To print a color on the page around the image, click the Background button to open the Color dialog box, where you can choose a color.

8	Click the Printer button to select a different printer.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and save the settings.

Related Topics

 Looking at a Print Preview

 Looking at a Full Screen Preview

 Printing an Image


Print Preview
 Using the Print Preview Window

Use the Print Preview Window to see how the image will look when printed. To activate this view, choose File > Print Preview or click the optional Print Preview toolbar button [image].

The Print Preview window opens. It displays the image within an outline of the page. There are five buttons across the top of the window: Print, Setup, Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Close.

Print Button

Click it to close the Print Preview window and open the Print dialog box.

Setup Button

Click it to close the Print Preview window and open the Page Setup dialog box, where you can resize the image and make other changes. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Print Preview window.

Zoom In and Zoom Out Buttons

Click them to change the magnification level. You can also zoom in and out by clicking the image.

Close Button

Click it to close the Print Preview window and return to the Paint Shop Pro workspace. You can also close the window by clicking the Close button [image] on the title bar.

Related Topics

 Looking at a Full Screen Preview

 Using the Print Dialog Box

 Using the Page Setup Dialog Box

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Full Screen Preview
 Using the Full Screen Preview

The Full Screen Preview mode displays the image against a black background that covers the screen.

To see an image in the Full Screen Preview mode, do one of the following:

•	Choose View > Full Screen Preview,

•	Press <Shift> + <Ctrl> + <A>, or

•	Click the Full Screen Preview button [image] on the toolbar.

To close the Full Screen Preview mode, do one of the following:

•	Left-click the mouse, or

•	Press any key on the keyboard.


 Printing an Image

Paint Shop Pro can print CMYK separations and negative images. It can also place a background color around the image. Select these options in the Page Setup dialog box before opening the Print dialog box.

If you want to print more than one image on a page, choose the Print Multiple Images command. To print thumbnails, open the Browser and print from it.

Opening the Print Dialog Box

Open the Print dialog box by doing one of the following:

•	Choosing File > Print,

•	Pressing <Ctrl> + <P>,

•	Clicking the Print button in the Print Preview window, or

•	Clicking the Print button [image] on the toolbar.

 Using the Print Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Using the Page Setup Dialog Box

 Printing Multiple Images on a Page

 Printing Thumbnails


 Using the Print Dialog Box

Use the Print dialog box to print one image at a time. Before using this dialog box, open the Page Setup dialog box to select the page orientation, margin width, image size, and type of output. To print more than one image on a page, choose File > Print Multiple Images.

To print a single image:

1	Select a printer in the Printer name box.

2	To print registration or crop marks, select their check boxes in the “Print Options” panel. If you typed a title in the Creator Information tab of the Current Image Information dialog box, you can select to print it. If there is no Creator Information, the filename is used.

3	To print the image to a file instead on the printer, select the “Print to file” check box. Clicking the Print button opens the Print to File dialog box, where you can choose a location and name for the new file.

4	Set the number of copies you want to print.

5	Click OK. Paint Shop Pro sends the file to the printer or opens the Print to File dialog box.

Related Topics

 Using the Page Setup Dialog Box

 Current Image Information Dialog Box

 Printing Multiple Images on a Page


Printing Multiple Images
Printing Multiple Images on a Page

Choose the Print Multiple Images command to print more than one image on a single sheet of paper. The File menu of both the main and the Browser windows contain this command. The command opens a WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) window that displays a blank page and thumbnails of all images open or minimized in the main window and any selected thumbnails (if you open the window from the Browser). After you move the images to the page, you can arrange and resize them or use the Auto Arrange feature and let the program do it.

Opening the Print Multiple Images Window

To open the Print Multiple Images window:

•	Choose File > Print Multiple Images,

•	Click the optional Print Multiple Images button [image] on the toolbar, or

•	From the Browser, right-click a thumbnail and choose Print Multiple Images.

Note that when you are using the Browser, you must select at least one thumbnail to make the Print Multiple Images command or toolbar button available.

 About the Print Multiple Images Window

Related Topics

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons

 Selecting Files Using the Browser Thumbnails

 Printing Thumbnails


About the Print Multiple Images Window

Use the Print Multiple Images window to print one or more images on a single sheet of paper. When you open the window, it displays a blank page in the workspace. Any images open or minimized in Paint Shop Pro appear as thumbnails along the left side. If you have opened the window from the Browser, the selected Browser thumbnails also appear.

Open an image by double-clicking its thumbnail or by dragging the thumbnail to the page or workspace. Note that you can open more than one copy of an image. Arrange and resize the images on the page by choosing the menu commands, clicking toolbar buttons, or dragging with the mouse. You can also access the most frequently used commands by right-clicking the image, the page, or the workspace. If you need to print the images more than once, you can save the layout and use it again.

Viewing Image Information

When you click an image to select it, its dimensions and scale appear at the right side of the Status bar. To view more information about an image that is open on the page or in the workspace, do one of the following to open the Current Image Information dialog box:

•	Click the Image Information toolbar button [image],

•	Choose Image > Image Information, or

•	Right-click the image and choose Image Information from the context menu.

 About the Current Image Information Dialog Box

Using the Print Multiple Images Window

Choose from the following topics to view information about using the Print Multiple Images window:

 Changing the Zoom Level

 Using the Print Multiple Images Grid

 Arranging the Images

 Using the Auto Arrange Feature

 Using the Print Preview Options Dialog Box

 Saving and Loading Layouts

 Printing the Page

 Closing the Print Multiple Images Window


Zoom Commands MIP
Print Multiple Images Zoom Commands

Resizing the window automatically changes the magnification of the page. When you want to adjust the page magnification (size) without altering the window size, use the Zoom commands.

To access the commands, do one of the following:

•	Choose a command from the Zoom menu,

•	Click one of the 3 Zoom toolbar buttons, or

•	Right-click the paper, an image, or the workspace and choose a command from the context menu.

Zoom In 10% and Zoom Out 10% Commands

Choose these commands or click the toolbar buttons [image] to change the page size/magnification in smaller increments. Each time you click the toolbar button or choose one of the commands from the menu, the page either increases or decreases by 10% of its current size.

Zoom In 50% and Zoom Out 50% Commands

Use these commands to change the page size/magnification quickly. Each time you choose one of the commands, the page either increases or decreases by 50% of its current size.

Zoom to Page Command

Choose this command or click the toolbar button [image] to resize the page so that it fits in the window. If you inadvertently scroll the window or drag the page and can’t see it, use this command to center the page in the window.


Using the MIP Grid
Using the Print Multiple Images Grid

Use the grid to help you align images evenly on the page. You can change the grid color, display it using lines or dots, and configure its spacing in inches or centimeters. Select these preferences in the Print Preview Options dialog box.

 Using the Print Preview Options Dialog Box

Displaying and Hiding the Grid

To display the grid, do one of the following:

•	Choose Preferences > Show Grid,

•	Click the Show Grid button [image] on the toolbar, or

•	Right-click the page or workspace and choose Show Grid from the context menu.

When the grid is visible, its buttons on the menus and toolbar appear pressed in. Choose the command or click the button again to make the grid invisible.

Using the Snap to Grid Function

The Snap to Grid function automatically places images along the grid. When you release an image, Paint Shop Pro moves it until the edges are aligned with the nearest grid lines. Choosing the Snap to Grid command does not affect images already placed on the page. You need to move an image again to align it.

You must choose the Show Grid command before you can use the Snap to Grid function. To activate the Snap to Grid function, do one of the following:

•	Choose Preferences > Snap to Grid,

•	Click the Snap to Grid button [image] on the toolbar, or

•	Right-click the page or workspace and choose Snap to Grid from the context menu.

When the Snap to Grid function is active, its buttons on the menus and toolbar appear pressed in. Choose the command or click the button again to turn off the function.


Arranging an Image
Arranging the Images

You can rotate, move, and resize the images. Drag them, click one to select it and use the menu commands, or right-click one and use the context menu commands. The commands in the image menu can only be used on an open image, not a thumbnail. While working, right-click the image, page, or workspace for easy access to many of the menu commands.

Opening an Image

Use either of the following methods to open an image:

•	Double-click the thumbnail. The image appears in the upper left corner of the page.

•	Drag the thumbnail to the page or workspace.

Note that you can open more than one copy of an image.

If the image is too large to fit on the page, a message appears asking if you want Paint Shop Pro to resize it to fit. If you choose not to resize it, only the part of the image that fits on the page is printed.

Positioning and Rotating an Image

You can rotate or position any image that is open on the page or in the workspace, and you can drag images on and off the page. When you place the cursor over an image, it changes to the Image Mover tool to indicate that you can drag the image.

When choosing a Rotate or Placement command, first click the image to select it. The currently selected image displays a handle at each corner. To position an image, drag it, use one of the Image > Placement commands, click the appropriate toolbar button, or right-click the image and choose a command from the context menu. The placement commands position the image in one of the four corners of the page or at its center.

If you prefer to have Paint Shop Pro arrange the images, use the Auto Arrange feature.

 Using the Auto Arrange Feature

Images can be rotated in increments of 90°. To rotate an image, click to select it and then:

•	Click the Rotate +90 [image] or Rotate -90 [image] toolbar button,

•	Choose Image > Rotate +90 or Image > Rotate -90, or

•	Right-click the image, and then choose Rotate 90+ or Rotate 90- from the context menu.

Resizing an Image

You can resize any image on the page or in the workspace. Click the image to select it. The currently selected image displays a handle at each corner. Move the cursor over a handle. It changes to a double-ended arrow. Drag the handle to enlarge or reduce the image size. The image always retains its original proportions. As you resize the image, its new dimensions and scale appear on the right side of the Status bar.

You can enlarge an image to extend beyond the page. However, only the part of the image that fits on the page is printed.

Locating an Image

If you misplace an image in the workspace, click the Auto Arrange [image] toolbar button to return it to the page. Note that this may resize images on the page. You can also zoom all the way out [image] and then scroll until you find the image.

Removing an Image

To remove an image from the page, double-click it, drag it to the workspace, click the Remove toolbar button, or right-click it and choose Remove from the context menu.

Saving an Arrangement

After you have created an arrangement, you can save it as a layout and reload it later.

 Saving and Loading Layouts


Using the Auto Arrange Function
Using the Auto Arrange Feature

Use the Auto Arrange feature to have Paint Shop Pro automatically arrange your images. It divides the paper into sections of equal size and places an image in each section. Only the images on the paper or in the workspace are used. Because no thumbnails are added, be sure to open all the images you want arranged before choosing the command.

When using Auto Arrange, you can choose to leave a specific amount of space between images (the border) and to enlarge (stretch) the images, if necessary, to fill their sections of the page. Set the width of this border in the Print Preview Options dialog box. Then, before choosing Auto Arrange, you can decide whether to use the Border and Stretch options.

To activate these options:

•	Choose Preferences > Use Borders and/or Preferences > Stretch to Fit,

•	Click the Use Borders or Stretch to Fit toolbar button,

•	Right-click the page or workspace and choose the commands from the context menu, or

•	Select their check boxes in the Print Preview Options dialog box.

After you have selected the options, do one of the following to use the Auto-Arrange feature:

•	Choose Preferences > Auto Arrange,

•	Click the Auto Arrange button on the toolbar, or

•	Right-click the workspace or page and choose Auto Arrange from the context menu.

Related Topic

 Using the Print Preview Options Dialog Box


Using the Print Preview Setup Dialog Box
Using the Print Preview Options Dialog Box

Use the Print Preview Options dialog box to configure the Auto Arrange function border and to select the grid preferences.

Opening the Dialog Box

To open the Print Preview Options dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Choose Preferences > Options,

•	Click the Options button [image] on the toolbar, or

•	Right-click the page or workspace and choose options from the context menu.

Units Box

From the Units drop-down box, select to use either Inches or Centimeters as the unit of measurement for the borders and grid.

Border Options Panel

The border refers to the minimum space left between images when you choose the Auto Arrange command.

To set the border options:

1	Select the “Use borders on auto arrange” check box to separate the images by at least the distance displayed in the Vertical and Horizontal Border Size boxes.

2	Select the “Stretch to fit on auto arrange” check box to enlarge images as much as possible while retaining their aspect ratios.

3	Type the distance or use the spin controls in the Horizontal border and Vertical border size boxes to set the minimum width between images.

Grid Settings Panel

Set the grid color, style (configuration – lines or dots) and spacing in inches or centimeters

To set the grid options:

1	Select the “Show grid” check box to display the grid. You can also activate this feature from the toolbar and the Preferences menu.

2	Select the “Dot grid” check box to view the grid as evenly spaced dots rather than intersecting lines.

3	Select the “Snap to grid” check box to automatically align images to the grid. You can also activate this feature from the toolbar or the Preferences menu.

4	Type the distance or use the spin controls in the Horizontal spacing and Vertical spacing boxes to set the measurement between grid lines or dots.

5	To change the grid color, left-click the Grid color box to open the Color dialog box or right-click to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box

 Using the Print Multiple Images Grid


MIP Page Setup Dialog Box
Page Setup Dialog Box

Use the Print Multiple Images Page Setup dialog box to select the paper size, page orientation, type of output, and whether to include printer marks. It contains many of the same options as the Single Image Page Setup dialog box.

Note that changes to this dialog box are reflected in the Page Setup dialog box for single images, and vice versa.

Opening the Dialog Box

To open the dialog box, either choose File > Page Setup or click the Page Setup button [image] on the toolbar.

Using the Dialog Box

To change the page setup settings:

1	In the “Paper” panel, select the paper size and its source.

2	In the “Orientation” panel, select one of the following page orientations:

•	Portrait orientation, which places the top of the image against one of the page's narrow sides, or

•	Landscape orientation, which places the top of the image against one of the page's wide sides.

3	To print crop or registration marks or labels for CMYK separation plates, select the check boxes in the “Print Marks” panel.

4	In the “Print Output” panel, select one of the following options:

•	Color, which prints the image in color. You must have a color printer to print in color.

•	Greyscale, which converts an image to greyscale. Paint Shop Pro will replace the colors in the image with greys of equal luminance. The effect is similar to a black-and-white photograph.

•	CMYK Separations, which will generate 4 separate greyscale prints, each representing one CMYK color.

5	In the “Options” panel, select the Negative check box to produce a negative print of the image by replacing each color with its opposite.

6	To surround the image with a color, click the Background button. When the Color dialog box opens, choose the color. The area of the paper from the image edge to the paper margin will be covered with this color.

7	Click the Printer button to open the printer.

8	Click OK to close the dialog box and save the settings.

Related Topic

 Printing the Page


Layouts
Saving and Loading Layouts

A layout is a specific arrangement of images on the page. You can save any layout you create and use it again later. The stored layout contains information on the names and locations of the images and their positions on the page. It does not contain the images. If you move an image contained in the layout after you save the layout, Paint Shop Pro may be unable to locate the image.

Saving a Layout

Use the Save As dialog box to save a layout. To open the dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Choose File > Save Layout,

•	Click the Save Layout button [image] on the toolbar, or

•	Right-click the page or workspace and choose Save Layout from the context menu.

 Using the Layout Save As Dialog box

Loading a Layout

Use the Open dialog box to load a previously saved layout. To open the dialog box, do one of the following:

•	Choose File > Open Layout,

•	Click the Open Layout button [image] on the toolbar, or

•	Right-click the page or workspace and choose Open Layout from the context menu.

 Using the Layout Open Dialog Box


Saving a Layout
Using the Layout Save As Dialog Box

Use the Layout Save As dialog box to save custom layouts so that you can reuse them. The stored layout contains information on the image names and locations and their positions on the page. It does not store the images. Note that if you move an image contained in the layout after you save the layout, Paint Shop Pro may be unable to locate the image.

To save a layout:

1	Use the Save In drop-down box and Windows buttons to navigate to the folder in which you want to store the layout. If necessary, use the Up One Level button to help navigate or the Create New Folder button to create a new folder.

2	Type a name for the layout in the File Name box. The correct file format automatically appears in the Save as type box.

3	Click Save. If the layout contains an image that has not been saved, Paint Shop Pro opens the file Save As dialog box. Chose a name, file format, and location for saving the image. When you click the Save button, the program saves the image and then the layout.


Opening a Layout
Using the Layout Open Dialog Box

Use the Layout Open dialog box to load any layout you have saved.

To open a layout:

1	Use the Look In drop-down box and Windows buttons to navigate to the folder in which you saved the layout. If necessary, use the Up One Level button to help navigate.

2	In the contents list box, either double-click the layout or click it and then click the Open button. The dialog box closes.

If you moved an image contained in the layout after you saved the layout, Paint Shop Pro may be unable to locate the image. If this happens, a message appears showing which image could not be found and giving you the choice of loading the layout or searching for the missing file. Click OK to load the layout without the missing image; click Browse to display an Open dialog box, where you can search for the image; click No to cancel the operation.


Printing the Page MIP
Printing the Page

To print the page, do one of the following:

•	Choose File > Print,

•	Click the Print button [image] on the toolbar, or

•	Right-click the page or workspace and choose Print from the context menu.

The page is sent directly to the printer. No Print dialog box opens because any changes you might make in the dialog box could affect the arrangement of the images.

Note that if an image extends beyond the edges of the page, only the part of the image within the page margins is printed.


Closing Print Multiple Images
Closing the Print Multiple Images Window

To close the Print Multiple Images window and return to the Paint Shop Pro workspace, do one of the following:

•	Choose File > Close,

•	Click the Exit button [image] on the toolbar,

•	Click the Windows Close button [image] on the title bar, or

•	Choose the Close command from the Control menu.

Related Topics

 About the Windows Buttons

 About the Control Menu


Closing an Image

To close an image, do either of the following:

•	Choose File > Close, or

•	Click the Windows Close button [image].

If you have made changes to the image since you last saved it, you are prompted to save the changes.

Related Topics

 About the Windows Buttons

 Closing All Open Images


Closing All Open Images

To close all open image files in the Paint Shop Pro workspace, choose Windows > Close All.

You are prompted to save any files with changes unless you have selected the “Do not ask to save changes on Windows Close All” check box in the Miscellaneous tab of the Paint Shop Pro Preferences dialog box.

Related Topic

 Setting the Miscellaneous Tab Preferences


 Deleting an Image

Deleting a Newly Created Image

To delete an image you have created but not yet saved, close it and click No when prompted to save changes.

Deleting a Previously Saved Image

After you have saved an image, you can delete it while it is open in the workspace by using one of the following methods:

•	Choosing File > Delete,

•	Pressing <Ctrl> + <Del>, or

•	Clicking the optional Delete File button [image] on the toolbar.

Deleting an Image Using the Browser

To delete a image file using the Paint Shop Pro Browser:

1	Open the Paint Shop Pro Browser.

2	Navigate to the folder containing the image.

3	Click the Image’s thumbnail and do one of the following:

•	Choose ImageFile > Delete, or

•	Right-click the thumbnail and choose Delete from the context menu.

4	You are prompted to confirm the deletion.

5	Click Yes to delete the image file; click No to cancel the deletion.

If the image is open when you delete it, it remains open in the workspace.

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


About Digital Watermarks

A digital watermark is a permanent proof of authenticity for an image. While a computer can detect it, it is imperceptible to the viewer. A watermark contains information about the creator, the copyright, and the image. When a viewer chooses to see this information, the program opens a dialog box that also contains a link to the Digimarc Web page, which displays contact information for the artist.

•	Note: An image can contain only one watermark. You cannot embed a new watermark in an image that already contains one.

Embedding a Digital Watermark

A digital watermark can only be embedded in an image once. Because its quality may be degraded by further changes to the image, you should apply it to a flattened copy of the finished image. If you try to embed a watermark in a layered image, Paint Shop Pro displays a message recommending that you flatten the image before proceeding. To embed a watermark, choose Image > Watermarking > Embed Watermark to open the Embed Watermark dialog box.

 Using the Embed Watermark Dialog Box

Detecting a Digital Watermark

Whenever Paint Shop Pro opens an image, it automatically checks for a digital watermark. If one is detected, the program displays a copyright symbol in front of the filename on the title bar. The user can view the watermark information by choosing Image > Watermarking > Read Watermark or Image > Image Information.

 Using the Watermark Information Dialog Box


Using the Embed Watermark Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to choose the information you want a watermark to contain. You can select the following options:

•	Creator ID

•	Image copyright dates

•	Image attributes and restrictions on use

•	Watermark durability

You can change the copyright date, image attributes, and durability each time you embed a watermark. You only need to configure the Creator ID the first time you use this dialog box.

•	Note: An image can contain only one watermark. You cannot embed a new watermark in an image that already contains one.

Creating a Personal Identification

Initially, Creator ID is set to “Jasc Watermark Demo.” To receive your own Creator ID, you need to register with Digimarc. This service is free. To do this, click the Personalize button to open the Personalize Creator ID dialog box.

 Personalizing the Creator ID

Entering the Copyright Dates

You can type either one or two years in the copyright boxes. Digimarc accepts years from 1922 to the present. If you try to enter a date earlier than 1922 or later than the current year, a message appears asking you to choose a year from 1922 to the present.

Choosing the Image Attributes

The Image Attributes are the restrictions shown when the program displays the watermark information. Select the check boxes of the attributes you want to apply to the image.

Selecting the Watermark Durability

The durability you choose depends on how the image will be displayed. When the image will be printed, stronger watermarks are recommended. When the image will be displayed on a monitor, weaker watermarks are better because they are not as visible. While stronger watermarks are easier to detect, harder to remove, and longer lasting, they are also more visible in the image. You can make two copies of the image and apply a stronger watermark to the copy you are printing and a weaker one to the copy you are displaying electronically.

To set the durability of the watermark:

1	After determining how you will display the image, select either Monitor or Print from the Target Output drop-down box. If you select the Print option for an image with a resolution under 300 dpi, Paint Shop Pro displays a message recommending that you increase the image resolution before embedding the watermark.

2	Set the strength of the watermark by typing a number from 1 to 16 in the Watermark Durability box, using the default values, or dragging the slider underneath the box. The default for the Monitor option is 8; for the print option, it is 12.

To verify that the watermark information is embedded correctly, select the “Verify” check mark. The program checks that the watermark has been applied and displays its attributes and durability.

 Verifying a Watermark

To view registration and patent information about Digimarc digital watermarks, click the About button.


Personalizing the Creator ID

Initially, Paint Shop Pro’s watermark Creator ID is set to “Jasc Watermark Demo.” Customizing the watermark with your own identification number is a two-step process. First, you register with Digimarc to obtain your own ID number. Second, you enter the information in the Personalize Creator ID dialog box.

Registering with Digimarc

If your computer has Web access, do the following to obtain a personal identification number:

1	Click Register. Your Web browser opens and navigates to the Digimarc Web page.

3	Follow the on-screen instructions to receive a Creator ID number, a PIN number, and a password. You may want to write them down for later use.

4	Close the browser to return to the Personalize Creator ID dialog box.

If your computer does not have Web access, you can phone Digimarc using toll-free number displayed below the URL to register and receive your Creator ID number, a PIN number, and a password.

Entering Your Information

To personalize the watermark:

1	Type the PIN and Creator ID numbers in the appropriate boxes.

2	Click OK to close this dialog box.

3	Click OK to close the Embed Watermark dialog box. If the “Verify” check box is selected, the Embed Watermark: Verify dialog box opens.

 Viewing the Embed Watermark: Verify Dialog Box


Verifying an Embedded Watermark

If you have selected the “Verify” check box in the Embed Watermark dialog box, the Embed Watermark: Verify dialog box appears. It lets you know that the watermark has been embedded and displays the creator, copyright, image attribute, and durability information from the Embed Watermark dialog box.


Reading a Watermark

When you open an image in Paint Shop Pro, the program performs a quick analysis to determine the presence of a watermark. While most watermarks are detected, some may be too weak to read. To do a more thorough search, use the Read Watermark command by choosing Image > Watermarking > Read Watermark. If Paint Shop Pro does not detect a watermark, it displays a message stating that no watermark was found. If it detects a watermark, it opens the Watermark Information dialog box.

 Using the Watermark Information Dialog Box

If the title bar of the image displays a copyright symbol, Paint Shop Pro detected a watermark when it opened the image. In this case, you can also view the watermark information by choosing Image > Image Information and then clicking the Watermark Information tab.


Watermark Information Dialog Box
Using the Watermark Information Dialog Box

This dialog box opens if Paint Shop Pro detects an embedded watermark when you do one of the following:

•	Choose Image > Watermarking > Read Watermark, or

•	Choose Image > Image Information, and then click the Watermark Information tab.

If your computer is connected to the Web, click the Web Lookup button to open your browser and view the Digimarc database page that displays information about the creator.

To view registration and patent information about Digimark digital watermarks, click the About button.


About Digimarc Digital Watermarking Dialog Box

This dialog box opens when you press the About button on the Embed Watermark dialog box, Watermark Information dialog box or the Watermark Information tab of the Current Image Information dialog box.

Related Topics

 About the Embed Watermark Dialog Box

 About the Watermark Information Dialog Box

 About the Watermark Information Tab


Save Dialog Box Options

 Using the Save As Dialog Box

 Using the Save Copy As Dialog Box


Layout Save and Load Dialog Boxes
Layout Save As and Load Dialog Boxes

 Using the Layout Save As Dialog Box

 Using the Layout Open Dialog Box


Printing Images

You can print your images in three ways:

 Printing One Image on a Page

 Printing Multiple Images on a Page

 Printing Browser Thumbnails


Print Multiple Images Page Setup Dialog Box


popup File Not Found Dialog Box
File Not Found Dialog Box


MIP Layout File Not Found Dialog Box
File Not Found Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when Paint Shop Pro can not locate an image in the layout you are loading.

You have the following choices:

•	Click OK to load the layout without the image,

•	Click Browse to display a standard Open dialog box, where you can search for the image,

•	Click Cancel to return to the Multiple Image Printing window without loading the layout.


 What is the Browser?

The Paint Shop Pro Browser is a visual method for finding, previewing, and opening files that is similar to the Windows Explorer. Because it is a visual file system, it makes working with image files easier and more intuitive.

The left pane of the Browser shows the file system of your computer. When you select a folder, the right pane displays small preview buttons, called thumbnails, of the supported images within this folder. You can use these thumbnails to select, open, move, copy, rename, and delete your image files. The Browser also has its own toolbar containing buttons for frequently-used commands. You can customize it by adding, removing, and rearranging the buttons.

Related Topics

 About the Thumbnails

 About the Browser Toolbar

 Navigating with the Browser

 Using the Context Sensitive (Pop-Up) Menus

 Selecting Files Using the Browser Thumbnails

 Opening Images Using the Browser

 Setting the Browser Preferences


About Thumbnails

A thumbnail is a small preview of an image that lets you identify and manage it without opening the actual image. When you navigate to folders using the Paint Shop Pro Browser, thumbnails of all images that can be opened by the program appear in the Browser’s right pane.

To view file information, move the cursor over a thumbnail. It displays a ToolTip with the file’s name and size, the image dimensions and color depth, and the date the file was last modified.

You can select one or more thumbnails and open them, rename or delete them, and copy or move them to another folder. When you select a thumbnail, it changes color. By default, this is blue. To select another color or choose a new thumbnail size, use the Browser tab in the General Program Preferences dialog box.

If you have selected thumbnails, they remain selected when you press the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key while clicking other thumbnails to select them. Press <Shift> to select contiguous thumbnails; press <Ctrl> to select non-contiguous thumbnails.

Related Topic

 Setting the Browser Preferences


 Opening the Browser

To open the Browser, do one of the following:

•	Choose File > Browse,

•	Click the optional Browse button [image] on the toolbar

•	Press <Ctrl> + <B>, or

•	From the Open dialog box, click Browse.

The Browser opens in the main Paint Shop Pro window, and its menus appear on the Menu bar.

Use the Find menu commands to locate specific files in the current folder.

Use the File menu commands to sort, select, preview, and print thumbnails. You can access many of the File menu commands by right-clicking the background area of the right pane.

Use the ImageFile commands to manage your files. You can access these commands from the menu or by right-clicking a thumbnail.

The Browser opens to the folder last browsed in the application. If the Browser has stored a cache file, it reads the thumbnails from this file and then scans the folder for new or changed files. If there is no cache file, it scans the folder and displays thumbnails of supported files. The images load more quickly when the Browser stores cache files.

Related Topics

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons

 About the Cache File


 Navigating with the Browser

Navigate through the folders using the left side of the Browser. When you click a folder, thumbnails of the images Paint Shop Pro supports appear in the right side of the window. Move the cursor over the thumbnail to view a ToolTip with its name, size, file format, and the date of the last modification to the file.

For more information about a thumbnail, do one of the following:

•	Right-click the thumbnail, and choose Information from the context menu,

•	Click the thumbnail, and choose ImageFile > Information,

•	Press <Shift> + <I>, or

•	Click the optional Image File Information button [image] on the Browser toolbar.

The File Information box opens. It lists the file format, compression method, size, bit depth, and other information.

Changing Folders

To select a new folder to browse, do one of the following:

•	Click the folder in the left side of the Browser window.

•	Choose File > Browse New Folder or click the New Folder button [image] on the Browser toolbar to open the Browse for Folder navigation box. Use the navigation box to find and select the new folder.

 Using the Browse for Folder Navigation Box

Related Topics

 Fitting the Browser Window to Thumbnails

 Updating the Browser Tree and Thumbnails


Using the Browser to Find Files

If you have a folder containing several image files, you can use the Find function of the Browser to search the folder and select thumbnails by name.

To locate files using the Browser:

1	Choose Find > File Name, click the Browser toolbar Find button [image], or right-click the background of the right pane and choose Find Name. The Find dialog box opens.

2	Type all or part of the file name into the Find What text box. The Browser will highlight the first file it finds that has the search string anywhere in its name. You can search using the wildcard symbol (*). For example, to find all files in the BMP format, type *.bmp.

3	If you want the search to be case-sensitive, select the “Match case” check box. In a case-sensitive search, the Browser highlights only those files with the same case as the search text. For example, in a case-sensitive search for “shadow,” it does not highlight files that contain “Shadow,” or “SHADOW,” or any other combination of cases.

4	If you have already selected specific files and want to add the ones you find to the group, select the “Keep current selections” check box.

5	In the “Direction” panel, choose Up to have Paint Shop Pro search from the current thumbnail toward the first in the list. Choose Down to search from the current thumbnail toward the end of the list. If no thumbnail matches, it will loop back when it reaches the end.

6	Click the Find Next button to search for the closest file containing the text that you entered. Click Find All to find all files containing the text.

7	If the Browser finds a thumbnail with matching text, it highlights the thumbnail. To keep searching, choose Find > Repeat Find or press <F3>.

8	If the Browser doesn’t find any matching text, a message appears stating that there is no match. Click OK to close it.


Opening Images Using the Browser
 Opening an Image Using the Browser

You can open one or more images using any of the following methods:

•	Select one or more thumbnails and choose File > Open.

•	Select one or more thumbnails and click the Browser toolbar Open button [image].

•	Select one or more thumbnails, and then right-click any thumbnail and choose Open from the context menu.

•	Drag the thumbnails into the Paint Shop Pro workspace. The number of images you can open is limited only by the memory of the computer.

•	Double-click a thumbnail. To select more than one image, press <Ctrl> while clicking each image, and then <Ctrl> while double-click the final image.

•	Note: If you select a meta or vector file or a Photo-CD file, Paint Shop Pro may open a format-specific dialog box requesting additional information.

To see more information about an image before opening it, right-click the thumbnail and choose Information from the context menu.

Dragging Thumbnails into Other Programs

•	You can create animations from images by dragging their thumbnails into Animation Shop. To combine the images into a single animation, press <Shift> while dragging their thumbnails.

•	You can paste an image into a program that supports meta files, DIBs, and BMPs, such as Microsoft Word. Press <Alt> and then drag a thumbnail into the document. If the image contains more than one layer, the layers are merged.

 Viewing File Information Details


 Copying Layers into an Image

Use the Browser to copy the layers of one image into an image open in Paint Shop Pro. It copies raster, vector, and adjustment layers. The image the layers are being copied to must be a 24-bit color or a grey scale image.

To copy layers:

1	Open a greyscale or 24-bit color image in the workspace. This image will receive the new layers.

2	In the Layer palette, click the layer above which you want to copy the new layers.

3	Open the Browser and navigate to the folder containing the thumbnail of the image you want to copy.

4	Drag the thumbnail from the Browser to the open image.

5	Release the mouse button. Paint Shop Pro adds the layers to the open image.

When first added, the layers are grouped and move together. To ungroup them so that they can be moved separately, click the Group Layer button on the Layer palette.

Related Topic

 Using the Layer Palette

 Using the Browser to Add a Mask to a Layer


 Selecting Files Using Thumbnails

To select files, click the thumbnails in the right pane of the Browser window. You can select a single thumbnail, a sequential group of thumbnails, or a non-sequential group of thumbnails.

The Browser uses the Windows Explorer concept for selecting thumbnails. There are selected thumbnails, a current thumbnail, and an anchor thumbnail. Selected thumbnails change color and appear pressed in. When you select more than one thumbnail, the current thumbnail is the active one, and the area around its filename is reversed.

Selecting a Single Thumbnail

Select a single thumbnail in a folder by clicking it. The border around the thumbnail changes color to indicate that it has been selected. To select the first thumbnail in the list, press <Home>. To select the last thumbnail in the list, press <End>.

Selecting Sequential Thumbnails

To select sequential thumbnails:

1	Click the first thumbnail in the sequence that you want to select.

2	Press and hold the <Shift> key.

3	Do either of the following:

•	Click the last thumbnail in the sequence, or

•	Use the Up <↑>, Down <↓>, Left <←>, and Right <→> Arrow keys to move to the last thumbnail in the sequence.

Selecting and Deselecting Non-Sequential Thumbnails

To select and deselect non-sequential thumbnails:

1	Press and hold the <Ctrl> key.

2	Do either of the following:

•	Click the thumbnails you want to select. Clicking once selects a thumbnail; clicking again deselects it.

•	Use the Up <↑>, Down <↓>, Left <←>, and Right <→> Arrow keys to move to the thumbnails you want to select and press the Space key to select each. Pressing the key once selects a thumbnail; pressing the key again deselects it.

Selecting All Thumbnails

To select all thumbnails, do either of the following:

•	Press <Home> and then press <Shift> + <End>, or

•	Press <End> and then press <Shift> + <Home>.

You can also select all thumbnails in a folder by choosing Edit > Select All or pressing <Ctrl> + <A>.

Deselecting All Thumbnails

To deselect all thumbnails, choose Edit > Select None or press <Ctrl> + <D>.

Inverting Your Selection

Inverting your selection deselects the thumbnails that were selected and then selects the thumbnails that were not selected. To invert your selection of thumbnails, choose Edit > Invert.


 Selecting Thumbnails by File Characteristics

You can select thumbnails of files that have a specific attribute, such as file name, file extension, size, width, height, bits per pixel, and date, using the Select dialog box.

To open the dialog box, choose File > Select or click the Browser toolbar Select button [image].

 Using the Select Dialog Box


Using the Select Dialog Box

Use the Select dialog box to select thumbnails that have specific file or image attributes.

To use the Select dialog box:

1	In the Name box, type the names of the files to select. You can use the standard wildcard symbols of substituting a question mark (?) for one letter and an asterisk (*) for several.

2	Select the “Match case” check box to limit the selection to filenames matching the case of the letters you type.

3	In the Type drop-down box, select a file format. All formats listed in the Open dialog box are included.

4	Use the File size boxes to select files by size. Choose between files greater than, less than or equal to the specified size. You can then type a floating-point number in the middle box and choose bytes, KB, or MB from the last box. These boxes use the following rules for the floating-point number:

•	Numbers after the decimal are ignored for bytes.

•	The first digit after the decimal is used for kilobytes, and two for megabytes.

5	In the Date drop-down box, select the date the files was last saved. You can type a date or use the date picker control calendar.

6	In the Width, Height, and Bits per pixel (color depth) drop down boxes, select if you want to search for images Equal To, Greater Than, or Less Than specific dimensions and/or color depth. Use the numeric edit controls of the boxes next to them to enter the values.

7	In the Size boxes, enter the size of the memory required to open the image. These boxes operate in the same way as the File size boxes described in step 4.

8	Select the “Keep current selections” check box to add the selected files to those already selected.

9	Clear All to reset the dialog box to its default values.

10	Click Ok to close the dialog box and select the files matching the attributes you entered.

File Attributes	Information to Enter
• Name	Enter the file’s name or any portion thereof.
• Type	Choose the file type from the drop-down list.
• File Size	Choose All, Equal To, Greater Than, or Less than. For the last 3, enter the size.
• Date	Choose All, On, After, or Before. For the last 3, enter the dates.
Image Attributes	Information
• Width	Choose All, Equal To, Greater Than, or Less than. For the last 3, enter the size.
• Height	Choose All, Equal To, Greater Than, or Less than. For the last 3, enter the size.
• Bits per Pixel	Choose All, Equal To, Greater Than, or Less than. For the last 3, enter the bits per pixel.
• Size	Choose All, Equal To, Greater Than, or Less than. For the last 3, enter the size.


Using Thumbnails to Copy Files
 Copying a File Using the Browser

You can copy one or more files to a different folder by using the Browser commands or by using drag-and-drop.

Using the Commands

To copy one or more files to a different folder using the Browser commands:

1	Open the folder containing the image or images you want to copy.

2	Select the thumbnail of one or more files.

3	Do one of the following:

•	Choose ImageFile > Copy To,

•	Click the Browser toolbar Copy To button [image].

•	Right-click the thumbnail and choose Copy To from the context menu, or

•	Press <Ctrl> + <Y>.

The Browse for Folder navigation box opens.

4	Navigate to and select the folder in which you want to place the copy.

5	Click OK to close the navigation box and copy the image file to the selected folder.

Using Drag-and-Drop

You can drag and drop thumbnails to folders in the left pane to copy or move them. Dragging thumbnails to a folder on the same drive moves them. Dragging them to a folder on a different drive copies them.

Also note the following actions:

•	Pressing <Ctrl> while dragging always copies a thumbnail.

•	Pressing <Shift> while dragging always moves a thumbnail.

You can tell you are copying or moving a file by looking at the cursor. It displays a “+” when you are copying a file.

Copying an Image into a Minimized Program

To copy an image into a minimized program, drag the thumbnail of the image from the Browser and hold it over the program’s button on the task bar. When the application opens, release the mouse button.

Copying an Image to a Program that Supports OLE

To copy an image into a program that supports metafiles, DIBs, and BMPs, press <Alt> and drag the thumbnail from the Browser to the document. A multi-layered image is merged before it is copied into the document.

Related Topics

 Using the Browse for Folder Navigation Box

 Using Thumbnails to Select Files


Using the Browse for Folder Navigation Box

Use the Browse for Folder Navigation Box to search your computer quickly and easily. There are several commands that open the dialog box. When the Browser is active, the dialog box opens when you choose the File > Browse New Folder, ImageFile > Copy To, ImageFile > Move To commands or click their corresponding Browser toolbar buttons. It also opens when you click the Browser toolbar New Folder button [image] or the Browse button on the main toolbar.

When you are working in the main Paint Shop Pro window, the dialog box opens when you click the Browse buttons in the Custom Brush and Batch Conversion dialog boxes. When working in the Image Mapper and Image Slicer dialog boxes, clicking the Save to Clipboard buttons opens the HTML Destination Folder dialog box, which is the same as this one.

Please note that the Create New Folder button is available only when you copy or move thumbnails. It is not available when you open the dialog box by choosing File > Browse New Folder.

To use the dialog box:

1	Navigate to the folder you want to select by scrolling through the tree, choosing a recent folder from the drop-down box or typing a path in the Select a folder text area. Use the Locate button [image] at the right to display and select the folder you typed.

2	Click the folder to select it. The folder opens.

3	To create a new folder below the selected folder, click the Create New Folder button [image].

4	To select the Paint Shop Pro Image, My Documents, or a temporary folder, click the Special Folder button [image]. You can add folders to this menu by selecting them in the tree and choosing the Add Current command.

5	Click OK to close the dialog box and copy or move the image or perform the command.


 Deleting a File Using the Browser

You can delete one or several files using the Browser.

To delete an image file using the thumbnail:

1	Navigate to and open the folder containing the image or images you want to delete.

2	Select the thumbnail of one or more files.

3	Do one of the following:

•	Choose ImageFile > Delete,

•	Click the Browser toolbar Delete button [image].

•	Right-click the thumbnail and choose Delete from the context menu, or

•	Press <Ctrl> + <Delete>.

A message asking you to confirm your action appears.

4	Click Yes to delete the selected file or files.

Related Topics

 Using the Browse for Folder Navigation Box

 Using Thumbnails to Select Files


 Moving a File Using the Browser

You can move one or more files to a different folder by using the Browser commands or by using drag-and-drop.

Using the Commands

To move one or more files to a different folder using the Browser commands:

1	Open the folder containing the image or images you want to move.

2	Select the thumbnail of one or more files.

3	Do one of the following to open the Browse for Folder navigation box:

•	Choose ImageFile > Move,

•	Click the Browser toolbar Move To button [image].

•	Right-click the thumbnail and choose Move To from the context menu, or

•	Press <Ctrl> + <M>.

4	Navigate to and highlight the new folder.

5	Click OK to close the navigation box and move the file or files to the selected folder.

Using Drag-and-Drop

You can drag and drop thumbnails to folders in the left pane to copy or move them. Dragging thumbnails to a folder on the same drive moves them. Dragging them to a folder on a different drive copies them.

Also note the following actions:

•	Pressing <Ctrl> while dragging always copies a thumbnail.

•	Pressing <Shift> while dragging always moves a thumbnail.

You can tell you are copying or moving a file by looking at the cursor. It displays a “+” when you are copying a file.

Related Topics

 Using the Browse for Folder Navigation Box

 Using Thumbnails to Select Files


 Renaming a File Using the Browser

To rename a file using the Browser:

1	Navigate to and open the folder containing the image you want to rename.

2	Select the file’s thumbnail.

3	Do one of the following to open the Rename dialog box:

•	Choose ImageFile > Rename,

•	Click the Browser toolbar Rename button [image].

•	Right-click the thumbnail and choose Rename from the context menu, or

•	Press <Ctrl> + <R>.

4	Type the new name. The file name can be up to 255 characters long, including the path and file extension. The Browser does not automatically add the extension. If you want the file name to include an extension, add it to the name.

5	Click the OK button to rename the file and close the dialog box.

Related Topics

 Using the Browse for Folder Navigation Box

 Using Thumbnails to Select Files


Updating Thumbnails
 Updating Thumbnails and the Browser Tree

Updating the Thumbnails of a Folder

To update the thumbnail images for the current folder, choose File > Update Thumbnails, press <F5>, or right-click any empty area of the right pane and choose Update Thumbnails from the context menu.

Updating thumbnails:

•	Refreshes the thumbnail images to reflect any changes to the files,

•	Removes thumbnails of files that have been deleted, and

•	Adds thumbnails of files that have been added to the selected folder.

Updating the Browser Tree

To update the Browser tree, choose View > Refresh Tree, press <Ctrl> + <F5>, or right-click any empty area of the right pane and choose Refresh Tree from the context menu.

Updating the tree refreshes the view of the folders in the tree and updates the thumbnails.

Related Topics

 Setting the Browser Preferences


 Sorting Thumbnails

You can arrange the thumbnails so that they appear in ascending or descending order according to file and image characteristics.

•	Note Sorting thumbnails is a one-time operation. The thumbnails will not remain sorted if you add new images or change the properties of the existing files.
New images are always added to the end of the list.

To sort the thumbnails in a folder:

1	Choose File > Sort or click the Browser toolbar Sort button [image]. The Thumbnail Sort dialog box opens. There are two criteria groups, the Primary Sort and the Secondary Sort.

2	In the “Sort order” panel of the Primary Sort tab, select to sort the images by ascending or descending order.

3	In the “Sort by” panel, select either a file attribute or an image attribute. You cannot select both.

4	Click the Secondary Sort tab to bring it to the front.

5	Do one of the following:

•	Repeat the process you used to select the primary criteria.

•	Click the No sort option. When this option is selected, no secondary sort criteria are used. The file and image attributes options are not available.

6	Click the OK button. The Browser sorts the thumbnails according to the order and criteria you selected.


 Previewing Thumbnails

Use the Print Preview window to see how the thumbnails will look when printed.

To open the Browser Print Preview window:

•	Choose File > Print Preview.

•	Click the Print Preview button [image] on the toolbar.

The window contains several buttons:

Print button

Click to close the Browser Print Preview window and open the Print dialog box.

Setup button

Click to close the Print Preview window and open the Page Setup dialog box.

•	Select the paper size and source in the Paper panel.

•	Select either a landscape or portrait orientation in the Orientation panel.

•	Set the margins in the Margins boxes.

When you close the Page Setup dialog box, Paint Shop Pro returns to the Browser Print Preview window.

Next Page and Prev Page Buttons

These buttons will be accessible if the thumbnails cover more than one page. Click to move forward and back by one page respectively.

Two Page / One Page Button

Click to switch the display between two pages and one.

Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons

Click to change the magnification level. You can also zoom in and out by clicking the image.

Close Button

Click to close the Browser Print Preview window.

Related Topics

 Printing Thumbnails

 Using the Thumbnail Page Setup Dialog Box


 Thumbnail Page Setup Dialog Box

To configure the Browser Page Setup dialog box options:

1	Select the paper size and source from the drop down boxes in the Paper group area. The options will vary with printers. (For some printers, one or both of the drop-down boxes may be unavailable.)

2	Select a page orientation from the Orientation panel. There are two page orientations, portrait and landscape. Printing in portrait orientation places the top of the image against one of the page’s narrow sides. Printing in landscape orientation places the top of the image against one of the page’s wide sides.

3	Set margins for the printed page by typing the measurements (in inches) in the four margin boxes.

4	Click Printer if you want to open the Printer Setup dialog box and make changes.

5	Click OK to close the Browser Page Setup dialog box and save the new settings.


 Printing Thumbnails

To print the thumbnails:

1	Open the Print dialog box by doing one of the following:

•	Choosing File > Print.

•	Pressing <Ctrl> + <P>.

•	Clicking the Print button [image] on the toolbar.

•	Clicking the Print button in the Print Preview window.

2	Select a printer in the Printer Name box.

3	To change the selected printer’s properties, click the Properties button. Paint Shop Pro opens the appropriate Properties dialog box. For help using the dialog box, press <F1>.

4	To print the image to a file rather than to paper, select the Print to File check box. When you then click the Print button, the Print to File dialog box will open. Enter a location and name for the new file in this dialog box.

5	Select the Print Range. You can print all the thumbnails, a range of pages, or just the selected thumbnails. If you select Pages, enter the first and last pages to print in the “from:” and “to:” boxes.

6	Set the number of copies you want to print. If your printer does not support multiple copies, the Number of copies box is unavailable.

7	Click OK. Paint Shop Pro sends the file to the printer or file.

To print the images rather than thumbnails, right-click a thumbnail and choose Print Multiple Images.

Related Topics

 Using the Thumbnail Page Setup Dialog Box

 Printing Multiple Images on a Page


Fitting Browser Window to Thumbnails
Fitting the Browser Window to Thumbnails

To resize the Browser window to fit the number of rows and columns of thumbnails currently visible, choose Window > Fit to Thumbnails or click the Browser toolbar Fit to Thumbnails button [image]. The Browser aligns to the nearest column of thumbnails. If there are too many thumbnails to fit within the window, a scrollbar appears along its edge.


About the Auto-Scroll Command

When Auto-scroll is active, the right pane of the Browser refreshes thumbnails from the top to the bottom of the right pane. If you scroll the right pane of the Browser during the refresh action, the thumbnails refresh starting from the scroll location. The Browser then returns to refresh the thumbnails it skipped. This turns the Auto-scroll function off.

To activate the Auto-scrolling mode again, choose View > Auto-Scroll.


 Closing the Browser

To close the Browser, either:

•	Click the Browser window’s Close button, or

•	Click the Browser window to activate it, and then choose File > Close.


About the Cache File

The first time you browse a folder, the Browser searches for images supported by Paint Shop Pro. It creates and displays a thumbnail for each supported image and stores the information in a special cache file. This cache file contains the name, thumbnail, and information for each image. You can have the Browser save it as a "pspbrwse.jbf." file in the folder.

The images in a folder load more quickly when you use cache files. Rather than having to read and generate a thumbnail for each image, the Browser compares the contents of the cache file to the folder and makes the necessary changes.

Use the Browser Preferences tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box to set the preference for saving cache files.

 Setting Browser Preferences


Context Sensitive Menus

The Browser has two context-sensitive menus that display many of the commands for editing and managing thumbnails. Right-clicking an individual thumbnail selects that thumbnail and opens a thumbnail context menu that contains the commands from the ImageFile menu. If more than one thumbnail is selected when you open the menu, the Rename and Information commands are unavailable.

When you choose Print Multiple Images from the menu, all selected thumbnails appear in the Multiple Image Printing window along with any images in the workspace of the main Paint Shop Pro window. When you want to print the thumbnails rather than images, choose File > Print or click the Print button [image] on the toolbar.

Right-clicking the background area of the right pane opens a general context menu that contains commands for working with the Browser in general. If a thumbnail is selected, pressing the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key while right-clicking the background does not open this menu. It opens the thumbnail context menu.

Related Topics

 Printing Thumbnails

 Printing Multiple Images on a Page


ImageFile Information

After clicking a thumbnail, choose this command to open the File Information box, which displays the file format, location, compression method, size, bit depth, and other information.

You can also open the File Information box by:

•	Right-clicking the thumbnail, and choosing Information from the context menu,

•	Clicking the thumbnail, and choosing ImageFile > Information,

•	Pressing <Shift> + <I>, or

•	Clicking the optional Image File Information button [image] on the Browser toolbar.


Browser Menu Bar


Thumbnail Pop-up


Find Dialog Box


Browse for Folder Navigation Box


Select Dialog Box


Thumbnail Context Menu


General Browser Context Menu


Paint Shop Pro Browser


Browser Page Setup Dialog Box


Browser Print Preview Window


File Information Box


Create New Folder Command

Choose this command to create a folder while you are using the Browser. Paint Shop Pro places the new folder inside the folder that is active in the Browser.

When you choose this command or click its optional Browser toolbar button, the Create New Folder dialog box opens. Use the dialog box to name the new folder.

 Using the Create New Folder Dialog Box


Create New Folder Dialog Box

This dialog box opens when you choose the Browser File > Create New Folder command or click its optional Browser toolbar button. Type a name for the folder you are creating and click OK. Paint Shop Pro closes the dialog box and places the new folder inside the folder that is currently open in the Browser.


General Program Preferences

The general program preferences are settings and options that determine how Paint Shop Pro displays and uses various features.

To change any general program preference:

1	Choose File > Preferences > General Program Preferences. The Paint Shop Pro Preferences dialog box opens.

2	Click the tab containing the preference information you want to change.

3	Select the new settings, and then click OK to close the dialog box and apply the changes.

For more information on specific options, select one of the Preferences tabs listed below.

 Setting Undo/Redo Preferences

 Setting Viewing Preferences

 Setting Dialogs and Palettes Preferences

 Setting Browser Preferences

 Setting Miscellaneous Preferences

 Setting Rulers and Units Preferences

 Setting Transparency Preferences

 Setting Warnings Preferences

Note to users of earlier versions of Paint Shop Pro: The Plug-in Filters tab has been moved to the File locations dialog box, which you open by choosing File > Preferences > File Locations.

Related Topics

 Setting Plug-in Filters Preferences

 Setting Cursor and Tablet Preferences

 Using the Paint Shop Pro Bars and Palettes


Undo/Redo Preferences

Use the options on the Undo/Redo preferences tab to enable the Undo and Redo systems and to select how Paint Shop Pro stores the Undo/Redo information.

The numeric edit controls in this tab provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

Enable the Undo System

Select this check box to use the Undo and Redo commands. If the box is not selected, you cannot undo individual steps. You can, however, still undo all changes by choosing the Revert command from the File menu.

Limit Undo/Redo Disk Usage per Open Image

Select this check box and enter the amount of disk space for Paint Shop Pro to use when storing the Undo/Redo information. The value can be between 5 and 999 MB of storage per open image.

Limit Undo/Redo Steps per Open Image

Select this check box and enter a value to place a limit on the number of steps of Undo/Redo information Paint Shop Pro stores per image. The range is from 1 to 99 steps per open image.

Compress Undo/Redo Information

Select this check box to compress the Undo information. This conserves disk space, but it slows Undo/Redo operations.

Enable the Redo System

Select this check box to use the Redo commands, which re-apply actions that you have undone.


Plug-in Filters Preferences

You can use external image processing filters with Paint Shop Pro by selecting the options on the Plug-in Filters preferences tab. “Adobe-compatible” is the Windows standard for image processing filters.

If you use filters, they load in the background when Paint Shop Pro starts. While they are loading, a message indicating this appears at the bottom of the Effects menu. After the loading is finished, the message is replaced by a Plug-ins submenu.

Enable Filters

Select this check box to use external image processing filters.

Include Sub-folders when Searching

Select this check box to have Paint Shop Pro search for filters in sub-folders as well as the selected folder.

Limit Loaded Plug-in Files to .8B?

Select this check box to restrict loaded files to those with an extension of .8B?.

Enable Automatic Identification

Select this check box to have the Browser read file formats supplied as plug-ins. If the plug-in displays a dialog box each time it loads a file, you may want to disable this option.

Locate the Filter Folder

You can place the filters you want Paint Shop Pro to use in up to three folders. Before using a filter, you must enter its path. If you know the path, type it in the Folder text boxes. If you do not know the path, click the Browse button to use the Browse for Folder dialog box.


Viewing Preferences

The Viewing preferences tab controls if and how Paint Shop Pro automatically sizes images and image windows after using the Zoom tool, after creating an image, and after resizing an image window.

Zooming

The Zooming options determine if Paint Shop Pro automatically resizes an image window when you zoom in or zoom out. A window is resized to include as much of the image as will fit.

New Images

When the “Auto size” check box is selected, if you open an image that is too large to fit in its image window, Paint Shop Pro automatically resets the image’s magnification so that the entire image is visible.

After Changing Size

When the “Fit window to image” check box is selected, Paint Shop Pro automatically resizes the image window whenever you resize an image.

When the “Auto Size” check box is selected, if you increase an image’s size to more than can fit in its window, Paint Shop Pro reduces the image’s magnification accordingly.


Dialogs and Palettes Preferences

Use the Dialogs and Palettes preferences tab to choose a color dialog box, palette style, and default file format for the Save As dialog box, and whether to activate the Automatic Roll-up feature.

Presentation Options

Large Text and Icons

When you select the "Display large text and icons on palettes" check box, Paint Shop Pro displays larger icons on each palette tool button.

Flat Style Toolbar

When you select the "Display flat style toolbars” check box, Paint Shop Pro displays flat buttons. If you are working on a laptop, clear this check box. The three-dimensional toolbar buttons are easier to see on a laptop.

Last File Type Used

When you select the "Remember last type used in file save-as dialog," the Save As dialog box automatically displays the file format previously used. This is convenient when you are saving several files in a specific format, but you don’t want to use the Batch Conversion command.

Menu Icons

When you select the “Display menu icons” check box, Paint Shop Pro displays the appropriate icon to the left of each command name in the menus.

Automatic Palette Roll-ups

When you select the “Enable automatic palette roll-ups” check box, the Histogram, Overview window, and the Tool Options and Layer palettes minimize to their title bars when you move the cursor away from them. They return to the original size when you move the cursor back over them. This feature keeps these items readily accessible while giving you more workspace.

Color Dropper ToolTips

When you select the “Display all color dropper tooltips” check box, Paint Shop Pro displays either the RGB or HSL values for the color under the cursor whenever the Dropper tool is active.

Color Palette Options

Color Display Format

The Color palette options determine how Paint Shop Pro displays color data on the Color palette. You can display color using its Red/Green/Blue (RGB) or its Hue/Saturation/Lightness (HSL) values.

Windows Color Picker

Paint Shop Pro provides two color dialog boxes: the default Paint Shop Pro color dialog box and the standard Windows color dialog box. Select the "Use standard Windows color picker" check box to use the Windows color dialog box.

Decimal or Hexadecimal Display

You can display the HSL and RGB color values in decimal or hexadecimal format. Because Web browsers use the hexadecimal format, you may prefer to display it when you are creating art for use on the Web. Paint Shop Pro also displays the hexadecimal value of colors in the Jasc Color dialog box.

Rainbow Picker or Document Palette

This option determines how the Color palette display the colors available for use in a paletted image (one with 256 or fewer colors). When you choose the Rainbow Picker option, the Available Colors panel displays the same color options no matter how many colors the image contains. When you choose the Document palette option, the Available Colors panel displays only the colors that you can use when working with a paletted image.


Browser Preferences

The Browser preferences tab displays the options for the thumbnails and the cache file.

Thumbnail Size

While the default thumbnail size is 80 by 80 pixels, you can choose any other size from 50 to 150 pixels. To keep the width and height of the thumbnails equal, leave the “Symmetric” check box selected. Clear it to enter different values using the Width and Height numeric edit controls.

Appearance

By default, the Browser uses the standard Windows color of dark blue to indicate a selected thumbnail. To use a different color, select “Use classic colors,” click the Selection color box and choose a new color from the Color dialog box; right-click it to choose a color from the Recent Colors dialog box.

When you select the "Display flat style thumbnails” check box, Paint Shop Pro displays flat thumbnails.

Browser Files Saved to Disk

As you view a folder using the Browser, Paint Shop Pro saves the folder's image information to a cache file named “pspbrwse.jbf,” and it stores that file in the folder. When you next view the folder, the Browser reads and displays the information from the cache file. This is much faster than having the Browser re-scan the folder's images. If you prefer not to have the program create and save a cache file for each folder you browse, clear the “Save Browser files to disk” check box.

Automatic Update of Thumbnails

When you view a folder using the Browser, it either:

•	Reads and displays the saved cache file, or

•	Compares the information in the cache file to the images in the folder to check for additions, deletions, and modifications, and updates the thumbnails to reflect the changes.

To compare and update the cache file information each time you browse a folder, select the “Automatically update the thumbnails” check box.

Related Topics

 About the Browser Cache File

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Miscellaneous Preferences

The numeric edit controls in the Miscellaneous preferences tab provide several ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

Recent File Listing

Use the Recently used file list option to set the maximum number of files that the File menu displays in the Most Recently Used list. Note that:

•	You must restart Paint Shop Pro before the new setting will take effect.

•	If you increase the setting, you will not reach the new maximum list length until you have opened a sufficient number of new files. For example, if the old list contained four files and you increase the setting to ten, you will have to open six new files before you reach the new maximum length.

Transparent Paste Color Tolerance

When you paste data as a transparent selection, Paint Shop Pro adds it to the current image, defines it as a selection, and then deselects all the pixels that match the current background color. The tolerance value you enter determines how closely the background color must match the transparent color for it to become transparent.

The Tolerance setting uses a scale of 0% to 100%, with 0 being no tolerance (only pixels with a perfect match are deselected), and 100 being total tolerance (all pixels are deselected).

Other Options

Do Not Ask to Empty Clipboard on Exit

When you select the "Do not ask to empty clipboard on Exit" check box, Paint Shop Pro does not prompt you to empty the Windows clipboard when you exit Paint Shop Pro.

Force Window Redraw

When you select the "Force full window redraw when positioning image elements" check box, Paint Shop Pro redraws the information in the active window whenever you move objects in the image.

Show Splash Screen

When you select the "Show splash screen when application starts" check box, Paint Shop Pro displays its splash screen each time you launch the application. The splash screen shows the Jasc Software, Inc. logo and the version number of Paint Shop Pro.

Disable Pressure Support for Pointing Devices

A puck-type pointing device is used with a graphics tablet. Some of these devices have the same pressure-sensitive feature as the graphics pens. When you use the pen, you can vary the pressure you apply to the tablet to control opacity, color, or line width. With a puck-type pointing device, you use its buttons to control the pressure applied. Push the button in more to apply greater pressure; ease up on it to reduce the pressure.

When you select the “Disable pressure support for puck-type pointing devices” check box, the pressure-sensitive feature is not available.


Rulers and Units Preferences

The Rulers and Units Preferences tab options control how rulers and grids are displayed on the screen and what unit settings (i.e., pixels, inches, or centimeters) are used.

Rulers

In the “Rulers” panel, select whether to display pixels, inches, or centimeters on the ruler. Set the ruler colors either to match the other toolbars or to be black on white.

Default Resolution

In the “Default Resolution” panel, use the numeric edit control to choose a default resolution for new images. You can override this resolution on an image-by-image basis by changing the settings in the New Image dialog box.

Grid

In the “Grid” panel, select the units of measurement (pixels, inches, or centimeters) and the horizontal and vertical grid spacing measured in the units. To change the color of the grid lines, click inside the Line Color box to open the Color dialog box. Right-click in the Line Color box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

You can also set the preferences for the Grid in the active image using the Grid and Guide Properties dialog box.

Guide

In the “Guide” panel, select a default color for the guide lines. To change the color of the lines, click inside the Line Color box to open the Color dialog box. Right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

You can also set the preferences for the guides using the Grid and Guide Properties dialog box.

•	Note: Grid and Guide settings applied to individual images override the default settings selected in this tab.

Related Topics

 About the Grid and Guides

 Using the Rulers

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Transparency Preferences

The Transparency Preferences tab options control how Paint Shop Pro displays the grid representing transparent backgrounds and transparent areas of layers.

From the Grid Size drop-down box, choose a grid size. (The default is Medium.)

In the “Grid Colors” panel, choose a color scheme from the drop-down box. The two Color boxes and the Preview box display the new grid.

To use custom colors, click inside the Color 1 and Color 2 boxes. When the Color dialog box opens, choose a color, and then click OK. To choose colors from the Recent Colors dialog box, right-click inside the color boxes. The Preview box displays your selection.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


CMYK Conversion Preferences

In a CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) conversion, Paint Shop Pro replaces the RGB (Red, Green, and Blue) colors you see on the monitor with the CMYK colors used in printing. You can then print a separate page for each CMYK color by selecting the CMYK Separations option in the Page Setup dialog box. This is useful if you are using a prepress shop and doing high-end printing.

Before printing the separations, configure the CMYK preferences to determine how Paint Shop Pro handles the conversion from RGB to CMYK, and then save these preferences in a file called a profile. Use the CMYK Conversion Preferences dialog box to select the preferences.

To open the dialog box, choose File > Preferences > CMYK Conversion Preferences.

 Using the CMYK Conversion Preferences Profile


CMYK Conversion Preferences Profile
CMYK Conversion Preferences Dialog Box

Use the CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) Preferences dialog box to manage your CMYK profiles. All the CMYK settings are stored in a file called a profile. These profiles determine the settings Paint Shop Pro uses when converting RGB (Red, Green, and Blue) color to CMYK color.

Selecting a Profile

To select a profile:

1	Click the Current Profile drop-down box to view the profile choices.

2	Click the profile you want to use.

Creating a Profile

To create a new profile, click the New button. The New CMYK Profile dialog box opens.

 Using the New CMYK Profile Dialog Box

Modifying a Profile

To modify a new profile, click the Modify button. The CMYK Profile dialog box opens. Use the three tabs in this dialog box to modify the properties for the profile.

 Black Generation Tab

 Transfer and Components Tab

 Ink Calibration Tab

Removing a Profile

To remove a profile, highlight the profile and click the Remove button.


Using the New CMYK Profile Dialog Box

Creating a Profile

There are two ways to create a CMYK profile:

•	You can create a new profile and then modify the settings.

•	You can modify the settings of an existing profile and then save it with a new name.

Use the New CMYK Profile dialog box to select the initial settings and name the profile by doing the following:

1	In the New CMYK Profile dialog box, select the initial settings for the profile. You can start with the program’s default settings or with the settings currently selected.

2	Type a name for the new profile.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the CMYK Conversion Preferences dialog box.

Related Topics

 Modifying the Black Generation Settings

 Modifying the Transfer and Components Settings

 Modifying the Ink Calibration Settings


CMYK Profile Black Generation

Use the Black Generation tab of the CMYK Profile dialog box to set how the black ink component is used.

To use the Black Generation tab:

1	Select a black generation method:

•	Undercolor Removal (UCR) replaces some of the cyan, magenta, and yellow components of neutral grey and shadow areas with black. This helps compensate for some of the trapping problems that occur in multicolor printing.

•	Grey Component Replacement (GCR) replaces grey components in colored areas of a reproduction with black. The least prominent color is reduced or removed completely, along with proportional amounts of the other two colors, to define a grey component, which is then replaced with black ink.

2	Select the black parameters. The black line in the graph represents the black value and updates as you change the settings. The settings are:

•	Total Coverage Limit, which can range from 200 to 400%.

•	Blank Ink Coverage Limit, which can range from 0 to 200%.

•	Black Starts At, which can range from 0 to 100%.

•	GCR Black Gamma, which can range from 1 to 4.

3	To return to the default settings for the black generation method, click the Default button.

 Transfer and Components Tab

 Ink Calibration Tab


CMYK Profile Transfer and Components

The left panel of the Transfer and Components tab displays a graph of the transfer curves for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The right panels display parameters for grey and color components.

To use the Transfer and Components tab:

1	Adjust the transfer curves. Highlighting the name of a curve in the Transfer Curves drop-down box, and then drag the points of the curve up or down. Each transfer curve contains five adjustable points that define the curve based on its zero-tone, quarter-tone, mid-tone, three-quarter-tone, and full-tone percentages. The default curve is a straight line from 0 to 100%. A curve that slopes above this 45° line produces darker tones.

2	Set the Grey and Color Component percentages by typing values into the corresponding text boxes. Values can range from 0 to 100%.

3	To return a curve to its default settings, click the Default button.

 Ink Calibration Tab

 Black Generation Tab


CMYK Profile Ink Calibration

The Ink Calibration tab provides textboxes to adjust for color shifts. The Hue and Greyness panel displays six colors, along with the combined CMY color. The Grey Balance panel includes the textboxes for adjusting CMY percentages.

To use the Ink Calibration tab:

1	Select Hue and Grayness colors. Left-click a box under the color name to open the Color dialog box; right-click it to open the Recent Color dialog box.

2	Adjust Grey Balance percentages.

3	To return to the default settings for a color box or grey value, click the default button.

 Transfer and Components Tab

 Black Generation Tab

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Setting File Format Preferences

Most file formats can be opened in Paint Shop Pro using the File> Open command. Some formats need information from the user so they can be displayed properly. Use the File Preferences dialog box to set your preferences for these formats.

 PCD Preferences

 PostScript Preferences

 RAW Preferences

 WMF / Import Preferences


Setting PCD File Preferences

PCD (the Kodak PhotoCD format) is used by many photo developers for delivering photos on CDs. This format can provide multiple resolutions of an image in one file. On this tab, you set a default resolution for PCD images. The format does not support transparency or layers.

To set a default resolution for opening PCD files:

1	Choose File > Preferences > File Format Preferences.

2	In the File Preferences dialog box, click the PCD tab.

3	Choose either:

•	One of the seven size options to open all PCD files in a specific pixel width and height, or

•	The “Ask when loading each file” option to be prompted for a resolution each time that you open a PCD file.

4	Click OK.

If you choose the “Ask when loading each file” option, Paint Shop Pro displays a dialog box containing the size choices when you open a PCD file.


Setting RAW File Preferences

Use the RAW tab to determine how Paint Shop Pro interprets RAW pixel data. For information about a RAW file’s format, refer to the documentation for the application that created the image.

To set the RAW format options:

1	Choose File > Preferences > File Format Preferences.

2	In the File Preferences dialog box, click the RAW tab to bring it to the front.

3	If you are familiar with RAW files, the RAW options should be self-explanatory. If you are new to the format, please find and read information about RAW data in general and the file you are trying to open in particular. A discussion of RAW pixel data is beyond the scope of this help file.


Setting WMF / Import File Preferences

WMF (Windows Meta File) is the Microsoft Windows native vector format. It is used for clip art in Microsoft Office as well as other programs. Although it is size independent because it is a vector format, some WMF files do provide a header containing a default size. It does not support transparency or layers.

To set a default resolution for opening WMF files:

1	Choose File > Preferences > File Format Preferences.

2	In the File Preferences dialog box, click the WMF/Import tab.

3	Choose either to be prompted for the size each time or to use the header information and your chosen defaults when no header is available.

4	Select or clear the Import vector data check box:

•	With the check box selected, metafile records are processed for vector shapes.

•	With the check box cleared, metafile records are processed into a raster image.

5	Click OK.

Paint Shop Pro 7 does not support Clipping in WMF files when input as vectors. All WMF functions are supported when files are read in as raster.

Paint Shop Pro 7 does not support Transparency, Clipping, Paths, and Alpha channels in EMF files when input as vectors. All EMF functions are supported when files are read in as raster.

Related Topics

 Opening Windows MetaFiles and Windows Enhanced MetaFiles

 MetaFile Limitations with Paint Shop Pro


File Associations Preferences

The File Associations Preferences function allows you to select the file formats that will be associated with Paint Shop Pro. Associating a file format with Paint Shop Pro means that your computer will automatically open all files of that format using Paint Shop Pro. These files display the Paint Shop Pro icon.

Use the File Format Associations dialog box to associate a file format with Paint Shop Pro.

Opening the File Associations Dialog Box

To open the File Format Associations dialog box, choose File > Preferences > File Associations.

 Using the File Format Associations Dialog Box


Using the File Associations Dialog Box
Using the File Format Associations Dialog Box

Use the File Format Associations dialog box to select which files your computer opens automatically using Paint Shop Pro.

Using the File Format Associations Dialog Box

1	The right side of the dialog box provides buttons to associate any or all unused formats with Paint Shop Pro or to remove all the format associations:

•	To associate all listed formats, click the Select All button.

•	To associate any file formats that are not associated with other applications, click the Select Unused button.

•	To have no file formats associated with Paint Shop Pro, click the Remove All button.

2	To associate a specific file format with Paint Shop Pro, select its check box. The extensions used by the format will appear below the list.

3	To add or remove extensions that you want to have automatically associated with the selected format, click the Extensions button to open the Extensions dialog box.

4	Change the extensions, and then click OK to return to the File Format Associations dialog box.

5	After you have selected files to associate with Paint Shop Pro, click OK to close the dialog box and apply the associations.

6	To close the dialog box without changing any associations, click Cancel.

Related Topic

 Using the Extensions Dialog Box


Using the Extensions Dialog Box

Use the Extensions dialog box to add and delete extensions associated with specific file formats. You can add extension names that contain up to 24 letters and underscore symbols (_). New extensions are added to the formats displayed in the Open, Save, Save As, and Save Copy As dialog boxes.

•	Notes: You must restart Paint Shop Pro to apply the changes.
You can not delete the default extension.

To open the dialog box, click the Extensions button in the File Format Associations dialog box.

Using the Extensions Dialog Box

•	To add a file extension, click the Add button to open the Define File Extension dialog box. Type the extension you want associated with the format and click OK to close the dialog box.

•	To delete an extension you have added, highlight it and then click the Delete button.

•	To change an extension to the preferred status, highlight it and then click the Preferred button.

•	To return the format to its default extension, click the Reset button.

After you have made your changes, click the OK button to close the dialog box.

Related Topic

 Using the File Associations Dialog Box


Changing the Toolbars Buttons

As you work in Paint Shop Pro, you will probably find yourself using some commands more often than others. These commands have toolbar buttons that you can add, remove, and rearrange. By customizing the toolbars and changing the buttons, you can access the commands more quickly.

The commands in the main Paint Shop Pro menus have buttons that you can add to any of the Paint Shop Pro main window toolbars. There are four main window toolbars: Standard, Web, Photo, and Effects. You can add any of the command buttons to any of these toolbars.

The commands in the Browser menus have buttons that you can add to the Browser toolbar. You cannot add Browser buttons to the main window toolbars or main window buttons to the Browser toolbar.

To customize the toolbars, use the Customize Toolbar dialog box. There are two ways to open the dialog box:

•	Right-click a toolbar and choose Customize from the context menu.

•	In the Toolbars dialog box, click the Standard, Web, Photo, Effects, or Browser Toolbar name to highlight it and then click the Customize button.

 Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box


Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box

Use the Customize Toolbar dialog box to add, remove, and rearrange buttons for faster access to frequently used commands. The Separator button adds a space to the toolbar.

To Add Buttons

You can add a button by dragging it from the Available buttons list to the Toolbar buttons list or by using the Add button.

To use the Add button:

1	In the Available buttons list, click the button that you want to add to the toolbar.

2	In the Toolbar buttons list, highlight the button above which you want to insert the new button.

3	Click the Add Button. Paint Shop Pro removes the button from the available buttons list and inserts it at the selected position in the Toolbar buttons list.

To Remove Buttons

You can remove a button by dragging it from the Toolbar buttons list to the Available buttons list or by using the Remove button.

To use the Remove button:

1	In the Toolbar buttons list, click the button that you want to remove from the toolbar.

2	Click the Remove button. Paint Shop Pro moves the button from the Toolbar buttons list to the Available buttons list.

To Rearrange Buttons

You can move a button by dragging it within the Toolbar buttons list or by using the Move Up and Move Down buttons.

To use the Move Up and Move Down buttons with the Toolbar buttons list:

1	In the Toolbar buttons list, click the button that you want to move.

2	Click the Move Up button to move the button up one space. Click the Move Down button to move it down one space.

To Restore the Default Configuration

To return the toolbar to its original setting, click the Reset button.

To Apply the Settings

After you have finished, click Close to close the dialog box and apply the new button settings.


Windows 98 Color Management Preferences

Color Management is a Windows 98 feature that improves color rendition when you display an image or page on your monitor and print it on your printer. It also allows you to preview, within the limitations of the monitor, how the image will look when printed on a specific color printer. Color profiles are installed when a monitor or printer is installed, and the profiles are used whenever colors are displayed or printed. For more information Color Management, please refer to your Windows documentation.

•	Note: To use Color Management, you must have Windows 98 or 2000 installed on your computer. The Color Management dialog box is not available with Windows 95 or NT4.

To open the Color Management dialog box in Paint Shop Pro, choose File > Preferences > Color Management.

 Using the Color Management Dialog Box


Using the Color Management Dialog Box

To use the Color Management dialog box:

1	Select the Enable Color Management check box.

2	Select Basic Color Management if you want to set how colors will appear on your monitor and printer. Select Proofing if you want to preview how colors would appear on a particular device.

3	Select the applicable device profiles and settings in the drop-down boxes.

4	Click OK to apply the settings and close the dialog box.

For more information about Color Management, please refer to your Windows documentation.


Monitor Gamma Preferences

Monitors display colors by exciting phosphors to produce red, green, and blue light. Because these phosphors do not excite equally, they can produce distortions in the brightness, contrast, and color balance of images. For example, if a computer reads a lightness value from a photographic image and sends it directly to the monitor, the displayed color will be dimmer than in the original photograph.

To compensate for this non-linearity of phosphor excitation, you can alter the color values sent to your monitor. Use the Monitor Gamma Adjustment to adjust the values.

To open the Monitor Gamma Adjustment dialog box, choose File > Preferences > Monitor Gamma.

 Using the Monitor Gamma Adjustment Dialog Box


Using the Monitor Gamma Adjustment Dialog Box

Use the Monitor Gamma Adjustment dialog box to adjust the brightness and color balance of your monitor.

To use the Monitor Gamma Adjustment dialog box:

1	Look at the red, green, blue, and grey color boxes on the left side of the dialog box. Each one contains an inner rectangle. The pixels in this area have a lightness value of 128. The outer area is a dithered pattern of pixels with lightness values of 0 and 255.

2	Drag a slider control to adjust its color box so that the inner rectangle and the surrounding area are of equal brightness.

•	Select the “Link Channels” check box to adjust the levels in unison.

•	Clear the check box to adjust colors individually.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the settings.


Setting PostScript File Import Preferences

Paint Shop Pro can read PostScript files through level 2 and convert them into raster information. It can convert up to 100 pages (depending on the memory in your computer), antialias the objects, and retain information on transparency. However, if you open a PostScript file and then save it, the file is not identical to the original because the information has been converted into raster format.

If you select the “Prompt for size and options each time a PostScript file is opened” check box, when you open a Postscript file Paint Shop Pro displays a dialog box containing the options displayed in the panel underneath the check box.

If you clear the check box, Paint Shop Pro does not prompt you. It opens a PostScript file using the settings from the “Size and options when not prompting” panel.

To set the options:

1	Choose File > Preferences > File Format Preferences.

2	In the File Preferences dialog box, click the PostScript tab to bring it to the front.

3	Choose a resolution for the image or leave the default setting of 72 dpi.

4	Choose a paper size by clicking a selection in the drop-down box. The bounding box, which is available when the EPS file has a recommended size, is usually the best choice.

5	Choose a color depth for the image by clicking a selection in the Image Mode drop-down box. The choices are Monochrome (1-bit), Greyscale (8-bit), and RGB (24-bit).

6	By default, the page is set to the Portrait orientation, where it is taller than it is wide. To reverse the orientation, select the “Landscape” check box.

7	The “Antialiasing” check box is selected by default. Antialiasing smoothes the edges of objects. If you prefer not to use this feature, clear the check box.

8	The “Render Transparency” check box is selected by default. Clear this check box to substitute a white background for the transparency.


What is Color Depth?

Color depth, often called bit depth, refers to the number of colors a pixel (and its image) can display. As the bit depth increases, the number of colors an image can contain increases. A 1-bit image can display 2 colors (2 to the 1st), black and white; an 8-bit image can display 256 colors (2 to the 8th); a 16-bit image can display 65,536 colors (2 to the 16th); and a 24-bit image can display 16.7 million colors (2 to the 24th).

The term greyscale is used to indicate an 8-bit image that contains black, white, and 254 shades of grey. A black and white image of any other bit depth is not a greyscale image.

The Effects commands, many of the color adjustments, and some of the painting tools in Paint Shop Pro can only be used with 24-bit and greyscale images. If your image is of a lower color depth, you need to increase it to 24-bits to make the command available. Then, after you have finished editing it, you can reduce it back to its original depth.

Related Topics

 Viewing Color Depth of an Image

 Increasing Color Depth


Viewing Color Depth of an Image

The color depth (bit depth) of the image is not the same as the actual number of colors it contains. The color depth tells you the maximum number of colors the image is capable of containing, not how many are actually in it.

Viewing Color Depth

To view the color depth of the image:

1	Choose View > Image Information. The Current Image Information dialog box opens.

2	In the "Image" panel, look at the Pixel Depth/Colors line. If you are using the painting tools, the Pixel Depth should be at least 8-bits and the colors should be at least 256.

3	Click OK to close the box.

Viewing Number of Colors

To view the actual number of colors a layer contains, choose Colors > Count Colors Used. In an image with one layer, Paint Shop Pro will display the total number of colors in the image. If the image contains more than one layer, Paint Shop Pro will display the number of colors in the current layer.

Related Topics

 Increasing Color Depth

 Decreasing Color Depth


Viewing Color Depth of a Monitor

If you display an image that has been saved at one color depth on a monitor with a lower color depth, the image is limited to the color depth of the monitor. The additional colors in the image cannot be viewed. This can produce color distortion and degradation of the image’s appearance. However, it does not affect the actual image, only how it looks on that screen. When you next view it on a monitor with the appropriate color depth, you can see all the colors.

To view color depth of the monitor:

1	Choose Help > About Paint Shop Pro. The splash screen appears.

2	Click the System Info button. The System Information list box opens.

3	Scroll to the Video Driver Information section, where the color depth is listed.

4	If you need to adjust your monitor settings, consult the Windows online Help.

Related Topic

 Windows Online Help


Increasing Color Depth

Increasing the color depth of an image increases the number of colors it can display. Images in Paint Shop Pro can display from 2 to 16 million colors. However, because many of the program’s commands are available only for 24-bit images (images capable of displaying 16 million colors), at times you may need to increase the color depth of some images.

To increase the color depth of an image, choose Colors > Increase Color Depth > and then choose one of the commands from the sub-menu.

If you are increasing several images to a specific color depth, you may find it convenient to add the color depth’s button the toolbar. You can then click the button to increase the image to the new color depth.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Colors

 Increasing an Image to 256 Colors

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Increasing an Image to 16 Colors
 Increasing an Image to 16 Colors (8-bit)

To increase the color depth of an image to 16 colors, choose Colors > Increase Color Depth > 16 or click the optional Increase Colors to 16 button [image] on the toolbar.

Related Topics

 About Image Palettes

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


 Increasing an Image to 256 Colors (8-bit)

To increase the color depth of an image to 256 colors, choose Colors > Increase Color Depth > 256 or click the optional Increase Colors to 256 button [image] on the toolbar.

Related Topics

 About Image Palettes

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-bit)

An image in Paint Shop Pro needs to have a 24-bit color depth before you can apply many of the effects and functions. You can make the commands available by increasing the color depth of your image.

Remember that a 24-bit image does not contain a palette because all colors are available, so you may want to save your image palette before increasing the color depth. If you are editing an image with a specific palette and need to reduce it back to those exact colors, save the palette before increasing the color depth.

 Saving an Image Color Palette

If an image has a lower bit depth:

1	Save the image color palette, if necessary.

2	Increase the color depth of the image to 24-bits.

3	Apply the effect.

4	Reduce the image to its original color depth. Use the Colors > Load Palette command to load the saved palette.

To increase the color depth of an image to 16 million colors, choose Colors > Increase Color Depth > 16 million or click the optional Increase Colors to 16 million button [image] on the toolbar.

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Decreasing Color Depth

Decreasing the color depth of an image reduces the number of colors it can display. This makes several features and commands unavailable. For example, images other than greyscale with color depths lower than 24-bits cannot contain more than one raster layer or an adjustment layer.

Images of any color depth can contain multiple vector layers. When you reduce an image’s color depth, you must first flatten (merge all) the layers. If you do not, Paint Shop Pro displays a message asking to flatten the image. After you have reduced the color depth, you can create new vector layers. However, each time you reduce color depth, you must first flatten the image.

Paint Shop Pro offers a choice of reduction methods and palettes for decreasing the color depth of an image. These determine how Paint Shop Pro compensates for missing colors. Whenever the color depth (pixel depth) of an image is lower than 24-bits, Paint Shop Pro automatically generates an image color palette containing the colors that are available to the image. It then uses this palette to display the image. These images are often referred to as "paletted images." You can edit the palette and save it as a file so that you can use it for other images.

 Color Reduction Methods

 Color Reduction Palette Options

Related Topics

 Reducing an Image to 2 Colors

 Reducing an Image to 16 Colors

 Reducing an Image to 256 Colors

 Reducing an Image to 32K or 64K Colors

 Reducing an Image to X Colors

 About Image Palettes

 Flattening an Image


Color Reduction Methods

The final color depth of the image determines which methods are available for color reduction. When you reduce an image to 15 or 16-bits per pixel, Paint Shop Pro uses either Nearest Color or Error Diffusion algorithm. When reducing colors to 8-bits per pixel or lower, Paint Shop Pro can also use Ordered Dither.

Nearest Color Method

With the Nearest Color method, Paint Shop Pro replaces the original color of a pixel with the color in the newly generated palette that is closest to its RGB value.

Ordered Dither Method

With Ordered Dither method, Paint Shop Pro adjusts adjacent pixels of different colors to give the illusion of a third color. It uses set patterns based on a known palette to change the color. This method can result in distinct patterns of light and dark areas.

Error Diffusion Method

With Error Diffusion method, Paint Shop Pro uses the most similar color in the palette, but it spreads discrepancy between the old and new color to the surrounding pixels. After it replaces a color, it adds the "error," or discrepancy to the next pixel, before selecting the nearest color. This process is repeated for every pixel in the image.

Related Topics

 About Image Palettes

 Color Reduction Palette Options

 Dithering Methods


Color Reduction Palette Options

When you reduce the colors in an image to 8-bits or lower (256 colors and below) using one of the color reduction dialog boxes, Paint Shop Pro displays options for generating the palette. The Optimized Median Cut and Optimized Octree options use different methods to create a custom palette for your image. If you choose the Standard /Web-safe option, Paint Shop Pro applies this palette.

Optimized Median Cut Method

This palette is generated using the Heckbert median cut algorithm. The palette uses occurrence of colors as weighting, and ranks accordingly. It is accurate only to 5 bits per channel. Even if your image contains fewer colors than the palette that is generated, this method may not represent each color exactly.

Optimized Octree Method

With the Optimized Octree method, Paint Shop Pro generates a palette more quickly than the Optimized Median Cut method. It is accurate to 8 bits per channel, but it is not as good at weighting color importance as the other method.

If your image contains fewer colors than the palette that is generated, every color in the image is represented in the palette.

Standard /Web-safe Palette

The standard palette is a generic palette that contains a balanced number of colors. If you are creating images for the Web, use it to produce images that can be viewed without color distortion on most monitors.

You can also save palettes from other images and apply them to the active image by reducing its color depth using the Load Palette command in the Colors menu.

Related Topic

 Loading a Palette


 Reducing an Image to 2 Colors

Paint Shop Pro always uses black and white when reducing an image to two colors.

To reduce an image to 2 colors (1-bit depth):

1	Choose Colors > Decrease Color Depth > 2 Colors (1-bit) or click the optional Decrease Colors to 2 button [image] on the toolbar. The Decrease Color Depth - 2 Colors dialog box opens.

2	In the "Palette Component" panel, choose the color channel to be used for the final image. Choose the Red, Green, or Blue option to use those channels. Choose the Grey values option to use the lightness values of the image. This produces the best results in most cases. However, if an image consists mostly of a single color, selecting that color may produce the best result.

3	In the "Reduction Method" panel, select a color reduction method. Using the Nearest Color method eliminates dithering and produces a high contrast image. Using the Ordered Dither method intermingles pixels to produce patterns. Images may appear to be composed of cross-hatches and dots. With the Error Diffusion method, you must also select the Floyd-Steinberg, Burkes, or Stucki option. These are three algorithms used to determine the dithering pattern.

4	In the "Palette weight" panel, choose whether to use a weighted palette. Weighting the palette sets the image’s current colors closer to black and white before reducing them. This results in less dithering, which produces sharper edges. A non-weighted palette produces more dithering and softer edges.

5	Click OK to close the dialog box and decrease the colors in the image.

Related Topics

 Color Reduction Methods

 Dithering Methods

 Color Reduction Palette Options

 About Image Palettes

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Reducing an Image to 16 Colors

To use the "Boost marked colors by" option, make a selection of an area that contains the colors you want to emphasize before opening this dialog box.

To reduce an image to 16 colors (8 or 4-bit depth):

1	Choose Colors > Decrease Color Depth > 16 Colors (8 or 4-bit) or click the optional Decrease Colors to 16 button [image] on the toolbar. The Decrease Color Depth - 16 Colors dialog box opens.

2	In the "Palette" panel, select a palette option.

3	In the "Reduction Method" panel, choose a color reduction method. You can use the Nearest Color, Ordered Dither, or Error Diffusion method. The Ordered dither option is available only if you have chosen the Windows’ palette.

4	In the "Options" panel, select the "Boost marked colors by" check box and enter a value to emphasize the importance of specific colors. Before opening the dialog box, select an area that contains these colors. This option makes the colors "more important" by a factor of the value you enter. The selected colors will stand out from the rest of the image.

5	If you chose the Optimized Median Cut or the Optimized Octree palette and then the Error Diffusion reduction method, you may want to select the "Reduce color bleeding" check box in the "Options" panel. This makes the left-to-right "bleed effect" of colors less noticeable.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box and decrease the colors in the image.

Related Topics

 Color Reduction Palette Options

 Color Reduction Methods

 Dithering Methods

 About Image Palettes

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Reducing an Image to 256 Colors

To use the "Boost marked colors by" option, make a selection of an area that contains the colors you want to emphasize before opening this dialog box.

To reduce the color depth of an image to 256 colors (8-bit depth):

1	Choose Colors > Decrease Color Depth > 256 Colors or click the optional Decrease Colors to 256 button [image] on the toolbar. The Decrease Color Depth - 256 Colors dialog box opens.

2	In the "Palette" panel, select a palette option.

3	In the "Reduction Method" panel, choose a color reduction method. You can use the Nearest color, Ordered dither, or Error diffusion method. The Ordered dither option is available only if you have chosen to use the Standard / Web-safe palette.

4	In the "Options" panel, select the "Boost marked colors by" check box and enter a value to emphasize the importance of specific colors. Before opening the dialog box, select an area that contains these colors. This option makes the colors "more important" by a factor of the value you enter. The selected colors will stand out from the rest of the image.

5	If you chose the Optimized Median Cut or the Optimized Octree palette, select the "Include Windows colors" check box if you want the 16 standard Windows colors to be included in the palette.

6	If you selected the Error Diffusion option for color reduction, you may want to select the "Reduce color bleeding" check box in the "Options" panel. This makes the left-to-right "bleed effect" of colors less noticeable.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and decrease the colors in the image.

Related Topics

 Color Reduction Methods

 Dithering Methods

 Color Reduction Palette Options

 About Image Palettes

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Reducing an Image to 32K or 64K Colors

Paint Shop Pro treats a 64K or 32K color image as a 24-bit color image. This means that any operation performed after the conversion may result in an image that is no longer 64K or 32K colors.

The Decrease Color Depth – 32K Colors and Decrease Color Depth – 64K Colors dialog boxes are identical.

To reduce the color depth of an image to 64K or 32K (24-bit depth):

1	Choose Colors > Decrease Color Depth and then either 32K Colors or 64K Colors (24-bit). The Decrease Color Depth - 32K or Decrease Color Depth - 64K dialog box opens.

2	Select either the Nearest color or Error diffusion option.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and decrease the colors in the image.

Related Topic

 Color Reduction Methods

 Dithering Methods


Reducing an Image to 2-256 Colors
Reducing an Image to X (2-256) Colors

To use the "Boost marked colors by" option, make a selection of an area that contains the colors you want to emphasize before opening this dialog box.

To reduce the color depth of an image to any value between 2 and 256:

1	Choose Colors > Decrease Color Depth > X Colors (4/8-bit). The Decrease Color Depth - X Colors dialog box opens.

2	In the "Palette" panel, enter the number of colors for the new palette. You can choose any number from 2 to 256.

3	Choose whether to load the Optimized Median Cut or the Standard / Web-safe palette.

4	In the "Reduction Method" panel, select either the Nearest Color or Error Diffusion option.

5	In the "Options" panel, select the "Boost marked colors by" check box and enter a value to emphasize the importance of specific colors. Before opening the dialog box, select an area that contains these colors. This option makes the colors "more important" by a factor of the value you enter. The selected colors will stand out from the rest of the image.

6	To include the standard Windows colors in the palette, select the "Include Windows colors check box."

7	If you selected the Error Diffusion option for color reduction, you may want to select the "Reduce color bleeding" check box in the "Options" panel. This makes the left-to-right "bleed effect" of colors less noticeable.

8	Click OK to close the dialog box and decrease the colors in the image.

Related Topics

 Color Reduction Methods

 Dithering Methods

 Color Reduction Palette Options

 About Image Palettes


About Image Palettes

An image palette is a collection of the colors contained in an image with a 4-bit to 8-bit color depth (16 to 256 colors). In a 24-bit image, you can select colors from the entire spectrum. When you reduce the color depth of an image, you limit the number of colors that you can use. The available colors are contained in the image palette. You can edit this palette, save it in the PAL format as a file that is separate from the image, and load it into other images. When you save a palette, you can use the Jasc or Microsoft format.

If you are producing an image for the Web, reduce its color depth automatically by loading the Jasc Safety palette. This creates an 8-bit image, web-safe image. You can then make any palette color transparent and produce a transparent GIF. The Paint Shop Pro program folder contains a Palettes folder with this and other preset palettes. If you create and save a palette, you’ll probably find it most convenient to save them in the same folder.

When you work with paletted images, you may find it more convenient to have the Available Colors panel of the Color palette display only the number of colors the image can contain. To do this, select the Document Palette Color Picker option in the Dialogs and Palettes tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box. The rainbow of colors is replaced by the Document palette.

Related Topics

 Editing a Palette

 Saving a Palette

 Loading a Palette

 Assigning a Palette Transparency

 About the GIF Optimizer Command

 About the Jasc Palette File Format

 About the Document Palette Style


Editing an Image Palette

Edit the active image’s palette using the Edit Palette dialog box. To open the dialog box, choose Colors > Edit Palette.

1	In the Sort Order drop-down box, select a method for sorting the palette colors. Use whichever one you find most convenient; sorting the palette merely changes the arrangement of the colors:

•	Palette Order, which arranges the colors in rows by palette numbers, from 0 on the left of the top row to 255 on the right of the bottom row;

•	By Luminance, which arranges the colors by their level of lightness. Lighter colors are at the top; darker colors are at the bottom;

•	By Hue, which arranges the colors according to their location on the color wheel.

2	To replace a color, by double-clicking it. The Color dialog box opens. Make your selection, and then click OK to return to the Edit Palette dialog box.

3	To save the edited palette and close the dialog box, click the OK button.

4	To return the palette to its original colors without closing the dialog box, click the Revert button.

Related Topics

 Saving a Palette

 Loading a Palette

 Selecting a Color Dialog Box


Saving a Palette

To save an image palette:

1	Choose Colors > Save Palette. The Save Palette As dialog box opens.

2	Navigate to the folder where you want to save the palette. You’ll probably find it most convenient to save it in the Palettes folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder. This folder contains the palettes that are loaded when you install the program.

3	Type a name for the palette in the File Name text box. Paint Shop Pro will automatically add the file extension to the saved file.

4	Select a palette format from the File Type box. The default is the Jasc format. If you want to use the palette with an application other than Paint Shop Pro, save the palette in the Microsoft format.

5	Click Save to close the dialog box and save the palette.

Related Topics

 Editing a Palette

 Loading a Palette

 About the Jasc Palette File Format


Loading a Palette

You can load palettes into images with 16 or more colors. When you load a palette, the palette determines the colors in the image. When necessary, the color depth of the image reduces to match the palette.

To apply a palette to an image:

1	Choose Colors > Load palette. The Load Palette dialog box opens.

2	Navigate to and open the folder where you saved the palette.

3	Highlight the palette.

4	Select one of the three methods for loading the palette:

•	Nearest Color Matching - Changes each color in the image to the color in the palette that is the closest match.

•	Error Diffusion Dithering - Attempts to maintain the image’s appearance by dithering colors that are not in the palette.

•	Maintain Indexes - Assigns each color in the palette a sequential index number, does the same for the colors in the image, and then changes each color in the image to the like-numbered color in the palette. This can result in radical color changes.

5	Click Open to load the palette.

Jasc Safety Palette

An easy way to convert images to a Web-safe palette is to load the Jasc Safety palette. Choose Colors > Load Palette. In the Load Palette dialog box, open the Safety.pal file. Paint Shop Pro automatically reduces the image to this palette.

Related Topics

 Editing a Palette

 Saving a Palette


Setting Palette Transparency

Paint Shop Pro lets you assign a transparent value to any color in the image palette. This is useful when working with certain file formats, such as GIF and PNG. You can make any color from the image or the current background color transparent. Note that the image must be paletted before you can use this command.

Paint Shop Pro has a GIF Optimizer that makes it even easier to create transparent GIFs. Choose File > Export > GIF Optimizer, and use the options in the tabs to set the image transparency. If you prefer to have the program guide use through the process, click the Use Wizard button at the lower left of the dialog box.

To assign a transparent color:

1	Choose Colors > Set Palette Transparency. The Set Palette Transparency dialog box opens.

2	Set the transparency by selecting the appropriate option:

•	To undo the transparency of a color, select No transparency.

•	To assign the current solid background color, select Set the transparency value to the current background color.

•	To assign a color by palette number, enter the number in the palette entry box. The corresponding color appears in the color box.

•	To select a color directly from the image, move the cursor over the image. It becomes the Dropper tool. Click the image to select a color. The third option is chosen, the palette entry box displays the new color’s palette number, and the color box displays the new color.

3	To view the transparency before applying it to the image, click the Proof button. Paint Shop Pro removes the color from the image.

4	Click OK to close the dialog box and make the selected color transparent.

•	Note: A transparent color remains visible in the image until you choose the View Palette Transparency command.

Related Topic

 Viewing a Palette Transparency

 About the GIF Optimizer Command


Viewing a Palette Transparency

Your image must be 8-bit or lower to use the View Palette Transparency command, and you need to have assigned a color in it a transparent value.

Viewing the Transparent Effect

To view the effect of assigning a color a transparent value, choose Colors > View Palette Transparency. Paint Shop Pro removes the color from the image. In the areas that are transparent, the checkerboard appears.

Related Topic

 Assigning a Palette Transparency


About the Jasc Palette File Format

Paint Shop Pro can save 16 and 256 color palette files in the Jasc Palette file format, which uses the .pal extension. This file type was created as a text file so that you can edit or create palettes with a text editor, such as Notepad.

The file structure is as follows:

Item	Setting
Header	JASC-PAL
Version	0100
No. of Colors	16 or 256
Palette Data	Made of Red, Green, and Blue color components. Color components are values from 0 to 255. RGB values must be separated by one space. Each RGB series must be on a separate line.
Note that while the Jasc Palette format is not the same as the Microsoft Palette format, Paint Shop Pro reads and writes the Microsoft format.

 Sample Jasc Palette


Sample Jasc Palette

The following table shows how the Window’s default colors appear in the Jasc Palette file format:

JASC-PAL

0100

16

0	0	0
128	0	0
0	128	0
128	128	0
0	0	128
128	0	128
0	128	128
192	192	192
128	128	128
255	0	0
0	255	0
255	255	0
0	0	255
255	0	255
0	255	255
255	255	255
 About the Jasc Palette File Format


Format Save Options
Save Options Overview

When you use the Save As and Save Copy As commands, or initially save an image, Paint Shop Pro displays a dialog box containing 32 file formats. Many of these formats have compression, encoding, or storage options you can select.

You will probably find it most convenient to save your image in the PSP format while you are working because many other formats do not support layers, selections, and other features of the program. If you try to save an image in a format that doesn’t support these features, Paint Shop Pro displays a message warning you of the changes it must make to the image and giving you the option not to continue. Use the Save As command to save the image in a new file format. Use the Save Copy As command to create a copy of the image in the new format without altering the original image.


Bitmap Save Options
Bitmap (BMP or DIB) Save Options

BMP (Bitmap) is the native image format for the Windows series and OS/2 operating systems. It provides Run Length Encoding (RLE), though some instances that require the use of bitmaps do not allow the RLE versions. It does not support transparency or layers.

Use the BMP format for Windows wallpaper and other system graphics.

To save your image as a BMP or DIB file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Windows or OS/2 Bitmap (*.bmp) or Windows or OS/2 DIB (*.dib).

4	Click Options to choose a mode.

5	Choose a mode:

•	RGB - Saves the image with the Red, Green, and Blue values for each pixel.

•	RLE - Compresses the file by grouping large blocks of color.


EPS Format Save Options

An EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) file is essentially a PostScript file with a bitmap included. The bitmap aids in page layout; it is discarded when the file is printed, as the printer uses the PostScript instructions instead. Paint Shop Pro does not support saving vector instructions to EPS files. It does not support transparency or layers. Instead, it puts the entire file into the bitmap section.

To save your image as an EPS file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Encapsulated PostScript (*.eps).

4	Click Options to choose the color and preview modes:

•	Color or Monochrome - Choose to have the image saved either with color information or as a black and white image.

•	Preview - Choose whether to include a raster preview in the file.


FPX Format Save Options

FPX (FlashPix) is the format from Digital Image Group that uses compression similar to JPG. It is used to store images on Kodak digital cameras. It does not support transparency or layers.

To save your image as an FPX file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose FlashPix (*.fpx).

4	Click Options and choose compression settings:

•	Compressed or uncompressed - Choose whether to use compression. This file format uses JPEG compression.

•	Compression factor - 1-99.


GIF Format Save Options

GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) is one of the two most popular image formats used on the Internet. It supports up to 8-bit color depth images (256 colors), and it is optimized for high contrast images and blocks of color. GIF89a supports animation as well as single color transparency. It does not support layers.

Use the GIF format:

•	When you need single color transparency.

•	When you need a single file animation for use on the Internet.

•	When the image has fewer than or will look acceptable with fewer than 256 colors.

•	When the image contains high contrasts or large blocks of color.

To save your image as a GIF file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Compuserve Graphics Interchange (*.gif).

4	Click Options and choose the GIF version and interlacing options.

•	GIF version:

•	87a is the earlier version of the GIF format and does not support transparency or animation.

•	89a adds support for those items and is the more recent version of the GIF format.

•	 Interlacing

•	Note: To open the GIF Optimizer dialog box, click the Run Optimizer button.


IFF and LBM Format Save Options
IFF, LBM and SGI Format Save Options

IFF and LBM Format Save Options

The Electronic Arts Interchange File Format (IFF) can save bitmap, audio, and multimedia files.

To save your image as an IFF or LBM file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Amiga (*.iff) or Deluxe Paint (*.lbm).

4	Click Options and choose whether to compress the file. This file format uses Packbits compression.

SGI Format Save Options

To save your image as an SGI file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose SGI Image File.

4	Click Options and choose whether to compress the file.


JPG Format Save Options

JPG, or JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group), is one of the two most popular image formats used on the Internet. It is optimized for photographs and other continuous tone images, but does not do very well with line art, screenshots, cartoons and other high contrast images. It provides variable compression. The compression loses some of the original data, but does so by exploiting the fact that small changes in color are less noticeable than changes in brightness. It does not support transparency or layers.

Use the JPG format:

•	When you need 24-bit (16.7 million) color.

•	When the image is a photograph or contains continuous tones.

•	For distributing on the Internet.

To save your image as a JPG file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose JPEG – JFIF Compliant (*.jpg, *.jif, *.jpeg).

4	Click Options and choose an encoding method and compression factor.

•	Encoding:

•	 Standard encoding

•	 Progressive encoding

•	Compression - Choose a level of compression from 1-99.

•	Note: To open the JPEG Optimizer dialog box, click the Run Optimizer button.


MAC Format Save Options

MAC is the file format for MacPaint. It is a 1 bit per pixel format, allowing only black and white images.

To save your image as a MAC file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose MacPaint (*.mac).

4	Click Options to choose whether to include a header or not. The header contains Macintosh-related fields, so you should choose to include it if your image will be opened on a Macintosh. If the image will only be used on a Windows machine, you do not need to include a header.


PCX Format Save Options

PCX is the file format for Zsoft Paintbrush.

To save your image as a PCX file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Zsoft Paintbrush (*.pcx).

4	Click Options to choose a Zsoft Paintbrush version for the image to be compatible with: 0, 2, or 5.


PNG Format Save Options

PNG (Portable Network Graphics) is a format used to transmit and store bitmapped images. It was created specifically for the Internet and other networks. It provides alpha transparency, high color support, and slightly better compression than GIF. The current generation of Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer may not completely support PNG and previous browsers do not support it at all. While it supports alpha channels and creator information, it does not support layers.

Use the PNG format:

•	For high color alpha transparency.

•	For lossless compression of high color images.

To save your image as a PNG file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Portable Network Graphics (*.png).

4	Click Options to choose interlacing options and palette optimization:

•	Adam 7 Interlacing

•	Palette Optimization – If you choose to optimize the palette, the palette is reduced to contain only those colors present in the image. The palette colors are also re-arranged so that any transparent color comes first. These steps reduce the file size.

•	Note: To open the PNG Optimizer dialog box, click the Run Optimizer button.


PPM, PGM, and PBM Format Save Options

PPM (Portable Pixelmap), PGM (Portable Graymap), and PBM (Portable Bitmap) are UNIX native formats for exchanging images in color and grayscale respectively.

To save your image as a PPM or PGM file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Portable Pixelmap (*.ppm) for color images, Portable Graymap (*.pgm) for 8 bit grayscale images, and Portable Bitmap (*.pbm) for monochrome bitmaps.

4	Click Options to choose ASCII or Binary as a storage format:

•	ASCII - The pixel color information is stored as letters and numbers and can be read by humans and machines.

•	Binary - The pixel color information is stored in a binary file (as ones and zeros) and is machine readable only.


PSP Format Save Options

PSP (Paint Shop Pro), is the native image format for Paint Shop Pro. It can contain layer, vector, mask, and selection information for images. The PSP format provides optional lossless compression to create smaller files.

Save a copy of your image in the Paint Shop Pro format to keep as a master copy of all of the layers, masks, transparency, vector, color, alpha channels, creator information, and palette transparency information it contains.

If you need to open a file in Paint Shop Pro 6, you can save to the PSP 6 format. If the image contains features not supported by Paint Shop Pro 6, those features will be lost.

If you need to open a file in Paint Shop Pro 5, you can save to that format. If the image contains adjustment layers, vector layers, or other features not supported by Paint Shop Pro 5, the image is flattened.

To save your image as a PSP file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Paint Shop Pro Image (*.psp) as the Save As Type.

4	Click Options to set Paint Shop Pro format and compression options.

5	Choose a compression option:

•	Uncompressed - The fastest method of saving a PSP file, though this method creates the largest files.

•	 Run Length Encoding (RLE) compression

•	 LZ77 compression


RAW Format Save Options

For information about a RAW file’s format, refer to the documentation for the application that created the image.

To save your image as a RAW file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Raw File Format (*.raw, *.*).

4	Click Options to set header choices and 24-bit options. The header size can be up to 2,147,483,646 bytes.


RLE Format Save Options

Run Length Encoding (RLE) images can be saved in one of two flavors: Compuserve and Microsoft Windows. Compuserve RLE is saved in black and white with no gray information. Microsoft Windows RLE is saved in 4 or 8 bit color.

To save your image as an RLE file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Windows or Compuserve RLE (*.rle).

4	Click Options to select Windows or Compuserve.


SCT Format Save Options

SCT (SciTex) is most often used to store high-color images for professional printing.

To save your image as a SCT file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose SciTex Continuous Tone (*.sct, *.ct).

4	Click Options:

•	CMYK - Saves color channel information on the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (K) channels.

•	CMY - Saves color channel information on the cyan, magenta, and yellow channels, but not on the black (K) channel.


TGA Format Save Options

TGA (Truevision Targa) is most often used to store high-color images. It does not support transparency or layers, but does support one alpha channel per image.

You can open and save three types of TGA files:

An 8-bit file that does not support an alpha channel,

A 16-bit file that contains a 15-bit color channel and a 1-bit alpha channel, and

A 24-bit file. If you save a file with an alpha channel in the 24-bit TGA format, Paint Shop Pro creates a 32-bit file containing a 24-bit color channel and an 8-bit alpha channel.

To save your image as a TGA file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Truevision Targa (*.tga).

4	Click options to choose a bit depth and compress the image:

•	Bit depth - Choose a bit depth: 8, 16, or 24 bit.

•	Compressed or uncompressed - Choose whether to use Run Length Encoding (RLE) compression or save the file uncompressed.


TIF Format Save Options

TIF (Tagged Image File Format), is a widely used file format from Aldus Corporation. It provides several types of compression. The TIF format supports one alpha channel per image if you choose LZW, Packbits, or Uncompressed for the compression type.

To save your image as a TIF file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Tagged Image File Format (*.tif, *tiff).

4	Click Options to set a compression type and choose color channels.

•	Compression Type:

•	 FAX - CCITT 3 compression

•	 Huffman encoding compression

•	 LZW compression

•	 Packbits compression

•	 Uncompressed

•	Color Channels:

•	RGB - Use for on-screen display.

•	CMYK - Use for printing by a service bureau or color separation printer.


WPG Format Save Options

WPG (WordPerfect Graphics) is the file format for clip art in the WordPerfect application.

To save your image as a WPG file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose WordPerfect Bitmap (*.wpg).

4	Click Options to choose a version of WordPerfect for the image to be compatible.

Versions supported - Version 5.0, 5.1, 6.0.


File Formats Overview

Paint Shop Pro directly supports a wide selection of file formats, including:

•	34 raster image formats

•	12 meta and vector image formats

For detailed information on each of these formats, click the appropriate link below:

 Supported Raster Formats

 Supported Meta and Vector Formats

Related Topics

 Opening an Image

 Setting MetaFile Import Preferences

 Setting RAW Format Preferences

 Setting PostScript File Import Preferences


Supported Raster Formats

A raster format breaks an image into a grid of equally-sized pieces, called pixels, and records color information for each pixel. The number of colors the file contains is determined by the bits-per-pixel: the more information recorded for each pixel, the more shades and hues the file can contain.

Most raster formats support multiple bits-per-pixel levels, and therefore more than one level of color. The table below lists all the bits-per-pixel ratios in the raster formats that Paint Shop Pro supports, and shows the corresponding maximum number of colors.

Bits-Per-Pixel and Color Depth

Bits-Per-Pixel	Maximum Number of Colors
1	2
4	16
8	256
16	32,768 or 65,536 (depends on format)
24	16,777,216
32	16,777,216
Most raster formats record color information on a pixel-by-pixel basis, but some formats use color planes. Each color plane contains all the pixel information for a single color. Color planes are also called color channels. Formats that use color planes/channels are called planar formats.

The bits-per-pixel are determined by multiplying the bits-per-plane by the number of planes. If the resulting number is not a power of two (expressible as 2ª, where a is an integer), then the bits-per-pixel are "promoted" to the next highest power of two. For example, if there are two bits-per-plane and three planes, the bits-per-pixel are promoted to eight:

2 x 3 = 6, and 2² < 6 < 2³

Raster Image Formats

The table below shows the file formats Paint Shop Pro can open and save.

Format	Sub-Format and Description	Bits-Per-Pixel and Color Type
		• Open	• Save
BMP	RGB encoded (OS/2)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
	RGB encoded (Windows)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
	RLE encoded (Windows)	4-bit, 8-bit color	4-bit, 8-bit color
CLP	Clipboard bitmap (Windows)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
	Device-independent clipboard bitmap	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
CT	Continuous Tone CMYK (SciTex)	24-bit	24-bit
	Continuous Tone CMY (SciTex)	24-bit	24-bit
CUT	Dr. Halo	8-bit color	8-bit color
DCX	Multipage Paintbrush (Zsoft)	1-bit
DIB	RGB encoded (OS/2)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
	RGB encoded (Windows)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
	RLE encoded (Windows)	4-bit, 8-bit color	4-bit, 8-bit color
EPS	Image only (Adobe)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
FPX	Compressed (Kodak)	8-bit grey, 24-bit	8-bit grey, 24-bit
	Uncompressed (Kodak)	8-bit grey, 24-bit	8-bit grey, 24-bit
GIF	v. 87a Interlaced (Compuserve)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color
	v. 87a Non-interlaced (Compuserve)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color
	v. 89a Interlaced (Compuserve)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color
	v. 89a Non-interlaced (Compuserve)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color
Format	Sub-Format and Description	Bits-Per-Pixel and Color Type
		• Open	• Save
IFF	Compressed (Electronic Arts)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
	Uncompressed (Electronic Arts)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
IMG	Old style (GEM Paint)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color	1-bit, 8-bit color
	New style (GEM Paint)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color
JIF	Huffman compressed	8-bit grey, 24-bit	8-bit grey, 24-bit
JPG	Huffman compressed	8-bit grey, 24-bit	8-bit grey, 24-bit
	Progressive	8-bit grey, 24-bit	8-bit grey, 24-bit
KDC	Kodak digital camera	24-bit
LBM	Compressed (Deluxe Paint)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color
	Uncompressed (Deluxe Paint)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color
MAC	With header (MacPaint)	1-bit	1-bit
	Without header (MacPaint)	1-bit	1-bit
MSP	New version (MS Paint	1-bit	1-bit
	Old version (MS Paint)	1-bit
PBM	Portable bitmap (UNIX)	1-bit	1-bit
PCD	Photo-CD (Kodak)	24-bit
PCT	PICT (Apple)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 16-bit, 24-bit, 32-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
PCX	v. 0 (Zsoft Paintbrush)	1-bit	1-bit
	v. 2 with palette info (Zsoft)	1-bit, 4-bit	1-bit, 4-bit
	v. 3 without palette info (Zsoft)	1-bit, 4-bit
	v. 5 (Zsoft)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
PGM	Portable Graymap ASCII (UNIX)	8-bit grey	8-bit grey
	Portable Graymap Binary (UNIX)	8-bit grey	8-bit grey
PIC	Pictor/PC Paint	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color
PNG	Interlaced Portable Network Graphics	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 16-bit, 24-bit, 32-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit, 32-bit
	Non-interlaced Portable Network Graphics	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 16-bit, 24-bit, 32-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit, 32-bit
PPM	Portable Pixelmap (UNIX)	24-bit	24-bit
PSD	Photoshop (RGB or Indexed)	1-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
Format	Sub-Format and Description	Bits-Per-Pixel and Color Type
		• Open	• Save
PSP	RLE encoded (Paint Shop Pro)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
	LZ77 compressed (Paint Shop Pro)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
	Uncompressed (Paint Shop Pro)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
RAS	Type 1 Modern (Sun)	1-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit, 32-bit	1-bit, 8-bit color, 24-bit
RAW	Unencoded pixel data	8-bit grey, 24-bit	8-bit grey, 24-bit
RLE	Compuserve	1-bit	1-bit
	Windows	4-bit, 8-bit color,	4-bit, 8-bit color,
SCT	Continuous Tone CMYK	24-bit	24-bit
	Continuous Tone CMY	24-bit	24-bit
SGI (.rgb, .sgi)	Uncompressed	8-bit grey, 24-bit	8-bit grey, 24-bit
	RLE Compressed	8-bit grey, 24-bit	8-bit grey, 24-bit
TGA	Uncompressed (Truevision)	8-bit grey, 8-bit color, 16-bit, 24-bit, 32-bit	8-bit grey, 8-bit color, 24-bit, 32-bit
	Compressed (Truevision)	8-bit color, 16-bit, 24-bit, 32-bit	8-bit color, 24-bit, 32-bit
TIF	Huffman compressed	1-bit	1-bit
	Uncompressed	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit grey, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit grey, 8-bit color, 24-bit
	Uncompressed CMYK	24-bit	24-bit
	Pack bits compressed	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit grey, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit grey, 8-bit color, 24-bit
	Pack bits compressed CMYK	24-bit	24-bit
	LZW compressed	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit grey, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit grey, 8-bit color, 24-bit
	LZW compressed CMYK	24-bit	24-bit
	Fax Group 3 compressed	1-bit	1-bit
	Fax Group 4 compressed	1-bit
WPG	v. 5.0 (WordPerfect)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit grey, 8-bit color	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit grey, 8-bit color
	v. 5.1 (WordPerfect)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit grey, 8-bit color	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit grey, 8-bit color
	v. 6.0 (WordPerfect)	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit grey, 8-bit color, 24-bit	1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit grey, 8-bit color, 24-bit


Supported Meta and Vector Formats

Meta and vector image formats can both contain vector information. Vector data is a set of instructions for recreation of shapes that form an image. These instructions are mathematical formulas that contain information about the location and characteristics of these shapes. Vector data cannot reproduce photo-realistic images, but for other types of images it has two advantages over raster data:

•	It is scaleable without distortion (the "jaggies" that come with re-sizing a bitmap), and

•	It produces smaller files.

In the strictest definition, a vector format can only contain vector information. In common practice, many formats that are considered to be vector allow the user to include non-vector data, such as raster images or text.

Meta formats explicitly allow more than just vector data. For example, a typical Windows metafile might contain a bitmap, vector information, and text, with the bitmap constituting the majority of the image, and the vector and text data providing annotation.

Meta and Vector Image Formats

The following table lists the meta and vector formats that Paint Shop Pro can open and save.

Format	Source/Standard	Open · (Read )	Save · (Write)
CDR	CorelDRAW!	Yes
CGM	Computer Graphics Metafile	Yes
CMX	Corel Clipart	Yes
DRW	Micrografx Draw	Yes
DXF	Autodesk	Yes
EMF	Windows Enhanced Metafile	Yes	Yes
EPS	Encapsulated PostScript	Yes	Yes*
GEM	Ventura/GEM	Yes
HGL	Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language	Yes
PCT	Apple	Yes	Yes*
PIC	Lotus Development Corp.	Yes
WMF	Microsoft Windows Metafile	Yes	Yes
WPG	WordPerfect	Yes	Yes*
* When you save data in these formats, the file contains raster data only.


Other Formats

In addition to the file formats that it supports directly, Paint Shop Pro can read other image file formats if the appropriate external import filters are installed on your system. Most major software applications, such as Microsoft® Word, install external import filters.

In Paint Shop Pro's dialog boxes, the file types that are supported via external import filters have "EXT:" after the file extension.

Related Topic

 Setting Plug-In Filter Preferences


Raster File Formats
Comparing Raster and Vector File Formats

Raster File Formats

A Raster image is composed of units of light, called pixels, which are laid out on a grid. If you increase the magnification of an image, you can see these pixels. They appear as squares in the screen. A Raster program creates objects by grouping pixels. An object is stored as a group of pixels with information about each pixel color. Pixels can be blended to create soft edges and smooth transitions between objects. This makes the format a good choice to use for saving photographs.

An image in the Raster format is resolution-dependent. You specify the resolution and pixel dimensions when you create the image. If you later decide to increase its size, you enlarge each pixel, which lowers the image quality.

Vector File Formats

A Vector image is composed of mathematical instructions for drawing the image. Each object in a Vector image is stored as a separate item with information about its relative position in the image, its starting and ending points, width, color, and curve information. This makes them suitable for logos, fonts, and line drawings.

An image in the Vector format is resolution-independent. It can be resized without losing detail because it is stored as a set of instructions, not a collection of pixels. Each time you display an image, you recreate it.

Note that a computer monitor uses pixels to display an image, and most printers convert pixels to ink dots. Vector images are rasterized (created using pixels) when displayed on the screen or printed. When you close them, they are saved in the Vector format.


Using the Meta Picture Import Dialog Box

When you choose to open a Windows Metafile image or paste it from the clipboard, the Meta Picture Import dialog box appears. You can enter new values to open the image using pixel dimensions that differ from the original image dimensions.

To open a MetaFile image:

1	Read the dimensions of the original image in the "Original Size" panel.

2	To use the original dimensions, click the OK button at the bottom of the dialog box.

3	To use different pixel dimensions, enter them in the Width in Pixels and the Height in Pixels boxes in the "Import size" panel.

4	Select the "Maintain original aspect ratio" check box to keep the width and height pixel values within the same aspect ratio as the original dimensions. Clear this check box to ignore the original aspect ratio when setting pixel values.

5	Click OK to close the dialog box and open the image.

Related Topic

 WMF / Import Preferences


Using the Raw Options Dialog Box

You use the RAW Options dialog box to tell Paint Shop Pro how to interpret RAW pixel data. For information about a RAW file format, please refer to the documentation for the program that created the image. If you are familiar with RAW files, the dialog box should be self-explanatory. If you are unfamiliar with the format, please find and read information about the format in general and the particular image you are trying to open. A discussion of RAW pixel data is beyond the scope of this help file.

Related Topic

 Setting RAW Format Preferences


Using the PostScript Renderer Dialog Box

If you selected the "Prompt for size and options each time a PostScript file is opened" option in the File Format Preferences dialog box, Paint Shop Pro displays the PostScript Renderer dialog box whenever you open a Postscript file.

To use this dialog box:

1	In the Resolution box, choose a new resolution for the image or leave the default setting of 72 dpi.

2	By default, the page is set to the Portrait orientation. To reverse the orientation, select the "Landscape" check box.

3	In the Page Size drop-down box, choose a selection. The bounding box, which is available when the EPS file has a recommended size, is usually the best choice.

4	In the Image Type drop-down box, choose a color depth for the image. The choices are Monochrome (1-bit), Greyscale (8-bit), and RGB (24-bit).

5	The "Enable Antialiasing" check box is selected by default. Antialiasing smoothes the edges of objects. If you prefer not to use this feature, clear the check box.

6	The "Enable Transparency" check box is selected by default. Clear this check box to substitute a white background for the transparency.

7	Click OK to close the dialog box and open the image.

Related Topic

 Setting PostScript File Import Preferences


 Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Using keyboard shortcuts can be a faster way to execute a command or display a menu than using the mouse. Many users find that familiarizing themselves with keyboard shortcuts saves a lot of time, especially when performing repetitive tasks.

Most keyboard shortcuts involve the <Alt>, <Ctrl>, or <Shift> key in combination with another key. Some shortcuts are activated by a Function key, such as pressing <F1> to display online help, or pressing <F12> to choose the File > Save As command.

Displaying Menus

Each menu title in the menu bar has an underlined letter. Holding down the <Alt> key and then pressing the underlined letter opens the menu in the same way that clicking the menu title does. For example, you can open the File menu by pressing <Alt> + <F>.

Executing Commands

Many menu commands list the associated keyboard shortcuts to their right. To execute the command, you can either click its name in the menu or press the shortcut keys. For example, to save an image, click File > Save or press <Ctrl> + <S>.

Hotkeys in Menus and Dialog Boxes

Another type of keyboard shortcut is called a hotkey. If you look at the menu and most dialog boxes, you can see underlined letters in the commands, buttons, and edit boxes. By pressing the key on the keyboard, you choose the command or jump to dialog box item. For example, the first command in the File menu, New, has the hotkey “N,” which means you can choose the command by pressing <N> when the File menu is open.

In a dialog box, you can press <Ctrl> + <Tab> to move from one control to the next. If the dialog box contains tabs, press <Ctrl> + <F7> to cycle through the tabs.

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Menu Commands

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Tools, Palettes, Bars, and Windows

 Browser Keyboard Shortcuts

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Node Editing Commands

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Multiple Image Printing


 Paint Shop Pro Menu Keyboard Shortcuts

You can open Paint Shop Pro menus and choose the following commands using the keyboard shortcuts listed below:

COMMAND	KEYBOARD SHORTCUT	COMMAND	KEYBOARD SHORTCUT
File Menu	Alt + F	Edit Menu	Alt + E
New	Ctrl + N	Undo	Ctrl + Z
Open	Ctrl + O	Redo	Ctrl + Alt + Z
Browse	Ctrl + B	Repeat	Ctrl + Y
Save	Ctrl + S	Command History	Shift +Ctrl + Z
Save As	F12	Cut	Ctrl + X
Save Copy As	Ctrl + F12	Copy	Ctrl + C
Workspace		Copy Merged	Shift +Ctrl + C
Load	Shift + Alt + L	Paste
Save	Shift + Alt + S	As New Image	Ctrl + V
Delete	Shift + Alt + D	As New Layer	Ctrl + L
Delete	Ctrl + Del	As New Selection	Ctrl + E
Import > Screen Capture		As Transp. Select.	Shift +Ctrl + E
Start	Shift + C	Into Selection	Shift +Ctrl + L
Print	Ctrl + P	As New Vector Selection	Ctrl + G
		Clear	Del
View Menu	Alt + V
Full Screen Edit	Shift + A	Image Menu	Alt + I
Full Screen Prev.	Shift + Ctrl + A	Flip	Ctrl + I
Normal Viewing	Ctrl + Alt + N	Mirror	Ctrl + M
Rulers	Ctrl + Alt + R	Rotate	Ctrl + R
Grid	Ctrl + Alt + G	Crop to Selection	Shift + R
		Resize	Shift + S
Colors Menu	Alt + C	Image Information	Shift + I
Adjust
Bright/Contrast	Shift + B	Selections Menu	Alt + S
Gamma Correct.	Shift + G	Select All	Ctrl + A
High/Midtn/Shdw	Shift + M	Select None	Ctrl + D
Hue/Sat/Lightness	Shift + H	From Mask	Shift + Ctrl + S
Red/Green/Blue	Shift + U	From Vector Object	Shift + Ctrl + B
Colorize	Shift + L	Invert	Shift + Ctrl + I
Histogram		Modify
Equalize	Shift + E	Feather	Ctrl + H
Hist. Adjustment	Shift + Ctrl + H	Transp. Color	Ctrl + T
Stretch	Shift + T	Hide Sel. Marquee	Shift + Ctrl + M
Posterize	Shift + Z	Promote to Layer	Shift + Ctrl + P
Edit Palette	Shift + P	Float	Ctrl + F
Load Palette	Shift + O	Defloat	Shift + Ctrl + F
Set Palette Trans.	Shift + Ctrl + V
View Palette Trans.	Shift +V	Mask Menu	Alt + M
Decrease Color Depth		New > Hide All	Shift + Y
2 colors (1-bit)	Shift + Ctrl + 1	Invert	Shift + K
16 colors (4-bit)	Shift + Ctrl + 2	Edit	Ctrl + K
256 col. (8-bit)	Shift + Ctrl + 3	View Mask	Ctrl + Alt + V
32K col. (24-bit)	Shift + Ctrl + 4
64K col. (24-bit)	Shift + Ctrl + 5	Window Menu	Alt + W
X colors (4/8 bit)	Shift + Ctrl + 6	New Window	Shift + W
Increase Color Depth		Duplicate	Shift + D
16 colors (4-bit)	Shift + Ctrl + 8	Fit To Window	Ctrl + W
256 colors (8-bit)	Shift + Ctrl + 9
16.7M col. (24-bit)	Shift + Ctrl + 0
Related Topics

 Using Keyboard Shortcuts

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Tools, Palettes, Bars, and Windows

 Browser Keyboard Shortcuts

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Node Editing Commands

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Multiple Image Printing


 Tools, Palettes, Bars, and Windows Shortcuts

Keyboard Shortcuts for Tools and Brushes

You can activate a Tool palette tool or brush using any of the following methods:

•	Click its button on the Tool palette,

•	Choose it from the Tool Selection menu of the Tool Option palette, or

•	Press the keyboard letter listed below:

TOOL or BRUSH	KEYBOARD SHORTCUT
Arrow	J
Zoom (Magnifier)	G
Deform	D
Crop	R
Selection	S
Freehand Selection	A
Magic Wand Selection	M
Dropper	Y
Paintbrush	B
Clone	N
Color Replacer	, (comma)
Retouch	Z
Scratch Remover	K
Eraser	E
Picture Tube	. (period)
Airbrush	U
Flood Fill	F
Text	X
Drawing	I
Preset Shape	/
Vector Object Selection	Q
Keyboard Shortcuts for Palettes, Bars, and Windows

Press the keyboard letter listed below to display or hide a palette, window, or bar:

PALETTE, WINDOW, or BAR	KEYBOARD SHORTCUT
Tools Options palette	O
Color palette	C
Layer palette	L
Tool palette	P
Histogram Window	H
Overview Window	W
Toolbar	T
View all tools and windows	Shift + Ctrl + T
Minimize PSP to Start bar and start screen capture	Shift + C
Cycle through the active image, the Tool Options palette, and Histogram window	F7
Cycles through the tabs in floating palette	Ctrl + F7
Tabs through the control in the floating palette	Shift + Tab
Related Topics

 Using Keyboard Shortcuts

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Menu Commands

 Browser Keyboard Shortcuts

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Node Editing Commands

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Multiple Image Printing


 Browser Keyboard Shortcuts

Ctrl + B	File > Browse New Folder (when Browser is not the current window)
F5	File > Update Thumbnails
Ctrl + P	File > Print
Ctrl + V	Edit > Paste as New Image
Ctrl + A	Edit > Select All
Ctrl + D	Edit > Select None
Shift + A	View > Full Screen Edit
Ctrl + F5	View > Refresh Tree
Alt+F3 or  Ctrl + F	Find > File Name
F3	Find > Repeat Find
Ctrl + Y	ImageFile > Copy To.
Ctrl + Delete	ImageFile > Delete
Ctrl + M	ImageFile > Move To
Ctrl + R	ImageFile > Rename
F2	Rename a file when a thumbnail is selected
Shift + I or  Alt + Enter	ImageFile > Information
Enter	ImageFile > Open
Ctrl + W	Window > Fit to Thumbnails
F6	Next pane
Shift + Tab	Next pane
Shift + F6	Previous pane
* on the number  key pad	Expands selected folder and all its subfolders.
Related Topics

 Using Keyboard Shortcuts

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Menu Commands

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Tools, Palettes, Bars, and Windows

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Node Editing Commands

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Multiple Image Printing


 Node Editing Keyboard Shortcuts

When you edit nodes, you alternate between the Drawing mode and the Edit mode. Use the Drawing mode to add nodes; use the Edit mode to edit them.

When the Vector Object Selection tool or the Drawing type Vector Line tool is active, you can execute the following commands by right-clicking the image and choosing the command from the context menu or by pressing the keyboard shortcuts listed below:

NODE COMMAND	KEYBOARD SHORTCUT
Alternate between Edit and Drawing Modes	Ctrl + E
Edit Submenu
Undo	Ctrl + Z
Redo	Ctrl + Alt + Z
Copy	Ctrl + C
Paste	Ctrl + V
Delete	Del
Select All	Ctrl + A
Select None	Ctrl + D
Join Select	Ctrl + J
Merge	Ctrl + M
Break	Ctrl + K
Close	Shift + Ctrl + C
Reverse Contour	Ctrl + R
Reverse Path	Shift + Ctrl + R
Node Type Submenu
Asymmetric	Shift + Ctrl + S
Symmetric	Ctrl + S
Cusp	Ctrl + X
Smooth/Tangent	Ctrl + T
Convert to Line	Ctrl + L
Line Before	Ctrl + B
Line After	Ctrl + F
Curve Before	Ctrl + 1
Curve After	Ctrl + 2
Refresh	F5
Quit Node Editing	Ctrl + Q
Related Topics

 Using Keyboard Shortcuts

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Menu Commands

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Tools, Palettes, Bars, and Windows

 Browser Keyboard Shortcuts

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Multiple Image Printing


Multiple Image Printing Keyboard Shortcuts

Ctrl + Tab	Alternate focus between layout and thumbnail pane
On the Thumbnail Pane
Arrow Keys	Change focus to next or previous thumbnail
<Enter>	Place the current thumbnail on the upper left corner of the page
On the Page
Arrow Keys	Move the selected image in small increments. If Snap-to-grid is on, the upper left on the image moves to the next grid intersection.
Shift + Arrow Keys	Move the selected image in large increments. If Snap-to-grid is on, the upper left corner of the image moves to the next grid intersection.
Delete	Remove currently selected image from the layout
Related Topics

 Using Keyboard Shortcuts

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Menu Commands

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Tools, Palettes, Bars, and Windows

 Browser Keyboard Shortcuts

 Keyboard Shortcuts for Node Editing Commands


Problems and Solutions

This section contains answers to the most common technical support questions. Refer to the Readme.doc file in your Paint Shop Pro folder to see if there are any additional questions and answers that were not available when this help file was completed.

We recommend configuring your system display for the highest color depth it supports at a screen resolution of 800x600 or higher. To determine your current display resolution, choose About Paint Shop Pro from the Help menu, and then click the System Info button at the bottom of the screen. In the System Information list, scroll to the Video Driver Information section. Look at the line marked "Number of Colors." It shows the number of colors that your display supports. For help changing your video driver, consult the documentation that came with your video card.

Select from the list below for more answers to issues:

 Color and Memory

 Vector and Text

 Operations


Color Issues
Color and Memory

The colors in the image are wrong or Wallpaper is flickering as different images are displayed.

When Windows is running a 256 color display driver, it reserves 20 colors for its own use. This lowers an image's palette to 236 colors (256 - 20 = 236) plus the 20 fixed Windows colors. Paint Shop Pro attempts to optimize the remaining 236 colors for the image that it is currently working with. It alters the common palette that is being used by the wallpaper, and for that matter, the entire screen. This can cause your Wallpaper, or other Windows to flicker. Also, If the color in the image is not in the palette Paint Shop Pro creates, the image color is replaced by the closest palette color. After the program or the specific image is closed, the wallpaper colors return to normal.

The image is mottled or grainy.

If your images are mottled or grainy, your video card or driver probably does not support enough colors to show the image correctly. For help changing your video driver, consult the documentation that came with the video card. The graininess is caused by dithering, a technique for simulating colors that are missing from the palette of an image. Paint Shop Pro maintains the original, un-dithered image in memory. If you edit the image, the change is applied to the original, and a new dithered image is created. This lets you work with images that are beyond the limit of your video system.

The Color Management Preference menu choice is unavailable.

This command is disabled if you are using Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0. Windows Color Management is not supported by Microsoft in either of these operating systems.

When I choose to enable Color Management ,either the monitor or printer profile is listed as <none>.

These settings are retrieved from Windows and must be configured through their respective properties dialog boxes inside your Control Panel. For your monitor, go into Display, and select the Settings Tab. There, click the advanced button and you will find the Color Management Tab. For your printer, choose Printers and right click the Printer. Now choose Properties and then the Color Management tab. (Please note, black and white printers may not have a Color Management tab.) If you are unable to configure or find a profile that you wish to use for your printer or monitor, contact the respective manufacturer for more information.

I scanned two images in from my scanner, and when I copy one into the other, it is too big even though both pictures are the same size.

This happens if either image was scanned in at a different resolution (pixels per inch, or per centimeter). Due to the nature of computers, images are stored by pixels. This means that your scanner must convert the physical size of the image to pixels. This will cause the image to be larger or smaller depending on the resolution that you scan in at.

I have scanned an image in at 150 pixels per inch. After I changed the resolution to 300, it prints at half the size.

The resolution of your image is used to convert the number of pixels in your image to a size in inches (or centimeters) that a device such as your printer can print it at. So if you increase your resolution, you are condensing the pixels and making your printed image smaller. In the same regard, if you decrease your image's resolution, you will increase the size of your printed image.

Editing, creating, or scanning an image causes a memory error message.

Depending on its size and resolution, an image may require a substantial amount of memory to be displayed and even more memory to be edited. The following example shows how the memory requirements of a single layer image escalate as its color depth increases.

Height	Width	Bits/Pixel	Display (KB)	Max Edit (KB)
800	600	1	59	176
800	600	8	469	1,406
800	600	24	1,406	4,219
Adding layers also increases the image’s memory requirements. Here’s what happens when layers are added to the 24-bit image:

Layers	Display (MB)	Max Edit (MB)
2 layers	3.2	9.6
3 layers	5	15
Remember that editing an image may require up to three times the memory required to display it.


Vector and Text

Some painting tools or menu commands are unavailable when a vector layer is active.

Some commands are not supported on vector objects. A vector layer can be converted to raster data by right-clicking the layer in the Layer palette and choosing the Convert to Raster command. This step makes the raster commands and tools available. Remember that vector data that has been converted to raster data is no longer editable as a vector object. If you wish to preserve the original vector layer, you can use the Duplicate command in the Layer palette and then convert the duplicated vector layer into a raster layer.

The Vector Object Selection tool or the "Create as vector" option in the Tool Options Palette is unavailable.

Vector tools are not supported when editing masks, and the Vector Object Selection tool is only available when the active layer is a vector layer. To make these options available, exit the Mask Edit mode and/or change the active layer to a vector layer.

There is an outlined box around the vector object I’ve just created.

The box indicates a vector selection. Press the <Esc> while your mouse is positioned over the image to remove the vector selection marquee.

There are moving lines in my image or around text I have just created. How do I remove them?

These lines indicate that a selection marquee is present. To remove the selection, choose Selections > Select None.

How can I re-size a vector shape I've just drawn without changing the proportions?

Right-click one of the corner nodes and drag the shape. The left mouse button allows you to change the aspect ratio (thereby changing the shape).The right mouse button does not. It maintains the aspect ratio, allowing you to resize your shape without distorting or elongating it.

How do I add nodes in between the nodes of on an existing path?

Press the <Ctrl> key while the cursor is over the shape, and the cursor will change to "+ADD". To add the nodes, just click the points of the shape where you want to place them.

I cannot find all my fonts in the Text Entry dialog box.

Paint Shop Pro does not support bitmap (or raster) fonts, such as MS Sans Serif. Use a similar True Type or Type 1 font or create the text in an Animation Shop frame and copy or export the text to Paint Shop Pro.

I have a utility that gives me the ability to type in an Asian language on an English version of Windows, but I cannot get the characters into Paint Shop Pro.

Currently, Paint Shop Pro strictly adheres to the Operating System's language. Because the English version of Windows does not support double byte languages, such as Japanese or Chinese, Paint Shop Pro is unable to support them. If you are using a double byte version of Windows, such as a Chinese version of Windows98, you should find that you will be able to type in that language in Paint Shop Pro.

I can get the text on the curved line but can't seem to get rid of the line without losing the text.

To get rid of the line, turn off the line object visibility. To do this, select the line with the Vector Object Selection tool, double-click to open the Vector Properties dialog box, and click Visible, or click the Object Visibility button on the Layer palette for the appropriate line.

When wrapping text around a curve, is it possible to do it under the curve (top of the text against bottom of the curve), instead of over the curve?

After you have attached your text to a vector path, select the path (not the text) with the Vector Object Selection tool. Right-click and choose Node Edit. Right-click again and choose Edit>Reverse Path or press <Shift>+<Ctrl>+<R>. Right-click and choose Quit Node Editing or press <Ctrl>+<Q>. You should see the text flipped over on the reverse side of the path. Adjust the text justification (left, center, right) as needed.


Operations

Nothing happens when I put the Paint Shop Pro disk in my CD drive.

If the Auto insert notification (also called "Auto Run") feature of Windows is disabled, you can start the Paint Shop Pro autorun program by opening the Paint Shop Pro CD-ROM using My Computer and double-clicking AUTORUN.EXE. If the autorun program still does not start, double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the \PSP directory of the Paint Shop Pro 7 disk to start the Paint Shop Pro 7 setup program.

When I attempt to install the program, I receive a message that "An I/O error has occurred."

Typically, this is caused by residue from previous installers inside your Windows temporary folder. To remedy this issue, you need to delete its contents. If you are using Windows 98 or 2000, this can be done quite easily by going to Start > Programs > Accessories > System tools > Disk cleanup. There, select the Temporary Files (not Temporary Internet Files) and click the OK button. You should now be able to install the program. Please note, as with deleting any files or folders from your system, be sure that there are no files that you wish to keep.

Certain file types launch Paint Shop Pro, while others do not.

If a file extension is associated with Paint Shop Pro, you can open the file by double-clicking the filename in Windows Explorer. If Paint Shop Pro is not running, double-clicking the filename starts or launches the program. Associated file types use the Paint Shop Pro image file icon. To select file types to be associated with Paint Shop Pro, set the File Associations preferences. If you are not sure which file types to associate with Paint Shop Pro, use the default settings of the File Associations dialog box.

 Associating Files with Paint Shop Pro

Paint Shop Pro 5 or 6 cannot read PSP format files created in Paint Shop Pro 7.

Whenever additional file features (such as styled lines) are added to a new version of Paint Shop Pro, we update the PSP file format to store the new type of image data. Because previous versions, in which such features were not available, cannot read this data, it must be converted into a supported form. To save a PSP format file for use in version 5 or 6, click the Options button in the Save or Save As dialog box, and select the desired version compatibility before saving the file.

Every time I go to save a file, it goes back to the Paint Shop Pro format. How to I set it to a different format by default?

This can be done by choosing File > Preferences > General Program Preferences. In the dialog box that appears, click the Dialogs and Palettes tab, and then select the "Remember last type used in Save As dialog" check box.

How can I use Picture Tubes created in an earlier version of Paint Shop Pro with version?

Picture Tubes created with Paint Shop Pro 6 can be used with Paint Shop Pro 7. However, we recommend converting them into Paint Shop Pro 7 Tubes for best results. Picture Tubes created in Paint Shop Pro 5 must be converted to use them with Paint Shop Pro 7, and you must have a TUBES.CTL file in the same directory as the Paint Shop Pro 5 tubes. Picture Tubes from both previous programs can be converted using the Picture Tube converter, which can be run by choosing Start > Programs > Jasc Software > Utilities > Picture Tube Converter.

I have a digital camera but I can't seem to find it in your list of cameras. Can I still use it with Paint Shop Pro?

Quite possibly, yes. Many digital cameras have support for TWAIN, use a floppy disk, or use a card reader. When using these cameras, you need to install their software. With TWAIN enabled cameras, you can choose File > Import > TWAIN > Select Source to choose your camera and File > Import > TWAIN > Acquire to retrieve your image from within Paint Shop Pro. For cameras that use floppy disks and card readers, you can choose File > Open or File > Browse to open your images.

I can’t use the scanner because the Acquire and Select Source commands are unavailable.

If the Acquire and Select Source commands on the File menu are unavailable, Paint Shop Pro could not find a copy of TWAIN_32.DLL on your system. Reinstall the software bundled with your scanner or digital camera to properly install this file. For more information on TWAIN-compliant devices, refer to the "Using a Scanner or Other TWAIN-Compliant Device" topic and the documentation that came with your device.

 Using a Scanner or Other TWAIN-Compliant Device

How do I use plug-in filters with Paint Shop Pro?

To load third-party plug-in filters, select File > Preferences > File Locations, then click on the "Plug-in Filters" tab and select the appropriate folders.

How do I change settings when I perform screen captures?

Select File > Import > Screen Capture > Setup to configure the screen capture utility. If you would like to make it easier to access this command, you can right-click the toolbar, choose the Customize command, and add this function to the toolbar.

When I try to capture an area, I see the numbers for the size inside my captured image.

This can occur if your display is set below true color. To perform area captures, you need to be in a true color display mode (either 24bit or 32bit). You can change this by going to Start > Settings > Control Panel > Display > Settings and increasing the number of colors.

Some functions (effects) are unavailable.

Certain effects require different conditions in order to work. Some require a selection, others require that the image is 24bit (16.7 million colors) or greyscale, while others yet cannot be used on certain types of layers (e.g. Vector or Adjustment layers). The last condition that you may find is if you are editing a mask. If you find that an effect is not available, you may want to consult the help to find out how this effect works and what conditions you should be concerned with.

Painting produces no apparent results.

There are several possible reasons paint strokes can’t be seen while painting. Check for the following:

•	Make sure the layer you are painting on is active.

•	Make sure there is no mask on the active layer. Disable the Layer mask toggle on the Layer palette.

•	Increase the brush size or line width in the Tool Options palette.

•	Make sure there are no selections on the active layer. (Sometimes there will be a small selection that you cannot see. Choose the Selections > Select None command to remove any existing selections. If the "Select none" command is available, you know there is a selection.)

•	Activate the Dropper tool, left-click and right-click anywhere on the Available Color Panel of the Color palette, and then try using the affected tool again.

•	If you are using a pressure-sensitive tablet, check its settings in the Windows Control Panel to ensure it is working properly. Consult the user’s manual for your tablet for more information.

When I select Effects > Reflection Effects > Pattern, there aren’t any options for choosing which pattern I want to use.

The Effects > Reflection Effects > Pattern command can only create a pattern from the image or selection itself. Therefore, to obtain a different pattern, you will need to open and possibly select the area that you want for your pattern.

After I resize an image, it appears to get larger. How is this possible?

Paint Shop Pro has a feature called Auto Size. This causes Paint Shop Pro to zoom out on an image that is too big to be displayed at 1:1. After resizing, if a different zoom level would make the image fit in the window without needing to be scrolled, Paint Shop Pro zooms to that level. If you wish not to have this feature enabled, choose File > Preferences > General Program Preferences. Click the Viewing tab and clear the Auto Size check box (there is an option for both when it opens or creates the image, and for resizing).

Masks are not visible or cannot be edited.

If you create a mask and it is not visible on the screen, open the Masks menu and make sure View Mask is checked. If it is not checked, click it to turn View Mask on. To turn off View Mask, click it again to remove the check mark.

If you are trying to edit a mask and do not see the expected results, you may be editing the image instead of the mask. Open the Masks menu and make sure the Edit command is selected, and then try making your changes. You must choose Masks > Edit before you can edit the mask. There is a check mark next to the Edit command whenever this function is active.

How do I make a transparent GIF?

Use the GIF Optimizer dialog box, which you open by choosing File > Export > GIF Optimizer.

 About the GIF Optimizer Command


About Paint Shop Pro

You have installed Paint Shop Pro version 7. The minimum requirements for using this program are Windows 95/98/NT4, a CD-ROM drive, a Pentium processor or equivalent, 32 MB RAM, 75 MB of disk space, and a monitor capable of displaying 256 colors and 800x600 resolution.

To view information about your computer system, click the About Paint Shop Pro button [image] on the toolbar. The Paint Shop Pro splash screen opens. Click the System Info button to open the System Information dialog box, where you can view information about your system resources.

If you are contacting Jasc Software for technical support, please have the program version number available.


Glossary

[glossary here]


Glossary of Terms

Additive Colors	Adjustment Layer
Alpha Channel	Antialias
Aspect Ratio	Asymmetrical curve
AVI
Background	Background Color
Background Layer	Batch Conversion
Bevel	Bezier Control Points
Bezier Curve	Bit Depth
Bitmapped Image	Blend
Blend Modes	Blur
BMP	Brightness
Browser	Burn
Canvas	Canvas size
Cap	Channel
Clone	CMYK
CODEC	Color Bleeding
Color Channel	Color Depth
Color Palette	Color Wheel
Colorize	Compression
Contour	Contract Command
Contrast	Control Palette
Crop	Cusp
Data rate	Decompression
Defloat	Deformation
Defringe	Delta Frame
DIB	Difference Frame
Diffuse	Digital Camera
Dithering	DPI
8-bit image	Effect
Em	Emboss
Error Diffusion	Expand a Selection
15-bit image	4-bit image
Feather	Filter
Flip Command	Float Command
Foreground Color	FPS
Frame	Full Screen Preview
Gamma	Gamma Correction
GIF	Gradient Fill
Greyscale Image	Grid
Grow Command
Halftone	Handles
Hexadecimal Color System	Highlight
Histogram	Histogram Equalizing
Histogram Stretching	HSL (Hue/Saturation/Lightness)
Hue	Hue Mapping
Image Arithmetic function	Image resolution
Image Palette	Image Window
INDEO	Interlacing
Interpolated Resolution
Join	JPEG
JPG File Format
Kerning	Key Frame
Layer	Leading
Lightness	Line Art
Lossless Compression	Lossy Compression
Luminance
Marquee	Mask
Matting	Metafile Formats
Midtones	Mirroring
Miter Limit	Monitor Gamma
Negative Image	Node
Noise Filter
1-bit image	Octree Palette
OLE	Opacity
Optical Resolution (scanner)	Optimized Median Cut Palette
Palette	Palette Transparency
Paletted Image	Paper Texture
Path	Photo-CD File Format
Pixel	Pixel Depth
Planar Format	PNG
Posterize	PPI
Preserve Transparency	Primary Additive Colors
Primary Subtractive Colors
QuickTime
Raster Image	RAW File Format
Replace Color command	Resample
Resize	Resolution
RGB (Red/Green/Blue)	RLE (Run Length Encoding)
Rotate
16-bit image	Saturation
Screen Capture	Seamless Pattern
Segment	Selection
Shadow	Sharpen
Shear	Skew
Smudge	Solarize
Source Window	Stroke
Subtractive Color	Symmetrical Curve
24-bit image	Tangent
Threshold level	Thumbnail
TIFF	Title Bar
Toggle	Tone Balance
Tool Palette	Toolbar
Transparency	Transparent Color
Transparent Selection	True Color
TWAIN
Undo Buffer	Unsharp Mask
Vector Graphic
Watermark	Workspace
Zoom


Additive Colors

Emitted color light. The color used on computer monitors. When the primary additive colors (red, green, and blue) are combined, they produce white. The opposite of additive color is subtractive color.


Adjustment Layer

A layer used to apply color corrections to the layers below it.


Alpha Channel

A greyscale channel for storing selections and masks that can be reloaded into an image.


Antialias

The blending of the pixel colors along the edges to eliminate the stair-stepping look (called "jaggies") of curved and slanted lines. This feature is commonly used with text.


Asymmetrical Curve

A vector curve that can have direction handles of differing lengths. This results in a curve that is shaped differently on each side of the node.


AVI

Stands for Audio Video Interlaced. The file format for Microsoft Windows digital video and audio. This format is cross platform compatible, allowing AVI video files to be played on other computer platforms.


Background

The "canvas" on which you create an image in an image window.


Background Layer

The bottom layer in any non-transparent image. It can be promoted to a standard layer.


Batch Conversion

A process that converts multiple image files to a single file format.


Bevel

An effect that gives a selection or object the appearance of a three-dimensional edge.


Bezier Control Points

Points on a vector object that determine the shape of Bezier curves.


Bezier Curve

A smooth curve with anchor points and direction handles at both ends. The Bezier curve can be reshaped by moving the direction handles.


Blend

To combine two layers or areas of an image together.


Blend Modes

Methods of combining the pixels from the current layer with the layers under it. The layers are not permanently combined, but this allows you to preview the way they will appear if combined.


Blur

Reduces areas of high contrast and softens the appearance of an image.


BMP

Stands for Bitmap. A standard Microsoft Windows image format. Supports paletted, 24-bit RGB color, and greyscale images. This format does not support alpha channels, layers or vector data.


Brightness

The amount of light in a hue-- how light or dark it is. See also Luminance.


Paint Shop Pro Browser

Windows Explorer-like interface that lets you quickly locate files and preview images.


Burn

A blend mode option that darkens an image. The lightness values of the Blend layer’s colors reduce the lightness of the underlying layers.


Canvas

The area on which an image or animation frame is displayed.


Canvas size

The size of the area within an image window that can be edited.


Cap

A shape added to the end points of a line.


Channel

Contains all of the pixel information for a single color. A greyscale image has one channel, an RGB image has three channels, and a CMYK image has four channels.


Clone

To duplicate a portion of an image.


CMYK

Stands for Cyan/Magenta/Yellow/Black. The four standard ink colors used in printing. Because of impurities in inks, cyan, magenta, and yellow produce a muddy brown when combined. Black (K) is often added. See also Subtractive Colors.


CODEC

Stands for Compression/Decompression. CODECs are algorithms used in multimedia.


Color Bleeding

An effect by which the colors of an image run and become mixed like dyes on wet cloth, causing an image loss at the edges. Error diffusion dithering causes colors to bleed from left to right.


Color Channel

See Channel.


Color Depth

The number of bits of color information available for each pixel. An 8-bit image can display 256 colors, a 16-bit image can display 65,536 colors, and a 24-bit image can display over 16.7 million colors.


Color Palette

Contains the selection of available colors and displays the active foreground and background colors. It appears on the right side of the window when you first start Paint Shop Pro or Animation Shop.


Color Wheel

The circular color spectrum located inside the Jasc Color Dialog Box, from which you can pick and create a custom color.


Colorize

Coverts an image or selection to a uniform hue and saturation while retaining its lightness. You can use it to create sepia tones (the brown seen in old photographs) and other single-color effects.


Compression

The process by which some of an image's data is either stored in patterns or eliminated in order to reduce file size.


Contour

Two or more nodes connected by line and/or curve segments.


Contract Command

Shrinks a selection by a specific number of pixels while retaining its original shape.


Contrast

The difference between the light and dark areas of an image.


Tool Options Palette

Contains the options for modifying the image-editing tools, as well as the controls for configuring brushes and access to custom brushes.


Crop

To remove part of an image outside a specified boundary.


Cusp

A corner on a vector object. The node defines the bend point and angles of the segments on either side.


Data rate

The number of bytes per second a device is capable of transferring. For CD-ROMs this is represented in multiples of 100 bytes per second. 1X equals 100 bytes per second, 2X equals 200 bytes per second, etc.


Decompression

To reverse the compression software algorithm to return data to its original size and condition. For files compressed with lossy compression, some data will not be restored.


Defloat

To merge a floating selection into a layer. After a selection is defloated, editing commands affect the entire image or layer.


Deformation

To change an image's appearance by moving data from one area to another. The result is a deformed version of the original image.


Defringe

To clean the edges of a selection by removing pixels of the background color.


Delta Frame

Animation frame that contains only the pixels different from the preceding Key Frame. Delta Frames reduce the overall size of the video clip to be stored on the output medium.


DIB

Stands for Device Independent Bitmap. This is a portable data format that is designed not to be limited to a specific type of display hardware.


Difference Frame

See Delta Frame.


Diffuse

To randomly scatter colors to create an Impressionistic effect.


Digital Camera

A camera that takes pictures with a CCD (charge-coupled device) and stores them in a memory module or on removable media. The pictures can usually be transmitted to a computer.


DPI

Stands for Dots Per Inch. A unit used to measure the resolution of a printer. The more dots per inch, the sharper an image appears.


8-bit image

An image containing a maximum of 256 colors.


Effect

A graphic function that, when applied to an image or selection, creates a modified version of the image or selection. The difference between the source and the output image varies according to the type of effect used.


Em

A unit of typographical measure equal to the width of the letter "M" in a given typeface.


Emboss

An effect that causes the foreground to appear raised from the background by suppressing color and tracing the edges in black.


Error Diffusion

A method of color reduction that spreads out the inaccuracies in representing a pixel's color to the surrounding pixels.


Expand a Selection

Increases the size of a selection by a specific number of pixels while retaining its original shape.


15-bit image

An image containing a maximum of 32,768 colors.


4-bit image

An image containing a maximum of 16 colors.


Feather

Fades an area on both sides of a selection marquee over a specified number of pixels.


Filter

Filters alter each pixel’s color based on its current color and the colors of any adjacent pixels. The results can vary from a minor adjustment of a single characteristic to a total alteration of an image.


Flip Command

Reverses the selection, layer, or image vertically. What was the top becomes the bottom, and vice-versa.


Float Command

Temporarily separates a selection from an image or layer.


Frame

A single, complete image in a connected series of images such as an Animation Shop animation, a video recording, or a film recording.


FPS

Stands for Frames Per Second. This is the rate at which animations are displayed.


Full Screen Preview

Displays the selected image at the center of a black background that occupies the whole screen area.


Gamma

The range of color values a monitor, scanner, or printer can display.


Gamma Correction

Corrects the brightness levels in an image. On a computer monitor, a small change in brightness at a low brightness level is not equal to the same change at a high level. Gamma correction compensates for the inequality.


GIF

Stands for Graphic Interchange Format. This is a file format commonly used on the Internet. It uses lossless compression and creates images in 8-bit color. GIF supports single-color transparency and animation. GIF does not support layers or alpha channels.


Gradient Fill

A fill created by a gradual blending of colors together.


Greyscale Image

An image that uses up to 256 shades of grey to represent brightness.


Grid

An equally spaced series of vertical and horizontal lines to help you align your artwork and arrange image elements symmetrically. The grid spacing can be set at any size.


Grow Command

Adds pixels adjacent to an active selection.


Halftone

A collection of black and white dots arranged to simulate the brightness values of greyscale images.


Handles

Control points attached to vector nodes that control the shape of line segments on either side of a vector node.


Hexidecimal Color System
Hexadecimal Color System

Describes color code values by means of different combinations of sixteen numbers and letters (0-9 and A-F) as part of the color palette.


Highlight

The lightest part of an image.


Histogram Equalizing

Adjusts the Histogram by distributing the lightness values of the pixels evenly across the spectrum.


Histogram Stretching

Adjusts the Histogram by pulling the Histogram graph from both ends so that it covers more of the spectrum.


HSL (Hue/Saturation/Lightness)

A method for defining colors in an image.


Hue Mapping

Replacing all the pixels of one hue with another hue.


Image Arithmetic function

Combines the color data from two images on a pixel by pixel basis according to an arithmetic function.


Image resolution

The number of pixels per unit of area. A display with a finer grid contains more pixels and thus has a higher resolution, capable of reproducing more detail in an image.


Image Palette

A collection of available colors in images with 8 bits of color or less. You can change a color in the palette, but not increase the number of colors.


Image Window

Active image area in which Paint Shop Pro places an image file when you open it.


INDEO

Intel's compression/decompression algorithm for scalable software playback video. Intel licenses Indeo technology to companies such as Microsoft who integrate it into products like Microsoft's Video for Windows. Indeo technology can record 8, 16, or 24-bit sequences and stores the sequence as 24-bit for scalability on high-end PCs.


Interpolated Resolution

Most commonly associated with image scanners, this is enhanced resolution, which adds to the data provided by the optical resolution. It analyzes image data such as color and brightness and makes up additional pixels based on that information to reach the selected resolution.


Join

A point or corner where lines meet at angles other than 0 degrees or 360 degrees.


JPEG

Stands for Joint Photographics Experts Group. A compression technique that supports 24-bit images and can reduce a file’s size by as much as 96%. It removes some color information, while retaining the brightness data. At higher compressions it can result in a visible loss of quality. It is best for photographs and for images that contain a variety of tonal values. JPG has been adapted to video, but it provides no frame compression.


JPG File Format

An image format commonly used on the web. It uses JPEG lossy compression and creates images up to 24-bit color. It does not support layers, transparency, or alpha channels.


Kerning

The distance between characters of text. Measured in units of 1/300th of an em.


Key Frame

A baseline frame against which other frames are compared for differences. If the clip has a large amount of motion, better playback will occur with every frame being a Key Frame. If there is very little motion, such as a narrator, a higher number of Delta Frames (intervening frames that are compressed based on differences from the key frames) will give satisfactory playback. In general making every 3rd frame a Key frame is a good choice with the current Indeo algorithm.


Layer

A discrete level of an image that can be edited independently from the rest of the image.


Leading

The distance between lines of text measured in 1/1000ths of a point. Positive values add leading, while negative values reduce leading.


Lightness

One of the components of H/S/L (Hue/Saturation/Lightness).


Line Art

An image composed entirely of lines of one color (no greyscale component).


Marquee

The animated, black and white border that surrounds a selection and defines its edges. This is also the name of a text effect in Animation Shop.


Mask

A device used to protect and isolate an area of a layer from changes applied to the rest of the layer.


Matting

To clean a selection or an image border by removing excess pixels. When a layer is created by removing it from an image, some of the pixels surrounding the border are included, especially when it has been antialiased or feathered.


Metafile Formats

File formats that included several types of data. For example, a typical Windows metafile might contain a bitmap, vector information, and text, with the bitmap constituting the majority of the image, and the vector and text data providing annotation.


Midtones

The shades midway between the highlights and shadows.


Mirroring

Used to reverse the selection, layer, or image horizontally. What was the left side becomes the right side, and vice-versa.


Miter Limit

The miter limit is the maximum allowed ratio of the miter length to the line width. The miter length is the distance from the inside corner of the join to the outside corner. If a Miter join exceeds the limit value, the point is cut off at the limit.


Monitor Gamma

Manages the amounts of red, blue, and green in an image to ensure that the on-screen and printed image match as closely as possible and that the colors will be consistent from image to image.


Negative Image

An image created by reversing the colors of the original. Each color is replaced by the color directly opposite it on the color wheel. The effect is the same as a photograph negative.


Node

A control point on a vector object. The type of each node dictates the shape of the line segment on either side of it.


Noise Filter

A grainy pattern created by the random re-coloring of pixels.


1-bit image

An image containing a maximum of 2 colors. In Paint Shop Pro, these are black and white.


Octree Palette

One of the palette generation methods that Paint Shop Pro can use to decrease an image color depth. It is accurate to 8-bits per channel. but it is not as good at weighting color importance as the optimized median cut palette.


Opacity

The density of a color or layer. A color or layer with an opacity of 0 is transparent; a color or layer with an opacity of 100 is complete opaque (solid).


Optical Resolution (scanner)

The actual number of pixels per inch at which a scanner is capable of capturing an image.


Optimized Median Cut Palette

One of the palette generation methods that Paint Shop Pro can use to decrease an image color depth. The palette uses occurrence of colors as weighting, and ranks accordingly. It is accurate only to 5-bits per channel.


Palette

As in a painter’s palette, the different palettes included in Paint Shop Pro offer you the ability to select and mix colors, organize the different layers of paint on the canvas and pick a customized brush for a specific task.


Palette Transparency

Specific color in the palette that is assigned a transparent value. This is useful when working with some files formats, such as GIF and PNG.


Paletted Image

An image with at most 256 colors.


Paper Texture

A variety of simulated surfaces to make it look as though you are painting on paper having that texture.


Path

One or more contours that form the guiding line for a vector object. It traces from a starting point to either an ending point or a closing point.


Photo-CD File Format

File format used by Kodak in digital cameras and Photo-CDs. When you open an image with a PCD file format, Paint Shop Pro may open a dialog box requesting additional information.


Pixel Depth

See color depth.


Planar Format

Formats that use color planes to determine an image's color. Most raster formats record color information on a pixel-by-pixel basis, but planar formats use color planes, which are sometimes called color channels. Each color plane contains all of the pixel information for a single color.


PNG

Stands for Portable Network Graphics. A file format designed for web graphics. It supports 24-bit color with lossless compression, one alpha channel, and alpha transparency.


Posterize

To reduce an image’s colors or shades of grey to the lightest shade, darkest shade, and a few shades in between.


PPI

Stands for Pixels Per Inch. A unit used to measure the resolution of a computer monitor and scanner. The more pixels per inch, the sharper an image appears.


Preserve Transparency

A layer option that restricts the editing of a layer to the pixels that already contain data. You can edit this data, but you can not cover any transparent areas.


Primary Additive Colors

Red, green, and blue. When these three colors are combined, they produce white.


Primary Subtracive Colors
Primary Subtractive Colors

Cyan, magenta, and yellow. When these three colors are combined, they produce black.


QuickTime

Apple Computer's video environment. QuickTime video files must be converted to AVI format to run under Microsoft's Video for Windows, however Apple provides a QuickTime viewer for Windows. INDEO video is supported under Apple’s Macintosh operating system.


Raster Image

See Bitmapped Graphic


RAW File Format

A file format that describes the colors in each pixel by means of an 8-bit system in which 255 equals white, and 0 equals black. The format’s great flexibility allows you to transfer images between applications, recognizing its channels, CMYK, and RGB values.


Replace Color command

Allows you to select a specific color and replace it with any new color of your choice.


Resample

To change the resolution of an image. To resample down is to decrease the resolution. To resample up is to increase the resolution.


Resize

To change the width and height of an image or layer.


Resolution

The level of detail of an image, monitor, or printer. See Image Resolution.


RGB (Red/Green/Blue)

See Primary Additive Colors.


RLE (Run Length Encoding)

A method for reducing file size by compressing repetitive information. It discards continuous regions of duplicate color to compress most multi-layered image to about 75% of their original sizes.


Rotate

To spin a selection, layer, or image in either direction around its center point.


16-bit image

An image containing a maximum of 65,536 colors.


Screen Capture

A picture of the screen or a section of the screen. These pictures can be of an area you draw, of the entire screen, of an active window, of the contents of an active window, or of the controls of a program, such as a toolbar. Screen captures are often used in documentation as a way to describe a feature, command, or process.


Seamless Pattern

A converted selection which, when tiled over an area, will not show a seam. When Paint Shop Pro converts a selection to a seamless pattern, it uses the area surrounding the selection to eliminate the appearance of seams. If the selection is tool close to the edge of the image, a message indicating this will appear. When you use this command, a new windows is created with the seamless pattern and the original image is not affected.


Segment

The line between two vector nodes. This can be a straight line or a curve.


Selection

An area or object that has been isolated from the rest of the image and can be edited separately.


Shadow

The darkest area of an image.


Sharpen

To bring an image into better focus and increase the detail by increasing the contrast of adjacent pixels.


Shear

A deformation that controls the offset of a side.


Skew

A deformation that tilts an image or selection along its horizontal or vertical axis up to 45% in either direction.


Smudge

A retouch mode setting that spreads color from the starting point and picks up new color as it moves. The effect is similar to smearing paint.


Solarize

A function that inverts all the colors above a certain lightness value.


Subtractive Color

Absorbs color light. The color used in printing. When the primary subtractive colors (cyan, magenta, and yellow) are combined, they produce black. The opposite of subtractive color is additive color.


Source Window

The image from which you can create a mask. It can be any image window open in the workspace.


Stroke

An outline placed on text.


Symmetrical Curve

A vector curve that has handles of identical lengths on either side of the node.


24-bit image

An image containing a maximum of 16,777,216 colors.


Tangent

A vector node that blends a curve and a line.


Threshold level

The lightness value above which colors are inverted in Adjustment layers, the Glowing Edges effect and the Solarize command. All colors with lightness values above the set level are turned into their inverse (on the 255 scale). At a Threshold level of 1, all colors except black change. As the Threshold level increases, colors must be increasingly lighter to invert themselves.


Thumbnail

A small representation of a larger image. Paint Shop Pro provides thumbnails in the browser so that you can preview images without opening the file.


TIFF

Stands for Tagged Image File Format. A file format used for scanning, storing, and interchanging color and greyscale images. It does not support layers or animation.


Title Bar

Located at the top of every window, the title bar displays the program name, as well as the control icon, the name of the open file, and the minimize, maximize, restore, and close buttons.


Toggle

To switch an item back and forth from one state to another, such as hiding and displaying a palette.


Tone Balance

Balances the Highlight, Midtone, and Shadow levels.


Tool Palette

Part of the Animation Shop and Paint Shop Pro interface that provides the image-editing tools. When you click a tool button, the Tool Options palette (in Paint Shop Pro) or the Style Bar (in Animation Shop) displays its usage options.


Toolbar

Part of the Animation Shop and Paint Shop Pro interface that provides buttons having the same functionality as some of the frequently used menu commands. If a command is unavailable, its button appears greyed-out.


Transparency

The degree of visibility assigned to a specific color or selection.


Transparent Color

An image palette color that is designated to allow the background to show through. Usually used when working with web formats like GIF and PNG. While working in Paint Shop Pro, the transparent color remains visible until you choose the View Palette Transparency command.


Transparent Selection

A pasted selection that Paint Shop Pro adds to the current image as a selection after deselecting pixels that match the color and tolerance settings in the Transparent Color Select dialog box. Any deselected pixels are transparent.


True Color

The common name for 24-bit color. "True" is used because the human eye can distinguish among approximately six million different colors, which is fewer than the number of colors available in a 24-bit color system. 24-bit images use 8 bits for each RGB channel. With 32-bit color depth, another 8 bits are used for an Alpha Channel.


TWAIN

An industry-wide compatibility standard for devices such as scanners and digital cameras to communicate with applications like Paint Shop Pro, allowing you to import an image into Paint Shop Pro without leaving the program.


Undo Buffer

Storage area for undo information.


Unsharp Mask

A filter that sharpens an image by subtracting a blurred copy image from the original.


Vector Graphic

An image composed of a set of instructions for drawing objects such as shapes, lines, and text.


Watermark

Embedded information in an image. It can include such items as copyright and author information. It is imperceptible to humans, but readable by computers.


Workspace

In Paint Shop Pro and Animation Shop, this is the area of the main window where you work with images and the Browser.


Zoom

To increase or decrease the magnification of an object or image.


Active Colors Panel
Active Styles Panel


Color Palette


Current Color Panel


Background Color

One of the two active colors used by the painting and drawing tools. It is usually applied by pressing the right button on the mouse. See also foreground color.


Background Color

The color of the image “canvas.” It is also one of the two active colors used by the painting and drawing tools and is usually applied by pressing the right button on the mouse.


Bit Depth

The number of bits of color information available for each pixel. An 8-bit image can display 256 colors, a 16-bit image can display 65,536 colors, and a 24-bit image can display over 16.7 million colors. Bit depth is also referred to as color depth.


Burn Mode

The lightness values of the colors of the Blend layer reduce the lightness of the underlying layers, darkening the image.


Browser


Browser Menu


Burn Mode

Darkens areas in the image that are too light. The opposite of Dodge.


Color Definition Models

Three models for describing color are:

The RGB method, which divides color into red, green, and blue light,

The HSL method, which divides color into its hue, saturation, and lightness values, and

The CMYK method, which divides color into cyan, magenta, yellow, and black ink.


Color Mode

Applies the hue and saturation of the selected layer to the image. The luminance of the underlying layers is not affected.


Color to Target Mode

Applies the foreground color without affecting the luminance.


Color Wheel


Control Menu


Cursors and Tablet Tab


Darken Mode

Decreases brightness (works on RGB values)


Darken Mode

Pixels in the selected layer that are darker than the underlying layers are applied to the image. Pixels lighter than the underlying layers disappear.


Difference Mode

Subtracts the selected layer's color from the color of the underlying layers, depending on which is lighter.


Dissolve Mode

Randomly replaces the colors of some pixels on the selected layer with those of the layer underneath to create a speckled effect. The number of pixels replaced is determined by the layer's opacity, with more pixels being replaced as the opacity decreases.


Dithering

A process that mixes monochrome with colored pixels or pixels of two or more colors to display colors that are not available. The process produces shading and highlighting that appear to the eye as different colors.


Dodge Mode

Lightens and brings out the details in areas that are in shadow. Comes from the darkroom technique of holding back some of the light when developing film to produce lighter areas. The opposite of Burn.


Dodge Mode

The lightness values of the colors in the Blend layer lighten the colors of the underlying layers, lightening the image. Light colors produce the most lightening; black has no effect.


Duotone Image

A greyscale image to which hue and saturation have been added.


Emboss Mode

Causes foreground to appear raised from background by suppressing color and tracing edges in black.


Exclusion Mode

Creates an effect similar to but softer than the Difference mode.


Fax - CCITT - 3 Compression
Fax - CCITT 3 Compression

Uses the same compression as fax machines, reducing the image to black and white


Foreground Color

The primary color used by the painting and drawing tools that is usually applied by left-clicking the mouse. It is displayed in the Active Colors panel of the Color palette.


Freehand Tool


Hard Light Mode

Combines two previous blend modes. If the selected layer's color channel value is less then 128 (half the maximum value), the Multiply blend mode is used. If the selected layer's color channel value is greater than or equal to 128, the Screen blend mode is used. This mode is generally used to add highlights or shadows.


Histogram

A graph of the distribution of pixels along the lightness values from black to white in an image. You can use the histogram to determine if there is enough detail in an image to make corrections possible and what lightness corrections need to be made.


Horizontal Displacement

Horizontal displacement controls the horizontal displacement of the vertical lines. It refers to the depth of the troughs that are measured horizontally


Hue

The shade or tint of a color. Also, one of the three components of the HSL color definition mode.


Hue Down Mode

Shifts hue down (affects HSL value)


Hue Mode

Applies the hue of the selected layer to the underlying layers.


Hue to Target Mode

Applies the hue of the foreground color without affecting the saturation or lightness.


Hue Up Mode

Shifts hue up (affects HSL value)


Huffman Encoding Compression

Lossless compression that replaces the most common elements with smaller shorthand codes and a key to decode them


Image Resolution

The number of pixels per unit of length in an image. It is often referred to as ppi, or pixels per inch. If there are two images of the same dimension, the image with the greater resolution contains a greater number of smaller pixels, while the lower resolution image contains fewer larger pixels.


Image Title Bar


Interlacing

Interlacing places a rough, blurry copy of the image at the beginning of the data stream, which allows people viewing the image on the Internet to see that copy first. The file gradually sharpens as the image loads.


Jasc Basic Colors


Jasc Color Wheel


Jasc Custom Color Squares


JPEG Compression

Joint Photographic Experts Group Compression A compression technique that supports 24-bit images and can reduce a file size by as much as 96%. It removes some color information while retaining the brightness data. At higher compressions it can result in a visible loss of quality. It does not support transparency or layers. It is best for photographs and for images that contain a variety of tonal values. It has been adapted to video, but it provides no frame compression.


Layer Palette


Lighten Mode

Increases brightness (works on RGB values)


Lighten Mode

The lighter of the blend and base colors is displayed.


Lightness Down Mode

Decreases lightness (affects HSL value)


Lightness to Target Mode

Applies the lightness value equal to that of the foreground color without affecting the saturation or hue.


Lightness Up Mode

Increases lightness (affects HSL value)


Luminance Mode

Applies the luminance values of the selected layer to the luminance values of the underlying layers. The color is not affected.


LZW Compression

Lossless compression that groups blocks of color together. GIF uses this compression.


LZ77 Compression

LZ77 Compression achieves the best compression rates. Some layered images will compress up to 75%. It is much slower than RLE compression, but it eliminates the need to ZIP or otherwise recompress files for transportation.


Magic Wand Tool


Menu Bar with No Open Images


Menu bar with open image
Menu Bar with Open Images


Multiply Mode

Combines the colors of the selected layer with the underlying layers to produce a darker color. Multiplying any color with black produces black; multiplying any color with white leaves the color unchanged.


Normal Blend
Normal Mode

Pixels on the current layer are blended with the underlying layer only by varying the opacity.


OLE

Object Linking and Embedding. A Windows feature that enables two or more programs to work together and share files. A link is a pointer from a file in one application to a file that may be from a different program. Linking saves space on your hard drive. Embedding allows information from one program to be contained in a file from another program. Embedding lets you keep all parts of a document in a single file even if the parts come from several programs.


Outer Bevel Shapes


Overlay Mode

Combines two previous blend modes. If the underlying layers' color channel value is less than half the maximum value, the Multiply blend mode is used. If the color channel value is greater than or equal to half, the Screen blend mode is used. This shows patterns or colors of the upper layer while preserving the shadows and highlights of the lower layers.


Packbits Compression

Compresses with a subset of the Postscript Level 2 printer language


Paper Orientations
Paper Orientation


Precision Cursor


MIP Toolbar
Print Multiple Images Toolbar


Profile

A profile is a file that contains all the settings for a particular device.


Progressive Encoding

Progressive encoding allows viewers of the image to see a rough, blurry copy of the image as it downloads. The file gradually sharpens as the image loads.


Push Mode

Similar to Smudge, but does not pick up any new color.


Random Access Memory (RAM)

The system memory of a computer used to run programs and temporarily store and process information.


Rulers and Grid


Run Length Encoding
Run Length Encoding (RLE)

A compression method that reduces file size by compressing repetitive information. RLE gains about 25% compression rate with layered images and is only slightly slower than not using any compression.


Sample Jump

When you click a topic jump, the new, related topic is displayed in the window.

After you have finished viewing the new topic, you can:

•	Return to the original topic by clicking the Back button [image] above the Table of Contents,

•	Read the topic that follows the current one by clicking the Next button [image],

•	Read the topic that precedes the current one by clicking the Previous button [image], or

•	Jump to a related task by clicking one of the Related Topics listings.

 Return to "Using Paint Shop Pro Help"

Related Topic

 General information on using Microsoft Windows Help


Saturation

The purity of a hue or the amount of grey it contains. A hue with a saturation of 100% is vivid; a hue with a saturation of 0% is grey. Also, one of the three components of the HSL mode.


Saturation Mode

Applies the saturation of the selected layer to the underlying layers.


Screen Mode

Lightens the underlying color by multiplying the inverse of the blend and base colors. The result is a color that is the same or a lightened version of the base color.


Slider Bar
Scroll Bar


Scroll Bar


Selection Marquee


Selection Tool


Available Colors Panel


Soft Light Mode

Combines two previous blend modes. If the selected layer's color channel value is less than half the maximum value, the Burn blend mode is used. If the color channel value is greater than or equal to half, the Dodge blend mode is used. This mode is generally used to add soft highlights or shadows.


Soften Mode

Smoothes edges and reduces contrasts.


Sharpen Mode

Heightens edges and accentuates contrasts.


Smudge Mode

Spreads color from the starting point and picks up new color as it moves. The effect is similar to smearing paint.


Saturation Up Mode

Increases saturation (affects HSL value)


Saturation Down Mode

Decreases saturation (affects HSL value)


Saturation to Target Mode

Applies the saturation value equal to that of the foreground color without affecting the hue or lightness.


Standard Encoding

Standard encoding makes the image display from top to bottom when viewed on the Internet.


Status Bar


Title Bar


Tool Palette


Toolbar


Toolbars Dialog Box


Tools to Use with the Dropper
Tools You Can Use with the Dropper

Painting Tools	Drawing Tools
Paint Brush	Text Tool
Clone Brush	Line Tool
Color Replacer	Shape Tool
Retouch Brush
Air Brush
Flood Fill Tool


This is a pop-up.


TWAIN Standard

To enable communication between imaging hardware and software, five companies (Aldus, Caere, Eastman Kodak, Logitech, and Hewlett Packard) developed what is now an industry-wide compatibility standard known as TWAIN. TWAIN allows data sources, such as scanners and digital cameras, to communicate with host applications, such as image-editing and page layout programs.


Uncompressed

No file compression is used. File is saved at normal size.


Vertical Displacement

Vertical displacement controls the vertical displacement of the horizontal lines. It refers to the depth of the troughs that are measured vertically.


Windows Color Spectrum


Windows Color Ribbon


Windows Basic Colors


Windows Custom Colors Squares


Aspect Ratio

The ratio of the width of an image to its height. When an image is displayed on different screens, the aspect ratio must be kept the same to avoid "stretching" in either the vertical or horizontal direction. For VGA and INDEO video, the aspect ratio is 4:3 yielding 160X120, 320X240 and 640X480 sizes.


Capture Setup Dialog Box


Dialog Box Title


Digital Camera Configuration Dialog Box


Digital Camera Dialog Box


Gradient Editor Dialog Box


Gradient Bar


Gradient Color Buttons and Color Box


Gradient Marker


Image Mover Tool


Image Resize Arrow


Jasc Color Dialog Box


Jasc Precision Cursor


Lossless Compression

Compression method that retains all of the original image data and reduces the file size by storing patterns of pixels in the image.


Lossy Compression

Compression method that eliminates data to reduce the file size.


Luminance

The lightness of a color, independent of its hue or saturation. The luminance of an image is displayed in the Histogram. A color with a luminance of 100% is white; a color with a luminance of 0% is black.


New Image Dialog Box


Numeric Edit Control

The Numeric Edit control gives you several methods for changing values in a number box. You can type the number, click the spin controls, drag the cursor in the meter bar, or hold down the pop-up button and drag the slider.


Multiple Image Printing Window Menu


Not Enough Detail


Open Dialog Box


Image Information / Preview Panel


Recent Colors Dialog Box


Recent Colors Dialog Box
with Unavailable Colors


Result Bar


Select Color from Palette Dialog Box


Tonal Range

The tonal range of an image is a measure of its pixels at each brightness level. An overexposed photograph contains too many pixels in the highlight area. An image that is too dark contains too many pixels in the shadow area. An image that lacks sufficient contrast contains too many pixels in the midtone area. The Histogram of an image displays its tonal range and shows you where it needs correcting.


Tool Options Palette for the Airbrush


Tool Selection Button


Tool Selection Drop-Down Menu


Opacity Box ToolTip


Transparency Bar


Pixel

Stands for picture element. One of the individual squares that make up a raster image and the smallest element that can be assigned a color. If you zoom in on an image, you can see the individual pixels.


Bitmapped Image

An image composed of an array of small squares, called pixels, arranged in rows and columns. Each pixel has a specific color value and location.


COLOR MENU DIALOG BOXES


Brightness / Contrast Dialog Box


Highlight / Midtone / Shadow Dialog Box


Red / Green / Blue Dialog Box


Hue / Saturation / Luminance Dialog Box
Hue / Saturation / Lightness Dialog Box


Hue Map Dialog Box


Gamma Correction Dialog Box


Colorize Dialog Box


Posterize Dialog Box


Solarize Dialog Box


MASKS


Alpha Channel

A greyscale channel for storing selections and masks in an image.


Greyscale Image

An image that uses up to 256 shades of grey to represent brightness.


DIALOG BOXES


Sort Order Drop-Down Box


Resize Dialog Box


Change Canvas Size Dialog Box


Add Borders Dialog Box


Select Area Dialog Box


Command History Dialog Box


Image Information Tab


Creator Information Tab


Watermark Information Tab


Image with Background Color


MIP Context Menu
Print Multiple Images
Context Menu


MIP Page Context Menu
Print Multiple Images
Page Context Menu


Browser Context Menu


Copyright Symbol on Title Bar


Paste Commands


Clone Brush Options


Example of Cloning


Retouch Tool Options Tab 2


Paper Textures


Export Picture Tube Dialog Box


Outer Bevel filter
Creating an Outer Bevel Effect

The Outer Bevel effect gives a selection a three-dimensional look by creating the appearance of raised edges. It expands the size of the selection by the width of the bevel.

•	Notes: Before opening the Outer Bevel dialog box, select the area or item to which you are applying the effect.
You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

Opening the Outer Bevel Dialog Box

You cannot open the dialog box until your image contains a selection. To open the Outer Bevel dialog box, choose Effects > 3D Effects > Outer Bevel.

 Using the Outer Bevel Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Creating a Selection

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Outer Bevel Dialog Box

Use the Outer Bevel effect to create a 3D effect by adding a bevel around the outside of the selection. The size of the selection expands by the width of the bevel. When you create the Outer Bevel effect, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: Before opening the Outer Bevel dialog box, select the area or item to which you are applying the effect.
You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

About the Dialog Box Settings

The dialog box contains three panels:

•	The "Bevel" panel, where you select the bevel shape and width. The Bevel box displays a cross-section of each bevel edge.

•	The "Image" panel, where you set the appearance of the effect and the overall brightness and glossiness of the image.

•	The "Light" panel, where you set the color, direction of origin, intensity, and height of the light source.

Using the Outer Bevel Dialog Box

The bevel is applied to the outside of the selection.

When an option contains both a slider and a number box, you can either drag the slider or type a number in the box to change the setting. Click the Reset button to return to the default settings for the dialog box.

To use the Outer Bevel dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	To update the original image automatically each time you change the settings, click the Auto Proof button [image].

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can edit this effect by changing its settings.

4	In the "Bevel" panel, click the Bevel box or bar and select the bevel shape. Use the Width setting to select the width of the beveled edge.

5	In the "Image" panel, use the Smoothness and Depth settings to shape the bevel edges. Smoothness controls the slope (sharpness) and thickness of the edges, while Depth controls the height. As the Smoothness increases, the edges become more rounded; as it decreases, they appear thinner and steeper. As Depth increases, the edges become more pronounced.

6	Use the Ambience setting to adjust the overall brightness of the image.

7	Use the Shininess setting to determine how reflective the surface appears. A higher value produces a glossy image and makes the highlights more evident; a lower value makes the highlights diminish.

8	In the "Light" panel, choose the color of the light shining on the image. The light color affects the overall color of the image. To change the light color, click a color in the image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

9	The Angle setting points to the direction of origin of the light and affects which edges appear light and shadowed. It is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

10	Use the Intensity setting to adjust the brightness of the directional light. Note that the Ambience value determines the brightness of the entire image before the Intensity is applied.

11	The Elevation setting shows the height of light source above the image. At 90°, it is positioned directly overhead. As you lower the value, the light source moves closer to the image, producing longer shadows.

12	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

13	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

14	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Sculpture Effect

The Sculpture effect accentuates the edges of the image so that they appear embossed or sculpted and overlays the result with a colored pattern. The patterns are 24-bit RGB images stored in the Patterns folder.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Sculpture Dialog Box

To open the Sculpture dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Sculpture.

 Using the Sculpture Dialog Box

Related Topics

 About the Edge Filters

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Sculpture dialog box
Using the Sculpture Dialog Box

Use the Sculpture effect to create an embossed or sculpted effect by alternating the edges of the image and then color the image with a semi-transparent pattern. To create the Sculpture effect, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

About the Dialog Box Settings

The dialog box contains three panels:

•	The "Pattern" panel, where you select and edit the pattern that is used to color the sculpted image. The patterns are 24-bit RGB images stored in the Patterns folder within the Paint Shop Pro program folder.

•	The "Image" panel, where you set the appearance of the sculpted effect and the overall brightness and glossiness of the image.

•	The "Light" panel, where you set the color, direction of origin, intensity, and height of the light source.

Using the Sculpture Dialog Box

When an option contains both a slider and a number box, you can either drag the slider or type a number in the box to change the setting. Click the Reset button to return to the default settings for the dialog box.

To apply the Sculpture dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	To update the original image automatically each time you change the settings, click the Auto Proof button [image].

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can edit this effect by changing its settings.

4	In the "Pattern" panel, click the Pattern box or bar and select the pattern to apply. The image’s color is the result of the pattern color combined with the light color. Use the Scale setting to resize the pattern to a percentage of its original dimensions. Decrease the scale to make the pattern tiling more pronounced; increase it to enlarge the pattern.

5	In the "Image" panel, use the Smoothness and Depth settings to determine the degree of sculpting. Smoothness controls the slope (sharpness) and thickness of the edges, while Depth controls the height. As the Smoothness increases, the edges become more rounded; as it decreases, they appear thinner and steeper. As Depth increases, the edges become more pronounced and the fainter edges become visible.

6	Use the Ambience setting to adjust the overall brightness of the image.

7	Use the Shininess setting to determine how reflective the surface appears. A higher value produces a glossy image and makes the highlights more evident; a lower value makes the highlights diminish.

8	In the "Light" panel, choose the color of the light shining on the image. The light color affects the overall color of the image. The pattern color and saturation of pattern determine how much the light color changes it. To change the light color, click a color in the image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

9	The Angle setting points to the direction of origin of the light and affects which edges appear light and shadowed. It is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

10	Use the Intensity setting to adjust the brightness of the directional light. Note that the Ambience value determines the brightness of the entire image before the Intensity is applied.

11	The Elevation setting shows the height of light source above the image. At 90°, it is positioned directly overhead. As you lower the value, the light source moves closer to the image, producing longer shadows.

12	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

13	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

14	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 About the Edge Filters


Texture Effect

The Texture effect gives the image a three-dimensional appearance as though the image were created on a textured surface. You create the textures using seamless tiles of 8-bit greyscale images that are stored in Textures folder.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Texture Dialog Box

To open the Texture dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Texture.

 Using the Texture Dialog Box

Related Topics

 About the Edge Filters

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Texture dialog box
Using the Texture Dialog Box

Use the Texture effect to make the image appear to be painted on a textured surface. You apply a seamless tile of an 8-bit greyscale image and then manipulate it to create the effect. You can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

About the Dialog Box Settings

The dialog box contains three panels:

•	The "Texture" panel, where you select and edit the texture that appears in the image. The patterns are 8-bit greyscale images stored in the Textures folder within the Paint Shop Pro program folder.

•	The "Image" panel, where you set the appearance of the texture effect and the overall brightness and glossiness of the image.

•	The "Light" panel, where you set the color, direction of origin, intensity, and height of the light source.

Using the Texture Dialog Box

When an option contains both a slider and a number box, you can either drag the slider or type a number in the box to change the setting. Click the Reset button to return to the default settings for the dialog box.

To use the Texture dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	To update the original image automatically each time you change a setting, click the Auto Proof button [image].

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can edit this effect by changing its settings.

4	In the "Texture" panel, click the Texture box or bar and select the texture to apply. Use the Scale setting to resize the texture to a percentage of its original dimensions. Decrease the scale to make the tiling more pronounced; increase it to enlarge the texture.

5	In the "Image" panel, use the Smoothness and Depth settings to determine the degree of sculpting. Smoothness controls the slope (sharpness) and thickness of the edges, while Depth controls the height. As the Smoothness increases, the edges become more rounded; as it decreases, they appear thinner and steeper. As Depth increases, the edges become more pronounced and the fainter edges become visible.

6	Use the Ambience setting to adjust the overall brightness of the image.

7	Use the Shininess setting to determine how reflective the surface appears. A higher value produces a glossy image and makes the highlights are more evident; a lower value makes the highlights diminish.

8	In the "Light" panel, choose the color of the light shining on the image. The light color affects the overall color of the image. To change the light color, click a color in the image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

9	The Angle setting points to the direction of origin of the light and affects which edges appear light and shadowed. It is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

10	Use the Intensity setting to adjust the brightness of the directional light. Note that the Ambience value determines the brightness of the entire image before the Intensity is applied.

11	The Elevation setting shows the height of light source above the image. At 90°, it is positioned directly overhead. As you lower the value, the light source moves closer to the image, producing longer shadows.

12	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

13	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

14	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 About the Edge Filters


Tiles Effect

The Tiles effect makes the image appear to be created from tiles. The tiles can be of varying shape, depth, and shininess.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

Opening the Tiles Dialog Box

To open the Tiles dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Tiles.

 Using the Tiles Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Using the Tiles Dialog Box

Use the Tiles effect to make the image appear to be created from tiles with the size, shape, depth, and shininess of your choosing. You can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

About the Dialog Box Settings

The dialog box contains three panels:

•	The "Tile" panel, where you select and configure the tiles and set the grout width.

•	The "Image" panel, where you set the appearance of the tiled effect and the overall brightness and glossiness of the image.

•	The "Light" panel, where you set the color, direction of origin, intensity, and height of the light source.

Using the Tiles Dialog Box

When an option contains both a slider and a number box, you can either drag the slider or type a number in the box to change the setting. Click the Reset button to return to the default settings for the dialog box.

To use the Tiles dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in up to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	To update the original image automatically each time you change the settings, click the Auto Proof button [image].

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can edit this effect by changing its settings.

4	In the "Tile" panel, click the Tile shape box to select a triangular, square, or hexagonal tile. Use the Angularity setting to reshape the tiles. As you increase the value, they change them from their original shape into shapes more aligned with the edges of the image.

5	Change the Tile size setting to increase or decrease the size of the tiles. Use the Border setting to control the grout, which is the width of the space between the tiles. Note that the grout is always black.

6	In the "Image" panel, use the Smoothness and Depth settings to determine the degree of sculpting. Smoothness controls the slope (sharpness) and thickness of the edges, while Depth controls the height. As the Smoothness increases, the edges become more rounded; as it decreases, they appear thinner and steeper. As Depth increases, the edges become more pronounced and the fainter edges become visible.

7	Use the Ambience setting to adjust the overall brightness of the image.

8	Use the Shininess setting to determine how reflective the surface appears. A higher value produces a glossy image and makes the highlights are more evident; a lower value makes the highlights diminish.

9	In the "Light" panel, choose the color of the light shining on the image. The light color affects the overall color of the image. To change the light color, click a color in the image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

10	The Angle setting points to the direction of origin of the light and affects which edges appear light and shadowed. It is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

11	Use the Intensity setting to adjust the brightness of the directional light. Note that the Ambience value determines the brightness of the entire image before the Intensity is applied.

12	The Elevation setting shows the height of light source above the image. At 90°, it is positioned directly overhead. As you lower the value, the light source moves closer to the image, producing longer shadows.

13	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

14	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

15	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Working with Preset Effects

The Bevels, Sculpture, Texture, and Tiles effects dialog boxes contain preset effects that you can apply to your images. These preset effects, which are included with Paint Shop Pro, are saved in the Presets folder within the program folder. When you open one of these dialog boxes, Paint Shop Pro scans the Presets folder and displays the files. If the folder does not exists or no files are found, only the Last Used entry appears in the Presets drop-down box.

When you apply a Bevel, Sculpture, Texture, or Tiles effect, the program saves it as the Last Used entry. This effect is updated each time you use the dialog box.

Creating and Saving a Preset Effect

You can create your own preset effects to add to these dialog boxes. To create and save a preset effect:

1	Set the Bevels, Sculpture, Texture, or Tiles dialog box options to create an effect.

2	Click the Save As button underneath the Presets drop-down box. The Preset Save dialog box opens.

3	Type a name for your new preset setting, and click OK.

The dialog box closes, and the new preset appears in the Presets drop-down box.

Deleting a Preset Effect

To delete a preset effect, click the Delete button underneath the Presets drop-down box. The name disappears. You can delete the presets included with the program as well as any you create.

Related Topics

 Using the Inner Bevel Dialog Box

 Using the Outer Bevel Dialog Box

 Using the Sculpture Dialog Box

 Using the Texture Dialog Box

 Using the Tiles Dialog Box


Texture Effect


Texture Dialog Box


Tiles Effect


Tiles Dialog Box


Preset Save Dialog Box


Presets Drop-down Box


Sculpture Effect


Sculpture Dialog Box


Outer Bevel Effect


Outer Bevel Dialog Box


Black Pencil Effect


Black Pencil Dialog Box


Charcoal effect


Charcoal dialog box


Colored Chalk effect


Colored Chalk dialog box


Colored Pencil effect


Colored Pencil dialog box


Blinds Effect


Blinds Dialog Box


Buttonize Effect


Buttonize Dialog Box


Chisel Effect


Chisel Dialog Box


Chrome Effect


Chrome Dialog Box


Cutout Effect


Cutout Dialog Box


Drop Shadow Effect


Drop Shadow Dialog Box


Feedback Effect


Feedback Dialog Box


Glowing Edges Effect


Glowing Edges Dialog Box


Inner Bevel Effect


Inner Bevel Dialog Box


Neon Glow Effect


Neon Glow Dialog Box


Woven Pattern Effect


Weave Dialog Box


Ripple Effect Example


Ripple Dialog Box


Twirl Effect Example


Twirl Dialog Box


Wave Effect Example


Wave Dialog Box


Wind Effect Example


Wind Dialog Box


Gaussian Blur Dialog Box


Gaussian Blur


Motion Blur


Motion Blur Dialog Box


Add Noise Filter


Add Noise Dialog Box


CurlyQs Effect Example


CurlyQs Dialog Box


 Kaleidoscope Effect


Kaleidoscope Dialog Box


Pattern Effect


Pattern Dialog Box


Rotating Mirror Effect Example


Rotating Mirror Dialog Box


Skew Deformation


Skew Dialog Box


Spiky Halo Effect Example


Spiky Halo Dialog Box


Warp Effect Example


Warp Dialog Box


Mosaic - Antique Effect


Mosaic - Antique Dialog Box


Mosaic - Glass Effect


Mosaic - Glass Dialog Box


Negative Image


Deformation Settings Dialog Box


User Defined Filters Dialog Box


Edit User Defined Filter Dialog Box


Define New Filter Dialog Box


Effect Browser


Image Arithmetic Dialog Box


Solarize Effect


Rotate Dialog Box


CMYK Combining Dialog Box


Posterize Effect


Colorize Effect


Greyscale Effect


Unsharp Mask Dialog Box


IMAGE OUTPUT


Save As Dialog Box


Browse for Folder Dialog Box


Batch Conversion Dialog Box


Batch Conversion Status Dialog Box


Batch Conversion Log Save As Dialog Box


Image Preview Boxes


GIF Transparency Tab


GIF Partial Transparency Tab


GIF Colors Tab


GIF Format Tab


GIF Download Times Tab


GIF Wizard Page 1
GIF Wizard Transparency Page


GIF Wizard Page 2
GIF Wizard Background Page


GIF Wizard Page 3
GIF Wizard Palette Page


GIF Wizard Page 4
GIF Wizard Quality Page


GIF Wizard Page 5
GIF Wizard Results Page


JPEG Quality Tab


JPEG Format Tab


JPEG Download Times Tab


JPEG Wizard Page 1
JPEG Wizard Quality Page


JPEG Wizard Page 2
JPEG Wizard Results Page


Page Setup Dialog Box


Print Preview Window


Print Dialog Box


Print Multiple Images Window


Print Preview Setup Dialog Box
Print Preview Options Dialog Box


 Layout Save As Dialog Box


Layout Open Dialog Box


Embed Watermark Dialog Box


Personalize Creator ID Dialog Box


Embed Watermark: Verify Dialog Box


Title Bar of Image with Watermark


Watermark Information Dialog Box


SELECTIONS


Remove Selected Color Dialog Box


Magic Wand Options


Selection Tool Options


Freehand Tool Options


Example of Smart Edge Selection


Example of Elliptical Selection


Example of a Point to Point Selection


Example of a Magic Wand Selection


Original Selection


Adding to the Selection


Selection Includes New Area


Save to Alpha Dialog Box


Save Selection Dialog Box


Load from Alpha Dialog Box


Load Selection Area Dialog Box


New Channel Dialog Box


Add Mask from Image Dialog Box


Save Mask Channel Dialog Box


Load Mask Channel Dialog Box


Layer with Mask


PREFERENCES


Undo Preferences Tab


Plug-in Filters Preferences Tab


Viewing Preferences Tab


Dialogs and Palettes Preferences Tab


Browser Preferences Tab


Miscellaneous Preferences Tab


Rulers and Units Preferences Tab


Transparency Preferences Tab


New CMYK Profile Dialog Box


Black Generation Tab


Transfer and Components Tab


Ink Calibration Tab


PCD Tab


RAW Tab


WMF/Import Tab


Meta Picture Import Dialog Box


PostScript Renderer Dialog Box


Raw Options Dialog Box


File Format Associations Dialog Box


Extensions Dialog Box


Customize Toolbar Dialog Box


Color Management Dialog Box


Monitor Gamma Adjustment Dialog Box


PostScript Tab


PAINTING


Tool Options Palette Brush Tab 1


Tool Options Palette Brush Tab 2


Paint Shop Pro Custom Brushes


Custom Brush Command


Custom Brush Dialog Box


Custom Brush Edit Dialog Box


Picture Tube Tool Options Palette


Picture Tube Options Dialog Box


Flood Fill Tab 1


PALETTES


Sort Order Drop-Down Box


Save Palette As Dialog Box


Load Palette Dialog Box


Set Palette Transparency Dialog Box


Edit Palette Dialog Box


Total Colors in Current Layer


Options Palette


X Colors Palette Panel


X Colors Reduction Methods


256 Color Palette Panel


Decrease Color - 32K Dialog Box


Reduce to 16 and 256 Color Reduction Methods


Decrease to 2 Colors Dialog Box


16 Color Options Panel


16 Color Palette Panel


Image Panel


View/Hide Pop-up Menu


Color Palette Docked


Color Palette Floating


Join Styles


Leading and Kerning

Leading specifies the amount of vertical space between lines of text. It is measured in either positive or negative points. Kerning specifies the distance between individual letters. It is measured in 1/1000th of an em. An em is the width of the letter “m” in a font, so its size is determined by the font size.


Line Cap Styles


Curve Tracking Examples

Set to 10	Set to 30


Miter Length


Text Justified on Closed Paths


Text Justified on Open Paths


Vector Object Context Menu


Vector Object Selection Tool Menu


Vector Object Button Menu


Vector Properties Dialog Box


Node Edit Menu in Drawing Mode


One Object Selected


Entire Group Selected


Rotating a Group

Left-click end of center bar

Drag to rotate group

Release Mouse


Resizing a Group

Left-click a corner

Drag to reshape the path

Release the mouse button


Stroked, Filled, and Stroked + Filled


Text and Shape Grouped


Fit To Path Command


Text Aligned with Shape


Text Curved Along Path


Vector Object and Its Path


Text Entry Dialog Box


Curved Text Cursor


Create As Panel


Text Settings Panel


Drawing Tool Options Palette
                      Tab 1


Drawing Tool Options Palette
                       Tab 2


Line Stroked, Filled, and Stroked + Filled


Creating a Single Line Segment


Creating a Multi-Segmented Line


Bezier Curve Outline


First Click for "S" Curve


Second Click for "S" Curve


First Click for Semi-Circular Curve


Second Click for Semi-Circular Curve


Creating a Freehand Line


Preset Shape Tool Options

                 Palette Tab 1


Preset Shape Tool Options
                 Palette Tab 2


Creating a Shape


Finished Shape


Patents

This product utilizes one or more of the following patents owned by Digimarc Corporation. U.S. Patents #5,636,292, 5,710,834, 5,721,788, 5,745,604, 5,748,763, 5,748,783, 5,768,426, 5,809,160, 5,832,119, 5,841,978, 5,850,481 and 5,930,377"


Export StudioAvenue.com Command

Choose this command to open the Studio Avenue Upload dialog box, from which you can send images to the Jasc StudioAvenue.com Web site. The site was created as a place for users of Jasc Software products to display their images. Your free StudioAvenue.com membership gives you 50MB of space to store as many pictures and albums as you want. Friends and family members can then visit the site and view your pictures.

You can choose this command from the File > Export menu of both the Browser and main window. In the Browser, you can also right-click any selected thumbnail and choose Send To StudioAvenue.com from the context menu. Before choosing the command from the Browser, select the thumbnails of pictures you want to copy to the site.

 Using the Send To StudioAvenue.com Dialog Box


Send To StudioAvenue.com Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to access Jasc StudioAvenue.com. StudioAvenue.com is a Web site where you can post images so that any friends or family with Web access can view them.

You can open this dialog box by choosing File > Export > StudioAvenue.com from the Browser or main Paint Shop Pro window. From the Browser, you can also right-click selected thumbnails and choose Send to StudioAvenue.com from the context menu.

Registering with StudioAvenue.com

Before you send images to the Web site, you need to register. Registration is free, and it gives you 50MB of space at StudioAvenue.com for displaying your images. You can register in either of two ways:

•	By entering the information in the StudioAvenue.com New User dialog box, or

 Using the StudioAvenue.com New User Dialog box

•	By navigating to the StudioAvenue.com site and completing the registration form.

To register at the StudioAvenue.com Web site:

1	Click the View Site button at the lower right of the dialog box. Your browser navigates to Jasc StudioAvenue.com.

2	Click the Start Here button at the upper left of the StudioAvenue.com page. The Registration page opens.

3	Type the requested information and choose a password.

4	Click the Submit button.

If you need more help or have questions about this site, please refer to the StudioAvenue.com Help. You are now registered and can upload images.

Uploading Pictures

To upload images to an album on StudioAvenue.com:

1	If your User name and Password are not displayed in the Login panel, type them. Select the Save password check box to have your password automatically entered each time you open the dialog box.

2	Create an album by typing a name in the Album name text box. If you are adding images to an existing album, type in that album’s name. Because all images are stored in an album, you must type a name before you can upload the images.

3	If you have opened the dialog box from the main window, the selected image appears in the Images list. You can upload any image that is open or minimized in the workspace. To add images, click the Add button. When the Select Images list box opens, select the check boxes of the images you want to add and clear those you want to remove.
Note that if you have opened the dialog box from the Paint Shop Pro Browser, the names of the selected thumbnails appear in the Images list. To select other thumbnails to upload, close the dialog box, select new thumbnails, and re-open the dialog box.

4	To include a description of an image, highlight it in the list and type up to 150 characters in the Image description box. The description appears below the image when a viewer selects it from the album.

5	To upload the images, click Send. As the images are sent to StudioAvenue.com, the Status panel displays messages on the progress of the upload.

When images are uploaded, they are converted to JPEG files. If an image is paletted, its color depth is increased to 24 bits.


StudioAvenue.com New User Dialog Box

To register using the StudioAvenue.com New User dialog box:

1	Click the New User button in the Login panel. The StudioAvenue.com New User dialog box opens.

2	Type the appropriate information in each box. You must enter information in all the boxes.

3	To read the Terms & Conditions, click the View Site button to open StudioAvenue.com in your browser. Close the browser after you have read the information.

4	To complete the registration, click the I Accept button. The dialog box closes, and your user name and password appear in the Send to StudioAvenue.com dialog box.

You are now registered and can upload images.

 Uploading Pictures


Select Images List Box


The Send To StudioAvenue.com Dialog Box


Replace Font Dialog Box

Paint Shop Pro displays this dialog box when you try to open an image containing fonts not installed on your system. Select a substitute font from the Replacement Font list. As you highlight a font, a sample of it appears below the Script box.


Replace Font Dialog Box pop
Replace Font Dialog Box


The StudioAvenue.com New User Dialog Box


Saving the Workspace

Choose this command to save your current workspace arrangement. When you save a workspace, Paint Shop Pro saves information on the toolbar and palettes placement and settings, the ruler and grid settings, and the location of all open images and their current zoom level. The saved file has a .wsp extension.

To save the current workspace:

1	Choose File > Workspace > Save or press <Shift> + <Alt> + <S>.

2	In the Save Workspace dialog box, navigate to the folder in which you want to save the workspace.

3	In the File name text box, type a name for the workspace. Paint Shop Pro adds the .wsp extension.

4	Click the Save button. Paint Shop Pro saves the workspace information.

If your workspace contains any newly created images that you have not yet saved, Paint Shop Pro will open the Save As dialog box, where you can assign a name and location for saving the new images. If you press Cancel, the image is not saved as part of the workspace.

If the workspace contains any images that have been modified, Paint Shop Pro saves them before saving the workspace information. If an image cannot be saved in its current format because of the modification, a message appears describing the format limitation. Press OK to modify the image and save it in its current format. Press Cancel to display the Save As dialog box, where you can change the file format. If you cancel the dialog box rather than saving the altered image, Paint Shop Pro saved the original, unmodified image with the workspace.

•	Note: The image filename and location rather than the actual file is saved. If you move or delete a file that you have saved, it will be missing when you next load the workspace.

Related Topics

 Loading a Workspace

 Deleting a Workspace

 About the Recent Workspace List


Loading the Workspace

Use this command to load a previously saved workspace. A saved workspace contains information about its arrangement -- palettes and Toolbar placement and settings, the ruler and grid settings, and the location of all open images and their current zoom level.

Note that the image filename and location, rather than the actual file, is saved. If you move or delete a file that is contained in a saved workspace, this file will be missing when you next load the workspace.

To load a workspace:

1	Choose File > Workspace > Load or press <Shift> + <Alt> + <L>.

2	In the Open Workspace dialog box, navigate to and select the filename of the workspace you want to load. Workspace files have a .wsp extension.

3	Click the Open button. Paint Shop Pro restores the files and program settings of the selected workspace.

If you have moved or deleted any image files from this workspace, the workspace opens without them. If an image from the workspace is already open, Paint Shop Pro applies the workspace settings and location to it.

If you have used a workspace recently, you can load it by choosing it from the list of recent workspaces, which is located in the File > Workspace menu.

Related Topics

 Saving a Workspace

 Deleting a Workspace

 About the Recent Workspace List


Deleting the Workspace

Use this command to delete a saved workspace file. Workspace files have a .wsp extension. A saved workspace contains information about its arrangement -- palettes and Toolbar placement and settings, the ruler and grid settings, and the location of all open images and their current zoom level.

Choose File > Workspace > Delete to open the Delete Workspace dialog box. Select the filename of the workspace, and then click the Delete button. Paint Shop Pro deletes the .wsp file.

Related Topics

 Saving a Workspace

 Loading a Workspace

 About the Recent Workspace List


Recent Workspace List

The lower portion of the Workspace sub-menu displays a list of the most-recently used workspaces. You can load one of these workspaces by choosing it from the list.

Related Topics

 Saving a Workspace

 Loading a Workspace

 Deleting a Workspace


Launching Other Jasc Software Programs

If you have Jasc Animation Shop, Image Robot, Media Center Plus, or WebDraw installed on your computer, you can open these programs by choosing File > Jasc Software Products > the program name.


Repeat Command

When you want to re-apply the last command to your image or apply the same command to another image, choose Edit > Repeat or press <Ctrl> + <Y>. If you have added the Repeat button [image] to the toolbar, you can click it.

This command is particularly useful when you want to apply the same effect to several images without opening the dialog box each time.

Related Topic

 Customizing the Toolbar


Changing Grid Properties

You can change the grid properties at any time, even if the grid is not visible, using the Grid and Guide Properties dialog box. To open the dialog box, double-click the ruler or choose View > Change Grid and Guide Properties. When Arrow tool is active, you can right-click the image and choose Change Grid and Guide Properties from context menu.

You can also change the grid properties using the Rulers and Units tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box.

 Using the Grid and Guide Properties Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Using the Grid

 Using the Snap to Grid Feature

 Setting Rulers and Units Preferences


Grid and Guide Properties Dialog Box

Double-click the ruler or choose View > Change Grid and Guide Properties to open the Grid and Guide Properties dialog box, where you change the grid and guide properties of the active image, the color of all the guides, and the snap influence settings.

To change the appearance of the grids in all the images, use the Rulers and Units tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box.

Grid Panel

To change grid properties:

1	In the Units drop-down box, choose whether to use pixels, inches, or centimeters for the grid spacing.

2	In the Horizontal Spacing box, type the distance you want between the vertical lines.

3	In the Vertical Spacing box, type the distance you want between the horizontal lines.

4	To choose a new Grid color, left-click in the Line Color box to open the Color dialog box or right-click to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

Guide Panel

To change the guide properties:

1	To delete all guides in the active image, select the Remove all guides check box.

2	To change the color of all the guides in the active image, select the Set color of all current guides check box and then left or right-click the color box and choose a new color.

Snap Panel

To set snap properties:

1	Choose a Snap Alignment. You have the following options in addition to center:

•	Top and Bottom align objects along the horizontal lines.

•	Left and Right align objects along the vertical lines.

•	Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left, and Lower Right align objects along the point where lines intersect.

2	Set a Snap Influence using the numeric edit control. Snap Influence controls how close an object must be to the grid or guide before it is aligned along it automatically.

3	Select the Snap to grid or Snap to guide check box to determine which of these two features is used for snapping. If you select both, Paint Shop Pro snaps objects to the guide when both Snap to Grid and Snap to Guide are active (visible).

Note that when you are using a brush, the grid or guide line runs through the center of the brush stroke.

Related Topics

 Using the Grid

 Creating Guides

 Setting Rulers and Units Preferences


Snap to Grid

Use this feature to have Paint Shop Pro automatically align objects along your grid when they come within a certain distance of it. You can snap selections, vector objects, and brush strokes. Set the Snap alignment and influence in the Grid and Guide Properties dialog box.

 Using the Grid and Guide Properties Dialog Box

Note that when both the Snap to Grid and Snap to Guide features are active (visible), Paint Shop Pro snaps objects to the guide and ignores the grid.

Related Topics

 Changing the Grid Properties

 Using the Grid


Creating Guides

You must display the rulers before you can create a guide. Choose View > Rulers to make the rulers visible.

To create a guide:

1	Choose View > Guides to make the guides visible.

2	Click the left mouse button and keep it pressed in while dragging from either ruler. Drag from the ruler across the top of the image window to create a horizontal guide; drag from the ruler extending down the left side of the window to create a vertical guide.

3	Release the mouse button when the guide is at the desired position.

Each guide has a guide handle on the ruler that you can use to move it. You can also change the color or delete a specific guide.

 Editing and Deleting Guides

To change the color of all future guides, use the Rulers and Units tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box.

Related Topics

 Using the Grid and Guide Properties Dialog Box

 Viewing Guides

 Using the Snap to Guide Feature

 Setting Rulers and Units Preferences


Editing Guides

After you have created a guide, you can move it, change its color, or delete it. However, before editing it, you must make the ruler visible because the ruler displays the guide handle.If you hide the ruler after creating or editing guides, the guides remain visible. To hide the guides, choose View >Guides.

Moving a Guide

To There are two ways to move a guide. You can:

•	Drag it by the guide handle on the ruler, or

•	Double-click the guide handle to open the Guide Properties dialog box. Type a new pixel in the Guide Position box. The position is the number of horizontal or vertical pixels from the upper left corner of the image.

Changing the Color of a Guide

To change the color of a specific guide:

1	Double-click the guide handle on the ruler to open the Guide Properties dialog box.

2	Left-click the Guide Color box to open the Color dialog box, where you can choose a new color. You can also right-click to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

To choose a new color for all guides in the image, use the Grid and Guide Properties Dialog Box.

To choose a new default color for all future guides, use the Rulers and Units tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box.

Deleting a Guide

To delete a guide:

•	Drag the guide handle off the image window, or

•	Double-click the guide handle to open the Guide Properties dialog box. and select the Delete Guide check box.

Related Topics

 Creating Guides

 Viewing Guides

 Using the Snap to Guide Feature

 Setting Rulers and Units Preferences


Viewing Guides

You can hide your guides when not using them and then display them only when they are needed. To alternate between hiding and displaying the guides, choose View > Guides. The guides are visible when the icon appears pressed in [image].

Guides extend beyond the edges of image canvas so that you can align objects before placing them in the image. As you enlarge the image window, the guides extend from one edge to the other.

Related Topics

 Creating Guides

 Editing and Deleting Guides

 Using the Snap to Guide Feature


Snap to Guide
Snap to Guides

You can have Paint Shop Pro automatically align selections, vector objects, and brush strokes along your guides when the come within a certain distance of them. Use the Grid and Guide Properties dialog box to set the snap placement and influence.

Note that when both the Snap to Grid and Snap to Guide features are active (visible), Paint Shop Pro snaps objects to the guide and ignores the grid.

 Using the Grid and Guide Properties Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Creating Guides

 Editing Guides

 Viewing Guides


Choosing a Snap Alignment

You can have Paint Shop Pro automatically align objects and lines along the grid or guides. This is a convenient way to create straight lines. You can use this feature with selections, vector objects, and the brushes.

Note that you must choose either Snap to Grid or Snap to Guides to make the Snap Alignment commands available.

Related Topics

Snap_to_Guide Using the Snap to Guide Feature

 Using the Snap to Grid Feature


Snap Influence

Choose this command to open the Snap Pixel Influence dialog box, where you can set how close your object or selection must be to the grid or guide before it is aligned along it automatically. When both Snap to Grid and Snap to Guide are active, Paint Shop Pro snaps objects to the guide.


Snap Pixel Influence Dialog Box

Use the Snap Pixel Influence dialog box to set how close an object must be to the grid or guide before it is aligned along it automatically. Note that when both Snap to Grid and Snap to Guide are active, Paint Shop Pro snaps objects to the guide.

To use the dialog box:

1	Use the numeric edit control to the distance at which Paint Shop Pro snaps an object to the grid or guide.

2	Click OK to close the dialog box.

When you are using a brush, the grid or guide line runs along its center.


About the Grid and Guides

As you work, you can use the grid and the guides to help you position elements of the image.

Using the Grid

The grid is a network of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical lines that covers the image canvas.

 Using the Grid

 Changing the Grid Properties

 Using the Snap to Grid Feature

Using the Guides

Guides are individual vertical and horizontal lines that you place on the image to help you align objects. Guides can extend beyond the canvas edge.

 Creating Guides

 Editing and Deleting Guides

 Using the Snap to Guide Feature

Related Topic

 Setting Rulers and Units Preferences


Image Slicing

When you slice an image, you divide it into several smaller sections that you can save in different formats or at different levels of optimization. Because these optimized sections take less time to download than one large image, your Web pages will load more quickly.

Slicing an image can reduce the number of graphics you need to save. If your Web site displays the same logo in more than one image, you only need to save that section once when you slice the images; you reload the same logo section for all the images.

The Paint Shop Pro Slicer works by creating a table from the image, saving the location of each sliced section as a cell in the table, and generating the HTML code for the table and cells. You copy the code to your source files so that the image can be reassembled when the user downloads the Web page.

The Image Slicer can also create rollovers, which are areas that display secondary images when the user clicks or moves a mouse over them.

•	Note: The Image Slicer affects the active image. Select the image you want to slice before opening the dialog box.

•	Note: If you purchased the CD-ROM version of Paint Shop Pro, be sure to check out our Image Mapping and Image Slicing tutorials and templates. These itmes can be found either by selecting the "Tutorials" option under "Web Templates" in the Paint Shop Pro 7 Autorun program or by opening the WEBTOOLS.HTM from the \Tutorial folder on the Paint Shop Pro 7 CD-ROM. The Autorun program is the screen you see when you insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

To open the Image Slicer dialog box, choose File > Export > Image Slicer.

 Using the Image Slicer Dialog Box

 Creating a Rollover for a Sliced Section


Image Slicer Dialog Box

Use the Image Slicer dialog box to slice an image by dividing it into rectangles, called cells, based on grids and lines. The cells can be saved in different formats or at different levels of optimization. You can also create rollovers, which are cells that display secondary images when the user clicks or moves a mouse over them.

•	Note: The Image Slicer affects the active image. Select the image you want to slice before opening the dialog box.

The preview area of the dialog box displays the active image. Use the Zoom In [image], Zoom Out [image], and Navigation [image] buttons underneath it to change your view of the image. Click the Proof button [image] to view the image in your Web browser.

Using the Tools to Create and Edit Cells

The Tools panel contains the tools you use to divide the image into cells and to edit the cell boundaries. To activate a tool, click its button. The button of the active tool appears pressed in. As you work with the cells, you may want to magnify the image. When the image is too large to fit within the preview window, drag it with the Pan tool [image] to bring other parts of it into view.

To create the cells:

1	Click either the Grid [image] or Line [image] tool to activate it.

•	Use the Grid tool to create evenly spaced and sized cells.

•	Use the Line tool to isolate a specific area, such as a logo, that you want to save.

2	Click the image. The two tools differ in the way they work:

•	Clicking with the Grid tool opens the Grid Size dialog box, where you set the number of rows and columns. To create a grid within an existing cell, click inside the cell.

•	Clicking with the Line tool creates a vertical or horizontal line across any cell into which you drag the cursor. To create a vertical line, click and drag vertically; to create a horizontal line, click and drag horizontally.

To move a line or grid border:

1	Click the Arrow or Line tool.

2	Move the cursor over a line.

3	When the cursor changes to the double-sided arrow, click and drag the line to a new position. To move only the segment within the current cell, press the <Shift> key before clicking the line.

Note that you can move lines up to, but not across, adjacent parallel lines. Also, you can move individual lines and lines that are part of a grid.

To delete a line or grid border:

1	Click the Eraser tool [image] and move the cursor over the line.

2	When the cursor changes to the Eraser, click to delete the line. If deleting the line would create a non-rectangular area, Paint Shop Pro displays an icon [image] indicating that you cannot erase the line.

Assigning Cell Properties

In the Cell Properties panel, you assign a URL, alternate text, and target to the cell. You also set whether the cell should appear in the downloaded image. By omitting cells, you can add cells from other images (such as logos or text) and create images in non-rectangular shapes.

To assign cell properties:

1	Make a cell active by clicking inside it with the Arrow tool [image] or Eraser tool. The positions of the cell boundary lines are displayed in the lower portion of the Cell Properties panel.

2	In the URL drop-down box, type the address of the Web page where you want the cell to appear. Click the arrow in the box to display and select addresses already used in the image.

3	In the Alt text box, type alternate text that the browser can display while the cell is downloading, if the cell doesn’t download, or if the user has images disabled in the Web browser. This text also appears as a ToolTip in some versions of Internet Explorer.

4	In the Target box, select the target frame or window in which you want the image to open. There are four choices:

•	_blank loads the image in a new browser window.

•	_parent loads the image in the parent window or frameset of the link. If the link does not point to a nested frame, the image loads in the full browser window.

•	_self loads the image in the same window or frame specified by the link.

•	_top loads the image in the full browser window and removes all frames.

5	By default, the “Include cell in table” check box is selected, and the cell appears in the image. To omit the cell from the downloaded image, clear the check box.

To assign a rollover to the cell, click the Rollover Creator button.

 Creating Image Rollovers

Applying a Format and Optimization Setting

Use the Format panel to save and optimize the cell in the following way:

1	Make the slice active by clicking inside it with the Arrow or Eraser tool.

2	Click the drop-down box and select a file format in which to save the slice. Your choices are GIF, JPEG, and PNG.

3	To optimize the cell file, click the Optimize Cell button. The appropriate Optimize dialog box for the selected format opens. Optimizing an image reduces its file size so that it loads more quickly.

4	To save all cells in the same format with the same optimization settings, select the “Apply optimization to whole image” check box.

Saving and Loading the Settings

When you save the settings, you save the cell arrangement and the information from the Cell Properties, Rollovers, and Format panels. You can then load them into the same or a different image.

To save the slice settings:

1	Click the Save Settings button. The Save Slice Settings dialog box opens.

2	Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the settings file. The file is saved in the JSD format.

3	Type a name for the file and click Save.

To load the slice settings:

1	Click the Load Settings button. The Load Slice Settings dialog box opens.

2	Select the JSD file you want to load and click Open.

If you are loading a grid to a different image, Paint Shop Pro automatically adjusts the grid size if the dimensions of the image are not the same.

Previewing the Image in a Web Browser

You can preview your cells and rollovers in a Web browser at any time by clicking the Proof button [image]. The Web browser opens and displays your image. You must have at least one Web browser installed on your computer to preview the image.

Saving the Slice Files and Generating the HTML Code

When the Image Slicer generates the HTML code for the positions of the cell slices, it also saves each slice to a file. This information is used for reassembling the image on a Web page.

To save the HTML file and files of individual slices:

1	Click the Save or Save As button the first time you save the settings for the image. The HTML Save As dialog box opens. If you continue editing the image, click Save to update the changes to the original file.

2	Choose a folder and title for the HTML file.

3	Click the Save button.

4	If you have previously selected the “Prompt for image folder on Save or Save As” check box in the Slicer Preferences dialog box, the Image Slice Save As dialog box opens. You can choose to save the individual slice files in a new folder and to rename them. The name of each file automatically includes its row and column number.

Click the Save to Clipboard button to open the HTML Destination Browse box. Use this dialog box to navigate to the folder where you want to save the HTML code.

Related Topics

 Setting the Slicer Dialog Box Preferences

 Using the GIF Optimizer Dialog Box

 Using the JPEG Optimizer Dialog Box

 Using the PNG Optimizer Dialog Box


Slice Preferences Dialog Box

The Slice Preferences dialog box opens when you click the Preferences button of the Image Slicer dialog box. Select new colors for the grid and lines and for the border of the active cell, select the number of URL and Alt text entries for the drop-down boxes to display, and choose whether to be prompted for file location and name when you save the HTML code and slices.

Related Topic

 Using the Image Slicer Dialog Box


Image Mapping

Use the Image Mapper dialog box to link areas of your image to URL or internet addresses. These areas are called maps or hot spots. They can be circles, rectangles, or irregular shapes. When the user clicks a mapped area, the browser jumps to the assigned destination, usually a new Web page.

•	Note: The Image Mapper affects the active image. Select the image you want to map before opening the dialog box.

•	Note: If you purchased the CD-ROM version of Paint Shop Pro, be sure to check out our Image Mapping and Image Slicing tutorials and templates. These itmes can be found either by selecting the "Tutorials" option under "Web Templates" in the Paint Shop Pro 7 Autorun program or by opening the WEBTOOLS.HTM from the \Tutorial folder on the Paint Shop Pro 7 CD-ROM. The Autorun program is the screen you see when you insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

To open the Image Mapper dialog box, choose File > Export > Image Mapper.

 Using the Image Mapper Dialog Box


Image Mapper Dialog Box

Mapping part of an image creates an area in the image that is a link to a URL or internet address. This area is called a map or a hot spot. When the user clicks the area, the browser jumps to the assigned destination, usually a new Web page.

•	Note: The Image Mapper affects the active image. Before opening the dialog box, select the image you want to map.

The preview area of the dialog box displays the active image. Use the Zoom In [image], Zoom Out [image], and Navigation [image] buttons underneath it to change your view of the image. Use the Proof button [image] to view your image in your Web browser.

Using the Tools to Create and Edit Map Areas

The Tools panel contains the tools you use to create and edit the image map areas. To activate a tool, click its button. The button of the active tool appears pressed in. As you create and edit map areas, you may want to magnify the image. When the image is too large to fit within the preview box, drag it with the Pan tool [image] to bring other parts of it into view.

To create a map area:

1	Click the Polygon tool [image], Rectangle tool [image], or Circle tool [image] to activate it.

2	To create a rectangle, square, or circle, click the image in the preview box (not the original image) and drag the cursor until the area is enclosed.

•	The Rectangle tool starts the square or rectangle at one of the corners.

•	The Circle tool begins at the center of the circle.

3	To create a polygon, click the image in the preview box to set the starting point. The Polygon encloses an area using straight line segments.

4	Move the cursor to where you want the line to change directions, and click the image.

5	Continue moving the cursor and clicking the image to change the direction of the line.

6	To complete the polygon, return to and click the starting point or right-click the image. When you right-click the image, Paint Shop Pro creates a line back to the starting point.

To change the shape of a map area, use the Arrow tool [image] or Mover tool [image].

•	Click and drag the upper left or lower right corner of a rectangle.

•	Click and drag a circle by the dot at its upper left or lower right.

•	Click and drag any of the point along a polygon.

To move a map area within the image, use the Mover tool to click inside the area and drag the shape.

Remove a map area by clicking it with the Delete tool [image]. To delete all the map areas and return the image to its original state, click the Clear button.

Assigning Map Area Properties

After you have created the map areas, use the drop-down boxes in the Object Properties panel to assign URLs, alternate text, and targets to them.

To assign object properties:

1	Make a map area active by clicking inside it with the Arrow or Eraser tool. The positions of its boundaries are displayed in the lower portion of the Object Properties panel.

2	In the URL drop-down box, type the address of the Web page to which you want to link the area. Click the box to display and select addresses already used in the image.

3	In the Alt text box, type alternate text that the browser can display image doesn’t load or if the user has images disabled in the Web browser. This text also appears as a ToolTip in some versions of Internet Explorer.

4	In the Target box, select the target frame in which the linked page opens. There are four choices:

•	_blank loads the linked page in a new browser window.

•	_parent loads the linked page in the parent window or frameset of the link. If the link is not in a nested frame, the page loads in to the full browser window.

•	_self loads the linked page in the same window or frame as the link.

•	_top loads the linked page in the full browser window and removes all frames.

To assign a rollover to the map area, click the Rollover Creator button.

 Creating Image Rollovers

Choosing Format and Optimization Settings

Use the Format panel to save and optimize the image in the following way:

1	Click the drop-down box and select a file format in which to save the image. Your choices are GIF, JPEG, and PNG.

2	To optimize the map file, click the Optimize Image button. The appropriate Optimize dialog box for the selected format opens. Optimizing an image reduces its file size so that it loads more quickly.

Saving and Loading the Settings

When you save the settings, you save the map area arrangement and the information from the Object Properties, Rollovers, and Format panels. You can then load them into the same or a different image.

To save the slice settings:

1	Click the Save Settings button. The Save Map Settings dialog box opens.

2	Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the settings file. The file is saved in the JMD format.

3	Type a name for the file and click Save.

To load the map settings:

1	Click the Load Settings button. The Load Map Settings dialog box opens.

2	Select the JMD file you want to load and click Open.

Previewing the Image in a Web Browser

You can preview your map areas and rollovers in a Web browser at any time by clicking the Proof button [image]. The Web browser opens and displays your image. You must have at least one Web browser installed on your computer to preview the image.

Saving the Map Files and Generating the HTML Code

When the Image Mapper generates the HTML code for the positions of the map areas, it also saves the image to the format you selected in the Format panel. This information is used for reassembling the image and map areas on a Web page.

To save the HTML file and image:

1	Click the Save button to open the HTML Save As dialog box. If you continue editing the image, click Save to update the changes to the original file.

2	Navigate to the folder in which you wan to save the HTML code.

3	Type a name for the HTML file. Paint Shop Pro automatically add the HTM extension when it saves the file.

4	Click Save to save the file and open the Image Map Save As dialog box.

5	Type a name for the image.

6	Click Save to save the image and close the dialog box.

Click the Save to Clipboard button to open the HTML Destination Browse box. Use this dialog box to navigate to the folder where you want to save the HTML code.

Related Topics

 Setting Mapper Dialog Box Preferences

 Using the GIF Optimizer Dialog Box

 Using the JPEG Optimizer Dialog Box

 Using the PNG Optimizer Dialog Box


Map Preferences Dialog Box

The Map Preferences dialog box opens when you click the Preferences button of the Image Mapper dialog box. Use it to select new colors for the grid and lines and for the border of the active cell and to control how many entries the URL and Alt text drop-down boxes display.

Related Topic

 Using the Image Mapper Dialog Box


Image Rollover Creation

A rollover is an image or section of an image that changes appearance when the user activates it. It can also be linked to a URL. Web designers frequently create rollovers for the buttons of a navigation bar. When a user clicks a button, the browser displays the linked Web page (or file), and the rollover area displays a different button.

You can assign a rollover to an image slice (cell) or hot spot (map area) by choosing a file for the slice or area to display when the user performs a specific mouse action. Use the Rollover Creator dialog box to choose the mouse action and the rollover.

To open the Rollover Creator dialog box, click the Rollover Creator button in either the Image Slicer or Image Mapper dialog box.

 Using the Rollover Creator Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Using the Image Mapper Dialog Box

 Using the Image Slicer Dialog Box


Rollover Creator Dialog Box

You can assign rollovers to individual image slices (cells) and map areas using the Rollover Creator dialog box.

To select the file for the active rollover area and the mouse action for activating it:

1	Make a cell or area active by clicking it with the Arrow tool. or Eraser tool. For a map area, use the Arrow or Mover tool.

2	Click the Rollover Creator button in the Rollovers panel. The Rollover Creator dialog box opens.

3	Select the check box of the action you want used to activate the rollover.

4	Click the Open icon to the far right of the check box. The Select Rollover dialog box opens.

5	Navigate to and select the graphics file you want to use.

6	Click Open. The field to the right of the check box displays the file path of the selected image.

7	For each action you want associated with a rollover, select the check box and choose a rollover file.

8	Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Image Mapper or Slicer dialog box.

Related Topics

 Using the Image Mapper Dialog Box

 Using the Image Slicer Dialog Box


Preview in Web Browser

If you have a Web browser installed on your computer, choose this command to see how your JPEG, BMP, JPEG, PNG, and GIF images will look when viewed in it.

To view your image, you must have at least one browser selected in the Web Browsers tab of the File Locations dialog box.

 Using the Preview in Web Browser Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Using the File Locations Dialog Box


Preview in Web Browser Dialog Box

If you have a Web browser installed on your computer, you can use the Preview in Web Browser dialog box to see how your JPEG, BMP, PNG, and GIF images will look on the Web. To open the dialog box, choose View > Preview in Web Browser or click the optional toolbar button.

Use this dialog box as follows:

1	The "Formats" box lists the different image formats that your web browser uses to display your image. Select the file format/s in which you want your web browser to display your current image. Any images whose original file format differs from the one/s you choose will be converted to match your file format selection.

2	Click the "Edit Web Browser" button to locate the browser for Paint Shop Pro to use to display your image. After the Browse for Web Viewer dialog box appears, use the contents box to navigate to and select your web browser .EXE file. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Preview in Web Browser dialog box.

3	Click to highlight the browser in which you want to preview your image. You must select at least one browser.

4	Use the Width and Height numeric edit controls in the "Size" panel to select a new size for the image. To use the original dimensions, select the Default check box.

5	Click the "Background" color box and select the HTML page background color from the Color dialog box.

6	Click the "Preview" button. If you have chosen the Bitmap option from the Formats box (Step 1), Paint Shop Pro launches the Web Browser application and displays the image in it. If you have chosen the GIF, JPEG, or PNG format, the GIF, JPEG, or PNG Optimizer dialog box opens. Select your choices for optimizing the image, and then click OK to see your image in the browser.

Related Topics

 Using the GIF Optimizer Dialog Box

 Using the JPEG Optimizer Dialog Box

 Using the PNG Optimizer Dialog Box

 Customizing the Toolbar


System Requirements

Minimum System Requirements

Pentium® processor or equivalent

Windows® 95/98/NT4/2000

32 MB of RAM

CD-ROM drive

75 MB of disk space

256-color display adapter at 800x600 resolution

Recommended System Configuration

300 MHz or better processor

64 MB of RAM

32-bit color display adapter at 1024x768 resolution


Using the Proof and Autoproof Buttons_POP
Using the Proof and Autoproof Buttons

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to see how the new settings affect the original image before you apply them. When you click the Autoproof button [image], the image updates each time you change a setting. If the image is large, Paint Shop Pro operates more slowly when this feature is active.

You may prefer to wait until you have changed one or all the settings before viewing them in the original image. In this case, click the Proof button [image] for a one-time update to the image.


Autosave Setting Dialog Box_pop
Autosave Settings Dialog Box


Snap Pixel Influence Dialog Box_POP
Snap Pixel Influence Dialog Box


Preview in WWW Browser Dialog Box_POP
Preview in Web Browser Dialog Box


Open Workspace DB_POP
Open Workspace Dialog Box


Save Workspace DB_POP
Save Workspace Dialog Box


Delete Workspace DB_POP
Delete Workspace Dialog Box


Guide Properties Dialog Box_POP
Guide Properties Dialog Box


Guide Handle on Ruler


Grid Properties Dialog Box_POP
Grid and Guide Properties Dialog Box


Frame Placement_POP
Frame Placement


Frame Selection Page_POP
Frame Selection Page


Frame Placement Page_POP
Frame Placement Page


Channels Split into Images


Pinch Dialog Box_POP
Pinch Dialog Box


Punch Dialog Box_POP
Punch Dialog Box


Horizontal Perspective Dialog Box_POP
Horizontal Perspective Dialog Box


Vertical Perspective Dialog Box_POP
Vertical Perspective Dialog Box


Pentagon Effect_POP
Pentagon Effect


Circle Effect_POP
Circle Effect


Horizontal Cylinder Dialog Box_POP
Horizontal Cylinder Dialog Box


Vertical Cylinder Dialog Box_POP
Vertical Cylinder Dialog Box


Grid Size Dialog Box_POP
Grid Size Dialog Box


Image Slicer Dialog Box_POP
Image Slicer Dialog Box


HTML Save As Dialog Box_POP
HTML Save As Dialog Box


Image Slice Save As Dialog Box_POP
Image Slice Save As Dialog Box


Save Slice Settings Dialog Box_POP
Save Slice Settings Dialog Box


Image Previewed in Web Browser_POP
Image Previewed in Web Browser


Image Mapper Dialog Box_POP
Image Mapper Dialog Box


Image Slicer Tools Panel_POP
Image Slicer Tools Panel


Slice Preferences_POP
Slice Preferences Dialog Box


Map Pref Dialog Box_POP
Map Preferences Dialog Box


Save Map Set DB_POP
Save Map Settings Dialog Box


Rollover Creator db_POP
Rollover Creator Dialog Box


Layers in an Image


Creating a Gradient or Textured Mask

To add texture or a gradient to a mask:

1	Create a mask using any method.

2	If the mask is not visible, choose Masks > View Mask.

3	Choose Masks > Edit.

4	Select the Flood Fill tool.

5	Set a Styles box on the Color palette to the gradient or pattern of your choice.

6	Set a Textures box on the Color palette to the texture of your choice.

7	Left-click to apply the foreground/stroke style and texture; right-click to apply the background/fill style and texture.

8	To apply the mask permanently, choose Masks > Delete. When prompted, choose to merge it into the current layer.

Related Topics

 Using the Color Palette

 Creating a Mask from an Image

 Creating a Mask from a Selection

 Creating a Mask from the Entire Layer or Image

 Creating a Mask from a Channel


Image Mapper Tools Panel_POP
Image Mapper Tools Panel


Saving Mapper and Slicer Settings and HTML Code
Save Map Settings, Save Slice Settings, and HTML Save As Dialog Boxes

The Save Map Settings or Save Slice Settings dialog box opens when you click the Save Settings button in the Image Mapper or Image Slicer dialog box. The HTML Save As dialog box opens the first time you click the Save button and whenever you click the Save As button in either dialog box.

When you save the Slice or Map settings, you save the cell or map area arrangement and the information from the Cell or Object Properties, Rollovers, and Format panels. You can then load them into the same or a different image. If you are loading an Image Slicer grid to a different image, Paint Shop Pro automatically adjusts the grid size if the dimensions of the image are not the same.

Click the Save or Save As button and open the HTML Save As dialog box when you want to save the image and its map or slice areas.

1	Navigate to and open the folder in which you want to save to .htm code.

2	Type a name for the file and click Save. The image is saved in a .htm file, the HTML Save As dialog box closes, and the Image Slice Save As or Image Map Save As dialog box opens.

3	Type a name for the files and click Save.

•	For the Image Slicer, PSP generates a file for each slice of the image. The name is followed by the location of the slice in the grid.

•	For the Image Mapper, PSP generates one file containing the image map information.

Related Topics

 Using the Image Slicer Dialog Box

 Using the Image Mapper Dialog Box


Load Slice Settings Dialog Box
Load Slice and Map Settings Dialog Box

Saving and Loading the Settings

When you save the Slice or Map settings, you save the cell or map area arrangement and the information from the Cell or Object Properties, Rollovers, and Format panels.

You can then load them into the same or a different image.

To load the slice or map settings:

1	Click the Load Settings button. The Load Slice or Map Settings dialog box opens.

4	To load settings saved from the Image Slicer, navigate to and select the SLC. To load settings saved from the Image Mapper, navigate to and select the JMD.

5	Click Open.

In the Image Slicer dialog box, if you are loading a grid to a different image, Paint Shop Pro automatically adjusts the grid size if the dimensions of the image are not the same.

 Using the Image Slicer Dialog Box

 Using the Image Mapper Dialog Box


Load Map Settings Dialog Box

Saving and Loading the Settings

When you save the Map settings, you save the map area arrangement and the information from the Object Properties, Rollovers, and Format panels. You can then load them into the same or a different image.

To load the map settings:

1	Click the Load Settings button. The Load Map Settings dialog box opens.

2	Navigate to and select the JMD file you want to load.

3	Click Open.

 Using the Image Mapper Dialog Box


Slicer Grid Size Dialog Box
Grid Size Dialog Box

The Grid Size dialog box opens when you click the image with the Grid tool. Use it to set the number of rows and columns the grid you are creating will contain.

To create a grid within an existing cell, click inside that cell.


Select Rollover Dialog Box


Styled Lines Dialog Box

Use the Styled Lines dialog box to design and save your own line styles so that you can use them again at any time. After you save a line style, the Line Styles list on the Tool Options palette displays it. The style is used for lines and for the outline (stroke) of letters and shapes.

Opening the Dialog Box

To open the dialog box:

1	Activate the Drawing tool, the Preset Shapes tool, or the Text tool in either of the following ways:

•	Click its button on the Tool palette, or

•	Click the Tool Option palette Tool Selection button and choose the tool from the drop-down menu.

2	If necessary, make the Tool Options palette visible. To do this, click its toolbar icon or press <O> on your keyboard.

3	On the first tab of the Tool Options palette, click the Custom button.

To edit a Styled Line of a vector object, you can double-click the object using the Object Selection tool to open the Vector Properties dialog box. Click the Custom button to open the Styled Lines dialog box.

Using the Dialog Box

Use the dialog box to design one repeating section of your line. For example, if you want a line that has a repetition of dash, dash, dot, dot, you don’t need to design a long line repeating this many times. You only need to design one repetition of the dash, dash, dot, and dot.

1	Use the "Caps" panel to design how you want the beginning and end caps of the line segments to look. You can also give the inner sections (dashes) of a segmented line their own starting and ending cap designs. Set the following options:

•	First Cap: Click the down arrow and select the cap style for the beginning of the line. Click the Size button to display the Cap Size dialog box, where you set the Height and Width for the cap. To use the same value for the two dimensions, select the “Link axes” check box.

•	Last Cap: Click the down arrow and select the cap style for the end of the last segment in the line. Click the Size button, and in the Cap Size dialog box, adjust the cap size the same way you did for the First Cap.

•	Different Segment Caps: Select the “Different segment caps” check box to use separate end caps for all inner line segments (dashes). Clear the check box to apply the First and Last caps to the dashes.

2	If you selected the “Different segment caps” check box, use the Segment start panel to select the cap style for the beginning of each dash, and use the Segment end panel to select the cap style for the end of each dash.

3	In the “Style” panel, design the line segments (dashes) and the gaps between the dashes. Use the preview area below the panel as a visual aid in designing your line repetition. The name of the numeric edit control changes between Add Dash, Dash and Add Gap, Gap. Do the following to design one repetition for your styled line:

•	Click the Add button, and then set the size of the first dash using the Dash numeric edit control.

•	Click the Add button again, and then set the size of the first gap using the Gap numeric edit control.

•	Continue adding the dashes and gaps, clicking the Add button before each one.

Note: You can also design the dashes by moving the cursor over the edit area (below the buttons) and then clicking to place the dashes and gaps. Then use the triangle sliders to adjust the dashes and gaps. Use the bottom green sliders to adjust the dashes; use the top red sliders to adjust the gaps. To delete individual dashes and gaps in reverse order, one at a time, click the Delete button. To delete all the dashes and gaps, click the Clear button.

4	Use one of the following methods to save your line:

•	For a new line, click the Save As New button. When the Styled Line Name box opens, type a unique name for the line and click the OK button.

•	For an existing line you have edited, click the Save button.

After the dialog box closes, the Tool Options palette displays the line in the Line Style list.

Related Topics

 Adding Text

 About the Drawing Tool

 Using the Preset Shapes Tool


Cap Size Dialog Box

Use the Cap Size dialog box to configure the width and height of endcaps for styled lines. The endcaps determine the shape of the ends of lines and segments (dashes). Styled lines can be used with the Drawing, Preset Shapes, and Text tools. When adding text and shapes, the styles are used for the outlines of letters and shapes.

The Cap Size dialog box opens when you click any of the Size buttons in the Caps panel of the Styled Lines dialog box.

Use the Height and Width numeric edit controls to set the size of the endcaps. To use the same value for the two dimensions, select the “Link axes” check box.

Click OK to apply the settings and return to the Styled Lines dialog box.

 Using the Styled Lines Dialog Box


Text Tool Options Palette Tab 1

Use the first tab of the Tool Options palette to set the width and style of the outline (stroke) of the text.

Width Setting

Use the Width numeric edit control to set the line width to between 1 and 255 pixels.

Line Style

Select a preset style from the Line Style drop-down list or click the Custom button and create your own line style.

 Using the Styled Lines Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Text Tool Options Palette Tab 2

 Using the Text Entry Dialog Box


Text Tool Options Palette Tab 2

The options on the second tab control the shapes of corners of the letters.

Join Options

Click the drop-down arrow and select a Join style to set the shape of the corners. If you select the Miter Join option, enter a value in the Miter Limit box.

Choose from three Join styles:

•	Miter Join [image], which produces mitered (pointed) corners when the width of the corner is within the Miter Limit value and beveled corners when it exceeds it,

•	Round Join [image], which produces round corners, and

•	Bevel Join [image], which produces flattened corners.

Miter Limit Setting

The Miter Limit value determines whether a Miter join is pointed or flat. This option is not available for other types of joins. Use the numeric edit control to set a value from 1 to 30.

Miter length is the length of the intersecting edge of two line segments, or the depth of the intersection from the inside to outside corner. The Miter limit is the maximum allowed ratio of miter length to the width of the intersecting lines. If a Miter join exceeds the limit, the corner is not pointed, but is cut off at the limit point.

Related Topics

 Using the Text Entry Dialog Box

 Text Tool Options Palette Tab 1


Vector Object Selection Tool Options Palette Tab 1
Object Selector Tool Options Palette Tab 1

When the Object Selections tool is active, the first tab of the Tool Options palette displays three buttons.

•	Click the Node Edit Button to activate Node Edit mode. Note that this button is available only when a vector object  (but not vector text) is selected.

•	Click the Properties button to open the Vector Properties dialog box. Note that this button is available only when a vector object (but not vector text) is selected.

•	Click the Edit Text button to open the Text Entry dialog box. Note that this button is available only when vector text is selected.

 Vector Object Selector Tool Options Palette Tab 2

Related Topics

 Using the Vector Objects Selection Tool

 Selecting Vector Objects

 About Vector Node Editing

 Using the Vector Properties Dialog Box

 Using the Text Entry Dialog Box


Vector Object Selection Tool Options Palette Tab 2
Object Selector Tool Options Palette Tab 2

The second tab of the Tools Options palette displays buttons for many of the commands found in the Objects menu. You can use the buttons to align, distribute, resize, group, and ungroup vector objects.

Click an item in the list to read about the commands:

 Aligning Objects

 Distributing Objects

 Making Objects the Same Size

 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

Related Topics

 Vector Object Selector Tool Options Palette Tab 1

 Using the Vector Objects Selection Tool


Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

You can combine vector objects into a group, which you can then manipulate, save, and load. To create a group, you must first select two or more vector objects. While the objects can be from different layers, they are moved to the same layer when they are combined into a group.

When a group is created, the objects are placed in the group in the order in which they were selected. The group is inserted at the point of the first selected object. When you select objects using the Object Selector tool, hold the <Shift> key while clicking them. If you select objects by dragging the cursor to enclose them, the order of the objects on the layer determines their selection order.

One group can contain other groups and an object can belong to more than one group. Groups can be nested up to 100 levels. On the Layer palette, each group is identified, and all objects appear indented below the name of the group.

Grouping and Ungrouping Vector Objects

When two or more vector objects are selected, apply the Group or Ungroup command in any of the following ways:

•	Choose Objects > Group or Objects > Ungroup,

•	Right-click the objects and choose Group or Ungroup from the context menu, or

•	Click the Group or Ungroup button on the Tool Options palette.

Removing an Object from a Group

To remove a single object from its group, use the Layer palette. On the Layer palette, drag the object’s button from the group. You can move it into another group or place it on another vector layer.

Related Topic

 Selecting Vector Objects


Alignment of Objects

You can align one or more vector objects to the edges or center of a specific vector object. This object used for determining alignment is called the “target” object, or target.

You can align vector objects to the top, bottom, right, or left edge of the “target” object. You can also align them to the horizontal or vertical center of the target object. The objects move until their edges or centers are aligned to the corresponding edge or center of the target. You can use these commands any time you have selected two or more vector objects.

Objects move either vertically or horizontally. The Align Top, Bottom, and Vertical Center commands move them along the Y axis; the Align Left, Right, and Horizontal Center commands move them along the X axis.

The first object you select becomes the “target object.” The other objects move until their edges or centers are aligned to the corresponding edge or center of the target. For example, when you choose Top Align, Paint Shop Pro positions the vector objects so that the top edge of each is lined up with the top edge of the target object

•	Note: When you align text on a path, the text is aligned with the target object, and the path is aligned relative to the text.

In the following image, click a button to see how an Object Alignment command moves the objects.

To align vector objects:

1	Use the Object Selection tool [image] to select the target object.

2	Press and hold the <Shift> key while clicking the objects you want to align with the target.

3	From the Objects menu, choose Align and then the appropriate command. You can also choose an alignment by click the appropriate alignment button on the second tab of the Tool Options palette.

4	The objects move into alignment with the target.

Choose Undo to return the object to their original positions.

Related Topic

 Selecting Vector Objects


Distribution of Objects

Choose these commands to distribute one or more vector objects evenly between two other vector objects. These commands are available any time you have selected three or more vector objects.

You can distribute the objects in one of two ways:

•	Horizontally, where the objects are spaced evenly from left to right, and

•	Vertically, where the objects are spaced evenly from top to bottom.

Distributing Objects Horizontally

When you distribute vector objects horizontally, the objects closest to the left and right boundaries of the group become the two target objects. The distance between these target objects determines the distribution, or spacing, of the objects in between them.

There are three types of horizontal distribution:

•	Left distribution, where objects are evenly spaced between the left edges of the left and right targets.

•	Center distribution, where objects are evenly spaced between the centers of the left and right targets.

•	Right distribution, where objects are evenly spaced between the right edges of the left and right targets.

Choose Undo to return the object to their original positions.

Distributing Objects Vertically

When you distribute vector objects vertically, the objects closest to the top and bottom of the group boundaries become the target objects. The distance between the two target objects determines the distribution of the objects in between.

There are three types of vertical distribution:

•	Top distribution, where objects are evenly spaced between the top edges of the top and bottom targets.

•	Center distribution, where objects are evenly spaced between the centers of the top and bottom targets.

•	Bottom distribution, where objects are evenly spaced between the bottom edges of the top and bottom targets.

Choose Undo to return the object to their original positions.

Spacing Objects Evenly

You can also space objects the same distance apart horizontally or vertically by choosing Objects > Distribute > Space Evenly Horz. or Vert.

Related Topic

 Selecting Vector Objects


Making Objects the Same Size

Click a Make Same Size button (on the Tool Options palette) or choose a command to make one or more vector objects the same width, height, or width and height as a selected object. Paint Shop Pro takes the width, height, or both of the first object you selected and applies it to the other object or objects. You can choose these commands any time two or more vector objects are selected.

Related Topic

 Selecting Vector Objects


Convert to Raster Layer Command

Choose this command to convert a vector layer into a Raster layer.


Create Raster Selection

This command makes a raster copy of the vector selection. It creates a marquee from the outlines of the vector selection.

To create a raster selection, right-click the selection and choose Create Raster Selection. You can also convert a vector selection into a raster selection by choosing Selections > From Vector Object.


Export Shape Command

Use the Export Shape command to save vector objects so that you can re-use them. The objects that you have saved appear in the Tool Options palette when the Preset Shapes tool is active. When you export a vector shape (object), Paint Shop Pro saves it to a specific folder. By default, this is the Shapes folder in the Paint Shop Pro directory. You can select a different folder using the Shapes tab page of the File Locations dialog box.

When a layer contains more than one shape, you can save one, some, or all the shapes. Save a specific shape by selecting it using the Object Selector tool and then choosing the command. Save some of the shapes by pressing the <Shift> key while selecting the shapes. Save all the shapes by choosing the command when no shape is selected.

 Using the Export Shape Library Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Using the File Locations Dialog Box

 Selecting Vector Objects


Export Shape Library Dialog Box

You can save vector shapes, lines, and text and then re-use them. The objects that you have saved appear in the Tool Options palette when the Preset Shapes tool is active.

When a layer contains more than one object, you can save one, some, or all them. Save a specific object by selecting it using the Object Selector tool and then choosing the command. Save more than one of the objects by pressing the <Shift> key while selecting them. Save all the objects by choosing the command when no object is selected.

To save a vector object:

1	Choose File > Export > Shape. The Export Shape dialog box opens.

2	In the dialog box, type the name for the object you are saving.

3	Click OK to close the dialog box and save the shape.

Note that Paint Shop Pro saves the objects to the folder you have previously selected using the Shapes tab of the File Locations dialog box. By default, this is the Shapes folder in the Paint Shop Pro directory.

Related Topics

 Using the File Locations Dialog Box

 Selecting Vector Objects


MetaFile Limitations
MetaFile Limitations with Paint Shop Pro

Standard Windows MetaFiles (WMF)

The Windows Metafile (WMF) format was designed by Microsoft in the 1980’s. It is completely supported by Windows 95/98/Me and Windows NT 4/2000.

There are no WMF records for storing Paint Shop Pro options such as anti-aliasing or named vector objects. WMF files also cannot handle transparent bitmaps or Bezier curves. If you save a Paint Shop Pro generated vector image out as WMF, the names of the objects will be lost. When read in again, they will be named for the basic shape they are (Polygon, Polyline, PolyPolygon, Text, etc.).

Most objects will be converted from one form to another equivalent form. Rectangles will be saved as Polygons. This is done because all of the shapes are reduced internally to Paint Shop Pro as Bezier curves that are either lines or filled or both.

As WMF does not support Bezier curves, and all lines and filled shapes are defined internally to Paint Shop Pro as Bezier vector shapes, Paint Shop Pro Bezier curves will be flattened to line segments and then output as Polygons or Polylines. Ellipses, Arcs, Chords, and Pies will also get flattened before saving as Polygons or Polylines in WMF files. Such flattened curves may have a significant increase in the number of nodes compared to the original Bezier curve.

WMF records use signed integer values from –32768 to +32767. Paint Shop Pro curves, lines, and shapes are described using floating point numbers. Thus when a Paint Shop Pro image is written out in WMF format, all of the floating point values are stored as integers. This tends to produce lines and polygons with a slightly jagged appearance, but it is consistent with all WMF files.

Paint Shop Pro vector functions do Winding Polygon Fills. Winding Polygon Fills differ from the Windows default of Alternate Polygon Fills in that Alternate Fills will change the fill brush every time the lines cross other lines in the Polygon. Winding fills do not change the fill brush. Thus some Polygon fills that have holes in raster images will be filled as a vector image. All Alternate Polygon fills are treated as Winding Polygon fills by the vector renderer, and all WMF files written by Paint Shop Pro will have the Polygon Fill set to Winding.

The Paint Shop Pro vector renderer also does not support the cross-hatch Fills or the Bitmap Fills that Windows supports. We are working on methods to support these functions. The vector renderer will not support area clipping. Thus, any metafiles that have clipped drawing regions will not be drawn correctly. Embedded bitmaps will be clipped to any active clipping regions.

All raster layers will be merged into one single layer before saving in a WMF file, and the raster layers will be saved before the vector layers. If you want to save only the vector layers of an image, copy the image, and then delete the raster layers before saving as a WMF file.

When reading in a metafile, any Device Independent Bitmap (DIB) in the metafile will be treated as its own layer. Any clipping region that is active will be in effect, and the DIB will have only the valid clipping region visible. Device Dependent Bitmaps are also ignored in Paint Shop Pro 7.

The speed of reading and rendering a metafile with vector objects is dependent upon how many vector objects there are. It is not unusual for some metafiles to have over 10,000 objects. The vector renderer presently is a bit slow when processing that many shapes because each shape takes up a significant amount of memory. This is especially true when the shape is complex or has many nodes. Processing slows down even further when the memory required exceeds available RAM because the computer must use virtual memory.

The greatest number of vector shapes have appeared in metafiles converted from DXF and CDR formats.

Some shapes created in Paint Shop Pro will appear doubled when output as a WMF file. This is due to the limitations that Windows has with Polylines; only closed Polygons may be filled. An open but filled and stroked Bezier curve must be converted to a filled/no pen Polygon and Polyline in a WMF file. If the shape is made from PolyPolyBezier curves, then separate Polylines will be created as needed because WMF files have no PolyPolyline records.

Enhanced Windows MetaFiles (EMF)

The Enhanced Windows Metafile (EMF) format was designed by Microsoft in the 1990’s. It is partially supported by Windows 95/98/Me and completely supported by Windows NT 4/2000.

There are no EMF records for storing Paint Shop Pro 7 options such as anti-aliasing or named vector objects. If you save a Paint Shop Pro generated vector image out as EMF, the names of the objects are lost. When read in again, they will be named for the basic shape they are (Polygon, Polyline, PolyPolygon, Text, etc.).

Most objects will be converted from one form to another equivalent form. Rectangles will be saved as Polygons. This is done because all of the shapes are reduced internally to Paint Shop Pro as Bezier curves that are either lines or filled or both.

As EMF does support Bezier curves and all lines and filled shapes are defined internally to Paint Shop Pro as Bezier vector shapes, Paint Shop Pro Bezier curves that are filled will be flattened to line segments and then output as Polygons with Bezier outlines. Ellipses, Arcs, Chords, and Pies will also get flattened before being saved as filled Polygons in EMF files. Such flattened curves may have a significant increase in the number of nodes compared to the original Bezier curve. If only outlined, those shapes will be left unflattened and output as Bezier curves.

EMF records use signed long integer values from –2147483648 to +2147483647. Paint Shop Pro curves, lines, and shapes are described using floating point numbers. Thus, when a Paint Shop Pro image is written out in EMF format, all the floating point values are stored as long integers. This tends to produce lines and polygons with a slightly jagged appearance, but it is consistent with all EMF files.

Bezier lines will also be stored with long integer values, but they will be drawn internally in Paint Shop Pro as smooth curves and lines with floating point values.

Paint Shop Pro vector functions support Winding Polygon Fills. Winding Polygon Fills differ from the Windows default of Alternate Polygon Fills in that Alternate Fills will change the fill brush every time the lines cross other lines in the Polygon. Winding fills do not change the fill brush. Thus, some Polygon fills that have holes in raster images will be filled as a vector image. All Alternate Polygon fills are treated as Winding Polygon fills by the vector renderer, and all EMF files written by Paint Shop Pro will have the Polygon Fill set to Winding.

EMF files will handle transparent bitmaps and Bezier curves, but they will not support filled Bezier curves except as part of a filled path.

Paint Shop Pro vectors converted from/to EMF metafiles presently do not include support for transparent bitmaps, alpha channel blending, and clipping of any vector shapes. However, Paint Shop Pro vectors converted from EMF metafiles do include support for Paths and clipping of embedded bitmaps.

The Paint Shop Pro vector renderer also does not support the cross-hatch Fills or Bitmap Fills that Windows supports. We are working on methods to permit these functions.

The Paint Shop Pro vector renderer does not support area clipping. Thus, any metafiles that have clipped drawing regions will not be drawn correctly. Embedded bitmaps will be clipped to any active clipped regions.

All raster layers will be merged into one single layer before being saved in an EMF file. Any raster layer will be saved before the vector layers. If you want to save only the vector layers of an image, copy the image and delete the raster layers before saving as a EMF file.

When reading in a metafile, any Device Independent Bitmap (DIB) in the metafile will be treated as its own layer. . Any clipping region that is active will be in effect, and the DIB will have only the valid clipping region visible.

The speed of reading and rendering a metafile with vector objects is dependent upon how many vector objects there are. It is not unusual for some metafiles to have over 10,000 objects. The vector renderer presently is a bit slow when processing that many shapes. Each shape takes up a significant amount of memory. Processing slows down even further when the memory required exceeds available RAM because the computer uses virtual memory.

The greatest number of vector shapes have appeared in metafiles converted from DXF and CDR formats.

Some shapes created in PSP will appear doubled when output as an EMF file. This is due to the limitations that Windows has with Polylines; only closed Polygons may be filled. An open but filled and stroked Bezier curve must be converted to a filled/no pen Polygon and a Bezier curve in an EMF file.

If the shape is made from PolyPolyBezier curves, then separate PolyBezier curves will be created as needed because EMF files have no PolyPolyBezier records.

Related Topics

 WMF / Import Preferences

 Opening Windows MetaFiles and Windows Enhanced MetaFiles

 EMF and WMF Format Save Options


Opening Windows MetaFiles

WMF (Windows Metafile) and EMF (Enhanced Windows Metafile) are two native metafile formats for the Windows operating systems. They provide support for both bitmaps and vectors. Use both the WMF and EMF formats to create Clip Art and other scalable imagery.

About WMF Format

WMF records are a subset of the drawing functions available in MS Windows. WMFs come in two flavors-Standard, and Aldus Placeable. In the original specifications for Metafiles, the file header did not include such information as image size and origin. This meant they were not very device-independent.

The metafile was made more device-independent by adding the Placeable Metafile header, which inserted the missing information at the beginning of a metafile. It is the more commonly-used version of WMF files, and it is the WMF output format of Paint Shop Pro. WMF does not support Transparency, Bezier Curves, Alpha channels, or layers.

About EMF Format

EMF records are also a subset of the drawing functions available in MS Windows. Unlike WMF, EMF does support Transparency, Bezier Curves, Clipping, Paths, and Alpha channels. It does not support layers.

EMF and WMF Format Support

Paint Shop Pro 7 does not support Clipping in WMF files when input as vectors. All WMF functions are supported when files are read in as raster only.

Paint Shop Pro 7 does not support clipping of vector shapes in EMF files when input as vectors. All EMF functions are supported when files are read in as raster.

There are two options for opening a file in the EMF or WMF format:

•	Reading in as raster data only (flattened image)

•	Reading in as raster and vector data

Raster data only turns the EMF or WMF to a user-sized bitmap and stores that bitmap in a raster layer.

Raster and vector data creates a raster layer if a bitmap is stored in the metafile, and it stores the raster image in that layer. All vector shapes are placed into a vector layer. Both raster and vector layers are sized according to the user preferences.

Opening a WMF or EMF File

Before you open a WMF or EMF file, set the preferences in the following way:

1	Choose File > Preferences > File Format Preferences.

2	Click the WMF/Import tab to bring it to the front:

3	Select or clear the check box for Import vector data:

•	When the check box is selected, the metafile records are processed for vector shapes.

•	When the check box is not selected, the metafile records are processed into a raster image.

To open an EMF or WMF file:

1	Choose File > Open.

2	Type the filename of the EMF or WMF file or open the Browser to find the file. You may have to change the type of file to Windows Enhanced Meta File (*.emf) or Windows Meta File (*.wmf).

Related Topics

 WMF / Import Preferences

 MetaFile Limitations with Paint Shop Pro


EMF and WMF Format Save Options

WMF (Windows Metafile) and EMF (Windows Enhanced Metafile) are two native metafile formats for the Windows operating systems. They provide support for both bitmaps and vectors. Use both the WMF and EMF formats to create Clip Art, and other scalable imagery.

Paint Shop Pro presently does not support Transparency, Clipping, Paths, and Alpha channels when output as vectors. Bezier curves are supported in all modes.

About WMF Format

WMF records are a subset of the drawing functions available in MS Windows. WMFs come in two flavors-Standard, and Aldus Placeable. In the original specifications for Metafiles, the file header did not include such information as image size and origin. This meant they were not very device-independent. The metafile was made more device-independent by adding the Placeable Metafile header, which inserted the missing information at the beginning of a metafile. It is the more commonly-used version of WMF files, and it is the WMF output format of Paint Shop Pro.

WMF does not support Transparency, Bezier Curves, Alpha channels, or layers.

About EMF Format

EMF records are also a subset of the drawing functions available in MS Windows. Unlike WMF, EMF does support Transparency, Bezier Curves, Clipping, Paths, and Alpha channels. It does not support layers.

To save your image as a WMF file:

1	Choose File > Save As.

2	Type a filename for the image in the text box.

3	Choose Windows Enhanced Meta File (*.emf) or Windows Meta File (*.wmf).

4	Click Options to choose a mode.

5	Choose a mode:

•	Save bitmap only (flattened image)

•	Save bitmap and vector

Save bitmap only merges all the layers into a single raster layer and outputs a single bitmap into the WMF or EMF file.

Save bitmap and vector merges all raster layers into a single layer, and then writes that bitmap to the WMF or EMF file. All vector layers are read for the shapes contained in those layers, and the vector records are written to the WMF or EMF after the bitmap.

Related Topic

 MetaFile Limitations with Paint Shop Pro


Viewing and Hiding Layer Groups

You can view and hide layers that you have combined into a group. The layers in a group all display the same number on their Group buttons [image] on the Group tab [image] of the Layer palette.

To hide a group of layers in an image, make a layer in the group current (active), and then either of the following:

•	Choose Layers > View > Hide Group, or

•	On the Layer palette, right-click a Layer button of a layer in the group, and choose View > Hide Group from the context menu.

To view a group of layers in an image, make a layer in the group current (active), and then either of the following:

•	Choose Layers > View > Show Group, or

•	On the Layer palette, right-click a Layer button of a layer in the group, and choose View > Show Group from the context menu.

Related Topic

 Grouping Layers


Top
Align Top


Bottom
Align Bottom


Left
Align Left


Right
Align Right


Horizontal center
Align Horizontal center


Vertical center
Align Vertical center


Export Vector Shape DB_POP
Export Shape Dialog Box


Path Closed and Not Closed_POP
Path Closed and Not Closed


Object Selection Tab 2_POP
Object Selection Tab 2


Make Same Size Buttons_POP
Make Same Size Buttons


Make Same Size Commmands_POP
Make Same Size Commands


Styled Lines Dialog Box_POP
Styled Lines Dialog Box


Cap Size Dialog Box_POP
Cap Size Dialog Box


Caps Panel_POP
Caps Panel


Align Commands_POP
Align Commands


Preview of Text_POP
Preview of Text


Space Evenly Horizontally_POP
Space Evenly Horizontally


Distribute Evenly Vertically_POP
Space Evenly Vertically


Positive Text Leading Value_POP
Positive Text Leading Value


Negative Text Leading Value_POP
Negative Text Leading Value


Object Selector Tab 1_POP
Object Selector Tab 1


Text Tool Options Palette Tab 1_POP
Text Tool Options Palette Tab 1


Text Tool Options Palette Tab 2_POP
Text Tool Options Palette Tab 2


Dilate Command

Use the Dilate command to enhance the light areas of an image.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

The Dilate and Erode filters are variations of a standard 3 pixel x 3 pixel Medium Cut filter. The Medium Cut filter sets all pixels in the image to the median value of its 9 pixel (3 x 3) neighborhood. The Erode filter sets all pixels to the minimum value of the 9 pixel neighborhood; the Dilate filter sets all pixels to the maximum.

To apply the effect, choose Effects > Edge > Dilate, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

Related Topics

 Creating a Greyscale Image

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Erode Command

Use the Erode command to enhance the dark areas of an image.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

The Dilate and Erode filters are variation of a standard 3 pixel x 3 pixel Medium Cut filter. The Medium Cut filter sets all pixels in the image to the median value of its 9 pixel (3 x 3) neighborhood. The Erode filter sets all pixels to the minimum value of the 9 pixel neighborhood; the Dilate filter sets all pixels to the maximum.

To apply the effect, choose Effects > Edge > Erode, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

Related Topics

 Creating a Greyscale Image

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Aged Newspaper Effect

The Aged Newspaper effect applies a warm brown tone and blurs the image so that it looks like a newspaper whose pages have become yellow with age and whose ink has run.

For best results, convert your image into greyscale and then increase the color depth to 16 million colors before applying this effect.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images, but not to greyscale images (which are 8-bit). If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Aged Newspaper Dialog Box

To open the Aged Newspaper dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Aged Newspaper, choose the command using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Aged Newspaper Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Creating a Greyscale Image

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Using the Aged Newspaper Dialog Box

Use the Aged Newspaper dialog box to make your image look like a newspaper that has been left too long in the sun. You control the intensity of the aging effect. The effect applies a warm brown tone and blurs the image. It works best with images containing text.

For best results, convert your image into greyscale and then increase the color depth to 16 million colors before applying this effect.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images, but not to greyscale images (which are 8-bit). If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To use the dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Select the intensity of the effect by dragging the Amount to Age slider or typing a number in its box. You can age the image from 10% to 100%.

4	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

5	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Creating a Greyscale Image

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)


Hot Wax Coating Effect

The Hot Wax Coating effect creates the appearance of coating the image in a layer of hot wax. It uses the foreground/stroke color for the wax.

•	Note: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.
Note: Do not set the foreground/stroke color to black; the image becomes completely black.

To apply the effect, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Hot Wax Coating, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Selecting Foreground and Background Colors

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Sepia Effect

The Sepia effect makes your image appear similar to the photographs of the mid- to late 19th century by applying a warm brown tone. For the best results, convert your image to greyscale and then increase its color depth to 16 million colors (24-bit) before applying the effect. You can create a 1940s style colorized appearance by applying the effect directly to a 24-bit color image.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images, but not to greyscale images (which are 8-bit). If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Sepia Dialog Box

To open the Sepia dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Sepia, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Sepia Dialog box

Related Topics

 Creating a Greyscale Image

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Sepia Toning Dialog Box

You can use the Sepia effect to create two types of effects: that of the duotone sepia photographs from the mid- to late 19th century and that of the colored photographs from the 1940s. To create the first type of effect, convert your image to greyscale, increase its color depth to 16 million colors (24-bit), and then apply the Sepia effect. To create the second type, apply the effect directly to a 24-bit color image.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images, but not to greyscale images (which are 8-bit). If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To use the Sepia Toning dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Select the intensity of the effect by dragging the Amount to Age slider or typing a number in its box. You can age the image from 10% to 100%.

4	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

5	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Creating a Greyscale Image

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)


Emboss Effect

The Emboss effect converts the image into a bas-relief. It highlights the areas of contrast with black or white pixels and colors the low contrast areas a medium grey. Colors appear when there is a large difference in the contrast. You can also apply the Emboss effect using the Retouch tool.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To apply the effect, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Emboss, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Retouching an Image

 Customizing the Toolbar


Brush Strokes Effect

Use the Brush Strokes effect to apply an oil painting or watercolor appearance to your image.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Brush Strokes Dialog Box

To open the Brush Strokes dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Brush Strokes, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Brush Strokes Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Brush Strokes Dialog Box

Use the Brush Strokes effect to make your image look like an oil painting or watercolor. When you use this dialog box, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Brush Strokes Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Brush Strokes dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can now either apply this style by clicking OK or edit it by changing the settings.

4	In the Strokes panel, use the Length setting to control the length of brush strokes.

5	Set a Density value to determine the number of strokes in the image.

6	In the Brush panel, use the Bristles setting to control the number of bristles in your brush

7	Use the Width setting to control the width of the brush.

8	Use the Opacity setting to control the strength of the effect. As the Opacity increases, the image displays more of the effect and less of its original appearance.

9	Adjust the Softness value to increase or decrease the amount of blur in the original image.

10	In the Lighting panel, use the Angle setting to point to the direction of origin of the light and affect which edges appear light and shadowed. The value is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

11	Use the Color box to choose a color for the light shining on the edges of the forms. To change the light color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

12	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

13	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

14	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Colored Edges Effect

The Colored Edges effect produces a retouch-like look by enhancing and coloring the edges of an image.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Colored Edges Dialog Box

To open the Colored Edges dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Colored Edges, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Colored Edges Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Colored Edges Dialog Box

Use the Colored Edges effect to enhance and color the edges in your image.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Colored Edges Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Colored Edges dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Use the Luminance setting to adjust the overall brightness of the image.

4	Enter a Blur value to determine the sharpness of the original image. As you increase the value, the image becomes less sharp.

5	Use the Color box to choose a color for the edges. To change the edge color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

6	Use the Intensity setting to control the amount of effect applied. As you increase the value, more edges are colored and more color is applied to the edges.

7	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

8	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Colored Foil Effect

The Colored Foil effect adds a three dimensional look to the edges and applies several colors to an image.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Colored Foil Dialog Box

To open the Colored Foil dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Colored Foil, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Colored Foil Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Colored Foil Dialog Box

Use the Colored Foil effect to add a sculpted look to the edges and apply multiple colors to your image. When you use this dialog box, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Colored Foil Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Colored Foil dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can now apply this style by clicking OK or edit it by changing the settings.

4	Enter a Blur value to determine the sharpness of the original image. As you increase the value, the image becomes less sharp.

5	Enter a Detail value to control the amount of effect applied. As you increase the value, color is applied to more areas of contrast.

6	Use the Color box to choose a color for the light shining on the image. To change the light color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

7	Use the Angle setting to point to the direction of origin of the light and affect which edges appear light and shadowed. The value is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

8	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

9	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

10	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Contours Effect

The Contours effect reproduces the look of a topographical map by covering the image with contour lines.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Contours Dialog Box

To open the Contours dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Contours, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Contours Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Contours Dialog Box

Use the Contours effect to turn your image into a topographical map. When you use this dialog box, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Contours Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Contours dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can now either apply this style by clicking OK or edit it by changing the settings.

4	Use the Color box to choose a color for the contour lines. To change the color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

5	Use the Luminance setting to adjust the overall brightness of the image.

6	Enter a Blur value to determine the sharpness of the original image. As you increase the value, the image becomes less sharp.

7	Use the Detail setting to control where color is applied. As you increase the value, color is applied to more areas of contrast.

8	Use the Intensity setting to control the amount of color applied to each area. As you increase the value, you apply more color.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Enamel Effect

The Enamel effect applies the look of a shiny, hard surface to the image.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Enamel Dialog Box

To open the Enamel dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Enamel, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Enamel Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Enamel Dialog Box

Use the Enamel effect to create the effect of a shiny, molded coating on your image. When you use this dialog box, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Enamel Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Enamel dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can now either apply this style by clicking OK or edit it by changing the settings.

4	In the Relief panel, enter a Blur value to determine the sharpness of the original image. As you increase the value, the image becomes less sharp.

5	Use the Detail setting to control the scale of the relief. With low values, there are fewer levels of relief and the effect is softer and less defined.

6	Use the Density setting to control the number of areas of relief. Low values produce fewer larger areas and a softer look. Higher values add relief to smaller areas producing a denser effect.

7	In the Lighting panel, use the Angle setting to point to the direction of origin of the light and affect which edges appear light and shadowed. The value is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

8	Use the Color box to choose a color for the light shining on the edges of the forms. To change the light color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Fine Leather Effect

The Fine Leather effect makes the image appear embossed on fine-grained leather.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Fine Leather Dialog Box

To open the Fine Leather dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Fine Leather, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Fine Leather Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Fine Leather Dialog Box

Use the Fine Leather effect to make an image look as though you had created it on leather that has a fine grain. When you use this dialog box, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Fine Leather Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Fine Leather dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can now either apply this style by clicking OK or edit it by changing the settings.

4	Use the Color box to choose a color for the light shining on the image. To change the light color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

5	Use the Angle setting to point to the direction of origin of the light and affect which edges appear light and shadowed. The value is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

6	Enter a Blur value to determine the sharpness of the original image. As you increase the value, the image becomes less sharp.

7	Use the Number of furrows setting to control how many leather furrows, or lines, are applied.

8	Use the Length of furrows setting to control the length of the furrows, or lines.

9	The Transparency value controls how much of the original image is visible. As you increase the value, more of the image shows through the furrows.

10	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

11	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

12	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Fur Effect

The Fur effect gives the image the appearance of being covered in fur or bristles.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Fur Dialog Box

To open the Fur dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Fur, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Fur Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Fur Dialog Box

Use the Fur effect to make an image appear as if it is covered in fur or bristles.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Fur Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Fur dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Enter a Blur value to determine the sharpness of the original image. As you increase the value, the image becomes less sharp.

4	Use the Density setting to control the strength of the effect. Increasing the setting adds more fur to the image.

5	Use the Length setting to control the length of the individual strands of fur.

6	The Transparency value controls how much of the image is visible. As you increase the value, the fur effect becomes more transparent, letting more of the image show through.

7	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

8	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)


Pixelate Effect

The Pixelate effect divides an image into rectangles or squares of a size you specify. Note to users of previous versions of Paint Shop Pro: This effect was called the Mosaic filter in earlier versions of the program.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Pixelate Dialog Box

To open the Pixelate dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Pixelate, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Pixelate Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Sunburst Effect

Use the Sunburst effect to reproduce the appearance of an image and light source viewed through a camera lens. You can adjust the light origin, amount of radiating light, and brightness of the halos, or glare spots.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Sunburst Dialog Box

To open the Sunburst dialog box, choose Effects > Illumination Effects > Sunburst, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Sunburst Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Sunburst Dialog Box

Use the Sunburst effect to create the effect of an image and its light source viewed through a camera lens. You can adjust the light origin, amount of radiating light, and brightness of the glare spots. When you use this dialog box, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Sunburst Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Sunburst dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image and the location of the light origin; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can now either apply this style by clicking OK or edit it by changing the settings.

4	To set the origin of the light source, either drag the crosshairs in the left preview box or adjust the Horizontal and Vertical settings in the Light Spot panel.

•	The Horizontal value indicates the horizontal location of the light origin from 0, or left side to 100, or right side.

•	The Vertical value indicates the vertical location of the light origin from 0, or top edge to 100, or bottom edge of the image.

5	Enter a Brightness value to control the strength of the light source.

6	In the Rays panel, enter a Density value to determine how many rays of light radiate from the light source.

7	Use the Brightness setting to control the brightness of the light rays.

8	Use the Circle Brightness value to control the visibility of the halos, or glare spots.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)


Lights Effect

Use the Lights effect to make the image appear to be lit by up to five spotlights using the color, intensity, direction, and location you choose.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Lights Dialog Box

To open the Lights dialog box, choose Effects > Illumination Effects > Lights, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Lights Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Lights Dialog Box

Use the Lights effect to make an image appear to be lit by up to five spotlights. You can set the intensity, direction, color and origin of the light source, use one of the preset effects, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Lights Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Lights dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image and the location of the spotlights; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can now either apply this style by clicking OK or edit it by changing the settings.

4	Set a Darkness value to determine the darkness of the non-illuminated areas of the image. Increase the value to make the areas darker.

5	To select a light, either click its button, which appears under the Darkness setting, or click the light dot on the left thumbnail of the preview box.

6	In the Light Source panel, select the On checkbox to turn on individual spotlights. Clear the checkbox if you do not want the spotlight to shine on the image.

7	To choose a color for the selected spotlight, click the Color box to open the Jasc or Windows Color dialog box. Right-click it to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

8	To set the brightness of the spotlight, enter an Intensity value.

9	To set the position, direction, cone size and asymmetry of a light, you can manipulate the light spot and arms on the thumbnail or the change the settings in the Light source panel by doing the following:

•	To position the light source, click the light spot and either drag it or enter a value using the Horizontal and Vertical numeric edit controls. For each light, a value of 0 indicates the center of the image; positive values indicate movement upward and to the right; negative values indicate movement downward and to the left.

•	To set the direction the light shines, click and drag the knob at the end of the center arm of the light spot or use the Direction settings. The value is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. Click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the box.

•	To set the width of the light, or cone size, drag either handle away from or in toward the center, or enter a value for the Cone Size setting. As you increase the size to 89, the cone widens.

•	To set the asymmetry, drag the knob of the center control to lengthen or shorten it, or enter an Asymmetry value.

10	Enter a Smoothness value to determine the smoothness of the transition from the light to dark area at the edge of the cone. At lower settings, the edge is sharp; as you increase the value, the transition becomes more gradual.

11	Enter a Scale value to control how large an area of the image the light covers.

12	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

13	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

14	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Page Curl Effect

The Page Curl effect makes the image appear as though a corner of it has been rolled up.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Page Curl Dialog Box

To open the Page Curl dialog box, choose Effects > Geometric Effects > Page Curl, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Page Curl Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Page Curl Dialog Box

Use the Page Curl effect to make it appear as though a corner of the image has been rolled up, exposing a colored background.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Page Curl Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Page Curl dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	In the Back Color box, select a color for the background underneath the curled area of the page. Left click to open the Jasc or Windows Color dialog box; right-click to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

4	In the Color box, select a color for the curled back of the image page. Left click to open the Jasc or Windows Color dialog box; right-click to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

5	Click one of the four Corner buttons to choose a corner to curl.

6	Drag the knob or enter an X value to determine how far along the top or bottom edge of the page the curl extends.

7	Drag the knob or enter a Y value to determine how far up the left or right side of the page the curl extends.

8	Radius determines the amount of the curl. As you increase the value, the curl loosens.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Pencil Effect

The Pencil effect enhances and colors the edges in an image to make it look like a pencil drawing.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Pencil Dialog Box

To open the Pencil dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Pencil, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Pencil Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Pencil Dialog Box

Use the Pencil effect to enhance and color the edges in an image to make it look like a pencil drawing.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Pencil Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Pencil dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	Use the Luminance setting to adjust the overall brightness of the image.

4	Enter a Blur value to determine the sharpness of the original image. As you increase the value, the image becomes less sharp.

5	Use the Color box to choose a color for the background, or non-edge area, of the image. To change the light color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

6	Use the Intensity setting to control the contrast between the background and edges. As you increase the contrast, more detail appears.

7	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

8	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Polished Stone Effect

The Polished Stone effect makes the image appear carved on a hard, shiny surface.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Polished Stone Dialog Box

To open the Polished Stone dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Polished Stone, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Polished Stone Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Polished Stone Dialog Box

Use the Polished Stone effect to make you image look as if it were carved on a hard, shiny surface. When you use this dialog box, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Polished Stone Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Polished Stone dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can now either apply this style by clicking OK or edit it by changing the settings.

4	In the Relief panel, enter a Blur value to determine the sharpness of the original image. As you increase the value, the image becomes less sharp.

5	Use the Detail setting to control the scale of the relief. As you increase the setting, smaller areas of contrast are shown in relief.

6	Use the Polishing setting to control the size of the polished area. As you increase the value, the roughness decreases and the surface appears smoother.

7	In the Lighting panel, use the Angle setting to point to the direction of origin of the light and affect which edges appear light and shadowed. The value is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

8	Use the Color box to choose a color for the light shining on the edges of the forms. To change the light color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Rough Leather Effect

The Rough Leather effect makes the image appear embossed on leather with a coarse grain.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Rough Leather Dialog Box

To open the Rough Leather dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Rough Leather, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Rough Leather Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Rough Leather Dialog Box

Use the Rough Leather effect make the image look like it has been embossed on leather that has a coarse grain. When you use this dialog box, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Rough Leather Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Rough Leather dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can now either apply this style by clicking OK or edit it by changing the settings.

4	Use the Leather Color box to choose a color for the leather background. To change the color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

5	Use the Angle setting to point to the direction of origin of the light and affect which edges appear light and shadowed. The value is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

6	Use the Luminance setting to adjust the overall brightness of the image.

7	Use the Contrast setting to control the roughness of the leather and the colors displayed. Increasing the value makes the surface appear bumpier and applies more color to it.

8	Use the Sharpness setting to control the sharpness of the edges in the image.

9	Enter a Blur value to determine the blur of the original image. As you increase the value, the image becomes less sharp.

10	Use the Light Color box to choose a color for the light shining on the leather surface.

11	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

12	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

13	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Sandstone Effect

The Sandstone effect makes the image appear as though it had been carved from sandstone.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Sandstone Dialog Box

To open the Sandstone dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Sandstone, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Sandstone Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Sandstone Dialog Box

Use the Sandstone effect to make the image appear carved in sandstone. When you use this dialog box, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Sandstone Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Sandstone dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can now either apply this style by clicking OK or edit it by changing the settings.

4	In the Relief panel, enter a Blur value to determine the sharpness of the original image. As you increase the value, the image becomes less sharp.

5	Use the Detail setting to control the scale of the relief. As you increase the setting, smaller areas of contrast are shown in relief.

6	Use the Luminance setting to adjust the overall brightness of the image.

7	In the Lighting panel, use the Angle setting to point to the direction of origin of the light and affect which edges appear light and shadowed. The value is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

8	Use the Color box to choose a color for the light shining on the edges of the forms. To change the light color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Soft Plastic Effect

The Soft Plastic effect makes the image molded from plastic.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Soft Plastic Dialog Box

To open the Soft Plastic dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Soft Plastics, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Soft Plastic Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Soft Plastic Dialog Box

Use the Soft Plastic effect to make your image look as if it were molded from plastic. When you use this dialog box, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Soft Plastic Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Soft Plastic dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can now either apply this style by clicking OK or edit it by changing the settings.

4	In the Relief panel, enter a Blur value to determine the sharpness of the original image. As you increase the value, the image becomes more blurred.

5	Use the Detail setting to control the scale of the relief. With low values, there are fewer levels of relief and the effect is softer and less defined.

6	Use the Density setting to control the number of areas of relief. Low values produce fewer larger areas and a softer look. Higher values add relief to smaller areas producing a denser effect.

7	In the Lighting panel, use the Angle setting to point to the direction of origin of the light and affect which edges appear light and shadowed. The value is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

8	Use the Color box to choose a color for the light shining on the edges of the forms. To change the light color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

9	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

10	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

11	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Straw-wall Effect

The Straw-wall effect makes the image look like it is covered with straws.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Straw-wall Dialog Box

To open the Straw-wall dialog box, choose Effects > Texture Effects > Straw-wall, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Straw-wall Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Straw-wall Dialog Box

Use the Straw-wall effect to make the image look like it has been covered with straws that are oriented along the image contours. When you use this dialog box, you can set the options yourself, use one of the preset effects included with the program, or start with a preset effect and then edit its settings.

 Working with Preset Effects

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Straw-wall Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Straw-wall dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	To apply a preset effect, click the Presets drop-down box and select the effect. You can now either apply this style by clicking OK or edit it by changing the settings.

4	Use the Color box to choose a color for the light shining on the image. To change the light color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

5	Use the Angle setting to point to the direction of origin of the light and affect which edges appear light and shadowed. The value is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

6	Enter a Blur value to determine the sharpness of the original image. As you increase the value, the image becomes less sharp.

7	Increase or decrease the Density to control the number of straws covering the image.

8	Use the Length and Width settings to determine the shape of the straws.

9	The Transparency value controls how much of the image is visible. As you increase the value, the straw becomes more transparent, letting more of the image show through.

10	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

11	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

12	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Topography Effect

The Topography effect gives the image a three-dimensional look by making it appear to be created from a system of terraces.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Topography Dialog Box

To open the Topography dialog box, choose Effects > Artistic Effects > Topography, select it using the Effect browser, or click its optional toolbar button.

 Using the Topography Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Customizing the Toolbar


Topography Dialog Box

Use the Topography effect to turn your image into a system of terraces.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Using the Topography Dialog Box

The numeric edit controls in this dialog box provide a variety of ways to change the settings. You can type a number in the box, click the spinner controls, drag the meter bar, or press the pop-out button and drag the slider.

To use the Topography dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in to 10:1and the [image] button to zoom out to 1:16. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Auto Proof buttons to view the changes to the original image before applying them.

3	In the Levels panel, set a Width value to control the size of each terrace or layer. Increasing the value makes the terraces larger.

4	Set a Density value to determine the number of terraces. Increasing the density value adds more levels of terraces.

5	In the Lighting panel, use the Angle setting to point to the direction of origin of the light and affect which edges appear light and shadowed. The value is a measure in degrees around the 360° circle. To set the Angle, click in the circle, drag the needle, or type a number in the Angle box.

6	Use the Color box to choose a color for the light shining on the sides of the terraces. To change the light color, click a color in the original image, left-click the color box to open the Color dialog box, or right-click the box to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

7	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

8	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to the default program values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

9	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the effect.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Windows Color Dialog Box

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


Hot Wax Coating Effect_POP
Hot Wax Coating Effect


Emboss Effect_POP
Emboss Effect


Dilate Effect_POP
Dilate Effect


Erode_Effect_POP
Erode Effect


Aged Newspaper Effect_POP
Aged Newspaper Effect


Aged Newspaper DB_POP
Aged Newspaper Dialog Box


Sepia Effect_POP
Sepia Effect


Sepia Dialog Box_POP
Sepia Toning Dialog Box


Brush Strokes Effect_POP
Brush Strokes Effect


Brush Strokes Dialog Box_POP
Brush Strokes Dialog Box


Colored Edges Effect_POP
Colored Edges Effect


Colored Edges Dialog Box_POP
Colored Edges Dialog Box


Colored Foil Effect_POP
Colored Foil Effect


Colored Foil Dialog Box_POP
Colored Foil Dialog Box


Contours Effect_POP
Contours Effect


Contours Dialog Box_POP
Contours Dialog Box


Enamel Effect_POP
Enamel Effect


Enamel Dialog Box_POP
Enamel Dialog Box


Fine Leather Effect_POP
Fine Leather Effect


Fine Leather Dialog Box_POP
Fine Leather Dialog Box


Fur Effect_POP
Fur Effect


Fur Dialog Box_POP
Fur Dialog Box


Sunburst Effect_POP
Sunburst Effect


Sunburst Dialog Box_POP
Sunburst Dialog Box


Pixelate Effect_POP
Pixelate Effect


Lights Effect_POP
Lights Effect


Lights Dialog Box_POP
Lights Dialog Box


Spotlight Examples_POP
Spotlight Examples


Light Selection Buttons_POP
Light Selection Buttons


Spotlight Controller_POP
Spotlight Controller


Page Curl Effect_POP
Page Curl Effect


Page Curl Dialog Box_POP
Page Curl Dialog Box


Pencil Effect_POP
Pencil Effect


Pencil Dialog Box_POP
Pencil Dialog Box


Polished Stone Effect_POP
Polished Stone Effect


Polished Stone Dialog Box_POP
Polished Stone Dialog Box


Rough Leather Effect_POP
Rough Leather Effect


Rough Leather Dialog Box_POP
Rough Leather Dialog Box


Sandstone Effect_POP
Sandstone Effect


Sandstone Dialog Box_POP
Sandstone Dialog Box


Soft Plastic Forms Effect_POP
Soft Plastic Effect


Soft Plastic Forms Dialog Box_POP
Soft Plastic Dialog Box


Straw-wall Effect_POP
Straw-wall Effect


Straw-wall Dialog Box_POP
Straw-wall Dialog Box


Topography Effect_POP
Topography Effect


Topography Dialog Box_POP
Topography Dialog Box


Scratch Removal Tool

Drag this tool along scratches, cracks, and other unwanted objects to remove them from your photographs. You can use it on the background of any 24-bit color or 8-bit greyscale non-transparent image, but not on a layer or on an image with a transparent background. If necessary, merge the layers of your image to make the tool available.

Using the Scratch Removal Tool

To remove a scratch from your image:

1	Click the Scratch Removal tool button [image] on the Tool Palette.

2	If necessary, make the Tool Options palette visible by pressing the <O> (letter O) key.

3	Use the numeric edit controls of the Tool Options palette to set the width of the tool. The area can be 4 to 100 pixels wide. The default width is 20 pixels.

4	Click either the flat-end or pointed-end Selection Boxes option to choose the shape of the ends of the enclosure box.

5	Move the cursor over the image.

6	Click and hold the left mouse button where you want to start removing the scratch.

7	Drag the mouse to enclose the area containing the scratch. As you move the mouse, Paint Shop Pro displays a box around the selected area.

8	After you have enclosed the scratch, release the mouse button.

Adjusting the Scratch Removal Area

You can change the size and position of the selection box as you define it. While dragging the mouse, you can:

Press Page Up to increase the width of the box by 1 pixel.

Press Page Down to decrease the width of the box by 1 pixel.

Press the Left Arrow (←) to move the starting point of the box to the left by 1 pixel.

Press the Right Arrow (→) to move the starting point to the right by 1 pixel.

Press the Up Arrow (↑) to move the starting point up by 1 pixel.

Press the Down Arrow (↓) to move the starting point down by 1 pixel.

Removing Wide Scratches

There are two versions of the selection box--one for narrow scratches and one for wide scratches. The width setting on the Tool Options palette determines which box Paint Shop Pro uses. For a setting of no more than 10 pixels wide, it uses the narrow box. When you set the width to more than 10 pixels, Paint Shop Pro uses the wide box. This box contains borders between double lines along both sides. Position the box so that scratch is between the two inner lines and the border areas enclose scratch-free sections of the image.

Note the following properties of the Scratch Removal tool:

•	The tool uses pixels from outside the selection box to correct the scratch.

•	Feathering reduces the amount of correction applied to the scratch because it blends pixels from the scratch area back into the image.

•	This tool works best when removing scratches from areas displaying a relatively smooth background. To remove a scratch from a textured area, you may prefer to use the Clone tool to cover the scratch with the texture.

Related Topics

 Merging Layers

 About the Automatic Small Scratch Removal Feature

 Cloning Part of an Image


File Locations Preferences

You can organize your tubes, patterns, textures, gradients, brushes, frames, shapes, styled lines, and plug-in filters by storing them in any folder on your computer. Use the File Location Preferences dialog box to set where Paint Shop Pro searches for these files, for Web browsers, and for any undo and temporary files that are saved to a folder other than WinTemp.

To open the dialog box, choose File > Preferences > File Locations.

 Using the File Locations Dialog Box


File Locations Dialog Box

Use the tabs in this dialog box to set the paths and folders where Paint Shop Pro searches for tubes, patterns, textures, gradients, brushes, frames, and shapes you have created and saved. You can also enter the path of any Web browsers you want to use with the program. If you want to save the undo and temporary files to a folder other than Windows > TEMP, you can use this dialog box to set the new location.

Adding Folders

When you install Paint Shop Pro, the program creates some default folders for the objects included with the program. The first text box of each tab displays this path and folder. If you want to store objects in additional folders, you can add them using the Browse button.

To add a new folder to a tab:

1	Create the folder. The folder must exist before you can add it.

2	Click the Browse button to open the Browse for Folder navigation box.

3	Use the scroll bar and the directory tree to locate the new folder.

4	Click the folder to select it.

5	In the tab, select the check boxes of any of the following options you want to use:

•	Select Enable this path to make the path active in Paint Shop Pro.

•	Select Use sub folders to have Paint Shop Pro search for files in any folders within this folder.

•	Select Save to path to make the path the default path for saving files. You can select only one default path for each tab.

6	Click OK to close the box.

Management of Saved Objects Folders

This section is about how to manage cache file resources using the “File Locations” feature. The speed at which you can use your caching is affected by the number of files that are located in your selected folders. To make caching as efficient as possible, you may want to arrange your folders using the following structure:

First, place the most frequently used files into one folder and some other frequently used files into a sub folder. Do this for two more folders for a total of three main level folders.

Now that you have a directory structure set up the way that suits your needs, select the directories that you would like to enable. When you enable only the top level folder, Paint Shop Pro uses only that folder. When you select the “Use sub-directories” check box, Paint Shop Pro also searches the sub-folders contained in the top level folder. By using the two check boxes associated with each folder, you can use none, some, or all the selected folders.

This applies to all the “File Locations” that use individual cache elements: brushes, shapes, textures, patterns, gradients, picture frames, picture tubes, and styled lines.

Related Topics

 File Extensions for Saved Object Files

 Using the Browse for Folder Navigation Box


File Extensions for Saved Objects

Paint Shop Pro will recognize the following extensions for saved objects:

Patterns:	.pat	.bmp
Textures:	.tex	.bmp
Gradients:	.jgd
Shapes:	.jsl
Styled Lines:	.sld
Tubes:	.tub
Picture Frames:	.pfr
Brushes:	.jbr	.abr
Related Topic

 File Locations Dialog Box


Autosave Settings Preferences

Choose this command when you want images you have open to be saved automatically at specific intervals. Paint Shop Pro saves the files to the folder you select in the Undo/Temporary Files tab of the File Locations dialog box. If anything causes the system or program to close unexpectedly, Paint Shop Pro loads these files the next time you start the program.

 Using the Autosave Setting Dialog Box

Related Topic

 File Locations Dialog Box


Autosave Settings Dialog Box

Use the Autosave Settings dialog box when you want Paint Shop Pro to create a temporary backup file for each open image. The program creates an ATS file containing the location of the original image, the location of the backup file, and a TMP. file of each open image.

The Autosave feature can prevent you from losing your work if the system or program crashes. If this occurs, after you restart Paint Shop Pro, the program scans your Autosave directory for any ATS files. If it locates one, it reloads the temporary images.

To use the Autosave Settings Dialog box:

1	Select the Enable autosave check box to have Paint Shop Pro create temporary feature. Clear the check box if you do not want to use the feature.

2	Select a number from the Minutes box to determine how frequently Paint Shop Pro creates a temporary file.

By default, temporary files are stored in the Windows > TEMP folder. If you prefer to save them elsewhere, select a new folder using the Undo/Temporary tab of the File Locations dialog box.

Related Topic

 File Locations Dialog Box


Warnings Tab

By default, the check boxes on the Warnings tab are selected, and Paint Shop Pro displays a warning message whenever you are about to perform an operation that will result in lost information or one that can’t be applied to the image in its current state. For each type of message you prefer not to have Paint Shop Pro display, clear its check box.

If you are an experienced user who understands the implications of a command, you may prefer not to see the warning message each time you choose the command. For example, if you make 12 screen captures, save the five you want to keep, and then want to close Paint Shop Pro, the program will display messages asking to save each of the remaining seven images. To close the program without seeing the messages, you would clear the "Warn on unsaved files during Window Close All" check box.

You can also prevent a message from appearing in the future by selecting the ”Don’t warn about this anymore” check box the first time Paint Shop Pro displays the message. If you then change your mind and want to see the message, return to this tab and select the appropriate check box.

Adding Raster Layer to Paletted Image

When you clear this check box, Paint Shop Pro does not remind you that a paletted image can contain only one raster layer if you try to add a raster layer to a paletted image (256 or fewer colors).

Deleting Layer via Drag and Drop

When you clear this check box, Paint Shop Pro does not warn you when you drag a layer to the Delete button on the Layer palette.

Exporting Shape Library Selection

When you clear this check box, if you have a specific vector shape selected when you choose the File > Export > Shape command, Paint Shop Pro does not warn you that only the selected shape will be saved. To save all the vector shapes, make sure no shape is selected.

File Format Limitations

When you clear this check box, Paint Shop Pro does not warn you that you may lose data when you save an image in a new format that doesn’t support all the information or features contained in the current format.

Loading Unsupported Adjustment Layers (PSD files only)

When you clear the “Show warning when reading PSD files containing unsupported attributes” check box, a message does not appear when you open a PhotoShop ® image that contains features Paint Shop Pro does not support.

Operations Requiring Decrease in Color Depth

When you clear this check box, Paint Shop Pro does not warn you when it needs to decrease the color depth of an image before applying the command you have chosen. It decreases the color depth automatically.

Operations Requiring Image to be Flattened or Merged

When you clear this check box, Paint Shop Pro does not warn you when it needs to flatten an image before applying a command you have chosen. It flattens the image automatically.

Replacing a Mask

When you clear this check box, Paint Shop Pro does not warn you that it must delete the current mask before applying the new mask. It deletes the current mask automatically.

Unsaved Files During Windows Close All

When you clear this check box, Paint Shop Pro does not prompt you to save files when you choose Window > Close All. If you do not save the files, unsaved changes to all open files are discarded.


PNG Optimizer Command

Choose this command or click the optional PNG Optimizer button [image] on the toolbar to open the PNG Optimizer dialog box, where you can save an image as a PNG file that is optimized for viewing on the Web.

 Using the PNG Optimizer Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Creating a Selection

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


PNG Saver Dialog Box
PNG Optimizer Dialog Box

The PNG Optimizer dialog box contains three tabbed pages where you configure the color, transparency, and format options. The fourth page displays estimated download times of the image at various modem speeds.

You can also use the dialog box to save your image as a PNG file without a transparency by choosing the None option in the Transparency tab.

Using the Preview Boxes

Use the two image preview boxes to compare the transparency, quality, and file size of the PNG image to that of the original. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

Using the Tabs

 Using the Colors Tab

 Using the Transparency Tab

 Using the Format Tab

 Using the Download Times Tab

Saving the File

After you have selected the options, click the OK button to open the Save As dialog box. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the new image and type a name for the file. When you click Save, Paint Shop Pro saves a copy of the image as a PNG file and leaves the original image unchanged.

 Using the Save As Dialog Box

Opening the PNG Wizard

If you prefer to let Paint Shop Pro guide you through the process, click the Use Wizard button. Page 1 of the Wizard opens.

 Using Page 1 of the PNG Optimizer Wizard


PNG Saver Colors Tab
PNG Optimizer Colors Tab

Image Type

Select one of the following image types:

•	Palette-Based, in which the image contains from three to 256 colors,

•	Greyscale, in which the image contains 256 levels of grey, or

•	16.7 Million Colors (24 Bit), in which the image contains 16.7 million colors.

If you are creating a Palette-Based PNG image, select the other options on the tab.

Number of Colors

If you want to create a paletted (palette based) image, you need to reduce your image to 256 or fewer colors. As you remove colors, the size of the file decreases, but so does the quality of the image. Use the Preview boxes to help you determine the best choice.

Amount of Dithering

Dithering refers to the way the program arranges pixels to compensate for missing colors in the adjacent pixels. Use the Preview boxes to help you determine the best setting.

Method of Color Selection

If you are creating a paletted image (3 to 256 colors), choose one of the following palettes to use with the image:

•	Choose the Existing Palette option if your image is already paletted and you want to use its palette.

•	Choose the Standard / Web-safe option if your image will be used on the Web and you want it to display consistently on the viewers’ monitors.

•	Choose the Optimized Median Cut option if you need to reduce the image to only a few colors.

•	Choose the Optimized Octree option if your original image contains only a few colors and you want to keep those exact colors.

Depending on your needs, you may want to try both “Optimized” options and choose the one that gives you the best looking result or the smallest file size.

 Palette Options

Options Panel

Boosting selected colors gives them more weight by a factor of the value you enter. The selected colors stand out from the rest of the image. To boost colors, make a selection of an area that contains these colors, and then select this option.

Select the “Include Windows’ colors” check box to include the 16 standard Windows colors in the palette. If the image will be used on the Web, leave this check box selected.


PNG Saver Transparency Tab
PNG Optimizer Transparency Tab

Use the options on the Transparency tab to determine the type of transparency for the image and the areas that will be transparent.

There are three types of transparency:

•	None, which produces a PNG file that does not contain a transparency,

•	Single Color, where a specific color becomes transparent, and

•	Alpha channel transparency,

If you have chosen to create a transparency, choose one of the second set of options to specify the area that will become transparent:

•	Existing image or layer transparency, which uses the current transparency information,

•	Inside the current selection, which is only available for images that contain a selection,

•	Outside the current selection, which is only available for images that contain a selection, and

•	Areas that match the color in the box. You can select any color. To choose a color from the image, move the cursor over the image and click a color. You can also click inside the color box to open the Color dialog box (24-bit images) or Image palette (8-bit images), or right-click it to open the Recent Colors dialog box. Set the tolerance factor for the color using the numeric edit control.The tolerance factor indicates how closely colors must match the color in the box before they are selected.

Related Topics

 Using a Color Dialog Box

 Using the Image Palette

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


PNG Saver Format Tab

Use the Format tab to choose how an image appears as it is downloaded.

There are two choices:

•	Non-interlaced, where the image downloads one line a time, starting from the top, and

•	Interlaced, where the image is displayed incrementally in several passes, and detail is added each time. Use this option with larger images so that the viewer can get an idea of how the image looks while waiting for it to download.


PNG Saver Download Times Tab
PNG Optimizer Download Times Tab

The Download Times tab displays the size of the compressed file and an estimate of the download time at four modem speeds. If the file size is too large, decrease it by clicking the Colors tab and reducing the number of colors.

Click OK to open the Save As dialog box, where you type a name and select a location for saving the PNG file. The original image is not altered.

 Using the Save As Dialog Box


PNG Wizard Page 1
PNG Wizard Type Page

Use the first page of the PNG Wizard to select the type of PNG image to create. You have three choices:

•	Palette-Based, in which the image contains from three to 256 colors,

•	Greyscale, in which the image contains 256 levels of grey, or

•	24-bit, in which the image contains 16.7 million colors.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Transparency page.

 PNG Wizard Transparency Page


PNG Wizard Page 2
PNG Wizard Transparency Page

Use the second page of the PNG Wizard to choose the color that you want to make transparent. When the page opens, the color box displays the current background color.

If the Wizard does not detect transparent information in the image, the page displays the following two options:

•	No transparency, which you choose to create a GIF file that does not contain a transparency, and

•	Convert matching colors to transparent, which you choose to create a GIF file containing a transparency.

To choose a color from the image, move the cursor over the image and click a color. You can also click inside the color box to open the Color dialog box (24-bit images) or Image palette (8-bit images), or right-click it to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

If the Wizard detects a transparency in the image, it displays a third option. This option, which is for retaining the existing transparency in the final image, is chosen by default. To use a different transparent color, choose the second option and select the new color.

Click the Next button to proceed to the Background Color page.

 PNG Wizard Page 3

Related Topics

 Using a Color Dialog Box

 Using the Image Palette

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


PNG Wizard Page 3
PNG Wizard Background Page

Use this page to enter the background color of the Web page on which you will be using the image. When the page opens, the color box displays the current solid background color. Choose a new color from the image by moving the cursor over the image and clicking a color. You can also click inside the color box to open the Color dialog box (24-bit images) or Image palette (8-bit images), or right-click it to open the Recent Colors dialog box.

Click the Next button to proceed to the next page. If you have chosen to create a greyscale or 24-bit color image, the Result page will open.

 PNG Wizard Result Page

If you have chosen to create a palette-based image, the Palette page opens.

 PNG Wizard Palette Page

Related Topics

 Using a Color Dialog Box

 Using the Image Palette

 Using the Recent Colors Dialog Box


PNG Wizard Page 4
PNG Wizard Palette Page

The PNG Wizard displays this page if you chose to create a Palette-based image on page 1. Choose the Standard / Web-safe option if your image will be used on the Web and you want it to display consistently on the viewers’ monitors.

Clock the Next button to proceed to the Colors page.

 PNG Wizard Colors Page


PNG Wizard Colors Page

The PNG Wizard displays this page if you chose to create a Palette-based image on page 1. As you drag the slider up, you increase the size by adding colors, which creates a better-looking image. As you drag the slider down, you remove colors, decrease the file size, and lower the image quality.

Click the Next button to proceed to the last page, which displays the compressed image and its file size.

 PNG Wizard Result Page


PNG Wizard Result Page

The last page displays the compressed image and its file size. To change the compression value, click the Back button to return to the previous page.

Click the Finish button to close the Wizard and open the Save As dialog box, where you type a name and select a location for saving the PNG file. The original image is not altered.

 Using the Save As Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Using the PNG Optimizer Dialog Box


Document Palette Color Picker
About the Document Palette Style

By default, the Available Colors panel of the Color palette displays a rainbow of colors. The number of colors available is determined by the number of colors (bit depth) in your image. All the color are available in a 24-bit (16 million colors) image. In a paletted image (8-bit or lower), only 256 colors are available. In a paletted image, when you select a color from the Available Colors panel, Paint Shop Pro uses the color from the 256 available colors that is closest to the color you click.

When you are working with images containing fewer than 16 million colors, you may find it more convenient to have the Available Colors panel display only the number of colors the image can contain. Do this by selecting the Document Palette Color Picker option in the Dialogs and Palettes tab of the General Program Preferences dialog box.

When you choose to display the Document palette style, the rainbow in the available colors area is replaced with rectangles containing the available colors.

There are two main benefits to selecting this option:

1	You can select exact colors in the paletted images, and

2	When you are working with masks or adjustment layers on 24-bit images, you can alternated between greyscale colors (for masks and adjustment layers) and the 24-bit rainbow of colors.

•	Note: The color depth of the image determines the number of rectangles in the Available Colors panel. If the image contains fewer colors than it can support, the remaining rectangles are black. For example, a 4-bit image can contain up to 16 colors. If it actually contains only 9 colors, the Available Colors panel displays 9 colored rectangles and 7 black rectangles.

Related Topics

 Using the Color Palette

 About Image Palettes

 Viewing Color Depth of an Image

 Setting Dialogs and Palettes Preferences


Using the Browser to Add a Mask to a Layer

When you add a mask by choosing Masks > Load from Disk, you don’t see the mask until Paint Shop Pro applies it. To view the mask before applying it, use the Browser to drag-and-drop it. Any mask that you have saved to a disk can be added using this method.

To drag a mask to an image:

1	Make active (current) the layer of the image to which you want to add the mask

2	Open the Browser.

3	Navigate to and select the folder containing the mask.

4	While pressing either the left or right mouse button, drag the mask thumbnail from the Browser to the image.

5	When the cursor is over the image, release the mouse button. Paint Shop Pro applies the mask to the active layer.

•	Note: The mask must be an 8-bit greyscale bitmap image with the “.msk” entension.

Related Topics

 Saving a Mask to a Hard Drive or Disk

 Loading a Mask from a Hard Drive or Disk


Browser Toolbar

The Browser toolbar displays buttons that correspond to frequently-used commands in the Browser menus. The commands and buttons are available only when the Browser is active. Click a button to activate its command. If a command is unavailable, its button is greyed-out.

You can dock, or attach, the Browser toolbar to the edge of the workspace or undock it and move it anywhere on the screen. You can also customize it by adding, removing, and rearranging the buttons.

Click a button on the Browser toolbar below to read about its function

The Browser toolbar is hidden by default. To view it, choose View > ToolBars. When the Toolbars dialog box opens, select the Browser Toolbar check box and click Close. If you select the “Hide disabled toolbars” check box, Paint Shop Pro will display the Browser toolbar whenever you open the Browser and hide it when you close the Browser.

Related Topics

 Using the Bars and Palettes

 Using the Toolbars Dialog Box


About the Overview Window

When you have zoomed in on a small area for a detailed operation, you may find it useful to see the entire image while you work. Do this by opening the Overview window, which displays a small view of the image.

To open the Overview window, click its Toolbar button [image], right-click any palette or bar and select Overview Window from the list, or choose View > Toolbars and select the Overview Window check box.

To toggle between viewing and hiding the Overview window, do any of the following:

•	Press <W>,

•	Click the Overview window button [image] on the toolbar,

•	Right-click the empty space of a palette or bar and choose it from the menu, or

•	Choose View > ToolBars and select or clear its checkbox in the Toolbars dialog box.

When the image is too large to fit in its window, its visible area is enclosed by a rectangle. To move from one area of the image to another, move the cursor over the rectangle. When the cursor changes to the Hand icon, click the left mouse button, drag to the new area you want to view, and release the button. Note that the rectangle moves as you drag the mouse button.

Note that:

•	The Overview window displays transparent areas of an image as white.

•	Paint Shop Pro may operate more slowly when the Overview is open.

The Overview window has an automatic roll-up feature that minimizes it so only its title bar is visible. This lets you keep it accessible without blocking the workspace. Enable automatic roll-up in the Toolbar dialog box or the Dialogs and Palettes tab of the General Program Preferences. When the feature is enabled, its button on the title bar shows whether it is active [image] or inactive [image]. When the feature is not enabled, the icon disappears from the title bar.

Related Topics

 Using the Bars and Palettes

 Setting Dialogs and Palettes Preferences


Using Active Styles Boxes

In Paint Shop Pro, you can paint and draw with solid colors, gradients, and patterns. The Active Styles boxes display which of these options you are using. You also have a “No Style” option for when you do not want to apply any style.

The upper box displays the foreground/stroke style. When working with the raster tools, use the left mouse button to apply the style from this box. When you work with the shape, text, and line tools, Paint Shop Pro automatically applies this style to the outlines of the shape and text and to the entire line.

The lower box displays the fill/background style. When working with the raster tools, use the right mouse button to apply the style from this box. When you work with the shape and text tools, Paint Shop Pro automatically applies this style to the interior of the objects.

To exchange the foreground/stroke with the background/fill style, click the color switcher.

Selecting a Style Option

To alternate between the style options:

1	Left-click the arrow in a Styles box.

2	Click one of the other icons. You have the following choices:

•	  Solid Color

•	  Gradient

•	  Pattern

•	  No Style

3	Release the mouse button to display the new icon and use the new style.

Selecting a New Color, Gradient, or Pattern

To select a new color, gradient, or pattern, click inside the foreground/stroke or the background/fill box when it displays the appropriate style. Clicking a solid color opens the Color dialog box; clicking a gradient opens the Gradient dialog box; clicking a pattern opens the Pattern dialog box.

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box

 Using the Gradient Dialog Box

 Using the Pattern Dialog boxes

Keeping Style Settings when Changing Tools

The Lock check box [image] controls whether each brush or tool keeps its own styles and textures or all the brushes use the styles and textures that are currently selected. Select the check box to apply the same style and texture settings to every brush. Clear the check box to have each brush retain the settings selected for it.

Related Topics

 Working with Gradients

 Working with Patterns

 Using the Active Textures Boxes


Working with Patterns

You can apply patterns using both raster and vector tools. When working with raster tools, apply patterns with the Paintbrush, Clone Brush, Color Replacer, Retouch, Eraser, Airbrush, and Floating Selection text. Press the left mouse button to paint with the foreground/stroke pattern; press the right mouse button to paint with the background/fill pattern. When creating text, the letters are filled with the background/fill pattern and outlined in the foreground/stroke pattern. When you do not want a fill pattern applied to the outline or interior, replace the pattern option with the “No Style” option.

When creating vector objects, Paint Shop Pro applies the foreground/stroke pattern to the outline of the shape and text and to the entire line. It applies the background/fill pattern to the interior of the text and shape.

Paint Shop Pro comes with several pattern choices. To change patterns, choose the pattern style for the box, and then click in the box to open the Pattern dialog box.

 Using the Pattern Dialog boxes

Related Topics

 Working with Gradients

 Using the Active Styles Boxes

 Using the Active Textures Boxes


Working with Gradients

You can apply gradients using both raster and vector tools. When working with raster tools, apply gradients with the Paintbrush, Clone Brush, Color Replacer, Retouch, Eraser, Airbrush, and Floating Selection text. Press the left mouse button to paint with the foreground/stroke gradient; press the right mouse button to paint with the background/fill gradient. When creating text, the letters are filled with the background/fill gradient and outlined in the foreground/stroke gradient. When you do not want a fill gradient applied to the outline or interior, replace the gradient option with the “No Style” option.

When you work with vector objects, Paint Shop Pro applies the foreground/stroke gradient to the outline of the shape and text and to the entire line. It applies the background/fill gradient to the interior of the text and shape.

Paint Shop Pro comes with several gradient choices. To change gradients, choose the gradient style for the box, and then click in the box to open the Gradient dialog box.

 Using the Gradient Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Working with Patterns

 Using the Active Styles Boxes

 Using the Active Textures Boxes


Using the Pattern Dialog Box

Use the Pattern dialog box to choose a new foreground/stroke or background/fill pattern. To open the dialog box, click either Styles box on the Color palette. Click the upper left box to choose a new stroke or foreground pattern; click the lower right box to choose a new fill or background pattern. The box must display a pattern for the dialog box to open. If it displays a solid color, a gradient, or the no style sign [image], click the arrow in the box and choose the pattern option [image].

When you click the Styles box, there may be a short delay as the program loads the patterns.

To use the dialog box:

1	Click the Pattern drop-down box to display the choices of patterns.

2	Scroll through the patterns and click one to select it. The preview displays the new pattern swatch its name appears above it.

3	To rotate the pattern, either type an angle from 0° to 359° or click and drag the directional needle.

4	To add a folder or choose a new folder for saving pattern files, click the Edit Paths button. The Patterns tab of the File Locations dialog box opens.

5	Click OK to close the dialog box.

Related Topic

 Working with Patterns

 Using the File Locations Dialog Box

 File Extensions for Saved Object Files


Using the Gradient Dialog Box

Use the Gradient dialog box to choose a new stroke or fill gradient. To open the dialog box, click either Styles box on the Color palette. Click the upper left box to choose a new stroke or foreground gradient; click the lower right box to choose a new fill or background gradient. The box must display a gradient for the dialog box to open. If it displays a solid color, a pattern, or the no style sign [image], click the arrow in the box and choose the gradient option [image].

To use the dialog box:

1	Click the Gradient drop-down box to display the choices of gradients.

2	Scroll through the gradients and click one to select it. The preview displays the new gradient and its name appears above it.

3	To edit the gradient, click the Edit button to open the Gradient Editor dialog box.

4	To reverse the colors in the gradient, select the Invert gradient check box.

5	From the Style panel, click an icon to choose a style for gradient. Your choices are Linear, Rectangular, Sunburst, and Radial.

6	If you have selected the Linear style, choose the angle of rotation by dragging the rotation needle inside the swatch or using the numeric edit controls of the Angle box.

7	If you have selected any of the other three styles, set the center of the gradient by dragging the crosshairs on the swatch or using the numeric edit controls of the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

8	To have the gradient repeat itself, choose the number of repeats in the Repeats box.

9	To add a folder or choose a new folder for saving gradient files, click the Edit Paths button. The Gradients tab of the File Locations dialog box opens.

10	Click OK to close the dialog box and use the new gradient.

Related Topics

 Working with Gradients

 Using the Gradient Editor Dialog Box

 Using the File Locations Dialog Box

 File Extensions for Saved Object Files


Using Active Textures Boxes

Paint Shop Pro provides a variety of textures that you can use with your images. You use the Active Textures boxes to control whether or not an image will display a texture and to select which textures to use.

The upper box shows the foreground/stroke texture. When painting with the raster tools, use the left mouse button to apply this texture to an image. When you work with the shape, text, and line tools, Paint Shop Pro automatically applies this texture to the outlines of the shape and text and to the entire line.

The lower box displays the fill/background texture. When painting with the raster tools, use the right mouse button to apply this texture to an image. When you use the shape and text tools, Paint Shop Pro automatically applies this texture to the interior of the objects.

To exchange the foreground/stroke with the background/fill texture, click the color switcher.

Turning Textures On and Off

To alternate between using and not using textures:

1	Left-click the arrow in a Textures box.

2	Click the Texture [image] or No Texture [image] icon. Choose No Texture icon when you want to have a smooth canvas.

3	Release the mouse button to display the new icon.

Selecting a New Texture

When you want to select a new texture, click inside the foreground/stroke or the background/fill box to open the Texture dialog box. Note that if a box is set to No Texture, you must choose the Texture icon before you can open the Texture dialog box.

 Using the Texture Dialog Box

Keeping Texture Settings when Changing Tools

The Lock check box [image] on the Color palette controls whether each brush or tool keeps its own textures and styles or all the brushes use the and textures and styles that are currently selected. Select the check box to apply the same texture and style settings to every brush. Clear the check box to have each brush retain the settings most recently selected for it.

Related Topic

 Using the Active Styles Boxes


Using the Texture Dialog Box

Use the Texture dialog box to choose a new canvas texture. To open the dialog box, click either one of the Active Textures boxes on the Color palette. Click the upper left box to choose a new stroke or foreground texture; click the lower right box to choose a new fill or background texture. The box must display a texture for the dialog box to open. If it displays the no texture sign [image], click the pop-out arrow and choose the texture option [image].

To use the dialog box:

1	Click the drop-down Texture box to display the name and a thumbnail of the textures.

2	Scroll through the textures and click one to select it.

3	To add a folder or choose a new folder for saving texture files, click the Edit Paths button. The Textures tab of the File Locations dialog box opens.

4	Click OK to close the dialog box. The new texture appears in the appropriate Active Textures box.

Related Topic

 Using the Active Textures Boxes

 Using the File Locations Dialog Box

 File Extensions for Saved Object Files


Recent Colors Boxes
Recent Solid Colors Boxes

The two Solid Colors boxes, which are above the Available Colors panel, display the most recently selected foreground and background solid colors. They are the colors that will appear in the Styles boxes when you choose the Solid Color option [image].

You can exchange the foreground and background solid colors by clicking the double-headed arrow between the two boxes and select a new color by clicking a box.

Related Topic

 Active Styles Boxes


Cursors and Tablet Options

The options on the last tab of the Tool Options palette control how Paint Shop Pro displays the brush (cursor) and what feature on a drawing tablet is controlled by the pressure you apply.

Cursors

Select the "Use precise cursors" check box to use a precise cursor in place of the standard Windows cursor. This cursor can help you select and position image elements with greater precision. Select the "Show brush outlines" check box to have the cursor show the brush shape and size when you paint.

Pressure Sensitive Tablet

If you are using a drawing tablet, select the attributes you want the pressure of the drawing pen to control. You can use it to control opacity, color, and width.

 Using a Pressure Sensitive Tablet


Browser Toolbar_POP
Browser Toolbar


Document Palette Style_POP
Document Palette Style


Warnings Tab_POP
Warnings Tab


Narrow Box_POP
Narrow Box


Wide Box_POP
Wide Box


Hand Icon and Rectangle


Overview Window_POP
Overview Window


Scratch Tool Options_POP
Scratch Remover Tool Options


Gradient Dialog Box_POP
Gradient Dialog Box


Texture Dialog Box_POP
Texture Dialog Box


Pattern Dialog Box_POP
Pattern Dialog Box


Textures Popout Arrow-POP
Textures Popout Arrow


Active Textures Boxes_POP
Active Textures Boxes


Styles and Textures Boxes_POP
Styles and Textures Boxes


Styles Box Arrow_POP
Styles Box Arrow


Active Styles Boxes


Color Switcher_POP
Switcher


Solid Color Boxes_POP
Solid Color Boxes


Link Colors Checkbox Selected_POP
Link Colors Checkbox Selected


Link Colors Checkbox Not Selected_POP
Link Colors Checkbox Not Selected


Flip Example_POP
Flip Example


Mirror Example_POP
Mirror Example


Pixelate Dialog Box_POP
Pixelate Dialog Box


Using the Proof and Auto Proof Buttons_POP
Using the Proof and Auto Proof Buttons

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to see how the new settings affect the original image before you apply them. When you click the Autoproof button [image], the image updates each time you change a setting. If the image is large, Paint Shop Pro operates more slowly when this feature is active.

You may prefer to wait until you have changed one or all the settings before viewing them in the original image. In this case, click the Proof button [image] for a one-time update to the image.


Screen Frequency_POP
Screen Frequency

When working with commercial printers, you may hear the term “screen frequency.” This is the resolution, measured in lines per inch (lpi), of the halftone screens used to reproduce the images. When you are scanning color or greyscale images intended for commercial printing, the general rule is to scan them at 1.5 to 2 times the screen frequency of the printing device.


Photo Toolbar_POP
Photo Toolbar


Web Toolbar_POP
Web Toolbar


Effects Toolbar_POP
Effects Toolbar


Creating a Custom Picture Frame

You can create a picture frame using the steps below. While you are reading these instructions, you may also find it helpful to open a few of the picture frame files in Paint Shop Pro 7 to see how they are designed.

To create a picture frame:

1	Create a new image with a transparent background, and design your picture frame. Note that all areas of the image canvas other than the frame must be transparent.

2	If the content of the frame extends to the edge of all four sides of the image canvas (as seen in the “Aqua Beveled” picture frame installed with the program), skip to step <5>. If the content of the frame does not extend to the edge of all four sides of the image canvas (as seen in the “Round Wood” picture frame), you must create an alpha channel using the frame and the transparent area inside it. The transparent area inside the frame is where the image will appear. When you add a frame containing an alpha channel, the Picture Frame Wizard prompts you to select the color you would like to use to fill the area outside the alpha channel (outside the frame).

3	To create the alpha channel, activate the Magic Wand Selection tool [image], set the Match mode to “All pixels,” the Feather to 0, and the Tolerance to 200, and then click a pixel of the frame to select all non-transparent areas. Next, set the Match mode to “RGB Value,” and hold the <Shift> key while clicking the transparent area within the frame to add it to the current selection.

4	Choose the Selections > Save to Alpha Channel to create the channel. You can use whatever name you wish for the alpha channel or accept the default name offered by the program.

5	Choose Selections > Select None to remove the selection from the image.

6	Choose File > Save As to save the file to the “Frames” sub-folder of the Paint Shop Pro 7 folder. The file must be saved as a “Paint Shop Pro Image (PSP)” file. The filename you use is the name that will appear in the Picture Frame style drop-down list of the Picture Frame Wizard.

7	Using the Paint Shop Pro Browser, open the Frames sub-folder of the Paint Shop Pro 7 folder and rename the extension of the file you saved from PSP to PFR.

The frame is now ready to use in Paint Shop Pro 7.

You can skip step <6> in the future by adding “PFR” as an associated extension with the Paint Shop Pro Image (PSP) format using the File Format Associations preferences dialog box in Paint Shop Pro’s preferences. This will allow you to type “PFR” as the extension when saving the picture frame and eliminate the need to rename the file extension using the Browser.

 Using the File Format Associations Dialog Box


Pop-out Arrow


Automatic Color Balance

Different types of lighting, photographic equipment, and photo processing can cause incorrect coloring in images. Apply the Automatic Color Balance feature to correct the coloring, remove any color cast (bias), and create natural-looking colors in your image. Use it for correcting images with several colors rather than for images with variations of one color.

After you have corrected the color balance, correct the contrast and then the saturation of your image, if necessary.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Automatic Color Balance Dialog Box

To open the Automatic Color Balance dialog box, choose Effects > Enhance Photo > Automatic Color Balance or click the optional Automatic Color Balance toolbar button.

 Using the Automatic Color Balance Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Automatic Contrast Enhancement

 Automatic Saturation Enhancement

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Automatic Color Balance Dialog Box

Use the Automatic Color Balance dialog box to remove the color cast from an image. For example, if you have a photograph that has become yellowed with age, you can remove the yellow and restore the original colors. This feature corrects images with several colors rather than for images with variations of one color.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Correcting Color Balance

To use the dialog box:

1	Use the Strength numeric edit control to set the amount of correction for your image. Start with the default value of 30 and adjust the control until the image looks the most natural.

2	If the image has an overall color cast (a particular color added to all the colors in the image), select the “Remove Color Cast” check box. Note that this may result in some loss of image information.

3	In the “Illuminance Temperature” panel, type a number in the Temperature box or click and drag the slider underneath it to adjust the lighting temperature for the image. The default setting is 6500K, which assumes the photograph was taken in daylight. If the photograph is an indoor scene, use a lower value. If it was taken on a very sunny day, try a higher one.

4	Click the OK button close the dialog box and apply the adjustments.

After you have corrected the color balance of your image, correct the contrast using the Automatic Contrast Enhancement feature and then the saturation using the Automatic Saturation Enhancement feature, if necessary.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Automatic Contrast Enhancement

 Automatic Saturation Enhancement


Automatic Saturation Enhancement

Use the Automatic Saturation Enhancement feature to adjust the saturation, or intensity, of colors in a photograph. The saturation of a color determines its vividness. Saturated colors appear bright and brilliant, like fire-engine red. As the saturation decreases, the colors appear subdued or washed-out.

While this feature has no effect on greyscale images because they have no color, it can be used with sepia or duotone images.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect. (By doing this, all image information is not available and the adjustment may not work correctly.)

Before correcting the saturation of an image, make any necessary corrections to the color balance and then the contrast.

Opening the Automatic Saturation Enhancement Dialog Box

To open the Automatic Saturation Enhancement dialog box, choose Effects > Enhance Photo > Automatic Saturation Enhancement, or click the optional Automatic Saturation Enhancement toolbar button.

 Using the Automatic Saturation Enhancement Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Automatic Color Balance

 Automatic Contrast Enhancement

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Automatic Saturation Enhancement Dialog Box

Use the Automatic Saturation Enhancement dialog box to adjust the saturation of the colors in your image automatically. The saturation of a color determines its vividness. Saturated colors appear bright and brilliant, like fire-engine red.

Because a desaturated color is grey, this feature has no effect on greyscale images. You can, however, use it with sepia or duotone images.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Before correcting the saturation of an image, make any necessary corrections to the color balance and then the contrast.

Adjusting the Saturation

To use the dialog box:

1	In the “Bias” panel, select Normal to use the normal bias of the automatic adjustments. Select Less Colorful or More Colorful to change the bias of the adjustments.

2	In the “Strength” panel, select Normal to use the normal strength of the automatic adjustments. Select Weak to reduce the strength of the adjustments; select Strong to increase the strength of the adjustments.

3	Select the “Skintones Present” check box if there are significant skin tone areas in your image; clear the check box if there are not. This gives your image a more realistic look.

4	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the adjustments.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Automatic Color Balance

 Automatic Contrast Enhancement


Automatic Small Scratch Removal Command

Use this command to remove small scratches from your image. It finds and eliminates small, line-like defects that are either lighter than or darker than the surrounding area.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Automatic Small Scratch Removal Dialog Box

To open the Automatic Small Scratch Removal dialog box, choose Effects > Enhance Photo > Automatic Small Scratch Removal or click the optional Automatic Small Scratch Removal toolbar button.

 Using the Automatic Small Scratch Removal Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Scratch Remover Tool

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Automatic Small Scratch Removal Dialog Box

As its name implies, you can use the Automatic Scratch Removal dialog box to eliminate small scratches that are either lighter or darker than their surroundings.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

1	Select the “Remove dark scratches” check box if you want to remove scratches that are darker than their background automatically. Select the “Remove light scratches” check box if you want to remove scratches that are lighter. You must select at least one of the check boxes, and you can select both.

2	In the “Local contrast limits” panel, set the upper and lower contrast limits using the boxes or sliders. Start by setting them to the top and bottom of the range. If the scratches persist, the Automatic Small Scratch Remover will not remove them. Move the lower limit up to just below the point at which the scratches reappear. Similarly, move the upper limit down to just above the point at which the scratches reappear. This optimizes the removal of scratches while minimizing loss of image detail.

3	In the “Strength” panel, select Normal to use the normal strength of the automatic scratch removal; select Mild to reduce the amount of the scratch removal; select Aggressive to increase the scratch removal. Look at all areas of your image to be sure that important details are not lost.

4	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the correction.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topic

 Scratch Remover Tool


Average Filter

The Average effect is one of several tools you can use to remove noise and specks in an image. Use it when noise is present over the entire image. You can also use it to reduce the effects that appear in dithered colors when you increase the color depth of a paletted image (256 or fewer colors) up to 24 bits.

Note that if the image noise is restricted to specific areas and the areas containing noise are distinctly different from the surrounding areas, you should use the Median filter to correct the image.

 Using the Median Filter Dialog Box

•	Notes: You can apply the Average filter to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Average Dialog Box

To open the Average dialog box, choose Effects > Blur > Average, choose Blur Average in the Effect Browser, or click the optional Blur Average toolbar button.

 Using the Average Dialog Box

Alternatives to this Feature

Soften, Soften More, Blur, Blur More, Gaussian Blur, Median Filter, Despeckle, Salt and Pepper Filter

 Making an Image Look Softer

 Removing Noise from an Image

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Average Dialog Box

Use the Average dialog box to remove noise covering the entire image. You can also use it to remove the dithering caused by increasing the color depth of a paletted image to 24 bits. This feature adjusts the intensity of each pixel to the average intensity of its surrounding pixels.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

The Filter Aperature value indicates the number of pixels around each pixel that are used to determine the average that replaces the pixel.

Using the Average Dialog Box

1	Use the Filter Aperture numeric edit control to select the number of surrounding pixels that are averaged to calculate the adjustment for each pixel. Aperture is always an odd number of pixels squared. Larger values increase noise removal and the smoothing effect, but they may cause loss of detail.

2	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the correction.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Automatic Contrast Enhancement

The Automatic Contrast Enhancement effect maximizes the visible information in an image to reveal all the detail and use all available colors. It adjusts the balance of the highlights, midtones, and shadows and the overall light and intensity of the image.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Before adjusting the contrast of you image, make any necessary adjustments to the color balance.

Opening the Automatic Contrast Enhancement Dialog Box

To open the Automatic Contrast Enhancement dialog box, choose Effects > Enhance Photo > Automatic Contrast Enhancement or click the optional Automatic Contrast Enhancement toolbar button.

 Using the Automatic Contrast Enhancement Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Automatic Color Balance

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Automatic Contrast Enhancement Dialog Box

Use the Automatic Contrast Enhancement dialog box to adjust the balance of the highlights, midtones, and shadows and the overall light and intensity of the image. As a result the image reveals all its detail and uses all available colors.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Before adjusting the contrast of you image, make any necessary adjustments to the color balance.

Correcting Contrast

To use the dialog box:

1	In the “Bias” panel, select Neutral to use the normal bias of the automatic adjustments. Select Lighter or Darker to change the bias of the adjustments.

2	In the “Strength” panel, select Normal to use the normal strength of the automatic adjustments. Select Mild to reduce the strength of the adjustments.

3	In the “Appearance” panel, select Natural to use the normal automatic adjustments to the image’s contents. Select Flat or Bold to change the effect of the adjustments.

4	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the adjustments.

After you have corrected the contrast, correct the saturation, if necessary, using the Automatic Saturation Enhancement feature.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Automatic Color Balance

 Automatic Saturation Enhancement


Deinterlace Filter

Use the Deinterlace command to clean up the scan lines from frames of video images. When a television sends a video signal, the signal updates alternates scan lines in each video frame. When you capture a frame, every second set of lines can either be missing or be out of alignment with the rest of the scan lines. The filter removes the odd or even lines and then reconstructs the missing information.

Because the filter is designed to work directly on a captured image, you should deinterlace an image before resizing it. Also, this filter does not remove noise. Any noise in the image may become more visible after you eliminate the scan lines. If this happens, one of the noise removal effects to improve the image.

•	Notes: The effect does not work on an image containing a selection. Deselect any selections in the image to make the command available.
You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

Opening the Deinterlace Dialog Box

To open the Deinterlace dialog box, choose Effects > Enhance Photo > Deinterlace or click the optional Deinterlace toolbar button.

 Using the Deinterlace Dialog Box

Alternatives to this Features

Edge Preserving Smooth and Texture Preserving Smooth effects – however, they may produce too much loss of detail

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 De-selecting a Selection

 Edge Preserving Smooth Effect

 Texture Preserving Smooth Effect

 Removing Noise from an Image

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Deinterlace Dialog Box

Use the Deinterlace dialog box to remove missing or mis-aligned scan lines from a video image. When a television sends a video signal, the signal updates alternates scan lines in each video frame. When you capture a frame, every second set of lines can either be missing or be out of alignment with the rest of the scan lines. The filter removes the odd or even lines and then reconstructs the missing information.

•	Notes: The effect does not work on an image containing a selection. Deselect any selections in the image to make the command available.
You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

Apply this command before you resize the image. If your image has been resized, zoom in until you can see individual pixels. Determine how many pixels make up one scan line and resize the image so each scan line is only one pixel high. Apply the Deinterlace feature and then return the image to its original size.

Using the Dialog Box

Keep in Mind:

•	Because the filter is designed to work directly on a captured image, you should deinterlace an image before resizing it.

•	Because the filter ignores noise, any noise in the image may become more visible after you eliminate the scan lines. If this happens, apply one of the noise removal effects to the image.

To use the dialog box:

1	In the “Scanlines to retain” panel, select either Odd or Even to determine whether the odd-numbered or even-numbered scan lines are kept. (Usually it makes little difference which you select; text, however, may look better with one rather than the other.)

2	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the correction.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 Removing Noise from an Image

 Increasing an Image to 16 Million Colors (24-Bit)

 De-selecting a Selection


Clarify Command

The Clarify command makes an image look more crisp and focused so that objects stand out.

•	Notes: The effect does not work on an image containing a selection. Deselect any selections in the image to make the command available.
You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

Opening the Clarify Dialog Box

To open the Clarify dialog box, choose Effects > Enhance Photo > Clarify or click the optional Clarify toolbar button.

 Using the Clarify Dialog Box

Alternatives to This Command

The Sharpen, Sharpen More, Edge Enhance, Edge Enhance More, and Unsharp Mask effects can make the edges of an image appear sharper. However, these other effects do not add the same sense of depth and clarity as the Clarify effect.

 Sharpening an Image

 Enhancing the Edges of an Image

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 De-selecting a Selection

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Clarify Dialog Box

Use the Clarify dialog box to sharpen or focus blurred images. It adds a crisp, focused look to an image so that objects stand out.

•	Notes: The effect does not work on an image containing a selection. Deselect any selections in the image to make the command available.
You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

Using the Dialog Box

To use the dialog box:

1	Drag the Strength of Effect numeric edit control to the amount of adjustment.

2	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the adjustment.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 De-selecting a Selection


Removing Red-eye

Use the Red-eye Removal feature to remove the red-eye effect that frequently occurs in photographs of humans and animals. You select the area within an eye and then customize the automatic correction. Because the default settings can automatically correct a wide range of red-eye effects, you may only need to click the eye. You can also use this feature to enhance or change a person or animal's eye color.

•	Notes: The effect does not work on an image containing a selection. Deselect any selections in the image to make the command available.
You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

Opening the Red-eye Removal Dialog Box

To open the Red-eye Removal dialog box, choose Effects > Enhance Photo > Red-eye Removal or click the optional Red-eye Removal toolbar button.

 Using the Red-eye Removal Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 De-selecting a Selection

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Red-eye Removal Dialog Box

Use the Red-eye Removal dialog box to remove the red-eye effect from photographs of humans and animals automatically or manually.

•	Notes: The effect does not work on an image containing a selection. Deselect any selections in the image to make the command available.
You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

To use the dialog box:

1	In the Method drop-down box, select a correction method. The choices are:

•	Auto Human Eye, which automatically selects the correction area and makes the appropriate corrections to a human eye. You can then customize the automatic corrections. If you are correcting human eyes, try this method first.

•	Auto Animal Eye, which automatically selects the correction area and makes the appropriate corrections to an animal eye. You can then customize the automatic corrections. If you are correcting animal eyes, try this method first.

•	Freehand Pupil Outline, where you manually select the correction area using a Freehand selection tool. Use this method for difficult situations, such as a partially obscured eye. You can use it on human and animal eyes.

•	Point-to-Point Pupil outline, where you manually select the correction area using a Point-to-Point Selection tool. Use this method for difficult situations, like a partially obscured eye. You can use it on human and animal eyes.

2	If necessary, use the Zoom In button [image] to get a closer view of the eye(s) in the previews.

3	In the left preview box, select the first eye to correct:

•	If you are using the Auto Human Eye or the Auto Animal Eye method, click anywhere inside the "red" area of the eye. This automatically selects the eye. (You can also click and drag from the center of the red-eye area to its outside edge to select it.)

•	If you are using the Freehand Pupil Outline method, left-click and hold the mouse button anywhere on the edge of the red-eye area. Drag the cursor to outline the area to be corrected. When you return to the starting point, release the mouse to create the selection.

•	If you are using the Point-to-Point Pupil Outline method, left-click anywhere on the edge of the red-eye area. Move the cursor a few pixels around the edge of the area and click again. Continue moving and clicking the cursor until the area is outlined. (You can right-click to reverse a click.) When you return to the starting point, double-click to create the selection.

A control box appears around the selected eye area, and the right preview box displays the corrected image.

•	Note: You can click the Undo Eye button, press <Ctrl> + <Z>, or right-click to remove a selection and start over.

4	Be sure the selection is positioned and sized properly over the red-eye area. To resize the selection, click and drag any of the control handles on the control box, or press <Alt> + <Page Up> to increase the size or <Alt> + <Page Down> to decrease the size. To move the selection, drag it to the new location or press <Alt> + any Arrow key.

5	If you are using the Auto Animal Eye method, you can drag the center rotation handle to rotate the selection. Note that with the Auto Animal Eye method, the selection can be reshaped to an ellipse by pulling on its edges.

6	If you are correcting a human eye, look at the corrected eye in the right preview box to see if you need to add an iris area around the pupil. Skip this step if the iris is visible or you are correcting an animal eye. (An animal eye usually does not show an iris). Use the numeric edit controls to add an iris to the corrected eye as follows:

•	Use the Iris size control to set the size of the iris.

•	In the Hue drop-down box, click the down arrow and select the correct hue.

•	In the Color drop-down box, click the down arrow to display thumbnails of the color variations. Click a thumbnail to select it.

Note: When the diameter of the red-eye area is under 5 pixels, any eye color you choose will be difficult to see. You can remove the red-eye using the default grey hue. If you want to add a hint of color to the eye, resample (resize) the image to four times its original size, correct the red-eye using an iris color, and then return the image to its original size.

7	Determine if the pupil should be lighter or darker. If necessary, lower the value in the Pupil lightness control to darken the pupil or raise the value to lighten it.

8	Create a natural looking the glint in the eye using the following controls:

•	Use the Glint size value to set the size of the glint.

•	Lower the Glint lightness value to darken the glint; raise the value to lighten it.

•	If the position of the glint appears unnatural, select the Center glint check box to move the glint to the center of the pupil. Clear it to leave the position unchanged.

9	If the eye is partially obscured in the original image, adjust the shape of the corrected eye to match it. For example, if the eyelid covers part of the original eye, it should cover it in the corrected eye. Use the Refine Slider to reduce the correction. Slowly drag the slider to the left to reduce the correction and minimize its overlap with the surrounding skin. If the eye does not correct properly, you may need to click the Undo Eye button and create a Freehand Pupil Outline or the Point-to-Point Pupil Outline selection.

10	If necessary, make the following adjustments to blend the eye correction with its surroundings:

•	Add a Feather value to make the edge of the corrected eye less pronounced.

•	If the photo is grainy, use the Blur to blend the eye with the surrounding pixels. Increase the setting one unit at a time until the eye blends naturally with the rest of the image.

11	The eye should now be completely corrected. If you need to correct another eye, repeat these steps. The controls retain their settings from the first correction. When you select the next eye, the previously-corrected eye still has a circle around it. You can click this circle to make further corrections to the eye.

12	After you have made the corrections, click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply them.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. In the box on the left, you select the area of the eye to correct. The box on the right updates as you make the corrections. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over the box on the right (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 De-selecting a Selection

 Changing the Image Size


Fade Correction

Use this feature to restore color and contrast to photographs that have faded. The dyes used in photographic prints can fade over time, especially when prints are exposed to light. Also, because different colors of dyes fade at different rates, the photos can develop a color cast (bias), where one color predominates.

If your photograph is a faded black and white photograph, there are no colors to correct. Restore the photograph using the Automatic Contrast Enhancement feature.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Fade Correction Dialog Box

To open the Fade Correction dialog box, choose Effects > Enhance Photo > Fade Correction or click the optional Fade Correction toolbar button.

 Using the Fade Correction Dialog Box

Alternatives to this Features

Fade Correction is designed as a quick and simple one-step adjustment of color and contrast. You may get better results by applying the sequence of:

1	 Automatic Color Balance,

2	 Automatic Contrast Enhancement, and

3	 Automatic Saturation Enhancement.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Fade Correction Dialog Box

With time and exposure to the elements, especially light, the dyes in a photograph can fade. Colors become less vivid, the image can acquire an undesirable color cast, and contrast can be lost. Use the Fade Correction dialog box to restore color and contrast to a faded photographic image.

The dialog box has no effect on black and white images because they contain no colors.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To use the dialog box:

1	Use the Amount of Correction numeric edit control to select the amount of correction for your image. Start with the default of 45, and increase or decrease the value until the image looks the most natural. If you notice loss of detail in the areas of highlight or shadow, reduce the amount of correction.

2	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the adjustments.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Manual Color Correction Command

Use the Manual Color Correction feature to make color changes to an image or to create a variety of unusual effects. This feature adjusts colors based on the hue, saturation and lightness (though it does not use the HSL color space).

This adjustment is useful when it is particularly important to get some color, such as a skin tone or a corporate logo, exactly right. It is also effective for images with grossly incorrect colors.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Manual Color Correction Dialog Box

To open the Manual Color Correction dialog box, choose Effects > Enhance Photo > Manual Color Correction or click the optional Manual Color Correction toolbar button.

 Using the Manual Color Correction Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Manual Color Correction Dialog Box

Use the Manual Color Correction dialog box to make color changes to an image or to create a variety of unusual effects. This feature adjusts colors based on the hue, saturation and lightness (though it does not use the HSL color space).

To shift the hues:

1	Define a source hue to shift from (select an area of the image), and then

2	Select a target hue to shift to (set the average color of the area to a color you choose).

All the pixels in the image containing the source hue are shifted to the target hue. All the remaining colors in the photo adapt to the selected color and shift to appropriate hues.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

The preview area in this dialog box is different from the Jasc standard preview area. Use the left preview box to make a color selection. Use the navigation buttons and the right preview box to adjust both previews.

To make manual color corrections:

1	In the left preview box, define the area of the source color (the color to shift from) by making a selection that includes the source color(s). Click to select one pixel, drag to select a rectangular area, or select the “Freehand Selection” check box and then drag to outline an irregularly shaped area. To change your selection, click the Clear Selection button or click the preview outside the selection area.

•	Note: If you left-click to select one pixel, you may want to zoom in to be sure you select the correct color. If the selection is mostly one color, you do not have to be very accurate with your selection area. The colors of the selected pixels are averaged to create the source color. This source color is shifted (adjusted,) and all other colors in the image are shifted accordingly.

2	To select the target color that you want to shift to, use the Preset Colors drop-down box or the Custom Color box. Do any of the following:

•	In the Color Category drop down list, select a category. Then, click the arrow in the Preset Colors box to display the preset colors of the category and select a target color.

•	Left-click the Custom Color box to open the Color dialog box, and choose a color.

•	Right-click the Custom Color box to open the Recent Colors dialog box, and choose a color.

•	Move the cursor to any open image. When the cursor changes to the Dropper, click to select a color.

The Color Category list includes a variety of frequently occurring colors. Particularly important ones include the following:

•	MEMORY COLORS People remember these colors particularly well and are sensitive to errors in them. Some examples are skin tones (Skintones category), vegetation (Foliage and Grasses categories), sky (Sky category) and foodstuffs (Beverages, Fruits, Various Foods and Vegetables categories).

•	STANDARD COLORS Use this set of colors to make subtle changes in hue. When you select a specific color as the source color, the “Nearest standard color in selection” data field below the left preview box displays a number for the color that is the closest match to the source color. The number represents one of the preset colors in this category. If you select a preset color that is close to this color number, you can subtly shift the hue of an image or a previously selected area. If you select a preset color that is farther from this color number, you can shift the hue dramatically.

•	USER COLORS Use this category for adding your own colors to the preset colors. This can be useful when you have several photos of a person taken under different conditions and you want to achieve a consistent skin tone in all the photos. It can also be useful if you want to correct the same color bias in several pictures. If a group of images or photos has something in common, you can correct one, store an appropriate user color, and then apply it to each of the images.

 Adding and Editing User Colors

3	In the Options panel, select the “Preserve lightness” and/or “Preserve saturation” check boxes to retain the existing saturation and lightness. Clear the check boxes to adjust them.

•	Notes: Normally, both these check boxes should be selected so that only the color component changes. However, you can clear either one or both of them to create a different effect. If you have already adjusted the contrast, you should select the “Preserve lightness” check box; if you have already adjusted the saturation, you should select both check boxes.

4	An alternative to step 2 is to use the Gray World button to adjust the image color. When you click this button, any selection you have made in the left preview box clears, and the entire image is selected. The “Preserve saturation” check box clears, the “Preserve lightness” check box is selected, and the Preset Color automatically becomes a medium grey.

The source color becomes the average of all the colors in the image (which is typically grey), and the target color is set at a balanced shade of grey. This works because the colors in many outdoor scenes, when averaged over the entire image, have grey as the mean value.

5	After making all your adjustments, click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the adjustments.

General Dialog Box Controls

Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Jasc Color Dialog Box


Histogram Adjustment

Use the Histogram Adjustment feature to adjust the contrast of your image by adjusting the histogram. This brings out details in the image without losing important information.

You may want to display the Histogram window while you are using this dialog box. Then, if you use the Auto-Proof feature while adjusting the histogram, you can see the changes in the Histogram window.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Before opening the dialog box, be sure your monitor is set up correctly in terms of contrast, brightness, and gamma.

Opening the Histogram Adjustment Dialog Box

To open the Histogram Adjustment dialog box, choose Color > Histogram Functions > Histogram Adjustment, press <Shift> + <Ctrl> + <H>, or click the optional Histogram Adjustment toolbar button.

 Using the Histogram Adjustment Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Monitor Gamma Preferences

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Histogram Adjustment Dialog Box

Use the Histogram Adjustment dialog box to adjust the contrast of your image by adjusting the histogram. This brings out details in the image without losing important information.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Note the following about the dialog box:

•	The histogram appears in the center. It displays the graph for the component selected in the Edit box. The horizontal axis represents values from 0 to 255. The vertical axis represents values from 0 to X.

•	The adjustment options appear around the histogram. Because dialog boxes retain their last settings, you may want to click the Reset button [image] to set all the settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

•	To zoom in and out on the view of the histogram, use the Magnification buttons [image]. The 1:1 Button resets the histogram to the original size.

To use the dialog box:

1	In the Edit drop-down box, select the color component you want to adjust. The options are Luminosity, Red, Green, and Blue. If you are correcting contrast, start by adjusting the Luminosity, which shows values of lightness from darkest on the left (0) to lightest on the right (255).

2	Look for a gap between the left edge of the histogram window and the point where the graph values start to rise. This gap shows that the darkest pixels in the image are not completely black. Click and drag the black Low value triangle slider [image] to the point where the graph rises. As you move the triangle slider, the values in the Low value boxes below the triangle slider change. The top box displays the position of the slider as an intensity from 0 to 255; the bottom box displays the percentage of pixels that are contained between 0 and the Low value, whose contrast will be lost. As a general rule, keep the percentage below 0.1%. The position of the slider defines a “lower clip limit.”

3	On the right side of the histogram window, look for a gap between the point where the graph values end and the right edge of the window. Click and drag the white High value triangle slider [image] to the upper end of the graph values. This changes the lightest pixels in the image to white by changing the “upper clip limit.” As a general rule, keep the High value percentage below 0.1%.

4	If the overall image is too dark or too light, adjust the Gamma triangle slider [image]. If the image is too dark, drag the triangle slider to the right; if it is too light, drag the triangle slider to the left. As you move the slider, the Gamma number below it changes. (Gamma is a standard measure of change in an image's contrast and this slider balances the shadows and highlights in the image.) As you move the slider to the right and increase the Gamma, the image lightens and shadow details increase, but highlight details may be lost. As you move the slider to the left and decrease the Gamma, the image darkens and highlight details increase, but shadow details may be lost.

•	Note: When the majority of the graph values peaks on the left, the image needs brightening. When the majority of the graph values peaks on the right, the image needs darkening.

5	If the graph still has peaks on the left and the right sides and contains low points in the center, or has low points on the sides with a peak in the center, you need to balance the midtones relative to shadows and highlights. Use the Midtones slider on the right side of the histogram to make this adjustment as follows:

•	If the graph has peaks on the left and right sides, the midtones contain little information and should be compressed. Shadows and highlights should be expanded to reveal the information they contain. This often occurs in flash photographs when a subject is too close to the camera. The subject appears brightly illuminated, but the background of the photo is very dark. To compress the midtones, click and drag the Midtones slider up.

•	If the graph peaks in the center and has low values at the left (dark) and right (light) sides, the midtones should be expanded. To expand the midtones, drag the Midtones slider down.

6	If you are trying to improve the visible information in your image, your adjustments are now complete. The line on the histogram shows the changes that will be applied to the image values. To interpret the line, use the ToolTip that appears as you move the cursor over the histogram.

7	If you are improving your image, skip this step. If you are using the Histogram Adjustment feature to create artistic effects, use the Output Max and Min buttons on the left side of the histogram to make further adjustments. To darken the image whites, click and drag the Max button [image] down. To lighten the image blacks, click and drag the Min button [image] up.

•	Note: You can use these sliders to create a pastel, low-contrast image that can be used as a background for a Web page or a watermark for a document.

8	If you want to adjust a different color component, select the color component in the Edit drop-down box and return to step 3. Otherwise, click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the adjustments.

•	Note: You can create exotic variations of an image by editing the individual Red, Green or Blue components of the image rather than working with Luminosity. Correcting the image by individually manipulating the Red, Green and Blue channels is, however, rather tricky.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Removing Noise

Noise refers to random patterns of pixels that give an image a grainy or textured appearance. Paint Shop Pro provides several methods for removing unwanted noise in an image. It also has an effect that creates noise.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Removing Noise

Paint Shop Pro contains the following noise removal commands:

•	Despeckle, which removes single-pixels specks that are black or white,

•	Edge Preserving Smooth, which smoothes an image without loss of edge detail,

•	Median Filter, which removes noise that is grouped in areas of the image and distinctly different from its surroundings,

•	Salt and Pepper Filter, which removes black and white specks that are larger than one pixel, and

•	Texture Preserving Smooth, which smoothes an image without loss of texture detail.

 Edge Preserving Smooth

 Median Filter

 Salt and Pepper Filter

 Texture Preserving Smooth

To remove large areas of unwanted information, use the Clone brush.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Cloning Part of an Image

 Using the Effect Browser

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Median Filter

Use this command to remove small, random areas of noise where the noise is distinctly different from the surrounding area. This feature adjusts the intensity of each pixel in the image to the median intensity of its surrounding pixels. Because you control how many surrounding pixels are used to determine the median intensity, you can correct different-sized defects.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Median Filter Dialog Box

To open the Median Filter dialog box, choose Effects > Noise > Median Filter, choose Median Filter in the Effect Browser, or click the optional Median Filter toolbar button.

 Using the Median Filter Dialog Box

Alternatives to this Features

•	Despeckle, which removes white or black single-pixel specks,

•	Salt and Pepper Filter, which removes white or black specks of various sizes, and

•	Average, which removes noise from the entire image.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Median Filter Dialog Box

Use the Median Filter dialog box to remove small, random areas of noise where the noise is distinctly different from the surrounding area of the image. The feature adjusts the intensity of each pixel to the median intensity of its surrounding pixels. Because you control the number of surrounding pixels that are used to determine the median intensity, you can correct different-sized defects.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

The Filter Aperature value indicates the number of pixels around each pixel that are used to determine the median that replaces the pixel. Pixels that are very different from surrounding pixels are affected more than those similar to surrounding pixels.

This correction preserves object edges. While larger Aperature values increase the amount of noise removal, they may cause loss of detail.

Using the Median Filter Dialog Box

1	Use the Filter Aperture numeric edit control to select the number of surrounding pixels that are included in calculating the median adjustment for each pixel. Aperture is always an odd number of pixels squared. Every pixel is adjusted the same way; however, the amount of adjustment is determined by how different a pixel is from its surrounding pixels.

2	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the correction.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser


Edge Preserving Smoothing Filter

Use this command to remove noise in an image without losing edge details. This feature finds details that may be object edges and leaves these areas unchanged while smoothing the areas between the edges. For example, edges of facial features may be preserved while removing a blotchy complexion. This feature is also good for minimizing film grain.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Edge Preserving Smooth Dialog Box

To open the Edge Preserving Smooth dialog box, choose Effects > Noise > Edge Preserving Smooth, choose Edge Preserving Smooth in the Effect Browser, or click the optional Edge Preserving Smooth toolbar button.

 Using the Edge Preserving Smooth Dialog Box

Other Noise Removal Commands

•	Despeckle, which removes single-pixels specks that are black or white,

•	Median Filter, which removes noise that is grouped in areas of the image and distinctly different from its surroundings,

•	Salt and Pepper Filter, which removes black and white specks that are larger than one pixel, and

•	Texture Preserving Smooth, which smoothes an image without loss of texture detail.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 About the Texture Preserving Smooth Filter

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Edge Preserving Smooth Dialog Box

Use the Edge Preserving Smooth dialog box to smooth an image without losing edge details. For example, smooth a blotchy complexion while preserving the facial features. The effect is similar to that of the Texture Preserving Smooth filter, but this filter preserves edges, while the other filter preserves textures.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To use the dialog box:

1	Use the Amount of Smoothing numeric edit control to set the strength of the correction. As you increase the value, the weakest, least perceptible edges begin to disappear. If you set too high a value, areas within edges start to look flat.

2	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the correction.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 About the Texture Preserving Smooth Filter


Texture Preserving Smooth Filter

Use the Texture Preserving Smooth filter to eliminate noise in an image while preserving the details in textures. For example, smooth a person’s face while retaining the details of his sweater. The effect is similar to that of the Edge-Preserving Smooth filter, but this filter preserves area of texture, while the other filter preserves edges.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Texture Preserving Smooth Dialog Box

To open the Texture Preserving Smooth dialog box, choose Effects > Noise > Texture Preserving Smooth, choose Texture Preserving Smooth in the Effect Browser, or click the optional Texture Preserving Smooth toolbar button.

 Using the Texture Preserving Smooth Dialog Box

Other Noise Removal Commands

•	Despeckle, which removes single-pixels specks that are black or white,

•	Edge Preserving Smooth, which smoothes an image without loss of edge detail,

•	Median Filter, which removes noise that is grouped in areas of the image and distinctly different from its surroundings, and

•	Salt and Pepper Filter, which removes black and white specks that are larger than one pixel.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Using the Edge Preserving Smooth Filter

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Texture Preserving Smooth Dialog Box

Use the Text Preserving Smooth dialog box to eliminate noise in an image while preserving the details in textures. For example, smooth a person’s face while retaining the details of his sweater. The effect is similar to that of the Edge-Preserving Smooth filter, but this filter preserves area of texture, while the other filter preserves edges.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To use the dialog box:

1	Use the Amount of Correction numeric edit control to set the strength of the correction. At lower amounts, textured areas are preserved but little noise is removed. At higher amounts, more noise is removed, but textured areas may be degraded.

2	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the correction.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Edge Preserving Smooth Filter


Salt and Pepper Command

Use this feature to remove black or white specks, such as those produced by dust, from a photograph. The tool determines what is a light or dark speck compared to its surroundings and eliminates it.

This tool may not be able to differentiate between a speck and an intentional detail, such as an eye, in an image with fine details. To avoid removing the details, create a selection of the area containing the specks before using this tool.

•	Notes: This command works best if you create a selection of the area containing the specks before choosing the command.
You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

Opening the Salt and Pepper Dialog Box

To open the Salt and Pepper dialog box, choose Effects > Noise > Salt and Pepper Filter, choose Salt and Pepper Filter in the Effect Browser, or click the optional Salt and Pepper Filter toolbar button.

 Using the Salt and Pepper Filter Dialog box

Alternatives to this Features

•	Despeckle, which removes single-pixels specks that are black or white, and

•	Median Filter, which removes noise that is grouped in areas of the image and distinctly different from its surroundings.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Using the Effect Browser

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Salt and Pepper Dialog Box
Salt and Pepper Filter Dialog Box

Use the Salt and Pepper Filter dialog box to remove black or white specks from an image, such as those caused by dust on film or video. This feature compares each pixel to its surrounding pixels to determine whether it is a speck or part of the image. If the pixel is determined to be a speck, it is adjusted.

This command works best if you create a selection of the area containing the specks before choosing the command.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To use the dialog box:

1	Use the Speck Size numeric edit control to set the size, in pixels, of the largest speck that can be completely removed. It is always an odd number. By setting it to the minimum size required you can speed up the filter operation.

2	Use the Sensitivity to Specks control to set how different the speck pixels must be from the pixels surrounding them before they are removed. Increasing the value causes more of the image to be considered as a possible speck.

3	Select the “Include all lower speck sizes” check box to remove all specks composed of fewer pixels than the “Speck Size” value. While this can produce a much cleaner image, it does cause the filter to operate more slowly.

4	Select the “Aggressive action” check box to increase the strength of the correction. Depending on the content of the image, it may improve or degrade the image.

5	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the correction.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Removing JPEG Artifacts

This feature removes artifacts caused by excessive JPEG compression. An artifact can be a checkerboard pattern that is visible in smooth areas, color leakage beyond the edges of objects, blocky-looking areas, and the like. Because JPEG compression is lossy (and so discards image information), there are limits to how well the image can be restored.

•	Notes: The effect does not work on an image containing a selection. Deselect any selections in the image to make the command available.
You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

Opening the JPEG Artifact Removal Dialog Box

To open the JPEG Artifact Removal dialog box, choose Effects > Enhance Photo > JPEG Artifact Removal or click the optional JPEG Artifact Removal toolbar button.

 Using the JPEG Artifact Removal Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 De-selecting a Selection

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


JPEG Artifact Removal Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to remove artifacts caused by compressing JPEG files too often or too much. An artifact can be a checkerboard pattern that is visible in smooth areas, color leakage beyond the edges of objects, blocky-looking areas, and the like. Because JPEG compression is lossy (and so discards image information), there are limits to how well the image can be restored.

•	Notes: The effect does not work on an image containing a selection. Deselect any selections in the image to make the command available.
You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.

To use the dialog box”

1	In the “Strength” panel, select Normal to use the normal strength of the automatic correction. Select Low, High, or Maximum to change the strength of the correction. To determine the best option, examine all areas of the image.

2	Use the Restore Crispness numeric edit control to select the amount of correction for the image. Start with the default of 50, and then adjust the value until the image looks the most natural. This setting determines how much fine-detail information the artifact remover should attempt to create. Note that it can only be a guess because the original information is lost. Too high a value may produce fine dots in the image.

3	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the correction.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 De-selecting a Selection


Removing Moiré Patterns

Scanning printed images can produce undesirable patterns in the scan. Use the Moiré Pattern Removal feature to remove these patterns, as well as patterns from photographs printed on textured paper.

Example

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

Opening the Moiré Pattern Removal Dialog Box

To open the Moiré Pattern Removal dialog box, choose Effects > Enhance Photo > Moiré Pattern Removal or click the optional Moiré Pattern Removal toolbar button.

 Using the Moiré Pattern Removal Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Moiré Pattern Removal Dialog Box

Use the Moiré Pattern Removal dialog box to remove undesirable patterns produced in a scanned image as well as patterns from photographs printed on textured paper.

•	Notes: You can apply this effect to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the command available.
To apply the effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To use the dialog box:

1	Zoom in to enlarge the previews until you can see the fine patterns clearly.

2	Adjust the Fine details numeric edit control until the pattern just disappears. (In some cases it may be possible to smooth this pattern more severely and then sharpen the image to restore detail without bringing the pattern back.)

3	Use the Zoom-Out button to reduce the image until you can see bands or color blotches. They should be visible at a 1:1 zoom ratio and pronounced at a 1:3 ratio.

4	Increase the Remove Bands control in small increments until the color bands or “blobs” are less visible. Although they may not disappear completely, they should be less visible.

5	Click the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the correction.

Because this filter does a considerable amount of processing, it may operate more slowly if your image is large.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Related Topic

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color


Making Image Softer
Making an Image Softer

The Blur effects are filters that smooth transitions and decrease contrast by averaging the pixels next to hard edges of defined lines and areas where there are significant color transitions. The Soften filter applies a uniform blur to an image. Use it for photo retouching. The Soften More filter applies the effect with more intensity.

You can apply the Blur and Soften filters to an image to reduce its graininess. If you apply the filters repeatedly, you can produce motion effects.

•	Notes: You can apply effects to greyscale and 24-bit color images. If necessary, increase the color depth of your image to make the commands available.
To apply an effect to a selection, create the selection before choosing the effect.

To apply a Blur effect, choose Image > Blur > the effect or select it using the Effect browser or optional toolbar button. The Gaussian Blur and Average commands open dialog boxes so that you can apply the effects with more control.

 Using the Gaussian Blur Dialog Box

 Using the Average Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Adding and Editing User Colors

Adding a Color

To add a User Color to the Manual Color Correction dialog box:

1	Set the color in the Custom Color box and click the Add User Color button. The Add User Colors dialog box opens.

2	In the Name box, type up to 10 characters to name the color.

3	In the Description box, type up to 256 characters for a description of the color (optional). Use the Enter key to add multiple lines.

4	Click the Add button to add the color and close the dialog box. The color appears in the Preset Colors box for the User Colors category.

Editing a Color

To edit a user color:

1	Select the color to edit in the Preset Colors box and click the Edit User Colors button. The Edit User Colors dialog box opens.

2	Edit the properties of the color and click the OK button to save the changes and close the dialog box.

3	Click the Delete button to delete the selected color. Click Cancel button to close the dialog box without saving the color changes.

Changes to the User Colors are retained when you close the Manual Color Correction dialog box by clicking the OK button. The changes are discarded if you use the Cancel button.

 Using the Manual Color Correction Dialog Box


Add User Colors Dialog Box
Add User Color Dialog Box


Edit User Colors Dialog Box_POP
Edit User Colors Dialog Box


Automatic Color Balance Example_POP
Automatic Color Balance Example


Automatic Color Balance_db_POP
Automatic Color Balance Dialog Box


Automatic Saturation Enhancement Dialog Box_POP
Automatic Saturation Enhancement Dialog Box


Automatic Saturation Enhancement Example_POP
Automatic Saturation Enhancement Example


Automatic Scratch Removal Dialog Box _POP
Automatic Small Scratch Removal Dialog Box


Average Dialog Box_pop
Average Dialog Box


Automatic Contrast Enhancement Dialog Box_POP
Automatic Contrast Enhancement Dialog Box


Deinterlace Example_POP
Deinterlace Example


Deinterlace Dialog Box_POP
Deinterlace Dialog Box


Clarify Dialog Box_POP
Clarify Dialog Box


Example of Red-eye Removal


Red-eye Removal Dialog Box_POP
Red-eye Removal Dialog Box


Control Box Around Selected Eye and the Corrected Eye
Control Box around Selected Eye and Corrected Eye


Fade Correction Example_POP
Fade Correction Example


Fade Correction Dialog Box_POP
Fade Correction Dialog Box


Manual Color Correction Example_POP
Manual Color Correction Example


Manual Color Correction Dialog Box_POP
Manual Color Correction Dialog Box


Color Category and Preset Color Boxes_POP
Color Category and Preset Color Boxes


Refine Slider


Histogram Adjustment Example_POP
Histogram Adjustment Example


Histogram Adjustment Dialog Box_POP
Histogram Adjustment Dialog Box


Histogram Window Graph_POP
Histogram Window Graph


Histogram Midtones Slider_POP
Histogram Midtones Slider


ToolTip Information_POP
ToolTip Information

The ToolTip displays the following information:

•	Input, which is the value on the horizontal axis,

•	Count, which is the number of pixels having that Input value (i.e. X),

•	Integral, which is the percentage of pixels in the image with that Input value, and

•	Output, which is the value on the vertical axis.

The Output value is also what the Input value would change to if you were to click the OK button to save the changes.


Median Dialog Box _POP
Median Filter Dialog Box


Edge Preserving Smooth Dialog Box_POP
Edge Preserving Smooth Dialog Box


Texture Preserving Smooth Dialog Box_POP
Texture Preserving Smooth Dialog Box


Salt and Pepper Filter Dialog Box_POP
Salt and Pepper Filter Dialog Box


JPEG Artifact Removal Example_POP
JPEG Artifact Removal Example


JPEG Artifact Removal Dialog Box_POP
JPEG Artifact Removal Dialog Box


Example of Moiré Pattern Removal

          Before                      After


Moiré Pattern Removal Dialog Box_POP
Moiré Pattern Removal Dialog Box


Median_POP
Median

The median is the midpoint intensity of all the surrounding pixels.


Adjust Channel Mixer Command

Use this command to increase or decrease a color channel by a percentage of itself and the other two channels.

Opening the Channel Mixer Dialog Box

To open the Channel Mixer dialog box, choose Colors > Adjust > Channel Mixer or click the optional toolbar button.

 Using the Channel Mixer Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Increasing an Image to 24-Bit Color

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Channel Mixer Dialog Box

Use the Channel Mixer dialog box to increase or decrease a color channel by a percentage of itself and the other two channels.

•	Notes: To use the Channel Mixer command on a selection, the image must be a 24-bit color image.
To limit the adjustment to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Using the Channel Mixer Dialog Box

To use the dialog box:

1	Select a color channel to edit from the Output channel drop-down box. Your choices are Red, Green, and Blue.

2	If you want to create a greyscale image, select the Monochrome check box. This sets the Output channel to black. You can then move the Source channel sliders. They set the percentage of each channel used for the greyscale value of the final image.

3	The Source Channels are used to define the current channel you are editing. For example, if you select the Red channel in the Output channel drop-down box and then set the Red slider to 50, you reduce the amount of red in the image to 50% of its original amount.

4	The Constant slider brightens and darkens the image across all the channels. The default of 0 is the original setting.

Related Topics

 Increasing Color Depth

 Creating a Selection


Adjust Color Balance Command

Use the Color Balance adjustment command to alter the image by shifting the balance of a color and its opposite on the color wheel. There are three pairs: cyan and red, magenta and green, and yellow and blue. Increasing the amount of one decreases the amount of its opposite. You can adjust the balance in each of the three tonal ranges.

Opening the Adjust Color Balance Dialog Box

To open the Adjust Color Balance dialog box, choose Colors > Adjust > Color Balance or click the optional toolbar button.

 Using the Adjust Color Balance Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Color Balance Dialog Box

Use the Color Balance dialog box to shift the balance of a color and its opposite on the color wheel. There are three pairs: cyan and red, magenta and green, and yellow and blue. Increasing the amount of one decreases the amount of its opposite. This dialog box contains two panels, one for tone balance, the other for color balance.

•	Notes: To use the Color Balance command on a selection, the image must be a 24-bit color image.
To limit the adjustment to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

About the Panels

Tone Balance Panel

The “Tone balance” panel displays the lightness levels, or tonal ranges, of colors to adjust. While you adjust each tonal range individually, you can adjust all three. They are:

•	The Shadows option, which refers to the colors at the dark end of the lightness scale,

•	The Midtones option, which refers to the colors in the middle range, and

•	The Highlights option, which refers to the colors at the bright end of the scale.

Color Balance Panel

The “Color balance” panel contains the pairs of colors whose balance you shift. The box on the left displays the cyan/red balance. The middle box displays the magenta/green balance. The box at the right displays the yellow/blue balance.

Adjusting the Color Balance

To use the Color Balance dialog box:

1	In the “Tone balance” panel select which lightness level to adjust.

2	Select or clear the “Preserve luminosity” check box. Default is selected and luminosity is preserved.

3	Use the sliders or type values in the three Color levels boxes at the top to set the color balance. When the boxes display 0 and the sliders are in the middle, the image contains its original colors. Increase the amount of one color to decrease the amount of its opposite.

4	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the settings.

Related Topics

 Increasing Color Depth

 Creating a Selection


Adjust Curves Command

The Adjust Curves command is similar to the Levels adjustment in that you use it to adjust lightness values. However, with Curves, you can the change any lightness value on the 0-255 scale.

Opening the Curves Dialog Box

To open the Curves dialog box, choose Colors > Adjust > Curves or click the optional toolbar button.

 Using the Curves Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Curves Adjust Dialog Box

Use the Curves dialog box to map any brightness value to a new value. This dialog box gives you more flexibility than the Levels dialog box because you can edit any value on the 0 to 255 (black to white) scale.

•	Notes: To use the Curves command on a selection, the image must be 24-bit color.
To limit the adjustment to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor becomes a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Using the Dialog Box

The graph charts the relationship between the input and output levels. At the lower left of the chart, both values are 0 (black). At the upper right, both values are 255 (white).

Select a channel to edit from Channel drop-down box. You can edit all the R/G/B values simultaneously or select a single channel.

You can change lightness values by entering numbers in the numeric edit control or dragging the graph line and adding a point to it. To use the numeric edit control, enter an input value and the new output value.

To add a point to the graph line, move the cursor over line. When the cursor changes to an arrowhead and displays “+add,’” click to add the point. You can then drag the point to a new location or use the numeric edit control to move it to a new brightness value. You can add up to 16 points.

You can also drag a point along the line to substitute values. To remove a point, drag it to the top or bottom of the graph and release the mouse.

Related Topics

 Increasing Color Depth

 Creating a Selection


Adjust Levels Command

Use the Adjust Levels command to reset the darkest and lightest values on the lightness scale (0 to 255) and to adjust the midrange of colors.

Opening the Levels Dialog Box

To open the Levels dialog box, choose Colors > Adjust > Levels or click the optional toolbar button.

 Using the Adjust Levels Dialog Box

Related Topics

 About the Histogram

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Adjust Levels Dialog Box

Use the Levels dialog box to map the brightness values in the image to new values. The original values are the input values; the new values are the output values.

In the Channel drop-down box, select the color channel to edit. You can edit all the R/G/B values simultaneously or select a single channel.

•	Notes: To use the Levels command on a selection, the image must be a 24-bit color image.
To limit the adjustment to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Input Levels

Modify the Input levels to darken the darkest values and lighten the lightest values. This increases the contrast in the image. The Input levels boxes correspond to the diamonds on the slider underneath them. The box and diamond on the left represent a lightness value of 0. The middle box and diamond control the gamma curve. The box and diamond on the right represent a lightness value of 255.

Type values in the boxes or drag the diamonds to set new levels. As you increase the value in the left box, all lightness levels in the image lower than the new value are set to 0 (black). As you decrease the value in the right box, all lightness values in the image higher than this value are set to 255 (white).

Change the gamma value to reset the lightness of medium grey and alter the center of light balance.

Output Levels

The Output levels modify the edited Input values to another set of brightness values. Modify the levels to lighten the darkest pixels and darken the lightest pixels. You set the lowest range and highest range for brightness levels.

The Output levels boxes correspond to the diamonds on the slider underneath it. The box and diamond on the left represent the minimum (darkest) value in the image. As you increase this value, all levels in the image below it are set to the new level (lightened). The box and diamond on the right represent the maximum (lightest) value. As you decrease this value, all levels in the image above it are set to the new level (darkened).

You can also use the Output levels to invert an image by dragging the black diamond to the right (or typing a high number in the box), and then dragging the clear diamond to the left of the black one (or typing a low number in the box).

Using the Keyboard to Control Slider

The Input and Output Levels values and sliders can be controlled by keyboard input. Press the Up (↑) and Down (↓) Arrow keys to increase and decrease the values by one unit. Press the Page Up and Page Down keys to increase and decrease the values by 10 units. Press the Home key to increase a value to its maximum valid number and the End key to lower it to its minimum valid number. For the gamma level, the Up (↑) and Down (↓) Arrow keys move the value by .01; the Page Up and Page Down keys move it by .10.

Related Topics

 About the Histogram

 Adjusting the Image Gamma

 Increasing Color Depth

 Creating a Selection


Adjusting Hue, Saturation, and Lightness

We perceive color in terms of its hue, saturation, and luminance. Hue refers to tint, saturation to the purity of the hue, and luminance to its brightness. Altering these three characteristics changes the color we see.

The Hue function shifts all the pixels in an image around the color wheel to a different point. If you change the red pixels to green, the green pixels will turn to blue and the yellow pixels to cyan. Adjusting the hue is the last step in creating a duotone image.

The Saturation function alters the amount of grey in a color. The level of grey increases as the saturation decreases.

The Lightness function alters the intensity of light.

Opening the Hue/Saturation/Lightness Dialog Box

To open the Hue/Saturation/Lightness dialog box, either:

•	Choose Colors > Adjust > Hue/Saturation/Lightness,

•	Press <Shift> + <H>, or

•	Click the optional toolbar button.

 Using the Hue/Saturation/Lightness Dialog Box

Related Topics

 Using the Hue Map Function to Adjust Individual Colors

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Using the Hue/Saturation/Lightness Dialog Box

Use the Hue/Saturation/Lightness dialog box to shift all the colors of an image or selection and change their strength and luminance.

•	Notes: To use the Hue/Saturation/Lightness command on a selection, the image must be a 24-bit color image.
To limit the adjustment to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

General Dialog Box Controls

Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them. Click the Auto Proof button [image] to update the original image automatically as you change a setting. Click the Proof button [image] to apply a one-time update to the original image.

Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Lightness

The dialog box contains three concentric hue rings:

•	The outer hue ring, which never moves, displays a color wheel. It represents the original hues. When the tab opens, this ring and the inner ring are displayed fully saturated. Increased saturation levels are not visible.

•	The inner ring displays the cumulative effects of all the adjustments. It rotates and changes as you adjust the settings, but does not reflect increases you make to the saturation level.

•	The middle ring is the control ring. When the tab opens, this ring is half saturated. It reflects all adjustments you make, including those to the saturation level. If you edit all the colors in the image by choosing Master in the Edit drop-down box, the entire ring appears. It shows all the colors at their current values. If you restrict the editing to a color range, only the segment of the ring at the color range appears. Drag the controls in the color segment to set where in the range the adjustment starts, where it is at full effect, where it begins to taper off, and where it ends.

•	Note: While the color ranges must be edited individually, you can edit as many as you want. There is a cumulative effect when you edit multiple color ranges.

To use the Hue/Saturation/Lightness dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed a setting or as you change them.

3	From the Edit drop-down box, select which color range to adjust. Choose Master to edit all the colors simultaneously. Choose a specific color range to limit the adjustment. Your choice determines the appearance of the control ring.

4	If you are adding color to a greyscale image, select the “Colorize” check box below the color rings. When you do this, the Edit box becomes unavailable.

5	To adjust the saturation and lightness, move the sliders or type numbers in the boxes. Negative numbers decrease the saturation and lightness levels; positive numbers increase them.

6	If you are in the Master Edit mode, move the Hue slider or type a number in the box to shift every color. You can go half the way around the wheel by moving the slider all the way left or right. Negative numbers rotate the wheel to the left; positive numbers rotate it to the right. The control ring displays the new hue for each color. For example, when the slider is at 180, blue becomes yellow and green becomes magenta.

7	If you are restricting the adjustment to a color range, drag the two outer pointers on the control ring to set the range width. They mark the beginning and end of the adjustment area. You can drag them to edit as wide a range of color as you like. You can also drag the two inner bars. The segment between each outer pointer and inner bar shows where the adjustment is building to its full effect. The area between the two inner bars shows where the adjustment is in full effect. To move control ring, drag the white circle.

8	To choose new colors for the color range, type a number in the Hue box or drag the Hue slider. You can move from –180 to +180.

9	To change the saturation of the color range, type a number from –100 to +100 in the Saturation box or drag the Saturation slider. At –100, the colors are desaturated, or grey; at +100, they are fully saturated.

10	To change the lightness of the color range, type a number from –100 to +100 in the Lightness box or drag the Lightness slider. At –100, the colors become black; at +100, they turn white.

11	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

12	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return all settings to their default values. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the settings to the values displayed when the dialog box opened.

13	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the settings.

Related Topics

 Increasing Color Depth

 Creating a Selection


Adjust Threshold Command

Choose the Threshold command to create a black-and-white image from your picture or layer.

Opening the Threshold Dialog Box

To open the Threshold dialog box, choose Colors > Adjust > Threshold or click the optional toolbar button.

 Using the Threshold Dialog Box

Related Topic

 Changing the Toolbar Buttons


Using the Threshold Dialog Box

Use the Threshold dialog box to turn your picture into a black-and-white image. The Histogram values are used to determine whether a pixel becomes white or black. All pixels whose brightness values are below the Threshold level become black and all pixels whose brightness values are equal to or greater than the Threshold level become white.

•	Notes: To use the Threshold dialog box on a selection, the image must be a 24-bit color image.
To limit the adjustment to a selection, create the selection before choosing the command.

To use the Threshold dialog box:

1	Use the two preview boxes to see a before and after view of the image. The box on the left shows the original image; the one on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the [image] button to zoom in and the [image] button to zoom out. To bring other areas of the image into view, either click the [image] button and drag the navigation frame to a new position or move the cursor over one of the boxes (the cursor will become a hand) and drag the image.

2	Use the Proof and Autoproof buttons to view the changes on the original image before applying them. You can update the original image after you have changed the setting or as you change it.

3	In the Threshold box, set the level at which all pixels become either white or black. As you increase the value, more pixels become black.

4	If you are not using the Auto Proof feature, click the Proof button [image] to see the effect applied to the original image.

5	Click the Reset button [image] at any time to return the setting to its default value. Press <Shift> while clicking the button to return the setting to the value displayed when the dialog box opened.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the setting.

Related Topics

 About the Histogram

 Increasing Color Depth

 Creating a Selection


Theshold Dialog Box_POP
Theshold Dialog Box


Purchasing Jasc Software Products

Please select the appropriate option to display purchasing information and an order form:

 USA

 All Other Countries


International Distributors
International Master Representatives

For international ordering information, select the country from the following list:

Country:

Australia

Belgium

Canada

Denmark

Finland

France, Belgium (French), Luxembourg, French Switzerland

Germany, Austria, German Switzerland

Hungary

India

Ireland

Israel

Italy

Japan

Korea

Malaysia

Netherlands, Belgium (Flemish)

New Zealand

Norway

Singapore

Spain

Sweden

United Kingdom

United States

If your country is not covered by one of our international representatives, you can place your order directly with us.


United States

To print this form, click the Print Button above or press <Alt> + <P>.

NOTE: Please use this form only if the product will be shipped inside the United States. Using this form to place an order to be shipped outside the United States may cause delays in processing your order properly, additional shipping costs, and imposition of applicable taxes. If you have not selected the appropriate form, please click the link below and select the correct country from the list:

 International Master Representatives

You can purchase this product by check, credit card, or money order. All checks must be in U.S. funds drawn from a U.S. bank and made payable to Jasc Software, Inc. We accept American Express, MasterCard, and Visa.

You can place your order using any of the following methods:

•	Fax this order form to (952) 930-9172 (Credit card only; please include your credit card number and expiration date on the form)

•	Mail this order form along with your payment (check or credit card information) to:

Jasc Software, Inc.

Attn: Orders

PO Box 44997

Eden Prairie, MN 55344 USA

•	For additional purchasing information and options, please visit http://www.jasc.com/orderjsc.asp

You can also purchase this product from major retail stores and Internet and catalog retailers. Volume and site license pricing are also available. Please visit the "Where to Purchase Jasc Software Products" page at http://www.jasc.com/order.asp or call us at 1-800-622-2793 for further information on these purchasing options.

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail.

Please do not use PO Box addresses for the billing address.

* All orders are shipped via Priority Mail unless other arrangements are made with us prior to shipment. For shipping prices on multiple copies of the product or other shipping alternatives, please see http://www.jasc.com/pricing2.asp or contact us at 1-800-622-2793.

Prices are subject to change without notice.


Canada

To place your order, please call us toll-free at 1-800-622-2793 (24 hours a day/7 days a week).


Jasc Software, Inc. (All Other Countries)

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

NOTE: Please use this form only if the product will be shipped outside the United States. Using this form to place an order inside the United may cause delays in processing your order properly, overpayment of shipping costs, and imposition of applicable taxes.

If you are ordering the product to be shipped within the United States, please click the link below to go to the appropriate form:

 United States

Although you can purchase this product directly from Jasc Software, Inc., you can also order it from our international representatives. To obtain contact information for our international representatives, please visit our web site at http://www.jasc.com/world.asp or select the appropriate country from our International Master Representatives list.

You can purchase this product from Jasc Software, Inc. by check or credit card. All checks must be in U.S. funds drawn from a U.S. bank and made payable to Jasc Software, Inc. We accept American Express, MasterCard, and Visa.

You can place your order using any of the following methods:

•	Call us at +1 (952) 930-9800

•	Fax this order form to +1 (952) 930-9172 (Credit card only; please include your credit card number and expiration date on the form)

•	Mail this order form along with your payment (check or credit card information) to:

Jasc Software, Inc.

Attn: Orders

PO Box 44997

Eden Prairie, MN 55344 USA

•	For additional purchasing information and options, please visit http://www.jasc.com/orderjsc.asp

You can also purchase this product from major retail stores and Internet and catalog retailers. Volume and site license pricing are also available. Please visit the "Where to Purchase Jasc Software Products" page at http://www.jasc.com/order.asp, call us at +1 (952) 930-9800, or contact your local international representative for further information on these purchasing options.

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail.

Please do not use PO Box addresses for the billing address.

* All orders are shipped via Air Mail unless other arrangements are made with us prior to shipment. For shipping prices on multiple copies of the product or other shipping alternatives, please contact us at +1 (952) 930-9800.

Prices are subject to change without notice.

Please note that if you live in Europe and purchase a Jasc Software product from a distributor outside of Europe, you will be liable for the VAT and customs charges.


Communique Software_Australia
Communique Software-Australia

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM (AUSTRALIA)

Communique Software
P.O. Box 777, Blacktown, N.S.W. 2148, Australia
20 Harvey Rd., Kings Park N.S.W. 2148, Australia

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

You can place your order with Communique Software by payment with cheque or credit card (Visa, Mastercard, Bankcard or American Express) or by money order. To order your copy of Paint Shop Pro 7, please contact us at 1800 008 777, fax your order 02 9671 5624, or visit our web-site at www.comm-unique.com.au.

NAME_____________________________________________________________

COMPANY_________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

CITY_______________________________	STATE_____________

COUNTRY_______________	POST CODE__________________

EMAIL ____________________________________TELEPHONE ____________________

FAX_______________

CREDIT CARD NAME________________________________________
EXPIRATION DATE______________

CREDIT CARD NUMBER______________________________________________
AMEX ID NO.:__________

SIGNATURE_________________________________________________________

Product	Price in AUS$ 	# of Copies:	Total Price

Paint Shop Pro 7 (includes Animation Shop 3)	$239.00 (inc. GST)  	_____	$ _________

CD-ROM drive required

Shipping/Handling (per order).	$11.00	(inc. GST)	$ $11.00

TOTAL 	in AUS$	$ _________

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail. All orders shipped same day if received before 2:30pm. Orders are sent by courier.

Site Licensing Programs for Paint Shop Pro

Site licensing programs for Paint Shop Pro are available. Communique Software offers a wide range of site licensing options to meet your specific requirements. Corporate, educational and government inquiries welcomed. Please contact us by phone, fax, or e-mail for more information:

Phone:	1800 008 777

Fax:	02 9671 5624

E-mail:	sales@comm-unique.com.au

Thank you for your order!


BroCo Software

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM (BELGIUM)

BroCo Software
Postbus 446
3760 AK Soest
Nederland

Selecteer de knop Afdrukken, of gebruik de toetsen <ALT> + <P> om dit formulier te printen.

BroCo software accepteert als betaling: een Eurocheque; een Euro/MasterCard of VISA creditcard; overmaken naar bankrekening 172.13.06.755.45 (Rabobank Antwerpen) op naam van BroCo software te Soest, Nederland.

U kunt uw exemplaar van Paint Shop Pro 7 ook bestellen via telefoon +31 35 6026650 of fax +31 35 6014012 of bezoek onze website op www.broco.nl.

NAAM__________________________________________________________ M / V

BEDRIJF_________________________________________________________

ADRES__________________________________________________________

PLAATS_________________________________________

LAND: BELGIE	POSTCODE__________________

E-MAIL ___________________________	TELEFOON ____________________

FAX___________________	BTW NUMMER ____________________

BETALINGSWIJZE
(  )	Overmaking bank België 172-1306755-45

BroCo software Soest Nederland, levering na ontvangst van uw betaling

(  )	Euro/MasterCard of VISA

geen andere creditkaarten, altijd 16 cijfers opgeven

CREDITCARD KAARTHOUDER________________________________________________

CREDITCARD NUMMER_______________________________________

CREDITCARD VERVALDATUM______________

HANDTEKENING_________________________________________________________

Adres kaarthouder, indien afwijkend

KAARTHOUDER________________________________________________________

HUISNUMMER__________________________________________________________

POSTCODE_____________________________________________________________

Product	Prijs	Aantal:	Bedrag

Paint Shop Pro 7 NL (inclusief Animation Shop 3)	Bef 6022	_____	Bef ____

Paint Shop Pro 7 UK (inclusief Animation Shop 3)	Bef 6022	_____	Bef ____

Verzendkosten	Bef  458

Totaalbedrag	Bef ______

Site Licenties door Paint Shop Pro

Site licenties, andere producten van Jasc software en upgrades zijn beschikbaar. BroCo software biedt een groot aantal licentie-mogelijkheden om tegemoet te komen aan uw specifieke wensen. Levering op factuurbasis naar bedrijven, educatieve instellingen en overheidsinstanties mogelijk. Alle prijzen zijn inclusief 17.5% BTW. Voor aanvullende informatie kunt u contact opnemen met de afdeling verkoop via telefoon, fax of E-mail.

Telefoon: +31 35 6026650	Fax: +31 35 6014012	 E-mail: verkoop@broco.nl

Hartelijk dank voor uw bestelling!


Pro Soft

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM (DENMARK)

Pro Soft
Roskildevej 384
4100 Ringsted, Denmark

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

You can place your order with Pro Soft, by payment with opkrav, check or credit card.  To order your copy of Paint Shop Pro 7, please contact us at (+45) 5752 9390, fax your order (+45) 5752 9391, or visit our website at www.prosoft.dk; email: support@prosoft.dk

NAME_____________________________________________________________

COMPANY_________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

CITY         ____________________	POSTAL CODE__________________

EMAIL ADDRESS____________________________________________________

TELEPHONE ____________________                         FAX___________________

We will pay with: [ ] Credit-card, [ ] Invoice (Approved Comp. & Public offices)
[  ] Prepayment to Danish Giro, [ ] Opkrav (+50,00 dkk)

CREDIT CARD NAME_______________	EXPIRATION DATE______________

CREDIT CARD NUMBER______________________________________________

SIGNATURE_________________________________________________________

Product	Price in DKK # of Copies:	Total Price

Paint Shop Pro 7 	(includes Animation Shop 3)	dkk 923,00	_____	dkk _________

CD-ROM drive required

*Shipping/Handling	(single copy)	dkk 40,00 	dkk _________

(multiple copies) 	 Ask	dkk _________

VAT  	(25%)	dkk _________

TOTAL	dkk  _________

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail. All orders shipped same day if received before 15:00. Orders sent by Postal system.

Site Licensing Programs for Paint Shop Pro

Site licensing programs for Paint Shop Pro are available. Pro Soft offers a wide range of site licensing options to meet your specific requirements. Corporate, educational, and government inquiries welcomed. Please contact us by phone, fax, or e-mail for more information:

Phone: (+45) 5752 9390

Fax: (+45) 5752 9391

E-mail: support@prosoft.dk

Thank you for your order!


Pro Soft

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM/FINLAND

Pro Soft
Roskildevej 384
DK-4100 Ringsted, Denmark

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

You can place your order with Pro Soft, by payment with invoice, prepayment or credit card.  To order your copy of Paint Shop Pro 7, please contact us at (+45) 5752 9390, fax your order (+45) 5752 9391, or visit our website at www.prosoft.dk; email: support@prosoft.dk.

NAME_____________________________________________________________

COMPANY_________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

CITY____________________	POSTAL CODE__________________

VAT-number  _______________               EMAIL ADDRESS___________________

TELEPHONE ____________________                         FAX___________________

We will pay with: [ ] Credit-card, [ ] Invoice (Approved Comp. & Public offices)
[  ] Prepayment to Danish Giro

CREDIT CARD NAME_______________	EXPIRATION DATE______________

CREDIT CARD NUMBER______________________________________________

SIGNATURE_________________________________________________________

Product	Price in DKK # of Copies:	Total Price

Paint Shop Pro 7 	(includes Animation Shop 3)	dkk 923,00	_____	dkk _________

CD-ROM drive required

*Shipping/Handling	(single copy)	               dkk 110,00 	dkk _________

(multiple copies)  Ask	dkk _________

VAT (None if VAT-number is available) (25%)	dkk _________

TOTAL 	dkk  _________

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail. All orders shipped same day if received before 15:00. Orders sent by Postal system.

Site Licensing Programs for Paint Shop Pro

Site licensing programs for Paint Shop Pro are available. Pro Soft offers a wide range of site licensing options to meet your specific requirements. Corporate, educational, and government inquiries welcomed. Please contact us by phone, fax, or e-mail for more information:

Phone: (+45) 5752 9390

Fax: (+45) 5752 9391

E-mail: support@prosoft.dk

Thank you for your order!


Editions WSKA

BON DE COMMANDE DE PAINT SHOP PRO 7
(FRANCE, BELGIQUE, LUXEMBOURG, SUISSE)

Editions WSKA
3, rue Joseph Cugnot
F – 57070 METZ

Pour imprimer ce bon de commande, cliquez sur le bouton Imprimer ci-dessus ou pressez sur <Alt> + <P>.

Vous pouvez adresser votre commande aux Editions WSKA, en joignant votre paiement par chèque ou en indiquant les coordonnées de votre carte de crédit. Pour commander votre copie de Paint Shop Pro 7, veuillez nous contacter au

 (+33) 03 87 18 78 00, faxer votre bon de commande au (+33) 03 87 18 78 01 ou visiter notre site Web à l’adresse http://www.wska.com.

NOM	PRENOM

SOCIETE

ADRESSE

CODE POSTAL	VILLE

PAYS

ADRESSE E-MAIL

TELEPHONE 	FAX

NOM DE LA CARTE (Visa ou EuroCard)

NUMERO DE CARTE	DATE D’EXPIRATION

SIGNATURE	DATE DE COMMANDE

Produit	Prix en FF	Nb d’exemplaires :	Prix total

Paint Shop Pro 7 sur CD-ROM
(Animation Shop 3 inclus)	999 FF TTC	_____	FF _________

(835,28 FF HT)

[TVA à 19,6 %]

soit TOTAL TTC	en FF	FF _________

Les commandes reçues avant 12H00 sont traitées dans la journée.

Licences sur site

Les Editions WSKA proposent de nombreuses solutions de licences sur site pour répondre aux besoins spécifiques (entreprise, milieu éducatif ou administration).

Veuillez nous contacter par téléphone, par fax ou par courrier électronique pour obtenir davantage d’informations :

Téléphone : (+33) 03 87 18 78 00

Fax : (+33) 03 87 18 78 01

E-mail : ventes@wska.com

Merci de votre commande !

NB : les prix sont susceptibles d'être modifiés sans préavis


Microbasic GmbH

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER INFORMATION (GERMANY, AUSTRIA, GERMAN SWITZERLAND)

For orders in Germany, Austria or German Switzerland, please contact our German representative.  Their contact information is as follows:

MicroBasic GmbH

Am Sommerfeld 11

D - 85622 Weißenfeld

Business Phone +49 (0) 89 90 49 90 49

Busines Fax +49 (0) 89 90 49 90 90

E-mail: service@microbasic.de

Web-site: http://www.microbasic.de

           or: http://www.jasc.de


Questar
Questar-Hungary

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER INFORMATION (HUNGARY)

For orders in Hungary, please contact:

Questar

Országbiró u. 62.

H-1135 Budapest

Hungary

Business Phone +36 (1) 397-5020

Busines Fax +36 (1) 397-5020

E-mail: questar@questar.hu

Web-site: http://www.questar.hu


India

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER INFORMATION (INDIA)

For orders in India, please contact our representative.  Their contact information is as follows:

The Bird Group

E-9, Connaught House

Connaught Place

New Delhi-110001

India

Business Phone +91(0) 11 332 9199

Busines Fax +91(0) 11 614 2999

E-mail: alpana.chaturvedi@thebirdgroup.com


Digital Workshop

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM (IRELAND)

Digital Workshop
42-44 North Bar Street, Banbury,
Oxfordshire, England, OX16 0TH

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

Place your order by faxing or e-mailing Digital Workshop with credit card or switch details, or send cheques and postal orders to the above address. For bank transfer details, purchase order conditions, or further information contact Digital Workshop on the details at the base of the page. You can also visit our web-site on www.digitalworkshop.co.uk for more information or a direct download of Paint Shop Pro.

NAME_______________________________________________________________________

COMPANY (if applicable)________________________________________________________

ADDRESS____________________________________________________________________

CITY________________________________     COUNTY ______________________________

COUNTRY___________________________     POSTAL CODE__________________________

EMAIL ADDRESS_____________________ TEL: _________________ FAX________________

METHOD OF PAYMENT:	CHEQUE / POSTAL ORDER / CREDIT CARD / BANK TRANSFER

(Please make cheques payable to Digital Workshop)

TYPE OF CARD: SWITCH/AMEX/MASTERCARD/VISA

NAME ON CARD________________________________________________________

CARD NUMBER____________________________________ ISSUE NO ___________

EXPIRY DATE________

SIGNATURE_________________________________________________________

Product	Price in £UK   	No of Copies:	Total Price

Paint Shop Pro 7 (includes Animation Shop 3)	£79.94    	_______   	£________UK

CD-ROM drive required

*Shipping/Handling        	Standard:	£ 5.00  	£ _________UK

 or

Next day:	£ 10.00    	£ _________UK

VAT 	(17.5%)	£ _________UK

TOTAL 	£ _________UK

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail. All orders shipped same day if received before 15.30. Orders sent by Royal Mail, Interlink or TNT dependent on delivery option.

* For shipping prices on five or more copies or other shipping alternatives, please contact us on: 01295 258335.

Licenses for Paint Shop Pro

Multiple-user licenses are available for Paint Shop Pro. Please contact Digital Workshop to discuss your specific requirements. Corporate, educational and government inquiries welcomed. You can contact us by phone, fax, or e-mail for more information:

Phone:	01295 258335

Fax:	01295 254590

E-mail:	sales@digitalworkshop.co.uk

Web-site:	http://www.digitalworkshop.co.uk

Thank you for your order!


Bernisoft

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM (ISRAEL)

Bernisoft
33, Hayarden St.
Ramat-Hasharon, 47204
ISRAEL

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

You can place your order with Bernisoft by payment with Check or Credit Cards.  To order your copy of Paint Shop Pro 7, please contact us at 03-5401550, fax your order 03-5471483 or visit our website at http://www.bernisoft.co.il

NAME_____________________________________________________________

COMPANY_________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

CITY______________________________	POSTAL CODE__________________

EMAIL ADDRESS___________________	TELEPHONE ____________________

FAX___________________

CREDIT CARD NAME______________________________ 	EXPIRATION DATE______________

CREDIT CARD NUMBER______________________________________________

SIGNATURE_________________________________________________________

Product	Price of  1Copy:                 	Total Price

Paint Shop Pro 7 	(includes Animation Shop 3)	$129.00	   	$  129.-

CD-ROM drive required

*Shipping/Handling	(single copy)	18.00 NIS

VAT (17%) Not Included.

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail. All orders shipped same day if received before 15:00. Orders sent by Registered mail.

* For shipping prices on five or more copies or other shipping alternatives, please contact us at   03-5401550.

Site Licensing Programs for Paint Shop Pro

Site licensing programs for Paint Shop Pro are available. Bernisoft offers a wide range of site licensing options to meet your specific requirements. Corporate, educational and government inquiries welcomed. Please contact us by phone, fax, or e-mail for more information:

Phone:  03-5401550

Fax:      03-5471483

E-mail: order@bernisoft.co.il

Thank you for your order!


Italsel
Questar-Italy

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER INFORMATION/ITALY

For orders in Italy, please contact our Italian representative.  Their contact information is as follows:

Questar
Via Maglio del Lotto, 2

24126 Bergamo

Italy

Numero verde (Toll Free): 800-QUESTAR (800-783-7827)
Business Phone +39 (035) 420 1499
Business Fax: +39 (035) 420 1498
E-mail: ordini@questar.it
Website: www.questar.it


P & A

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM (JAPAN)

P. & A. Inc.
Fudoya Bldg 4F
2-10-01 Akebono, Tachikawa
Tokyo 190-0012  JAPAN

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

You can place your order for the English or the Japanese version of Paint Shop Pro 7 with P. & A., Inc. by payment with credit card, bank transfer, postal transfer, cash or COD (call or write for detail).  To order your copy of Paint Shop Pro 7, please contact us at +81-42-525-9501, fax your order 042-525-9502, email at info@panda.co.jp or visit our web-site at www.panda.co.jp.

NAME_____________________________________________________________

COMPANY_________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

CITY_________________________________

COUNTRY_______________	POSTAL CODE__________________

EMAIL ADDRESS___________________	TELEPHONE ____________________

FAX___________________

CREDIT CARD NAME_______________	EXPIRATION DATE______________

CREDIT CARD NUMBER______________________________________________

SIGNATURE_________________________________________________________

Product	Price in Yen    # of Copies:	Total Price

[  ]  Paint Shop Pro 7 (English) (includes Animation Shop 3) Yen 12,800        _____	Yen ________

[  ]  Paint Shop Pro 7J  (Japanese) (includes Animation Shop 3) Yen 12,800  _____	Yen ________

      CD-ROM drive required

      (Prices include shipping in Japan)

      Consumption Taxes 	(5%)	Yen  ________

      TOTAL  (in Yen)	Yen  ________

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail. All orders shipped same day if received before 12:00. Orders are sent by takkyubin.

Site Licensing Programs for Paint Shop Pro

Site licensing programs for Paint Shop Pro are available. P. & A., Inc. offers a wide range of site licensing options to meet your specific requirements. Corporate, educational and government inquiries welcomed. Please contact us by phone, fax, or e-mail for more information:

Phone: 042-525-9501

Fax:  042-525-9502

E-mail: info@panda.co.jp

Thank you for your order!


Hanmi Information & Communications Co., Ltd.

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER INFORMATION/KOREA

For orders in South Korea, please contact our representative in that area.  Their contact information is as follows:

HANMI Information & Communications Co., LTD

Chungsan B/D 4F

#1-48 Shingye-dong

Yongsan-gu, Seoul

Korea

Business Phone: +82 (0) 2-3273-3524

Business Fax: +82 (0) 2-3273-3523

E-mail: hanmi56k@unitel.co.kr

Website: www.softmall.co.kr


Communique Software Sdn Bhd

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM (MALAYSIA)

Communique Software Sdn Bhd
2020 Cyberview Garden
63000 Cyberjaya
Selangor, Malaysia

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

You can place your order with Communique Software by payment with Cheque, Bank Draft or Credit Card.  To order your copy of Paint Shop Pro 7, please contact us at (603) 83127320, fax your order (603) 83127322, or email us at asia.sales@comm-unique.com.au.

NAME_____________________________________________________________

COMPANY_________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

CITY____________________	PROVINCE_____________________

COUNTRY_______________	POST CODE__________________

EMAIL ___________________________	TELEPHONE ____________________

FAX___________________

CREDIT CARD NAME_____________________________________

EXPIRATION DATE______________

CREDIT CARD NUMBER______________________________________________

SIGNATURE_________________________________________________________

Product	Price in RM 	#of Copies:	Total Price

Paint Shop Pro 7 (includes Animation Shop 3)	RM480.00	________	$ _________

CD-ROM drive required

*Shipping/Handling	(single copy)	RM12.00  	$ _________

(multiple copies) 	RM9.00 per additional copy	$ _________

TOTAL 	in (Malaysian Ringgit)	$ _________

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail. Where possible all orders shipped same day if received before 11.00am.

* For shipping prices on five or more copies or other shipping alternatives, please contact us at (603) 83127320 or email asia.sales@comm-unique.com.au.

Site Licensing Programs for Paint Shop Pro

Site licensing programs for Paint Shop Pro are available. Communique Software offers a wide range of site licensing options to meet your specific requirements. Corporate, educational and government inquiries welcomed. Please contact us by phone, fax, or e-mail for more information:

Phone:	(603) 83127320

Fax:	(603) 83127322

E-mail:	asia.sales@comm-unique.com.au

Thank you for your order!


BroCo Software

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 BESTELFORMULIER (NEDERLAND)

BroCo software
Antwoordnummer 2049
3760 VB Soest

Selecteer de knop Afdrukken, of gebruik de toetsen <ALT> + <P> om dit formulier te printen.

BroCo software accepteert als betaling: een girobetaalkaart; een Eurocheque; een  Euro/MasterCard of VISA creditcard; overmaken naar bankrekening 37.99.42.844 of girorekening 28.39.530, beide op naam van BroCo software te Soest; of verzending onder rembours.

U kunt uw exemplaar van Paint Shop Pro ook bestellen via telefoon 035 6026650 of fax 035 6014012 of bezoek onze website op www.broco.nl.

NAAM__________________________________________________________ M / V

BEDRIJF_________________________________________________________

ADRES__________________________________________________________

PLAATS_________________________________________

LAND: NEDERLAND	POSTCODE__________________

E-MAIL ___________________________	TELEFOON ____________________

FAX___________________

BETALINGSWIJZE
(  )	Overmaking postbank 28.39.530

op naam van BroCo software te Soest, levering na ontvangst van uw betaling

(  )	Overmaking Rabobank 37.99.42.844

op naam van BroCo software te Soest, levering na ontvangst van uw betaling

(  )	Onder rembours, betaling aan postbode

(  )	Euro/MasterCard of VISA

geen andere creditkaarten, altijd 16 cijfers opgeven

CREDITCARD KAARTHOUDER________________________________________________

CREDITCARD NUMMER_______________________________________

CREDITCARD VERVALDATUM______________

HANDTEKENING_________________________________________________________

Adres kaarthouder, indien afwijkend

KAARTHOUDER________________________________________________________

HUISNUMMER__________________________________________________________

POSTCODE_____________________________________________________________

Product	Prijs	Aantal:	Bedrag

Paint Shop Pro 7 NL (inclusief Animation Shop 3)	FL 329,00	_____	FL _________
Paint Shop Pro 7 UK (inclusief Animation Shop 3)	FL 329,00	_____	FL _________

Verzendkosten	FL  15,00

Totaalbedrag	FL _________

Site Licenties voor Paint Shop Pro

Site licenties, andere producten van Jasc software en upgrades zijn beschikbaar. BroCo software biedt een groot aantal licentie-mogelijkheden om tegemoet te komen aan uw specifieke wensen. Levering op factuurbasis naar bedrijven, educatieve instellingen en overheidsinstanties mogelijk. Alle prijzen zijn inclusief 17.5% BTW. Voor aanvullende informatie kunt u contact opnemen met de afdeling verkoop via telefoon, fax of E-mail.

Telefoon: 035 6026650	Fax: 035 6014012	E-mail: verkoop@broco.nl

Hartelijk dank voor uw bestelling!


New Zealand
Communique Software

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM (NEW ZEALAND)

Communique Software
P.O. Box 25 747, St Heliers, Auckland New Zealand
144 West Tamaki Road, St Heliers, Auckland, New Zealand

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

You can place your order with Communique Software, by payment with cheque or credit card (Visa, Mastercard, or American Express) or by money order. To order your copy of Paint Shop Pro 7, please contact us at 0800 577 776, fax your order 09 5286 919, or visit our website at www.comm-unique.co.nz.

NAME_____________________________________________________________

COMPANY_________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

CITY_______________________________

COUNTRY_______________	POST CODE__________________

EMAIL ____________________________________TELEPHONE ____________________

FAX_______________

CREDIT CARD NAME________________________________________
EXPIRATION DATE______________

CREDIT CARD NUMBER______________________________________________
AMEX ID NO.:__________

SIGNATURE_________________________________________________________

Product	Price in NZ$	# of Copies:	Total Price

Paint Shop Pro 7 (includes Animation Shop 3)	$266	_____	$ _________

CD-ROM drive required

Shipping/Handling (per order).	$10.00	   $10.00

TOTAL 	in NZ$	               + 12.5% GST	$ _________

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail. All orders shipped same day if received before 3.00pm. Orders are sent by courier.

Site Licensing Programs for Paint Shop Pro

Site licensing programs for Paint Shop Pro are available. Communique Software offers a wide range of site licensing options to meet your specific requirements. Corporate, educational and government inquiries welcomed. Please contact us by phone, fax, or e-mail for more information:

Phone:	0800-577-776

Fax:	09 5286-919

E-mail:	sales@comm-unique.co.nz

Thank you for your order!


Pro Soft Norge

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM (NORWAY)

Pro Soft Norge
Fosseløkka 12
1792 Tistedal

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

You can place your order with Pro Soft Norge, by payment with opkrav, invoice or prepayment.  To order your copy of Paint Shop Pro 7, please contact us at 6917 5505, fax your order 6917 5875, visit our website at www.pro-soft.no, or e-mail us at post@pro-soft.no.

NAME_____________________________________________________________

COMPANY_________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

CITY         ____________________	POSTAL CODE__________________

EMAIL ADDRESS____________________________________________________

TELEPHONE ____________________                         FAX___________________

We will pay with: [ ] Invoice (Approved Comp. & Public offices[  ] Prepayment to Norwegian Bank
[ ] Opkrav (+35,00 nok)

Product	Price in NOK # of Copies:	Total Price

Paint Shop Pro 7 (includes Animation Shop 3)	nok 1015,30	_____	nok _________

CD-ROM drive required

*Shipping/Handling	(single copy)	nok     50,00 	nok _________

(multiple copies)  Ask	nok _________

VAT  	(23%)	nok _________

TOTAL 	 	nok  _________

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail. All orders shipped same day if received before 15:00. Orders sent by Postal system.

Site Licensing Programs for Paint Shop Pro

Site licensing programs for Paint Shop Pro are available. Pro Soft Norge offers a wide range of site licensing options to meet your specific requirements. Corporate, educational and government inquiries welcomed. Please contact us by phone, fax, or e-mail support@prosoft.dk. for more information:

Phone: 6917 5505

Fax: 6917 5875

E-mail: post@pro-soft.no.

Thank you for your order!


Singapore
Communique Software Sdn Bhd-Singapore Orders

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM (SINGAPORE)

Communique Software Sdn Bhd
2020 Cyberview Garden
63000 Cyberjaya
Selangor, Malaysia

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

You can place your order with Communique Software by payment with Cheque, Bank Draft or Credit Card. To order your copy of Paint Shop Pro 6, please contact us at (603) 83127320, fax your order (603) 83127322, or send e-mail to asia.sales@comm-unique.com.au.

NAME_____________________________________________________________

COMPANY_________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

CITY____________________	PROVINCE_____________________

COUNTRY_______________	POST CODE__________________

EMAIL ___________________________	TELEPHONE ____________________

FAX___________________

CREDIT CARD NAME____________________________________

EXPIRATION DATE______________

CREDIT CARD NUMBER______________________________________________

SIGNATURE_________________________________________________________

Product	Price in Sing$ 	#of Copies:	Total Price

Paint Shop Pro 7 (includes Animation Shop 3)    	Sing$212.00     	_______     	$ _________

CD-ROM drive required

*Shipping/Handling	(single copy)	Sing$20.00  	$ _________

(multiple copies) Sing$15.00 per additional copy	$ _________

TOTAL 	(in Singapore Dollars)	$ _________

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail. Where possible all orders shipped same day if received before 11.00am.

* For shipping prices on five or more copies or other shipping alternatives, please contact us at (603) 83127320 or email asia.sales@comm-unique.com.au.

Site Licensing Programs for Paint Shop Pro

Site licensing programs for Paint Shop Pro are available. Communique Software offers a wide range of site licensing options to meet your specific requirements. Corporate, educational and government inquiries welcomed. Please contact us by phone, fax, or e-mail for more information:

Phone:	(603) 83127320

Fax:	(603) 83127322

E-mail:	asia.sales@comm-unique.com.au

Thank you for your order!


WSKA Ediciones sl

FORMULARIO DE PEDIDO PARA PAINT SHOP PRO 7 (ESPAÑA)

WSKA EDICIONES
C/ ISLA ALEGRANZA 6, NAVE 35
POLÍGONO INDUSTRIAL NORTE
28709 SAN SEBASTIÁN DE LOS REYES (MADRID)

Para imprimir este formulario, haga clic en el botón o  pulse <Alt> + <P>.

Puede hacer su pedido a WSKA Ediciones, realizando el pago mediante cheque o tarjeta de crédito.  Para adquirir su programa Paint Shop Pro 7, puede contactar con nosotros llamando al teléfono (+34) 91 623 94 99, enviando su pedido por fax al número (+34) 91 623 85 92, o visitando nuestra página web http://www.wska.com.

NOMBRE___________________________________________________________

COMPAÑÍA_________________________________________________________

DIRECCIÓN_________________________________________________________

DIRECCIÓN_________________________________________________________

CIUDAD____________________	PROVINCIA_____________________

PAÍS______________________	CÓDIGO POSTAL________________

EMAIL__________________ TELÉFONO __________________ FAX_________________

NOMBRE TARJETA DE CRÉDITO_____________________________________________________

NÚMERO TARJETA DE CRÉDITO_____________________________________________________

CADUCIDAD_______________________

FIRMA________________________________________________________

Producto	   Precio unitario (Pesetas):	Cantidad:     Precio Total

Paint Shop Pro 7 (incluye Animation Shop 3) Pta 24.975 IVA incluido                	______              ______

(Versión en inglés)

Requiere unidad de CD-ROM

[IVA 16%]

TOTAL en Pesetas                                                                                             	_____________   Ptas.

Los pedidos recibidos por correo tendrán un periodo extra de tramitación. Todos los pedidos se enviarán el mismo dia de recepción de la orden si esta se recibe antes de las 12 horas. Los pedidos se enviarán por correo.

Licencias Paint Shop Pro

WSKA Ediciones le ofrece una amplia gama de opciones para trabajar con licencias según sus necesidades específicas (Ya sea una empresa, un centro educativo o una administración). Por favor contacte con nosotros por teléfono, fax o e-mail para más información:

Teléfono: (+34) 91 623 94 99	 Fax: (+34) 91 623 85 92    E-mail: sales@wska.com

Gracias por su pedido!


Pro Soft

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM (SWEDISH)

Pro Soft
Roskildevej 384
DK-4100 Ringsted, Denmark

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

You can place your order with Pro Soft, by payment with invoice, prepayment or credit card.  To order your copy of Paint Shop Pro 7, please contact us at (+45) 5752 9390, fax your order (+45) 5752 9391, or visit our web-site at www.prosoft.dk, email: support@prosoft.dk.

NAME_____________________________________________________________

COMPANY_________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________

CITY____________________	POSTAL CODE__________________

VAT-number  SE____________________  EMAIL ADDRESS________________

TELEPHONE ____________________                         FAX___________________

We will pay with: [ ] Credit-card, [ ] Invoice (Approved Comp. & Public offices
[  ] Prepayment to Swedish Giro

CREDIT CARD NAME_______________	EXPIRATION DATE______________

CREDIT CARD NUMBER______________________________________________

SIGNATURE_________________________________________________________

Product	Price in DKK # of Copies:	Total Price

Paint Shop Pro 7 (includes Animation Shop 3)	dkk  923,00	_____	dkk _________

CD-ROM drive required

*Shipping/Handling	(single copy)	dkk 110,00 	dkk _________

(multiple copies)  Ask	dkk _________

VAT (None if VAT-number is available) (25%)	dkk _________

TOTAL	dkk  _________

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail. All orders shipped same day if received before 15:00. Orders sent by Postal system.

Site Licensing Programs for Paint Shop Pro

Site licensing programs for Paint Shop Pro are available. Pro Soft offers a wide range of site licensing options to meet your specific requirements. Corporate, educational and government inquiries welcomed. Please contact us by phone, fax, or e-mail for more information:

Phone: (+45) 5752 9390

Fax: (+45) 5752 9391

E-mail: support@prosoft.dk

Thank you for your order!


Digital Workshop

PAINT SHOP PRO 7 ORDER FORM (UNITED KINGDOM)

Digital Workshop
42-44 North Bar Street, Banbury,
Oxfordshire, England, OX16 0TH

To print this form, click the Print Button above, or press <Alt> + <P>.

Place your order by faxing or e-mailing Digital Workshop with credit card or switch details, or send cheques and postal orders to the above address. For bank transfer details, purchase order conditions, or further information contact Digital Workshop on the details at the base of the page. You can also visit our web-site on http://www.digitalworkshop.co.uk for a direct download without waiting for delivery.

NAME_____________________________________________________________

COMPANY (if applicable)_______________________________________________________

ADDRESS__________________________________________________________________

CITY________________________________	COUNTY ______________________

COUNTRY___________________________	POSTAL CODE__________________

EMAIL ADDRESS_____________________	TEL:_________________ FAX_________________

METHOD OF PAYMENT:	CHEQUE / POSTAL ORDER / CREDIT CARD / BANK TRANSFER

(Please make cheques payable to Digital Workshop)

TYPE OF CARD: SWITCH/AMEX/MASTERCARD/VISA

NAME ON CARD___________________

CARD NUMBER____________________________________ ISSUE NO __________________

EXPIRY DATE________

SIGNATURE_________________________________________________________

Product	Price in £UK   	No of Copies:	Total Price

Paint Shop Pro 7 (includes Animation Shop 3)	£79.95 	______       	£ _________UK

CD-ROM drive required

*Shipping/Handling 	Standard:	£ 5.00	£ _________UK

or

Next day:	£ 7.00	£ _________UK

VAT 	(17.5%)	£ _________UK

TOTAL 	£ _________UK

Please allow extra processing time for orders submitted by mail. All orders shipped same day if received before 15.30. Orders sent by Royal Mail, Interlink or TNT dependent on delivery option.

* For shipping prices on five or more copies or other shipping alternatives, please contact us on: 01295 258335.

Licenses for Paint Shop Pro

Multiple-user licenses are available for Paint Shop Pro. Please contact Digital Workshop to discuss your specific requirements. Corporate, educational and government inquiries welcomed. You can contact us by phone, fax, or e-mail for more information:

Phone:	01295 258335

Fax:	01295 254590

E-mail:	sales@digitalworkshop.co.uk

Web-site:	http://www.digitalworkshop.co.uk

Thank you for your order!